r=S Capilano College Aft 1F1 tS 1979-80 Calendar 'f Welcome to C a p i l a n o College T h e p u r p o s e of t h i s C a l e n d a r is to p r o v i d e y o u w i t h i n f o r m a t i o n a n d to a s s i s t y o u in m a k i n g c h o i c e s a n d d e c i s i o n s a b o u t y o u r e d u c a t i o n a l future. W h e t h e r y o u w i s h to a t t e n d t h i s c o l l e g e in p r e f e r e n c e to o t h e r i n s t i t u t i o n s , w h a t p r o g r a m s a n d c o u r s e s w i l l b e s t fit y o u r e d u c a t i o n a l i n t e r e s t s a n d n e e d s , w h a t s e r v i c e s y o u m i g h t w i s h to u t i l i z e , h o w y o u s h o u l d g o a b o u t b e c o m i n g a s t u d e n t at t h i s c o l l e g e — i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e s e a n d s i m i l a r m a t t e r s is f o u n d in t h e p a g e s w h i c h f o l l o w . W h a t t h i s d o c u m e n t l a c k s is a f l a v o u r of t h e p e o p l e w h o m a k e t h i s c o l l e g e t h e f i n e i n s t i t u t i o n it is. It l i s t s n a m e s a n d c r e d e n t i a l s , but c a n n o t truly c o n v e y e i t h e r t h e p r o f e s s i o n a l a n d a c a d e m i c e x c e l l e n c e of t h e f a c u l t y a n d staff m e m b e r s or t h e i r w i l l i n g a v a i l a b i l i t y to s t u d e n t s b e y o n d t h e c l a s s r o o m o r l a b o r a t o r y . It d e s c r i b e s s e r v i c e s a n d a c t i v i t i e s , but c a n n o t i n d i c a t e the o p e n n e s s w h i c h c h a r a c t e r i z e s the p r o f e s s i o n a l p e o p l e w h o p r o v i d e t h e m . T o m a n y p e o p l e c o n s i d e r i n g a n a p p l i c a t i o n to a n e w i n s t i t u t i o n , t h e p r o s p e c t c a n b e v e r y i n t i m i d a t i n g ; I w i s h to a s s u r e y o u that C a p i l a n o p e o p l e a r e not i n t i m i d a t i n g f o r t h e p e r s o n i n t e r e s t e d in l e a r n i n g . I w i s h to a d d a w o r d , t o o , a b o u t w h a t t h i s c o l l e g e e x p e c t s f r o m y o u , s h o u l d y o u c h o o s e to c o m e h e r e . W e t a k e y o u r e d u c a t i o n a l i n t e r e s t s s e r i o u s l y , a n d w e h o p e that y o u w i l l d o s o a s w e l l . B e y o n d that, w e b e l i e v e that y o u r e d u c a t i o n c a n o n l y b e a r i c h a n d f u l l o n e if y o u t a k e a d v a n t a g e of t h e m a n y , v a r i e d e x t r a - c u r r i c u l a r a c t i v i t i e s a v a i l a b l e to y o u ; w e w i l l d o a l l w e c a n to e n c o u r a g e y o u to p a r t i c i p a t e in t h e t o t a l life of t h e c o l l e g e , but t h e c h o i c e w i l l b e y o u r s . W e h o p e y o u w i l l c h o o s e to b e c o m e d e e p l y i n v o l v e d . F i n a l l y , C a p i l a n o o f f e r s y o u t h e c h a n c e to m e e t w i t h a n d l e a r n f r o m o t h e r s t u d e n t s . S o m e a r e f r e s h f r o m h i g h s c h o o l , o t h e r s b r i n g y e a r s of life e x p e r i e n c e w i t h t h e m ; s o m e h a v e d e f i n i t e c a r e e r g o a l s , o t h e r s a r e just b e g i n n i n g to sort o u t t h e i r i n t e r e s t s a n d a s p i r a t i o n s ; s o m e a r e f u l l - t i m e s t u d e n t s in a t r a d i t i o n a l s e n s e , o t h e r s a r e by c h o i c e o r c i r c u m s t a n c e d o i n g a l l t h e y c a n to f u r t h e r t h e i r e d u c a t i o n w h i l e s p e n d i n g m u c h of t h e i r t i m e w o r k i n g o r p u r s u i n g other activities. T o g e t h e r they form an e x c e l l e n t , interesting, a n d e n joyable student body. F a c u l t y , staff a n d s t u d e n t s w e l c o m e y o u . Paul Gallagher Principal T a b l e of Contents INTRODUCTION TO C A P I L A N O C O L L E G E 3 COLLEGE BOARD 4 COLLEGE ADMINISTRATION 4 CAPILANO COLLEGE CALENDAR FOUNDATION 5 F O R 1978-79 6 ADMISSION 7 R E G I S T R A T I O N .•. 8 FINANCIAL 10 INFORMATION INSTRUCTIONAL INFORMATION 12 SERVICES FINANCIAL 16 AIDS COMMUNITY AND AWARDS EDUCATION COUNSELLING 26 GROUP PROGRAM 27 LEARNING ASSISTANCE P R O G R A M 28 ACADEMIC 31 CAREER STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER P R O G R A M S PROGRAMS 67 VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS 124 TRANSFER 129 GUIDE INDEX • 20 ... 141 PARKING & C A M P U S MAP 143 HOW 144 TO GET H E R E — capilano Lynnmour Campus & Administrative Offices Squamish 2055 P u r c e l l W a y North Vancouver, B.C. V 7 J 3H5 Published by: Information Services Design: Lynn Montgomery & Dave Thompson Photographs: Media Production Centre Typesetting, Layout & Printing: North Shore Times 2 P.O. Box *QS 'A I Learning Centre 38030 C l e v e l a n d A v e . 1531, S q u a m i s h , B . C . VON 3 G 7 Introduction EDUCATIONAL OFFERINGS E x c e l l e n c e and diversity are the two major e m p h a s e s of C a p i l a n o ' s educational activities. Quality C a r e e r programs lead directly to employment. A g r o w i n g range of V o c a t i o n a l programs are offered in r e s p o n s e to the human resource n e e d s of the province's and region's e c o n o m y . A rigorous array of programs and c o u r s e s prepare students for transfer into the third year at the provincial universities. Non-credit c o u r s e s and activities appeal to the wide range of avocational interests of individuals and groups within the community. A C o n f e r e n c e program offers s p e c i a l training of particular value to the b u s i n e s s community. Preparatory and start-up programs respond particulary to n e e d s of persons w h o have been away from formal e d u c a t i o n for s o m e time. Diversity is reflected as well in the forms in w h i c h e d u c a t i o n a l opportunity may be pursued. C o n v e n t i o n a l c o l l e g e level instruction in all areas is c o m p l e m e n t e d by s p e c i a l tutorial a s s i s t a n c e , s e l f - p a c e d learning programs, other forms of individualized instruction, and s p e c i a l area studies. C O L L E G E OBJECTIVES The following extracts from the C o l l e g e ' s policy statement reflect C a p i l a n o ' s institutional g o a l s : two years of quality and c o m p r e h e n s i v e post-secondary education curriculum flexibility to meet c h a n g i n g community requirements standards of transfer with degree-granting institutions where a p p l i c a b l e job upgrading, vocational training, career opportunity a d m i s s i o n to all w h o will benefit the c o n c e p t of C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n in the provision of general interest programs ensuring that community n e e d s are met with service at the community level priorities to utilize resources available. Students with a mature desire to e x c e l in learning regardless of age, gender, interest or b a c k g r o u n d , are c h a l l e n g e d and assisted by C a p i l a n o . FACILITIES AND R E S O U R C E S Originally intended to serve North V a n c o u v e r , West V a n couver and H o w e S o u n d , the C o l l e g e now also provides serv i c e to students w h o live beyond the North S h o r e . T h e C o l l e g e o p e n e d in S e p t e m b e r 1968 with c l a s s e s held for s o m e 300 students in W e s t V a n c o u v e r H i g h S c h o o l . In A u g u s t 1973, the C o l l e g e first o c c u p i e d its current major site in Lynnmour in North V a n c o u v e r , b e g i n n i n g with s o m e 50,000 square feet of instructional s p a c e ; s i n c e that time, an a d ditional 130,000 square feet have been added to form the core facilities of the C o l l e g e in a h a n d s o m e setting o v e r l o o k i n g the north end of the S e c o n d N a r r o w s B r i d g e . A c c l a i m e d as one of the most beautiful natural settings of all the c o l l e g e s in British C o l u m b i a , the Lynnmour site h o u s e s the L i b r a r y / M e d i a C e n t r e , instructional rooms and laboratories, the Registrar's Office, faculty offices, a large Cafetheatre, and recreational areas. P a t h w a y s through trees and planted areas lead to separate buildings for B i o l o g y , Chemistry, P h y s i c s and G e o g r a p h y laboratories and a D a y c a r e C e n t r e . A D y n a m i c s L a b and Art Studio are more recent additions, together with a Field H o u s e and playing field area d e v e l o p e d in conjunction with the District of North V a n c o u v e r . R e d e v e l o p m e n t of s o m e existing facilities and construction of additional facilities for an eventual student population of 4,000 are currently in the planning stage. C a p i l a n o is, however, a c o l l e g e in and of its community. In addition to a broad range of offerings at the Lynnmour c o r e , the C o l l e g e has a history of providing extended s e r v i c e s in a number of locations throughout the region to meet c o m munity n e e d s and interests. C r e d i t and non-credit c o u r s e s and services in West V a n c o u v e r , S q u a m i s h , P e m b e r t o n , S e c h e l t and other areas, both day and e v e n i n g , have c h a r a c terized the general operation of the C o l l e g e . A satellite in S q u a m i s h is now being d e v e l o p e d a n d a higher level of a c tivity in West V a n c o u v e r is p l a n n e d . 3 College COLLEGE Board GENERAL BOARD B O A R D M E M B E R S APPOINTED BY DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION P a u l Gallagher, B.A., M.Ed., D.C.L. Principal THE K.H Ian G . Edgar P C D . Powell Hilda Rizun Dr. Lalit M. Srivastava J a c k K. Stathers Thiel, G r a d . E n g . , M.B.A. Bursar A l a n P.D. Smith, B.A., M.A. Director of P l a n n i n g M. Jessup, C.G.A. Director of F i n a n c i a l S e r v i c e s BOARD MEMBERS - SCHOOL (NORTH VANCOUVER) DISTRICT No. 44 Ernie Sarsfield Verna Smelovsky BOARD (WEST ADMINISTRATION J i m Dillon, B.A., L L . B . Director of P e r s o n n e l Dave Brewer Director of S u p p l i e s and S e r v i c e s MEMBERS - SCHOOL VANCOUVER) DISTRICT No. 45 Ken Hughes Facilities Supervisor DISTRICT No. 48 INSTRUCTIONAL Norm Alban C a r l F. Hunter BOARD (HOWE MEMBERS SOUND) - SCHOOL T . B . M . Fougberg T.J. M a c D o n a l d O B S E R V E R - S C H O O L D I S T R I C T N o . 46 Brian (SECHELT) - CAPILANO COLLEGE REPRESENTATIVES - CAPILANO FACULTY ASSOCIATION COLLEGE M a r g Penn W a n d a Tilley B i l l Little Pat P o p e 4 G.F. Lee, B . S c , M . S c . A s s o c i a t e Dean, C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l Programs Daniel R. Dolphin, B.A. S c . , M.B.A., M . S c . Director of Training for B u s i n e s s & Industry Kelly Fearey Adrienne V i c k e r s REPRESENTATIVES Franklin C . G e l i n , B.A., M.A., P h . D . Dean of A c a d e m i c Studies Harold B. Kirchner, B.Ed.. M . S c . Dean, Career/Vocational Programs Hodgins REPRESENTATIVES STUDENT SOCIETY ADMINISTRATION Douglas K. Jardine, B.A., S c . , P h . D . Dean of Instructional S e r v i c e s - S T A F F U N I O N , A . U . C . E . No. 4 Capilano College Foundation S i n c e 1970, the activities of the C o l l e g e and its students have received strong community support from the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Foundation. The Foundation was established, under the Societies Act, to e n c o u r a g e community interest in the C o l l e g e , and to raise and receive funds to assist worthy C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e students who require financial a s s i s t a n c e . M o r e than a hundred students have been assisted through Foundation bursaries and s c h o l a r s h i p s since 1971. M e m b e r s h i p in the Foundation program may be obtained by contacting the Secretary. Details of application for bursaries and s c h o l a r s h i p s will be found in the Financial A s s i s t a n c e section of the C a l e n d a r . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Foundation Executive Committee 19781979: President 1st V i c e President & Solicitor 2nd V i c e President Treasurer Secretary Past President Fund Distribution Directors: M. C a r m i c h a e l Daryl C o l l i e r Stuart M c K e n z i e L.V. O'Neill D. Smit H. A d d i s o n F.H.B. Charlesworth Mrs. M. Comba-Ftamsay P. J o n e s T.J. M a c D o n a l d W. M c P h e e F. Millerd Mrs. P. M u g r i d g e A. Smith P. Watts All public support is w e l c o m e . Contributions may be sent c a r e of the President, C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Foundation, 2055 P u r c e l l Way, North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3H5, and should be made payable to the Foundation. 1 ,u I I ffj'l j ill " w<4^0, *«SjJ^WP.isi If 1 • i C a l e n d a r f o r 1979-80 1979 FALL TERM s M July 16-August 17: M a i l Registration (North S h o r e , Howe S o u n d a n d S e c h e l t students, returning students, all career students). 1979 1980 JUNE T W T S JANUARY M T W T F S 6 T)© 10 11 12 19 F 1 S 2 5 August 28: C o u r s e C h a n g e Day. 1:00 p.m.-3:00 p.m. (For students w h o registered by M a i l , but need to alter their c o u r s e registration.) August 28: In Person Registration. 3:00 p.m.-8:00 p.m. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 17 11 12 13 14 15 16 13 % 15 16 17 18 18 25 19 21 22 23 22 2 3 24 28 29 30 20 27 21 26 20 27 28 2 9 3 0 31 S M JULY T W T F S 1 2 9 3 6 7 13 14 3 4 11 5 12 6 7 (8) 9 13 14 fig) 16 October 8: T h a n k s g i v i n g Day. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . 17 2 0 ( g ) (22) 2 3 27 28 29 October 10: Deferred fees due. Last day to receive 8 0 % refund of tuition and lab fees. 24 8 10 4 5 11 12 S 9 22 © 2 3 24 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 29 30 24 18 25 19 26 S M S M MARCH T W T 17 18 19 20 21 31 AUGUST T W T F S 1 2 4 September 3 : Labour Day. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . September 4: In Person Registration. 2:00 p.m.-7:00 p.m. FlE B R U A R Y M T W T F 1 10 15 2 526 August 29: In P e r s o n Registration. 1:00 p.m.-8:00 p.m. September 5: C l a s s e s c o m m e n c e . S 2 September 5-6: Late Registration. 2:00 p.m.-7:00 p.m. (No faculty in attendance.) October 5: Last day to A D D a c o u r s e . November 9: Last day to withdraw from a c o u r s e . F S 5 6 10 11 2 3 0 8 November 19-December 14: M a i l Registration for Spring Term. (Only for North S h o r e , H o w e S o u n d a n d returning students.) 12 13 14 15 16 @ 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 December 10-14: Examination Week for A c a d e m i c Division. 19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3 2 4 16 17 18 19 2 0 21 26 2 7 (J>8) £ 9 ) 3 0 31 S SEPTEMBER M T W T F 7 8 3 9 25 S 5 5 6 22 3i 25 26 27 2829 December 14: Last day of c p a s s e s for C a r e e r a n d A c a d e m i c Divisions. APRIL December 21: Last day of c l a s s e s for V o c a t i o n a l Programs. M T 24 ^ 4 1 ® W T F S 2 3 ® 5 ® © ® 19 2 0 0 0 © 7 8 6 (J) 8 9 10 11 12 13 Q 4 ) ® 9 16 a> 10 11 12 13 14 17 18 19 2 0 21 24 25 26 27 28 15 22 29 20 21 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 27 28 29 S OCTOBER M T W T F S S 1 6 B 7 2 (§) 9 3 4 ® (JO) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 9 3 0 31 S NOVEMBER M T W T F 1 4 5 6 7 2 4 11 18 25 1980 SPRING TERM MAY T W T F S 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 31 M S M 3 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 F S 6 7 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21 18 19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3 22 2 3 24 25 26 27 25 2 6 27 2 8 @ ) 3 0 24 January 1: N e w Y e a r ' s Day. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . January 2: College Change Day. 1:00 p.m.-3:00 p.m. (For students who have registered by M a i l but need to alter their course registration.) January 2: In P e r s o n Registration. 3:00 p.m.-8:00 p.m. First day of instruction for V o c a t i o n a l programs. January 3 : In Person Registration. 1:00 p.m.-8:00 p.m. January 7: C l a s s e s c o m m e n c e . S JUNE T W T 8 ( 9 ) 10 December 26: B o x i n g Day. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . 26 30 4 December 25: C h r i s t m a s Day. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . 28 29 3 0 January 7-8: Late Registration. 2:00 p.m.-7:00 p.m. -"»bruary 8: Last day to A D D a c o u r s e . February 15: Deferred fees due. Last day to receive 8 0 % refund of tuition and lab fees. February 21-22: Mid-term break. N o c l a s s e s s c h e d u l e d . March 7: Last day to withdraw from a c o u r s e . S DECEMBER M T W T F S 5 1 9 16 x B © (TJ) ( g ) ( § ) © 15 17 18 19 2 0 22 3i ( § ) ( § ) 2 7 2 8 2 9 24 6 13 20 27 M JULY T W T F S 1 4 5 2 3 April 4: G o o d Friday. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 8 2 9 3 0 31 April 7: Easter Monday. C o l l e g e c l o s e d . April 14-18: Examination W e e k for A c a d e m i c Division. 1980 SUMMER TERM April 1: S u m m e r term M a i l Registration begins on a c o n tinuous basis and c o u n s e l l i n g s e r v i c e s are available. Admission General Admission Policy Any person who is 18 or older and who is a C a n a d i a n Citizen or L a n d e d Immigrant is eligible tor a d m i s s i o n to Capilano College. P e r s o n s under 18 years of age are also eligible if they are in at least one of the following c a t e g o r i e s : i) They have a B . C . S e c o n d a r y S c h o o l graduation tificate or equivalent e d u c a t i o n a l r e c o r d s ; cer- ii) They are secondary s c h o o l students attending a s c h o o l in the C o l l e g e Region and have the written recommendation of their s c h o o l principal; iii) P e r s o n s at least 16 years of a g e w h o c a n satisfy a C o l l e g e counsellor that they p o s s e s s an interest in, and an aptitude for, a vocation for w h i c h the C o l l e g e provides instruction, may be eligible to enter the related C o l l e g e V o c a t i o n a l program. A d m i s s i o n of P e r s o n s from Other C o u n t r i e s P e r s o n s from other countries will only be eligible for a d mission if they c a n present d o c u m e n t a t i o n indicating that they are L a n d e d Immigrants in C a n a d a . L a n g u a g e Requirement A n y applicant is required to be functional in the E n g l i s h language. The C o l l e g e reserves the right to a s s e s s the c o m petence of applicants in the E n g l i s h l a n g u a g e before granting a d m i s s i o n . Admission Procedure 1. A p p l i c a t i o n for admission to the C o l l e g e may be made at any time in person or by mail. 2. Obtain an admission application form from the Registrar's Office. Timetables giving the times of c o u r s e offerings will be available approximately seven w e e k s prior to the c o m mencement of any term. 3. C o m p l e t e the application form and bring or mail it to the Registrar's Office. Include with your application form any former education records s u c h as B . C . S e c o n d a r y S c h o o l Graduation certificate w h i c h are required. 4. P e r s o n s wishing to enter full-time or part-time programs of studies are advised to consult with a c o u n s e l l o r and/or instructor before applying to the C o l l e g e . 5. C o m p l e t i o n of a d m i s s i o n will be formalized by the Registrar's Office which will return a "Permit to R e g i s t e r " to the applicant. T h i s permit does not guarantee registration s i n c e c o u r s e s may fill. 6. P e r s o n s wishing to enter a Career Program must have an interview with the C a r e e r co-ordinator before being admitted. Individuals will not be refused admission to the C o l l e g e but they may not be admitted to particular C a r e e r programs. A d m i s s i o n to H o w e S o u n d Courses E a c h semester C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers a number of courses in S q u a m i s h . Students from S q u a m i s h and other H o w e S o u n d communities who wish to be admitted to these courses s h o u l d contact the S q u a m i s h Centre for details of c o u r s e offerings. A d m i s s i o n to the C o l l e g e is as above and may be done by mail. P e r m a n e n t Student N u m b e r W h e n a student is first admitted to the C o l l e g e s/he is a s s i g n e d a permanent student number. This number controls the Student's R e c o r d , Statement of G r a d e s and C o l l e g e Identification C a r d . A student's number will c h a n g e only if the student's name is c h a n g e d . The student is requested to familiarize him/herself with this number. 7 Registration Registration Policy 1. Academic Studies Program C o l l e g e region residents and returning students will be g i v e n priority of registration in A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s p r o g r a m s / c o u r s e s at the C o l l e g e . 1. Only registration applications from residents (see definition below) or returning students will be p r o c e s s e d during the d e s i g n a t e d mail registration periods (in a d v a n c e of i n - p e r s o n registration for any p a r t i c u l a r s e m e s t e r ) . D u r i n g i n - p e r s o n r e g i s t r a t i o n for e a c h semester, anyone meeting the a d m i s s i o n eligibility criteria as set out in A d m i s s i o n section may then register in those c o u r s e s where there are still s p a c e s available. " R e s i d e n t s " and "returning s t u d e n t s " are defined as: a) Resident A person w h o has lived in the official C o l l e g e region (North V a n c o u v e r , West V a n c o u v e r , H o w e Sound) for at least four months as of the first day of the term for which application is made. The C o l l e g e region may be extended by the time of registration. b) Returning Student Any student who has registered for, and has attended, credit c l a s s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Returning students who have been a c a d e m i c a l l y disqualified in the previous semester s h o u l d consult a c o u n s e l l o r about eligibility. 2. Career/Vocational Programs B e c a u s e many of the more s p e c i a l i z e d programs and c o u r s e s offered by the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l Division of the C o l l e g e are unique to the province, there is no priority of registration except that, as a guideline, a majority of the students shall be residents of C o l l e g e regions. Registration P r o c e d u r e 1. For Academic Studies Programs/Courses a) For Returning Students and R e s i d e n t s application for registration may be submitted during mail registration for any semester or during in-person registration. b) For non-resident or non-returning students who have been admitted, registration may only be carried out during the designated in-person registration days. s c r e e n i n g for these programs c o m m e n c e s at least four months in a d v a n c e for Fall registration and two months in advance for Spring registration. Admitted students wishing to register in programs s h o u l d c h e c k actual a d v a n c e registration times with the pertinent program co-ordinator. A d v a n c e registration for C a r e e r students c a n be in C a r e e r c o u r s e s only, registration for A c a d e m i c Studies c o u r s e s ( " e l e c t i v e s " to C a r e e r students) c a n only take p l a c e during regular registration for the A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s p r o g r a m s / c o u r ses. b) Registration a p p l i c a t i o n s must first of all be submitted to, and approved by, the pertinent program c o ordinator. For new students this will often involve an interview and c o u n s e l l i n g . c) Through this program of a d v a n c e registration for C a r e e r programs, registration (and payment of fees) c a n often be c o m p l e t e d prior to the normal mail registration period. However, o n c e the formal mail registration period for the w h o l e C o l l e g e has c o m m e n c e d , registrants who have been a c c e p t e d into a C a r e e r program or c o u r s e and w h o have not c o m p l e t e d (by fee payment) the a d v a n c e registration, must submit their approved registration form (with fees) to the Registrar's Office either during the d e s i g n a t e d mail or in-person registration period. d) Registration forms and timetables (which include C a r e e r courses) may be obtained from the Registrar's Office. e) Registration into V o c a t i o n a l programs must be carried out through the pertinent co-ordinator at any time relative to the start-up time of the particular program. Chlldmlndlng F r e e c h i l d m i n d i n g is a v a i l a b l e d u r i n g I n - P e r s o n Registration. A s u p e r v i s e d , w e l l - e q u i p p e d play area is open to children of all a g e s . Non-Registration for Debts to the College Returning students with debts to the C o l l e g e (e.g. lost Library materials; lost equipment; tuition fees not paid) will be refused registration until s u c h debts are e r a s e d . c) Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Registrar's Office and return the c o m p l e t e d form either during mail or in-person registration. P e r s o n s are urged to register as early as p o s s i b l e to avail themselves of a better c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n . De-Registration for N o n - P a y m e n t of Tuition d) T h o s e students who wish to enroll in E n g l i s h , G e n e r a l and Humanities, G e n e r a l c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n ment English P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students who have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n ment English P l a c e m e n t Test must take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S c r e e n i n g Examination before registering for any of these c o u r s e s . S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g Examinations will be posted in the reception area, Student Info Centre and the Humanities Division. Registration for Howe S o u n d 2. For Career/Vocational Program/Courses a) B e c a u s e of the high d e m a n d for, but limited number of s p a c e s in, most C a r e e r p r o g r a m s , r e g i s t r a t i o n Fees The C o l l e g e may de-register students w h o pay tuition fees with N.S.F. c h e q u e s or w h o fail to pay deferred fees when due. Courses Students who wish to register in c o u r s e s held in the H o w e S o u n d area should contact the C o l l e g e Information C e n t r e in S q u a m i s h at 892-5322. College Identification Cards T o use the Library S e r v i c e s of the C o l l e g e , a student must have a C o l l e g e Identification C a r d . T h e s e c a r d s will be available from the Registrar's Office two w e e k s after the beginning of c l a s s e s . If this c a r d is not r e c e i v e d within two w e e k s , students should contact the Registrar's Office. If the card is lost, a duplicate may be obtained from the Registrar's Office at the cost of $2.00. Registration Schedule FOR ACADEMIC/CAREER STUDENTS FALL 79 SPRING 80 M a i l Registration Jul 16-Aug 17 Nov 19-Dec 14 C o u r s e C h a n g e Day (For students who have registered by M a i l , but need to alter their c o u r s e registration.) A u g 28 1:00pm-3:00pm Jan 2 1:00pm-3:00pm In P e r s o n Registration (Faculty Advisors present) A u g 28 3:00pm-8:00pm Jan 2 3:00pm-8:00pm (Faculty A d v i s o r s present) A u g 29 1:00pm-8:00pm Jan 3 1:00pm-8:00pm (Faculty A d v i s o r s present) Sept 4 2:00pm-7:00pm Classes commence Sept 5 Jan 7 DEPENDENT COURSE UPON Late Registration (No faculty in attendance) Sept 5,6 2:00pm-7:00pm J a n 8,9 2:00pm-7:00pm DEPENDENT COURSE UPON Oct 5 Feb 8 DEPENDENT COURSE UPON Nov 9 March 7 DEPENDENT COURSE UPON Final Date to A d d a course Final Date to Withdraw from a c o u r s e SUMMER 80 April 1-25* * B e g i n n i n g on a continuous b a s i s 9 Financial Information Fees Career Alternatives Program 4 m o n t h s - $30.00 a) A l l c h e q u e s and money orders are to be made payable to " C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e " , and must be a c c o m p a n i e d by a c o m pleted registration form. Medical Office Assistant 8 months - $60.00 b) U n d e r p a i d registrations will be returned u n p r o c e s s e d . (This may c a u s e unavoidable delays and requested courses may not be available. P l e a s e c h e c k your fee c a l c u l a t i o n carefully.) c) A c h a r g e of $5 will be levied for c o s t s of handling c h e q u e s returned by the bank for nonsufficient funds d) Post-dated c h e q u e s or separate c h e q u e s for tuition fees and Student S o c i e t y activity fees will not be a c c e p t e d . e) Students whose fees are to be paid by a g e n c i e s , other than Government S c h o l a r s h i p s , are required to present a letter to this effect at registration. f) The student's copy of the registration form is the only tax receipt issued by the C o l l e g e . Fees Schedule - Academic and plus lab fees (2 terms) Legal Stenographer NOTE: Part-time vocational c o u r s e s are pro-rated a c c o r d i n g to the duration of the c o u r s e . Deferred Fees A l l fees are due and payable in full at the time of registration. Students enrolling for 12 or more credit hours w h o are unable to pay their fees in full may apply in writing to defer up to one-half of their fees for a maximum period of one month. " A p p l i c a t i o n for Deferred Tuition F e e s " forms are available at the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office. S a m p l e fee deferment s c h e d u l e : Credit Hours 15 or more Career 8 months - $60.00 plus lab fees Total Tuition Fee Due $105.00 Maximum Deferrable Amount $52.50 Tuition Fees $7.00 per credit hour to a maximum of $105.00 per term. S p e c i a l Fee W a i v e r for Senior Citizens Lab Fees S c i e n c e lab c o u r s e s and C a r e e r program c o u r s e s may require an assessment for supplies or s p e c i a l activities, and students s h o u l d be prepared to pay these s p e c i a l fees at the time of registration. Information regarding the amount to be a s s e s s e d will be available at the time of registration. Any person 65 years of age or over is entitled to free tuition, and is not required to pay student activity fees. A p plicants for this s p e c i a l senior citizen fee waiver n e e d only produce appropriate identification s u c h as the C o u r t e s y C a r d for senior citizens or their P h a r m a c a r e c a r d . S e n i o r c i t i z e n s will be required to pay all lab fees. Student Activity Fee $1.00 per credit hour to a maximum of $15.00. (This fee is optional for c o u r s e s given in the H o w e S o u n d and S e c h e l t S c h o o l Districts.) Refunds Sample Fee 1. A complete refund of fees will be made when courses or programs are cancelled. Calculation C o u r s e " A " at C o u r s e " B " at C o u r s e " C " at Career, Vocational $XX XX XX 2. Refunds may also be granted to a student on the basis of a complete or partial official withdrawal (see scale below). Sub-total L a b Fee C o u r s e " A " L a b Fee C o u r s e " C " XX XX Sub-total Student Activity Fee credit hours at $1.00 per credit hour 3. Student Society activity fees may be refunded, subject to Board Policy No. 48, upon written application to the Student Society Office; such application to be received within two weeks of the and of Late Registration. XX TOTAL $XX Fees Schedule credit hours credit hours credit hours for A c a d e m i c , - Vocational Basic Training and Skills Development: (B.T.S.D.) -$15.00 per month for full time student. - T h e c o s t is pro-rated for part time students. Business Office Training: C l e r k Typist Option 4 months - $60.00 S t e n o g r a p h e r Option 6 months - $90.00 B o o k k e e p e r Option 4 months - $60.00 A c c o u n t i n g Option 6 months - $90.00 1 0 Refunds Scale a) Students who withdraw before the first day of c l a s s e s will receive an 8 0 % refund of tuition fees, and 100% of lab fees. Student S o c i e t y activity f e e s will not be refunded, except as per item 3, above. b) If an application for withdrawal is received within one month of the date c l a s s e s c o m m e n c e . 8 0 % of both tuition and lab fees will be refunded. Student S o c i e t y activity fees will not be refunded, except as per item 3, a b o v e . c) From the date following the last day s p e c i f i e d in b) until the end of the term, no refund will be granted. Refund Deadlines Fall Last day to receive a refund of 8 0 % of tuition and lab fees is October 5, 1979. Spring Last day to receive a refund of 8 0 % of tuition and lab fees is February 15th, 1980. F e e s Policy — C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n and Non-Credit Courses and Services Information about C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n non-credit cours e s and services is generally produced in separate brochures. The C o l l e g e policy regarding C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n fees is determined by the C o l l e g e B o a r d and is printed here for the information of students in s u c h c o u r s e s . Tuition fees c h a r g e d for C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n non-credit c o u r s e s and services shall be b a s e d on the principle of recovering the cost of direct instructional e x p e n s e s (instruction, advertising, facilities, instructor supplies but not development costs). Tuition fees shall be established from time to time and printed as part of Community E d u c a t i o n program information. L a b fees shall be c h a r g e d to recover c o s t s of c o n s u m a b l e supplies to students in C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n c o u r s e s . Tuition and Lab fees c h a r g e d for Community Education non-credit courses and services shall be the s a m e regardless of the location within the college region where the course or service is provided. Additional fees may be levied for courses and services offered outside the college region. Any person 65 years or over is entitled to free tuition but will be required to pay lab fees. The c o l l e g e reserves the right to c a n c e l any c o u r s e for w h i c h registration does not reach the required minimum, and to withdraw, postpone, or c o m b i n e c l a s s e s , or to c h a n g e instructors. Fees c h a r g e d for c o u r s e s that are later c a n c e l l e d by the C o l l e g e will be refunded in full. A p p l i c a t i o n s for withdrawals and refunds will not be a c cepted after the s e c o n d s e s s i o n of a course, and cannot be c o n s i d e r e d for a workshop of less than one w e e k ' s duration. All refunds are subject to a 2 0 % administration c h a r g e . Fees already paid for supplies and materials (lab fees) are not refundable upon withdrawal from a course. F e e s paid for a c o u r s e or service are not transferable to another course or services to be offered during a different semester. • 11 Instructional GRADUATION Information Course REQUIREMENTS: C O L L E G E D I P L O M A : Four Term Requirement ACADEMIC STUDIES: a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credits, at least 30 of w h i c h must be c o m pleted at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . b. Obtained a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. • c. Obtained at least 45 credit hours from the following subject areas, including at least 6 credit hours in English (100 level or better), and at least 6 credit hours from subjects listed in A : A B Biology Chemistry Geography Geology Mathematics Physics CAREER Anthropology Art English Fine Arts French German History Music Philosophy Physics Political S c i e n c e Psychology R e l i g i o u s Studies Sociology Spanish Theatre W o m e n ' s Studies PROGRAMS: a. Obtained a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. b. C o m p l e t e d program requirements. S E L E C T E D STUDIES: b. Obtain a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. C O L L E G E C E R T I F I C A T E : L e s s than four terms 1. P R O G R A M C O M P L E T I O N : C o m p l e t e d the requirements of a prescribed V o c a t i o n a l / T e c h n i c a l program a c c o r d i n g to the c a l e n d a r at the term of initial registration, or the c a l e n d a r of any subsequent year. 2. C O U R S E C O M P L E T I O N : C o m p l e t e d the requirements of a prescribed V o c a t i o n a l / T e c h n i c a l c o u r s e offered for credit by the c o l l e g e . of the Procedure The C o l l e g e has a policy w h i c h allows registered C o l l e g e students to request examination for a c h i e v e m e n t in certain c o u r s e s . By this procedure, a student may receive credit for a c o u r s e . Interested students s h o u l d c o n s u l t a c o u n s e l l o r for current information on this c h a l l e n g e p r o c e d u r e . There are certain c o u r s e s which may not be c h a l l e n g e d . A student c h a l l e n g i n g a c o u r s e will be required to pay the normal tuition fee for that c o u r s e . Audit Status A student may attend all meetings of a c l a s s without receiving credit. The audit student attends all c l a s s e s , seminars, labs, etc., of the c l a s s and pays the normal tuition fee. S/he is not required to sit e x a m i n a t i o n s or submit a s s i g n ments. The status of audit may be d e n i e d by an instructor if the student has not participated in the c l a s s . T h i s d e n i a l may be appealed through the grade a p p e a l p r o c e s s . Audit students will be a c c e p t e d on a s p a c e - a v a i l a b l e basis. Visitors A person may attend a c l a s s s e s s i o n as a visitor for a limited period of time, provided s/he has permission from the instructor in a d v a n c e . T h i s privilege does not extend to s c i e n c e and language labs or c o u r s e s requiring the use of machinery or materials. A visitor is not registered, does not sit examinations, does not receive credit and attends not more than three w e e k s during the term. Hours A credit hour normally represents one hour per week of c l a s s r o o m work per term. Most c o u r s e s offered are three credit hour c o u r s e s . A s s u c h , they normally require three c l a s s hours per week and may, in addition, require laboratories, seminars and tutorials. Fourth Instructional Hour A n additional and optional fourth hour of instruction will be offered in e a c h three credit hour c o u r s e but will not necessarily follow the regular three hour instructional period. This extra educational opportunity may take the form of a w o r k s h o p , seminar, field-trip or similar activity, at the discretion of e a c h instructor and as c i r c u m s t a n c e s allow. Students should understand that fourth hour activities will not be a factor in determining final grades. A t t e n d a n c e will be on a voluntary basis. Student It is the responsibility of the student to apply for C e r tificates and Diplomas. T h i s should be done by May 1st e a c h year at the Registrar's Office. T h e Instructional Y e a r The instructional year is divided into two four-month terms, Fall and S p r i n g , and an equivalent Summer S e s s i o n of two months (May and June). A c o u r s e pursued progressively for two terms normally constitutes an instructional year in that subject. 12 Course Challenge Credit a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credits at least 30 of w h i c h must be c o m pleted at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Responsibility Credits A student will receive credit only for the c o u r s e s and s e c tions in w h i c h s/he is officially registered, a c c o r d i n g to the records maintained by Student R e c o r d s , in the Registrar's Office. Course Overload Regulations During the Fall and Spring Terms, a student may not take more than 16 credit hours of a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s or more than the full requirements of a C a r e e r P r o g r a m without written permission from the Dean of A c a d e m i c Studies or the Dean of C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s as appropriate. C o u r s e o v e r l o a d s are g r a n t e d in e x c e p t i o n a l c i r c u m s t a n c e s to students with a minimum G . P . A . of 3.00 in the previous term. Attendance A student is e x p e c t e d to attend all c l a s s e s in w h i c h s/he is registered. S i n c e evaluation of progress in any c o u r s e is cumulative, based on c l a s s a s s i g n m e n t s , participation and examinations, regular attendance may be essential for s u c c e s s . Irregular attendance may result in lowered grades or suspension. A student expecting to be absent from c l a s s e s b e c a u s e of prolonged illness is advised to notify his/her instructor as s o o n as possible and to arrange to m a k e up m i s s e d instruction. The instructor may require that a m e d i c a l certificate be presented to the appropriate instructional Dean to re-instate the student. If illness prevents a student from writing a final examination or assignment s/he may be a s s i g n e d a grade or granted a deferral at the discretion of his/her instructor. In s u c h c a s e s , a medical certificate must be submitted to the appropriate instructional Dean within one week of the date of the examination or due date of the assignment. the work to be completed by a s p e c i f i e d date, w h i c h is noted in the c l a s s list with grades. The student granted an "I" grade must c o m p l e t e the n e c e s s a r y a s s i g n m e n t s on the date s p e c i f i e d by the instructor on the grade sheet. Upon completion of the required a s s i g n m e n t s the student will receive the predetermined grade specified by the instructor. Failure to complete the n e c e s s a r y a s s i g n m e n t s by the date specified will result in the prespecified grade being recorded on the student's transcript. All " F " grades are recorded on the student's transcript. T h e s e grades are a s s i g n e d a value of zero in the calculation of a student's C u m u l a t i v e G r a d e Point A v e r a g e . B a s e d on the above grading system an instructor will c o n firm or deny the "audit" status of a student. A denial ruling is open to appeal by the student. Students are cautioned that other institutions may include "I" grades in G.P.A. c a l c u l a t i o n . G r a d e Point A v e r a g e Plagiarism Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's words or ideas without a c k n o w l e d g i n g their s o u r c e — as if they were o n e ' s o w n . S t u d e n t s in doubt about the n e e d for a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t should take care to avoid unintentional plagiarism by learning proper s c h o l a r l y procedures. A document explaining these procedures is available from the Learning A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e . Intentional plagiarism is not only dishonest, but a rejection of the principles of s c h o l a r ship. A plagiarized c o l l e g e assignment, therefore, will ordinarily receive no credit. At the instructor's discretion, the plagiarist may receive an F for the paper or for the c o u r s e . G r a d e Point A v e r a g e s are reported on e a c h Permanent Student R e c o r d . The G . P . A . is the sum of the grade point hours earned in the term divided by the number of credit hours taken which are a p p l i c a b l e to the G r a d e Point c o m putation. Statement of Errors and omissions in the Statement of G r a d e s s h o u l d be reported immediately to the Registrar's Office. Appeal Grading C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e uses the following categories of grading. Letter A+ A A- Grade Point Value 4 1/3 4 3 2/3 B+ B B- 3 1/3 3 2 2/3 C+ C c- 2 1/3 2 1 2/3 D F 1 W NA AUD 1 0 0 Classification First class Second class Pass f Pass Fail Incomplete* Withdrawn' + Not A t t e n d i n g " + Audit* "not c a l c u l a t e d in Grade Point A v e r a g e +not shown on transcript Grades A Statement of G r a d e s is either mailed or distributed from the C o l l e g e R e c e p t i o n D e s k . of Final Grades If a student w i s h e s to appeal a final grade s/he must c o n tact a c o u n s e l l o r not later than two w e e k s after receipt of G r a d e s or C h a n g e of G r a d e Notification. The c o u n s e l l o r will d i s c u s s the grade and appeal procedure with the student and attempt to arrange a meeting with the instructor. The c o u n sellor will provide the student with a " F i n a l G r a d e A p p e a l " form. If the student wishes to pursue the a p p e a l , the " F i n a l G r a d e A p p e a l " form is c o m p l e t e d and submitted to the Secretary of the A p p e a l s Committee with a fee of five dollars for e a c h c o u r s e to be a p p e a l e d . A p p e a l s are c o n s i d e r e d by an A p p e a l s Committee, chaired by one of the c o l l e g e instructional Deans. The Committee c o n s i s t s of representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. During the A p p e a l p r o c e s s , all term grades, inc l u d i n g the final examination mark are taken into c o n sideration. In all c a s e s the student is informed in writing of the C o m m i t t e e ' s d e c i s i o n . S h o u l d the mark be c h a n g e d , the five dollar fee is refunded. Only those appeals that follow the above p r o c e s s will be considered. Official T r a n s c r i p t of M a r k s Grades "I" grades are given at the end of a terrrj w h e n , in the judgement of the instructor, the student w o u l d have a reasonable expectation of p a s s i n g the c o u r s e but has not completed the work required of him. A n "I" grade is only awarded where the instructor and student have arranged for The official Transcript of M a r k s is obtainable only from the Registrar's Office. The official transcript must bear the signature of the Registrar and official C o l l e g e S e a l . Official transcripts are issued only at the request of the student. The student must c o m p l e t e a Transcript Order Form and pay $1.00 per copy in order to obtain a copy. 13 Student Limitations of Records All student records are kept in the Registrar's Office. The information on file for a student is always available to that student for examination. No information on file is divulged to any agency or person other than the student without the student's permission. Students are cautioned that student loan applications and other similar applications have s u c h consent written in the document. The Squamish Provisional Standing A student who has not maintained a s c h o l a s t i c standard a c c e p t a b l e to the C o l l e g e may not be allowed to re-register in his/her current C o l l e g e program. Repeating a Course C o u r s e s may be repeated for the purposes of improving grades. Credit will be granted for the duplicate c o u r s e receiving the higher grade. Academic Difficulties Students who are experiencing difficulties in their c o u r s e work during a term may be referred by an instructor to a ' Counsellor. The student is e n c o u r a g e d to consult with his/her instructor and C o u n s e l l o r to evolve a satisfactory plan which will remedy these difficulties. Change or W i t h d r a w a l s from Courses All c h a n g e s to registered c o u r s e s and s e c t i o n s must be made on a C o u r s e C h a n g e Form and submitted to the Registrar's Office. O n e week after c l a s s e s c o m m e n c e all course or section c h a n g e s must be s i g n e d on the C o u r s e C h a n g e Form by the instructors involved. Space It is a C o l l e g e policy to provide students with as much c h o i c e of programs and options as p o s s i b l e . However, it must be realized that limitations of s p a c e , equipment and budget are likely to restrict the student's range of c h o i c e . The C o l l e g e , therefore, reserves the right to c a n c e l programs where numbers and facilities are inadequate. Centre C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ' s S q u a m i s h C e n t r e is located at 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e and serves as the f o c a l point for all of the C o l l e g e ' s activities in the P e m b e r t o n - H o w e S o u n d region. By means of this satellite centre, the C o l l e g e is attempting to extend to these c o m m u n i t i e s the programs and s e r v i c e s that are offered through the main L y n n m o u r c a m p u s . A l t h o u g h it is impossible to duplicate in S q u a m i s h all of the Lynnmour activities at any one time, the c o r e instructional services of C o u n s e l l i n g , M e d i a S e r v i c e s , Learning A s s i s t a n c e and a W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e are available to all at the C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e location. In addition, the C o l l e g e offers a number of C a r e e r Program c o u r s e s . V o c a t i o n a l c o u r s e s , A c a d e m i c University Transfer c o u r s e s and C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n activities at various locations within the region. Information on any of the C o l l e g e c o u r s e s , programs, services or activities, o c c u r i n g either in the P e m b e r t o n - H o w e S o u n d R e g i o n or at Lynnmour may be obtained by visiting the Centre or calling 892-5322. C L A S S DESCRIPTION C O D E O n the right hand side of e a c h c l a s s d e s c r i p t i o n , there is a series of c o d e letters and number, for e x a m p l e : If a student does not c o m p l e t e a c o u r s e and does not withdraw from it officially an NA or F grade may result. Mathematics X Y Z Chemistry M N P Psychology A B C Course Interpretation: The first letter(s) indicate the Term in w h i c h the c l a s s will be offered. E x a m p l e : F-Fall, S - S p r i n g , S U - S u m m e r . Thus. M a t h e m a t i c s X Y Z is to be offered in the Fall term; Chemistry M N P is to be offered in the Fall and Spring term; P s y c h o l o g y A B C is to be offered in Fall, S p r i n g and S u m m e r term. Verification Following the last day to add a c o u r s e the Registrar's Office will issue C o u r s e R e c o r d Verification forms to e a c h student. It is the student's responsibility to c h e c k h i s / h e r list of c o u r s e s . If a student believes that there is an error in his/her registration, s/he must correct the errors with a C o u r s e C h a n g e Form before the final withdrawal date. Failure to correct the error may result in a " F " grade on the student's transcript (or no credit being granted for work done). Change of N a m e a n d / o r Address It is the responsibility of the student to inform the Registrar's Office of any c h a n g e s in his/her name, address, or phone number. Id C a l c u l u s (F) (3,0,0) B i o c h e m i s t r y (F,S) (3,3,0) A b n o r m a l (F,S,SU) (3,0,1) The first number indicates the number of credit hours granted for the c o u r s e and the number of hours taught per week, the s e c o n d number denotes the number of lab hours per week, and the third number denotes the number of seminar/tutorial/4th instructional hours per w e e k . Thus, P s y c h o l o g y A B C is offered three times a week for three hours with no lab time and with one hour per week of seminar/tutorial. Chemistry M N P is offered for three hours per week with three hours of lab per week with no seminar/tutorials. 15 Services Student Responsibilities C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a s s u m e s that students who enrol will seriously attempt satisfactory completion of all studies w h i c h are undertaken. The C o l l e g e also a s s u m e s that students are mature and responsible and will c o n d u c t themselves a c cordingly. S o m e c l a s s e s are s c h e d u l e d at C e n t r e s other than L y n n mour. Students are advised to make the best timetable for themselves in view of c o l l e g e services w h i c h are offered in West V a n c o u v e r , H o w e S o u n d and other parts of North V a n couver. All c o u r s e s for any one student may not necessarily be held at one Centre. Student Society The Student S o c i e t y is incorporated under the S o c i e t i e s A c t of British C o l u m b i a . It was established in order to represent the interests of all students of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e in a number of c a p a c i t i e s . There are nine elected positions in c o u n c i l for which any interested student of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is eligible. The elected body of the Student S o c i e t y is responsible for ensuring that students are represented on all d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g committees of the C o l l e g e . They also are responsible for maintaining active membership within the B . C . Student Federation and the National Union of Students. The S o c i e t y provides services to students that are not under the jurisdiction of the C o l l e g e Administration, s u c h as the organization of films, s o c i a l s , c o u r s e unions, c l u b s and general information services. The Student Society Executive holds weekly meetings w h i c h the student body is w e l c o m e to attend. For further information students may c a l l 986-1911 local 347 or go to the office in A114. Counselling The services of trained c o u n s e l l o r s are available to all students and to residents of the C o l l e g e R e g i o n . C o u n s e l l o r s assist students in the educational planning and provide g u i d a n c e in the solution of a c a d e m i c and personal problems. The C o l l e g e c o u n s e l l i n g objective is to help students a c h i e v e self-direction in d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g and planning. If you are e x p e r i e n c i n g difficulty of any kind with which you c o u l d use a s s i s t a n c e you are e n c o u r a g e d to contact C o u n s e l l i n g Department personnel. There is a reception desk located on the lower floor, north end of N F building. For those living in the P e m b e r t o n - H o w e S o u n d R e g i o n , a C o l l e g e C o u n s e l l o r is available from M o n d a y through Thursday at the S q u a m i s h C e n t r e , 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e . A n evening appointment may also be arranged by c a l l i n g the Centre, 892-5322, in a d v a n c e for those who are unable to make an appointment during the day. The C o l l e g e A d m i s s i o n s Advisor visits all s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l s in the C o l l e g e R e g i o n e a c h Spring to speak to student groups about opportunities offered by C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . S c h o o l students planning to enter the C o l l e g e may take advantage of early a d m i s s i o n interviews at their s c h o o l by contacting their s c h o o l C o u n s e l l o r for the appropriate dates. 16 Group Programs T h e s e are programs d e s i g n e d for personal development. They include programs to c o n s i d e r areas of personal growth, career c h o i c e , human sexuality and life style development. They are listed in the c o u r s e offerings under C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m s . They are non-credit c o u r s e s , generally offered without c h a r g e . S o m e h a v e limited enrolment. (Programs are offered if there is sufficient interest.) Testing Services The C o l l e g e also offers students a c o m p r e h e n s i v e testing program. V o c a t i o n a l interest, personality and aptitude tests are available free of c h a r g e to students and residents of the community. Test results are often helpful in m a k i n g career c h o i c e s . All testing is done on a voluntary b a s i s and results are confidential. High School Equivalency Examinations C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is an approved testing centre for the government-sponsored H i g h S c h o o l E q u i v a l e n c y (GED) Examinations. T h e s e e x a m s are written at least four times per year and are open to all individuals over 19 years of age. Information and application forms are available from the C o u n s e l l i n g Department. Career Development Resource Centre The C o l l e g e assists students in c o n s i d e r i n g c a r e e r options and selecting a career by providing in-depth information on a wide variety of career options. The C a r e e r Development R e s o u r c e Centre houses a c o l l e c t i o n of v o c a t i o n a l literature, pamphlets and reference works available for use in the C e n tre in room NF102. Students w i s h i n g to utilize the materials s h o u l d contact the Receptionist at the reception station, lower floor, north end of N F building. Placement Centre The P l a c e m e n t Centre aids students who desire a s s i s t a n c e in locating part-time or temporary employment. T h e Centre also works c l o s e l y with the C a r e e r Division to assist in the career placement of c o l l e g e graduates. S t u d e n t s w h o w i s h to take advantage of this service s h o u l d register at the P l a c e m e n t Centre Office in the N F b u i l d i n g . Women's Resource Centre - Lynnmour The W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e provides a variety of programs available to students, staff, faculty and other members of the community. T h e s e include non-credit c o u r s e s , a C o m m u n i t y R e s o u r c e File for the North S h o r e , library materials, an o m b u d s service, c u s t o m - d e s i g n e d non-credit c o u r s e s , o n - c a m p u s w o r k s h o p s , and, with the C o u n s e l l i n g Division, drop-in c o u n s e l l i n g , testing, and life-planning. In addition to these activities, the W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n tre offers a lounge area where persons may meet with others or sit and read. For further information, contact M a r s h a Trew, W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e Centre, 986-1911, local 350, or drop in. Women's Resource Centre - Squamish The W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e provides a variety of programs of s p e c i a l interest to both community and C o l l e g e w o m e n . T h e s e programs include films, s p e a k e r s , w o r k s h o p s , non-credit c o u r s e s , library s e r v i c e s , and community resources. W o m e n are w e l c o m e to c o m e to the C e n t r e to d i s c u s s their c o n c e r n s with a member of the R e s o u r c e staff. The W o m e n ' s C e n t r e will also sponsor mutual support groups. T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e is a service provided by C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for S q u a m i s h and surrounding areas. It is our purpose to be responsive to the interests and e d u c a t i o n a l needs of community groups. W e invite your ideas and your participation in the C e n t r e ' s programs. For further information c a l l R a c h e l A a r o n s at 892-5322 or visit the Centre i n ' t h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e office at 38038 Cleveland Avenue, Squamish. Learning Assistance Centre The Learning A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m is a resource centre for those who seek to increase their learning efficiency. E a c h term the Program staff offers small group w o r k s h o p s on Study S k i l l s , R e a d i n g Improvement, V o c a b u l a r y D e v e l o p ment, C o n c e p t u a l B l o c k b u s t i n g , E s s a y Writing and S p e l l i n g Improvement. Times and Dates for the W o r k s h o p s are published in the Learning A s s i s t a n c e B r o c h u r e . Students who wish to apply to the Canada Student Loan and B.C. Student Assistance Program are encouraged to apply at least two months before registration. Scholastic Awards Dean's List S p e c i a l recognition will be a c c o r d e d , students who c o m plete a full program of studies at the C o l l e g e with a 3.50 or higher grade point average during a term. Students with "I" grades are not eligible for the D e a n ' s list. Governor-General's Silver Medal - one per year This award is presented to a Diploma G r a d u a t e with the best cumulative G r a d e Point A v e r a g e , and who has attained this G r a d e Point Average on a minimum of 15 credit hours per term during attendance at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Lieutenant Governor's Medal A w a r d e d for a c a d e m i c e x c e l l e n c e and contribution to the c o l l e g e and community to a graduate in a V o c a t i o n a l or C a r e e r program of less than two years duration. Merit List S p e c i a l recognition will be a c c o r d e d part-time students with a 3.50 cumulative grade point average or higher who have s u c c e s s f u l l y completed a minimum of 30 semester hours at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . The Learning A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e , located on the South C a m p u s in A110, has materials on a wide variety of learning and teaching practices. For e x a m p l e , information on notetaking, time management and exam writing is available in handout form. Principal's Citizenship Award In addition, the Centre e n c o u r a g e s utilization of its library and study facilities. Students have a c c e s s through the Centre to audio-visual programs, electric typewriters, cassette recorders and reading equipment. This award is presented to one Diploma G r a d u a t e with the best G r a d e Point Average in A c a d e m i c Studies, and to one Diploma Graduate with the best G r a d e Point A v e r a g e in a Career Program. Students may use the P r o g r a m to improve their c o m munication skills, analyze the c i r c u m s t a n c e s of c o l l e g e e d u c a t i o n , and evaluate their own e d u c a t i o n a l objectives. The Learning A s s i s t a n c e Program is a tool for people to use in the realization of their e d u c a t i o n a l g o a l s . Library For individual appointments with the Co-ordinator, L e a r n ing A s s e s s m e n t Specialist, or other Learning A s s i s t a n c e Faculty please call 986-1911, L o c . 353 or 356. If it is more c o n venient, please c a l l the S q u a m i s h Centre at 892-5322. (Students should also see notes on the Writing W o r k s h o p and Mathematics Lab.) Financial Awards and Placement The F i n a n c i a l A i d Office, located in NF102 (North C a m p u s ) may be contacted for information and a s s i s t a n c e regarding the C a n a d a Student L o a n and British C o l u m b i a Student A s s i s t a n c e Program, the H o w e S o u n d A l l o w a n c e , and bursaries, s c h o l a r s h i p s and loans. Students who may need f i n a n c i a l aid or who w i s h to apply for financial awards may obtain c o p i e s of the F i n a n c i a l A i d brochure at the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office. A detailed and c o m prehensive listing of financial aid programs is also provided near the end of this C a l e n d a r . A p p l i c a t i o n s for programs a d ministered through the C o l l e g e are available from the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office. The F i n a n c i a l A i d person is available to d i s c u s s financial assistance with interested students. This award is given in recognition of the student who has made the greatest contribution to C o l l e g e life. Principal's Awards - two per year Services The M e d i a C e n t r e ' s main aims are to support the c o u r s e s offered by the C o l l e g e in the wide range of a c a d e m i c , career and v o c a t i o n a l areas and to teach students self-sufficiency in library use. Through supplying b o o k s , films, m a g a z i n e s , A V equipment and slides, and through teaching users how to find information and make the best use of these materials, the M e d i a Centre is an integral part of the instructional p r o c e s s of the c o l l e g e . The M e d i a Centre is s m a l l but it supplies all types of media through its various departments — reference and c i r c u l a t i o n , t e c h n i c a l services, periodicals, audio visual and film departments. The M e d i a Production C e n t r e , w h i c h is part of the library, is responsible for film, tape and graphic work for the c o l l e g e as well as teaching students how to use production equipment. T h r o u g h the computer, the M e d i a Centre has a c c e s s to information about the holdings of other c o l l e g e s and universities in B . C . The M e d i a C e n t r e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is part of a network of public, c o l l e g e and university libraries which m a k e s information and materials quickly available. For students at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , whatever their c h o i c e of c o u r s e , the M e d i a C e n t r e is an essential resource. The skills in research w h i c h c a n be learned there will be valuable whatever career is pursued and, if the library cannot immediately satisfy the n e e d , other r e s o u r c e s in the Lower M a i n l a n d c a n be a c c e s s e d . 17 Both students and the community from the P e m b e r t o n H o w e S o u n d region may avail themselves of the M e d i a C e n tre's resources by c o n t a c t i n g J u d y V e t s c h at the S q u a m i s h Centre, 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e or by c a l l i n g 892-5322. Media Production Services M e d i a production equipment and facilities are available for film, tape and graphic production in the M e d i a Production CJentre w h i c h is located in rooms NB109 and 110. Qualified media staff are available to give a s s i s t a n c e in this production as required. Athletics C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e e n c o u r a g e s a program of intramural and extramural athletics for both men and w o m e n students. The C o l l e g e is a full member of Totem C o n f e r e n c e , which is the governing body for all inter-college athletics in the province of British C o l u m b i a . P r o v i n c i a l c h a m p i o n s are determined annually with winners a d v a n c i n g to a W e s t e r n C a n a d a final in most sports, and national finals in s e l e c t e d athletic a c tivities. T h i s affords our C o l l e g e ' s highly s k i l l e d student •athletes the opportunity to meet with and compete against, the best C o l l e g e athletes in C a n a d a . T h e c a l i b r e of c o m petition on the inter-college level is excellent with the athletic program b e i n g structured to provide an e a s y meld of a c a d e m i c and athletic pursuits for student athletes. Intercollegiately, C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o m p e t e s in R u g b y . S o c cer, B a s k e t b a l l , V o l l e y b a l l , Badminton and C u r l i n g . At present, g y m n a s i u m - b a s e d B l u e teams operate out of what was formerly Delbrook H i g h S c h o o l ' s G y m n a s i u m . The facility has been completely renovated and upgraded to meet C o l l e g e standards. E a c h year, the many e x c e p t i o n a l athletes that attend our institution, working in conjunction with an e x p e r i e n c e s B l u e s c o a c h i n g staff, have c o m b i n e d to p r o d u c e several Totem C o n f e r e n c e and Western C a n a d i a n (4-West) c h a m p i o n s h i p teams. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is proud of the a c c o m p l i s h m e n t s of its student athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic excellence. Opportunities to take part in intramural activity are also provided by the C o l l e g e . Activities offered vary from year to year in c o m p l i a n c e with e x p r e s s e d interests, but usually inc l u d e s u c h activities as badminton, volleyball, basketball, s o c c e r , tennis, touch football, and P h y s i c a l Fitness. T h e C o l l e g e Athletic Department, working in conjunction with the C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n D i v i s i o n , annually s p o n s o r s , at minimal cost, several instructional programs directed toward both the student body and the North S h o r e C o l l e g e Community at large. T h e s e programs include P r e - S k i Fitness, B e g i n n e r and Intermediate Tennis, and the B . C . C o a c h i n g Certification P r o g r a m . The Fitness Centre is located in the west corner of the South P a r k i n g lot. The facility c o n t a i n s s h o w e r s , locker rooms, saunas, an equipment room and an e x e r c i s e area, c o m p l e t e with weight training and fitness testing facilities. S c h e d u l e d fitness s e s s i o n s are intermingled with large b l o c k s of o p e n facility time. T h e F i t n e s s C e n t r e ' s P r o f e s s i o n a l staff will provide personal consultive and testing services relative to health, p h y s i c a l fitness, and weight c o n trol, on an appointment basis. The Fitness Centre is yours; m a k e good use of it. 18 First A i d a n d H e a l t h Services First A i d and Health S e r v i c e s are located in R o o m ND102 on the North C a m p u s . T h e C o m m u n i t y H e a l t h N u r s e is available to provide the following s e r v i c e s to students and employees: 1. First A i d - phone local 271. If no a n s w e r contact C o l l e g e switchboard " 0 " . the 2. Health C o u n s e l l i n g - to both individuals and groups in preventive health care as well as e m e r g e n c y care. S o m e areas of c o u n s e l l i n g involve: nutrition, weight control, communicable diseases, immunization, conception control, short and long term illness and pre and post natal care. 3. P h y s i c a l Health C a r e - involves vision c h e c k , hearing tests (oto chek), blood pressure c h e c k , weight (skin caliper test), p r e g n a n c y tests (slide test), alergy injections (referral from physician). 4. Stop S m o k i n g C l i n i c s are offered free by the nurse using Dr. A l a n B e s t ' s (U.B.C.) t e c h n i q u e s . If interested, phone local 271 or visit the Health S e r v i c e s . 5. Health Hazard Appraisal - provides a computer printout to portray the b a l a n c e between your health history and habits and your potential life e x p e c t a n c y . If interested phone L o c a l 271 or visit the H e a l t h S e r v i c e s . 6. P a m p h l e t s and T e a c h i n g A i d s on various t o p i c s s u c h as: nutrition, heart, s m o k i n g , p r e g n a n c y , d i s e a s e s , respiratory illness, c a n c e r , venereal d i s e a s e s , and c o n c e p t i o n control. 7. R e g u l a r meetings of the Health and Safety C o m m i t t e e are held at which time any c o m p l a i n t s or s u g g e s t i o n s re: hazardous, unsafe, or health injuries items c a n be submitted, in writing, to the C h a i r m a n of the Health and Safety C o m m i t t e e via the Student R e p r e s e n t a t i v e s . 8. A n Accident/Injury Reporting form (F167) is available from the C o l l e g e Nurse and Student Info-Centre. 9. First A i d Kits are av ailable at: A012 Art Dept. A-Building B125 B - B u i l d i n g Library C131 S o u t h C a m p u s Portables S c i e n c e and Chemistry Lab C-6 S o u t h C a m p u s Portables Day C a r e Centre C-4 S o u t h C a m p u s Portables Print S h o p D South C a m p u s Fitness Centre NE North C a m p u s Portables Workshop South C a m p u s D y n a m i c s Lab Community Education Community Education offices Division 778 Premier Street, North V a n c o u v e r Referrals to outside a g e n c i e s , individuals, c a n be made through your Health S e r v i c e s . Infocentre The purpose of the Information C e n t r e , w h i c h is o r g a n i z e d by the Student Society, is to c e n t r a l i z e and facilitate information relevant to students. The C e n t r e deals with both internal and external information, including h o u s i n g and jobs. It is located a c r o s s from the reception desk in the lobby of building " B " . Lost and Found Students may a d d r e s s enquiries regarding items Lost or Found to the Information Centre operated by the Student S o c i e t y and located in the lobby of building " B " , South C a m pus. F o o d and Beverage Service North Campus The main cafeteria is located in B u i l d i n g N E offering full hot meal service during the Fall a n d Spring term from approximately 8:00 a.m. (0800 hrs) through 8:30 p.m. (2030 hrs) daily except Fridays when it c l o s e s at 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs). minutes while loading or unloading. V e h i c l e s parked in e x c e s s of this time period are subject to the C o l l e g e towing policy (see f) below). d) Reserved P a r k i n g may be made available to selected departments and to h a n d i c a p p e d persons requiring a v e h i c l e to be parked near specific work areas. In s u c h c a s e s , a permit must be s e c u r e d from the Facilities Department allowing extended parking privileges. e) All traffic and parking s i g n s must be observed. f) V e h i c l e s parking in unauthorized areas wjll be towed away at the owner's e x p e n s e by Tritow S y s t e m s Ltd., Keith and S e y m o u r Blvd., North V a n c o u v e r , B . C . - T e l e p h o n e : 689-1441. South Campus T h e satellite c a f e t e r i a is l o c a t e d in B u i l d i n g (B) Cafetheatre — offering limited hot foods and snack items approximately 8:30 a.m. (0830 hrs) through 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs) a n d 6:30 p.m. (1830 hrs) through 9:00 p.m. (2100 hrs) M o n d a y through Thursday; Friday 8:30 a.m. (0830 hrs) through 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs). Women's Resource Centre Faculty Trew, M.. B.A. (Kansas State). M.A. (Missouri Centre State), Ph.D. (Michigan State) A a r o n s , R., B.A. (Toronto). P h . D . (Michigan). M.S.W. (Toronto) Vending Machine V e n d i n g service offering limited food, beverage and c o n fectionery items is a v a i l a b l e in the S o u t h C a m p u s (Cafetheatre) and North C a m p u s foyer area B u i l d i n g N.E. Use of Cafeterias Limited dining s p a c e (seating & circulation) does not allow for the use of either cafeteria for s p e c i a l functions during the period the food service is in operation. Bookstore These activities are p u b l i c i z e d through brochures that are available through the Centre located in the A - B u i l d i n g . In a d dition, the faculty are committed to responding to the expressed needs of w o m e n , and will work with any group interested in custom designing an activity or w o r k s h o p w h i c h is in keeping with the g o a l s of the C o l l e g e . Media The Bookstore, located in B u i l d i n g N.E., North C a m p u s , offers required and r e c o m m e n d e d texts together with assorted stationery, sundry and personal items. A postage stamp selling a g e n c y is located B o o k s t o r e together with a mail drop bag. The W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e Centre sponsors a variety of programs that are of interest to both women of our c o m munity and those registered at the C o l l e g e . in the The Maradadi Boutique The M a r a d a d i Boutique is a small s h o p , located in the A building, operated by the Retail F a s h i o n students. Serving the specialty needs of the student body as well as the e d u c a t i o n a l n e e d s of the fashion m e r c h a n d i s i n g students, it sells fashion items, greeting cards, and a c c e s s o r i e s , as well as art objects on a c o n s i g n m e n t basis. The boutique is open from M o n d a y to Thursday, from 11:30 a.m. until 1:30 p.m. during the term. Centre Faculty B i g g i n s , P., B.A. (Hon.) (Manchester), A.L.A. ( C o l l e g e T e c h Manchester), B.L.S. (Toronto), M.L.S. (Toronto). M.A. (Simon Fraser) Carter, S., B.A. (Louisiana). Cert, of E d . (Louisiana). M. of Lib. (Washington) M o d e n e s i . G . , B. M o n e l e s t i c Studies (Peru). B.A. (Brit. Col.), M. of Lib. (Brit. Col.) P r i c e , C , B.S. M u s . (Danbury State), M.A. (Columbia), M . S . C . (Oregon) V e t s c h . J . , B.A. (Carroll C o l l e g e ) . B.L.S. (Mich.) The M e d i a Centre supports the c o u r s e s offered by the C o l l e g e through the provision of books, films, m a g a z i n e s , A . V . equipment and slides as well as through activities d e s i g n e d to make the student self sufficient in the use of library materials. Parking P a r k i n g is available to all students on the north and south parking lots only. For exact locations, c o n s u l t the P a r k i n g & C a m p u s map p. 144. The following parking regulations, w h i c h have been d e s i g n e d to meet the District Fire M a r s h a l ' s instructions, are in effect: S p e c i a l short w o r k s h o p s are offered to students a n d c o m munity members in how to a s s e s s and make the best use of the C o l l e g e ' s media resources At the request of faculty, these w o r k s h o p s will be offered on an in-class basis and will be particularly f o c u s s e d on the needs of that c l a s s . a) No restrictions apply to O p e n P a r k i n g areas on the North and South C a m p u s e s . b) N o parking is permitted in a Fire Z o n e . c) V e h i c l e s may park in a L o a d i n g Z o n e for up to 15 19 Financial Aids a n d T h e British C o l u m b i a Assistance Student Awards Financial P r o g r a m / C a n a d a Student Loan Subject to revision of the 1979/80 e d u c a t i o n a l year, the program is as follows: 1. Program A comprehensive program of a s s i s t a n c e for postsecondary students has been introduced by the Ministry of Education to ensure that B . C . residents are not denied the opportunity to reach their e d u c a t i o n a l objectives due to financial barriers. The purpose of the British C o l u m b i a Student A s s i s t a n c e Program is to assist students w h o s e resources are insufficient to provide for the cost of full-time studies at the post-secondary level of e d u c a t i o n . F u n d s under the program are therefore granted only when the financial resources available to students from parents, summer work or other s o u r c e s are insufficient to meet their estimated e d u c a t i o n a l costs. The funds awarded under this program will normally be disbursed through a combination of funds drawn from the provincial grant fund and the federal C a n a d a Student L o a n plan. A detailed booklet d e s c r i b i n g the program in full s h o u l d be available at your institution's financial awards office. 2 Eligibility Funds will be provided to eligible students undertaking a minimum of 6 0 % of a full program of studies leading to a certificate, diploma or 1st degree. The amount of assistance awarded will be based on a s s e s s e d need as determined by the provincial authority. 3. Canada Student Loan Students should note the " S u m m a r y of O b l i g a t i o n s " on the reverse side of the loan certificate prior to negotiating a loan. Interest on your loan is paid by the Federal government as long as you are registered as a full-time student and for 6 months thereafter Y o u s h o u l d d i s c u s s the interest rates with your bank, credit union, etc., since rates vary from year to year. Students who have received C a n a d a Student L o a n s previously, but who do not negotiate one for their immediate period of studies, s h o u l d submit a S c h e d u l e II to their bank, credit union, etc., in order to retain interest-free status. N.B. P l e a s e note that applications must go through the F i n a n c i a l Awards Office. Do not send applications directly to the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n . It is strongly advised that students submit applications at least 6-8 w e e k s prior to registration in a c o u r s e of studies. Students who wish to obtain loans to attent institutions outside of C a n a d a should write to the following A d d r e s s : Student S e r v i c e s Ministry of E d u c a t i o n 835 Humboldt Street, Victoria, B . C . T h e A s s o c i a t i o n of C o l l e g e a n d University E m p l o y e e s — L o c a l N o . 4 The C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e A s s o c i a t i o n of C o l l e g e and University E m p l o y e e s , L o c a l N o . 4, will award a bursary of $200.00 in e a c h of the Spring and Fall C o l l e g e terms. The bursary will be awarded by the financial awards officer, primarily on the basis of need, to a full-time C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e student. A p p l i c a t i o n s may be obtained through receptionist. the C o u n s e l l i n g Deadline for the Fall Semester: September 15. Deadline for the Spring Semester: January 15. T h e Birks Family F o u n d a t i o n B u r s a r i e s The Birks Family Foundation has e s t a b l i s h e d a plan of annual contributions to the Student A i d Fund of r e c o g n i z e d C a n a d i a n c o l l e g e s / u n i v e r s i t i e s for the creation of The Birks Family Foundation Bursaries. The Bursaries are awarded by the Foundation on the recommendation of the C o l l e g e / U n i v e r s i t y S c h o l a r s h i p C o m mittee and are not restricted to faculty or year and may be renewed. The number and amount of s u c h awards may vary annually, d e p e n d i n g upon the funds available for the purpose from the Foundation. A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available at the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office and must be returned by J a n u a r y 15, 1979. British Columbia Forest P r o d u c t s Limited Scholar- ship U p to eight s c h o l a r s h i p s of $250 are offered by B . C . Forest P r o d u c t s Limited to legal d e p e n d e n t s of e m p l o y e e s of the C o m p a n y who, by J u n e 30 of the year in w h i c h the awards are made, have or will have served with the C o m p a n y for at least one year. They are open to students p r o c e e d i n g in the Fall from G r a d e XII to a full program of studies at a regional c o l l e g e . There will be one s c h o l a r s h i p allotted every year to e a c h of the following: C a p i l a n o , C a m o s u n , D o u g l a s , Fraser Valley, M a l a s p i n a , New C a l e d o n i a , North Island and L a n g a r a colleges. The s c h o l a r s h i p s will be awarded to the c a n d i d a t e s with the highest records of s c h o l a s t i c achievement in their final two years of high s c h o o l . No award will be made to an applicant with an overall average of less than 70 per cent. A p plicants must give the n e c e s s a r y details of service with the C o m p a n y in a covering letter e n c l o s e d with their a p p l i c a t i o n . A p p l i c a t i o n s are available at the c o l l e g e s and must reach the c o l l e g e by J u l y 1 together with a transcript of high s c h o o l marks. B.C. Telephone Company Awards First year students w h o are d e p e n d e n t s of B . C . Tel e m ployees may apply. Four s c h o l a r s h i p s are awarded e a c h year based on achievement in studies and community participation. A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available through B . C . T e l e p h o n e C o m p a n y ' s Trust C o m p a n y . Internal A w a r d s The following awards are administered by the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . A p p l i c a t i o n s s h o u l d be submitted to the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Officer. For the purposes of financial aid and awards, unless otherwise s p e c i f i e d , a full time student shall be taken to mean any student registered in a minimum of 9 credit hours per term. 20 B . C . Government Employees Union Five $1,000.00 s c h o l a r s h i p s are awarded annually to immediate relatives of B . C . G . E . U . members. A p p l i c a n t s must be registered in post-secondary studies of eight months duration or longer. > A p p l i c a t i o n s available at: B . C . G . E . U . Area Office 203 - 4925 C a n a d a Way Burnaby, B . C . V5G 1M1 Deadline: March 31. British Columbia the first year of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Program in the C o m p u t e r Option. F i n a n c i a l need and a minimal standing of 2.5 are criteria for eligibility. A p p l i c a t i o n s are available at the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office. Deadline is January 15. Youth Foundation Loans Interest-free educational loans are made to B . C . residents age thirty or under. h e loans may be for fees, b o o k s and/or a monthly allowance for living e x p e n s e s where the applicant is not living at home. An adult guarantor is normally required. Students eligible for government loans should first apply to that s o u r c e . Contact the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office for an interview and further information. T Capilano College Faculty Association For Fall semester — September 15 For Spring semester — January 15 College Foundation The applicant must: (b) have attained a standing in the s e c o n d half of the first year program of 2.5 (C+) average; (c) have satisfied the c o l l e g e student financial award officer and the Foundation that he or she is in need of financial a s s i s t a n c e to continue with his or her studies at C a p i l a n o College Memorial Scholarship The C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Foundation has established this s c h o l a r s h i p in recognition of the g e n e r o u s support received from the Estate of the late D o n a l d A n d e r s o n M a c G r e g o r . T h e purpose of the s c h o l a r s h i p is to r e c o g n i z e the increasing importance of the study of C a n a d i a n affairs in post-secondary institutions. T o be eligible to apply, a student must have a c h i e v e d an excellent standing in the study of s o c i a l s c i e n c e s and particularly in relation to C a n a d i a n affairs. Application deadline: January 15 Apply to the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office before January 15. Management Centre Non-status Indians who s u c c e s s f u l l y complete the s c h o o l year and w h o have received a C a n a d a Student L o a n c a n apply through the B . C . Native Indian T e a c h e r s A s s o c i a t i o n / F i r s t C i t i z e n s Fund to have their loan repaid. Institute of C h a r t e r e d A c c o u n t a n t s of British C o l u m bia A $100.00 bursary is available to a full-time student at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e completing the first year of the University Transfer program who is p r o c e e d i n g to s e c o n d year or to a university in the c o m m e r c e option, has a good record in the a c c o u n t i n g c l a s s e s c o m p l e t e d , has maintained a s e c o n d c l a s s standing overall, has financial need and who is interested in b e c o m i n g a C h a r t e r e d A c c o u n t a n t . A p p l i c a t i o n deadline is January 15. Williamson Memorial Association A $100 bursary is available to a student who has c o m p l e t e d Bursaries Several bursaries will be awarded annually to full time students enrolled in Career P r o g r a m s . One of these bursaries will be restricted to students in the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Program. A p p l i c a n t s must have s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d at least one full year at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . The selection of award recipients will be based mainly on financial need although s c h o l a s t i c ability will be taken into account. A p p l i c a t i o n deadline is January 15. Margaret Campbell Bursary The Credit Union Foundation of British C o l u m b i a awards two $100 grants e a c h year, on the b a s i s of financial need. A p plicants must be C a n a d i a n citizens and residents of the area served by the C o l l e g e . Data Processing Resources Through the Indian E d u c a t i o n R e s o u r c e s Centre, both nonstatus and status Indians are e n c o u r a g e d to apply for e d u c a t i o n a l bursaries. John Percy Application deadline is October 15 T h e C r e d i t Union F o u n d a t i o n Indian E d u c a t i o n For complete details and application forms contact the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office in NF102 or Muriel Roberts at 2284662 or 228-6325. Awards (a) have applied for enrollment in the s e c o n d year of either an A c a d e m i c Transfer program or a C a r e e r program: MacGregor A $300 s c h o l a r s h i p will be awarded to an outstanding student in Secretarial Studies in the final year of the program. Apply to the Secretarial Studies Department. Status Indians c a n apply for a $500.00 bursary. The Foundation currently a w a r d s the C o n s t a n c e M a c G r e g o r Memorial S c h o l a r s h i p (listed separately) and fourteen bursaries of $105.00. a c c o r d i n g to the following eligibility requirements: The Constance for S e c r e t a r i a l S t u d i e s Bursaries C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Faculty A s s o c i a t i o n will provide two $200 busaries annually. F i n a n c i a l need is the major criterion. A p p l i c a t i o n deadlines: Capilano I.B.M. S c h o l a r s h i p Bursary This award is made p o s s i b l e by the North S h o r e B u s i n e s s and P r o f e s s i o n a l W o m e n ' s C l u b in recognition of Alderman Margaret C a m p b e l l ' s outstanding contribution to the North V a n c o u v e r Community and as past president of the C a n a d i a n Federation of B u s i n e s s a n d P r o f e s s i o n a l W o m e n ' s C l u b s . The bursary is open to women students C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e in at least three c o u r s e s . enrolled at A p p l i c a t i o n s s h o u l d be submitted to the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office by January 15. 21 N o r t h S h o r e C o m m u n i t y Credit U n i o n A w a r d E a c h fall or spring two $100 awards will be granted students exhibiting l e a d e r s h i p , c i t i z e n s h i p and h i g h a c a d e m i c standing. The awards are available to residents of North V a n c o u v e r C i t y or District on c o m p l e t i o n of at least one year at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Deadline dates: September 15, January 15. by the B . C . P h y s i c a l Fitness and A m a t e u r Sports F u n d . A p plicants must show e v i d e n c e of 1, athletic ability and perf o r m a n c e ; 2, l e a d e r s h i p and c h a r a c t e r ; 3, s c h o l a s t i c achievement. A l l applications s h o u l d be obtained from and s h o u l d be a d d r e s s e d to Athletic A w a r d s , B . C . P h y s i c a l F i t n e s s and Amateur Sports F u n d , Parliament B u i l d i n g s , V i c t o r i a , B . C . S u b m i s s i o n deadline: June 1. P.E.O. Bursary British Columbia A bursary will be awarded annually to a female student with financial need and satisfactory a c a d e m i c standing. AMOUNT: AVAILABLE TO: A p p l i c a t i o n deadline is January 15. Student S o c i e t y APPLICATIONS: Bursaries The Student S o c i e t y provides several bursaries annually to full-time and part-time students. F i n a n c i a l need is the main requirement. A p p l i c a t i o n deadline is January 15. Vancouver Foundation Bursaries F i n a n c i a l need and satisfactory a c a d e m i c standing are the requirements for a p p l i c a t i o n . For more details contact F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office. D e a d l i n e is January 15. West V a n c o u v e r University W o m e n ' s C l u b Bursary A bursary will be awarded annually to a female student, part-time/full-time, w h o resides in the district. ( T h e recipient of this award must oe registered in an a c a d e m i c program, have satisfactory a c a d e m i c standing and demonstrated financial need. A p p l i c a t i o n s must be submitted to the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office by January 15. General Awards The following awards are not administered through the C o l l e g e . Information is provided to assist students who wish to m a k e application to the granting agency(ies). A d e l e Peet M e m o r i a l Bursary - $250.00 S E L E C T I O N CRITERIA: — A p p l i c a n t must be a resident of the lower mainland. — M u s t be registered in the Faculty of Nursing, P h y s i c a l E d u c a t i o n or R e c r e a t i o n . — A p p l i c a t i o n should be supported by a letter of reference(s). — A p p l i c a t i o n must be in writing, giving full particulars, i.e. name, address, including postal c o d e , age, together with reason for applying for this bursary (in 500 words or less). SEND APPLICATION TO: Mr. Dennis Peet, C h a i r m a n " A d e l e Peet Memorial B u r s a r y " Committee c / o V a n c o u v e r Area Y . M . C . A . 6137 C a m b i e Street V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V5Z 3B2 Cultural Fund Awards Three quarters (3/4) of tuition fees Students attending r e c o g n i z e d institutions in the cultural field. T o the P r o v i n c i a l Secretary Parliament B u i l d i n g s Victoria, B.C. The British C o l u m b i a Hotels Association Scholarships Six- s c h o l a r s h i p s of $300.00 e a c h , the gift of the British C o l u m b i a Hotels A s s o c i a t i o n , are offered to students w h o are residents of British C o l u m b i a and w h o are b e g i n n i n g or c o n tinuing studies in the s e c o n d , third, or higher year of University work. S e l e c t i o n of the w i n n e r s will be made by the University on the basis of s c h o l a s t i c s t a n d i n g , personal qualities, and interest and participation in student and c o m munity affairs. In making the awards, financial c i r c u m s t a n c e s of the candidates may also be c o n s i d e r e d . Further information and an application may be obtained from the University A w a r d s Committee, R o o m 50, G e n e r a l S e r v i c e s , Administration B u i l d i n g , U . B . C , V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V6T 1W5. A p p l i c a t i o n d e a d l i n e : July 1. T h e B . C . Indian A r t s a n d W e l f a r e Society Memorial Bursary A M O U N T : $100.00 A V A I L A B L E T O : B . C . Native Indians w h o are planning to e n ter one of the established c o l l e g e s , universities, t e c h n i c a l s c h o o l s or training centres in B . C . A P P L I C A T I O N S : The Honorary Secretary, B . C . Indian Arts and Welfare S o c i e t y , c / o P r o v i n c i a l M u s e u m , V i c t o r i a , B.C. S T I P U L A T I O N S : If no application is received from a student entering the first year of c o l l e g e , then the bursary may be awarded to a student enrolled in another year. Cal Callahan Memorial Bursary A M O U N T : $1,000.00 A V A I L A B L E T O : C h i l d r e n or legal w a r d s of p e r s o n s who derive their principal i n c o m e from the P i p e l i n e Industry and w h o s e employers are members of the P i p e Line C o n tractors A s s o c i a t i o n of C a n a d a , and w h o are b e g i n n i n g undergraduate studies in a full program leading to a degree or certificate in any field at a r e c o g n i z e d university or c o l l e g e in C a n a d a . B . C . Athletic A w a r d s A P P L I C A T I O N S : Pipeline Contractors Association Canada (Executive Office) Suite 400 698 Seymour Street V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V 6 B 3K7 Five Premier's Athletic A w a r d s of $1,000.00 e a c h and 25 B . C . Athletic A w a r d s of $500.00 e a c h are awarded annually D E A D L I N E : C o m p l e t e d application must be returned by September 30 along with a receipt or confirmation of enrolment. C l o s i n g date for applications: October 15. 22 of C a n a d i a n Army Welfare F u n d B u r s a r y Payment of tuition fees and the cost of text b o o k s will be provided to the recipient of this bursary. A p p l i c a n t s must be d e p e n d e n t s of former m e m b e r s of the C a n a d i a n Army (Regular) who served between Oct. 1, 1946 and J a n . 31, 1968. D e p e n d e n t s include natural, step, or legally adopted children. Students must be registered in a full-time program requiring not less than two years to complete. A p p l i c a t i o n s are available at: The M a n a g e r C a n a d i a n Army Welfare F u n d Veterans Affairs B u i l d i n g Lyon & Wellington Streets Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0P4 A p p l i c a t i o n s s h o u l d be submitted prior to July 1, of the app l i c a b l e year. Carllng O'Keefe Bursaries A M O U N T : $500.00 A V A I L A B L E T O : S o n s and daughters of members in g o o d standing in any union affiliated to, or chartered by, the C a n a d i a n L a b o u r C o n g r e s s , w h o will be attending their first year of post-secondary e d u c a t i o n in any approved institution of higher e d u c a t i o n . Deadline: July 1. Stipulations: E a c h application must be a c c o m p a n i e d by a letter from the Secretary of the L o d g e . A transcript must also be e n c l o s e d from the a c a d e m i c institution most recently attended. A P P L I C A T I O N S : C a r l i n g O ' K e e f e Breweries 79 St. C l a i r A v e n u e East Toronto, Ontario M4T 1M6 The F a i r b r i d g e S o c i e t y B u r s a r i e s A M O U N T : up to $500.00 A V A I L A B L E T O : C h i l d r e n of former members of the P r i n c e of W a l e s Fairbridge Farm S c h o o l , D u n c a n , B . C . , pursuing a full-time c o u r s e of a c a d e m i c or v o c a t i o n a l , studies at a r e c o g n i z e d institution of learning. A P P L I C A T I O N S : The Secretary/Treasurer O l d Fairbridgians' A s s o c i a t i o n c/o Hood, Joe & Chong 166 East P e n d e r St. Vancouver, B.C. The F e d e r a t i o n of T e l e p h o n e W o r k e r s of B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a Plant Division S c h o l a r s h i p A M O U N T : $500.00 (2 s c h o l a r s h i p s available) A V A I L A B L E T O : S o n s and daughters of members (or of d e c e a s e d members) p r o c e e d i n g in fall from G r a d e XII to a full program of studies at any one of the public universities or accredited regional c o l l e g e s . A P P L I C A T I O N S : S c h o l a r s h i p and Bursary Committee University of British C o l u m b i a 2075 Westbrook P l a c e V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V6T 1W5 tinuing studies (2nd year) at any British C o l u m b i a University or regional c o l l e g e , or at B.C.l.T., in a program leading to a degree or certificate in any field. A P P L I C A T I O N S : The S c h o l a r s h i p and Bursary C o m m i t t e e University of British C o l u m b i a 2075 Westbrook P l a c e V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V6T 1W5 Hockey C a n a d a Scholarships A M O U N T : $2,000.00 A V A I L A B L E T O : Students with outstanding h o c k e y ability who are C a n a d i a n citizens or have held landed immigrant status for at least one year, and who are attending any post-secondary institution w h i c h is an affiliated member of the A s s o c i a t i o n of Universities and C o l l e g e s of C a n a d a , and which has a viable h o c k e y program. A P P L I C A T I O N S : Secretary C o m m i t t e e on H i g h e r E d u c a t i o n Imperial Oil Ltd. 111 St. C l a i r A v e n u e West Toronto, Ontario S T I P U L A T I O N S : To qualify, a student must average 7 0 % or higher. H u g h C h r i s t i e M e m o r i a l B u r s a r y - $500 S E L E C T I O N C R I T E R I A : Students pursuing a c a r e e r in C o r r e c t i o n s , International Development, S o c i a l Work or Y M — Y W C A — must be registered in the Faculty of P h y s i c a l E d u c a t i o n , R e c r e a t i o n , S o c i a l Work, C r i m i n o l o g y or related fields. A p p l i c a t i o n s h o u l d be supported by a letter of reference(s). A p p l i c a t i o n must be in writing, giving full particulars, i.e. name, address, age, together with reason for applying to this bursary (in 500 words or less). S E N D A P P L I C A T I O N S To: Mr. G r a h a m Christie, C h a i r m a n "Hugh Christie M e m o r i a l B u r s a r y " Committee V a n c o u v e r Area Y . M . C . A . 6137 C a m b i e Street V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V5Z 3B2 C l o s i n g date for applications: September 30. J o h n B. M a c D o n a l d A l u m n i B u r s a r y Bursaries of $350.00 are available to students who will be entering the University of B . C . from a regional c o l l e g e . Several c a n d i d a t e s will be r e c o m m e n d e d by the P r i n c i p a l of the c o l l e g e . It is expected that at least one award will be available to e a c h c o l l e g e . W i n n e r s will be s e l e c t e d by a s p e c i a l A l u m n i S c r e e n i n g Committee representing the University of B . C . and the A l u m n i A s s o c i a t i o n . Further information and an application may be obtained from the University A w a r d s Committee, R o o m 50, G e n e r a l S e r v i c e s Administration B u i l d i n g , U . B . C , V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V6T 1W5. D e a d l i n e : July 1. The G r a n d L o d g e M a s o n i c B u r s a r i e s Navy L e a g u e of C a n a d a C o m m u n i t y College Entrance Scholarships A M O U N T : $200-$500 (several available) A V A I L A B L E T O : A l l deserving students, with preference to sons, daughters or legal w a r d s of active members of M a s o n i c L o d g e s in British C o l u m b i a beginning or c o n - A M O U N T : $100.00 (several available) A V A I L A B L E T O : Royal C a n a d i a n S e a C a d e t s , former C a d e t s , Navy L e a g u e Wrenettes, or former Wrenettes who are e n tering a community c o l l e g e program of one or more years 23 leading to a diploma. These s c h o l a r s h i p s are not available to students who have received Government S c h o l a r s h i p s or awards. A P P L I C A T I O N S : Submitted through the Navy L e a g u e B r a n c h responsible for the C o r p s of w h i c h the candidate was a member, to the responsible Division or to the National Office, the Navy L e a g u e of C a n a d a . D E A D L I N E : August 15. N a v a l Officers' Association British C o l u m b i a A M O U N T : $250 00 (several available) A V A I L A B L E T O : Students beginning or continuing studies at a B . C . university, regional c o l l e g e or B.C.I.T. with preference to present or former members of a cadet force, of a reserve force of the permanent force, or the s o n s and daughters of anyone who has served or is now serving in the British C o m m o n w e a l t h naval forces or Merchant Navies. APPLICATIONS From Naval Officers' A s s o c i a t i o n of British C o l u m b i a P.O. Box 823, Station " A " Vancouver, B.C. D E A D L I N E : October 15 North Vancouver Education Society (Dollars for S c h o l a r s ) L o a n F u n d A M O U N T : variable, usually tuition fees A V A I L A B L E T O : any student who has spent at least one year in any North V a n c o u v e r S c h o o l . Available any time during the year. A P P L I C A T I O N F O R M S : at the F i n a n c i a l A w a r d s Office, or write to the North V a n c o u v e r E d u c a t i o n Society, P. O. Box 86164, North V a n c o u v e r , B . C . L o a n s are interest free and are normally granted for tuition fees, in any c o u r s e , in any post-secondary institute. F i n a n c i a l need is the main requirement. Repayment is e x p e c t e d when the student goes to work, as the fund is a permanently revolving pool relying on repayments to help future students. Association (PACE) Bursaries for C o n t i n u i n g Education The amounts vary between $50-$200. T h e s e bursaries are available to part-time students who have financial need. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d provide e v i d e n c e of intent to pursue a continuing e d u c a t i o n plan or job upgrading goal. The bursaries are applied directly to tuition fees or c o u r s e materials. Apply in writing, one month prior to the start of c l a s s e s to: The Bursary Committee P a c i f i c A s s o c i a t i o n for C o n t i n u i n g Education c / o Douglas C o l l e g e , P.O. B o x 2503 New Westminster, B . C . V3L 5B2 24 Scholarship, Bursary and Loan Awards are available to students from the P e n d e r Harbour to Port M e l l o n area. Apply to: Mrs. B. R a n k i n Sunshine Coast Scholarship, Bursary & Loan C o m m i t t e e R.R. N o . 1 Sechelt, B.C. Parks C a n a d a Undergraduate Scholarships for R e g i s t e r e d Indians a n d Inuit P e o p l e of Scholarships Pacific Sunshine Coast Committee A M O U N T : $1,000.00 (10 available) A V A I L A B L E T O : Registered Indian or Inuit people for study in the areas of resource c o n s e r v a t i o n , natural s c i e n c e s , outdoor recreation, environmental studies, interpretation and extension, C a n a d i a n historical a r c h a e o l o g y and restoration architecture, who are attending a C a n a d i a n university or community c o l l e g e . A P P L I C A T I O N : S c h o l a r s h i p Secretary, P a r k s C a n a d a Department of Indian and Northern Affairs 400 Laurier A v e . W. Ottawa, Ontario K 1 A 0H4 P . E . O . Sisterhood Educational Loan Funds A M O U N T : $900.00 (renewable) A V A I L A B L E T O : W o m e n students in any year of a university course, and may be requested at any time, though freshmen must complete one term of work satisfactorily before making application. A P P L I C A T I O N S : Mrs. H a r o l d G . R o b i n s o n 860 R i c h m o n d R o a d Victoria, B . C . S T I P U L A T I O N S : L o a n s are made for periods up to five years. Interest at the rate of 4 % is to be paid annually, and the student is expected to begin payment of the principal as soon as she is out of university or e m p l o y e d . R e g u l a r Officer T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m A M O U N T : Student is s u b s i d i z e d for tuition fees and books and is paid a salary as an Officer cadet. A V A I L A B L E T O : Students interested in a military career. A P P L I C A T I O N S : C a n a d i a n F o r c e s Recruiting and S e l e c t i o n Unit 547 S e y m o u r Street V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V6B 3H6 S T I P U L A T I O N S : A student graduating in this program will be c o m m i s s i o n e d a lieutenant in the C a n a d i a n F o r c e s . F U R T H E R I N F O R M A T I O N : Military C a r e e r C o u n s e l l o r , C a n a d i a n F o r c e s Recruiting and S e l e c t i o n Unit. Merill C . R o b i n s o n Bursary Fund A M O U N T : Varies (several awards available) A V A I L A B L E T O : Blind students attending any university or c o l l e g e within the B . C . - Y u k o n Division (other than U.B.C.) who show e v i d e n c e of promise and ability. A P P L I C A T I O N S : To Merril C . R o b i n s o n Bursary Bursary C o m m i t t e e C a n a d i a n National Institute for the Blind 350 East 36th A v e n u e Vancouver, B.C. D E A D L I N E : July 31 S i m o n F r a s e r University R e g i o n a l College Entrance Scholarships A number of s c h o l a r s h i p s ranging in value from $175.00 to $300.00 will be available to students entering S i m o n Fraser University from regional junior or c o m m u n i t y c o l l e g e s . Students who have completed one or two years of study at s u c h institutions and have maintained a high a c a d e m i c average on a full c o u r s e load, and who have been r e c o m m e n d e d for the s c h o l a r s h i p by the c o l l e g e from w h i c h they are transferring, will be c o n s i d e r e d . Only students who are p r o c e e d i n g with further university studies within one year of completion of one or two years of study at the regional c o l l e g e level will be eligible. Students who are not enrolled in a full university course load will ordinarily not be eligible. Deadline is the first day of classes in September at Simon Fraser University. For further information and application, contact F i n a n c i a l A i d Office, S i m o n Fraser University, Burnaby, B . C . S o n s of Norway Foundation Scholarships A M O U N T : $600.00 (3 available) A V A I L A B L E T O : Students who have s h o w n interest in Norw e g i a n culture, history or l a n g u a g e who will study at any junior c o l l e g e , vocational institute, or university in B . C . A P P L I C A T I O N S : O n forms from the institute of your c h o i c e (indicating financial need and a c a d e m i c standing and all other pertinent information). S o n s of Norway Foundation in C a n a d a 6480 Grant Street Burnaby. B.C. V 5 B 2K6 D E A D L I N E : July 30 A s s o c i a t i o n For R e t a r d e d C h i l d r e n of British C o l u m b i a B u r s a r i e s A M O U N T : Varies (several awards available) A V A I L A B L E T O : Undergraduate or graduate students in e d u c a t i o n , medicine, nursing, p s y c h o l o g y and s o c i a l work who intend to pursue studies related to mental retardation. A P P L I C A T I O N S : A s s o c i a t i o n for Retarded C h i l d r e n of British C o l u m b i a R o o m 221, 119 West P e n d e r Street Vancouver, B.C. D E A D L I N E : July 15 and December 15. S T I P U L A T I O N S : C a n d i d a t e must be undertaking a full year, part-time or summer s c h o o l c o u r s e at a r e c o g n i z e d university or c o l l e g e . Vancouver Municipal/Regional Employees' Union A $300.00 bursary will be available to d e p e n d e n t s of m e m bers of the U n i o n . A P P L Y T O : J a c k Peterson 300 - 545 West 10th A v e n u e V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V5Z 1K9 The Women's Committee, V a n c o u v e r S y m p h o n y Society Scholarships A M O U N T : $1,000.00 (2 awards available) A V A I L A B L E T O : A d v a n c e d students of orchestral instruments including strings, w o o d w i n d s , brass, harp and p e r c u s s i o n (tympanic, batterie, mallet) between the a g e s of 14 and 24 who have been residents of B . C . for at least one year. A P P L I C A T I O N S : M r s . J . R. Ferris S c h o l a r s h i p Committee C h a i r m a n 1136 Seaport R o a d Richmond, B.C. 25 Community Education Community education activities offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e are an attempt to respond to e d u c a t i o n a l needs beyond those met by the c o m p r e h e n s i v e array of postsecondary credit c o u r s e s available through A c a d e m i c Studies and C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l training. Community education activities are not offered for c o l l e g e credit and cannot be used to satisfy the requirements of an Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a . They are further c h a r a c t e r i z e d by being generally shorter in length than regular credit c o u r s e s and more concentrated in their s c h e d u l e s of presentation. A d m i s s i o n to community education activities requires no formal pre-requisites. Other than o c c a s i o n a l provision for informal assignments, there are no requirements for evaluation, assessment and grading. For ease of identification, the program and service a c tivities w h i c h comprise the C o l l e g e ' s community education activities are grouped as follows: —working with the b u s i n e s s and professional communities in the public and private sector to identify short and longterm needs for training of employed persons. The C o l l e g e is prepared to d e s i g n and present c u s t o m - m a d e c o u r s e s a n d s e m i n a r s in s m a l l b u s i n e s s m a n a g e m e n t a n d operation, management and supervisory skill development, and continuing professional e d u c a t i o n . —programs of non-credit short c o u r s e s and w o r k s h o p s in the Creative and Liberal Arts and L e i s u r e / R e c r e a t i o n for personal enrichment and enjoyment. —work with other community a g e n c i e s (educational and s o c i a l s e r v i c e ) to d e s i g n c o m m u n i t y development educational programs w h i c h aim at making the community a better place to live, or assist individuals and groups to overcome e c o n o m i c and other o b s t a c l e s , or help people to solve community problems. S u c h programs may deal with family life e d u c a t i o n , volunteer skills training, training programs for personnel in s o c i a l service or other c o m munity a g e n c i e s , and community action programs. —the C o l l e g e will assist in organization of public meetings, seminars and other presentations on subjects of current community c o n c e r n and interest. Film series, c o n c e r t s and other cultural events are presented where s u c h events c a n complement other programs in the community. Community non-profit groups are invited to use the C o l l e g e facilities when available for s p e c i a l meetings or events. — p u b l i c and private organizations are invited to use the serv i c e s and facilities of the C o l l e g e ' s C o n f e r e n c e Centre to arrange c o n f e r e n c e activities for sharing information on current business concerns, organizational and t e c h n o l o g i c a l c h a n g e , and s o c i a l issues. The C o l l e g e c a n provide program design and administrative services as well as facilities for c o n f e r e n c e s . In support of these activities, the services of professional c o u n s e l l o r s are available to assist in e d u c a t i o n a l planning, career and vocational testing, and to provide g u i d a n c e in solving related personal problems. T h e s e services are available by appointment w h i c h may be made by calling 9861911, local 298. The C o l l e g e ' s community e d u c a t i o n activities are a d vertised by means of brochures distributed periodically throughout the C o l l e g e region, as well as through newspaper advertising and directed mail. C o m m u n i t y members may obtain information on current community education offerings by c a l l i n g 986-1911, local 321. 26 Counselling Group Program Faculty B a g s h a w , Ft.' B . C o m m . (Brit. Col.), M . A . (Colorado), M . E d . (Brit. Col.) J o n e s , D., B.A. (Dalhousie), M.A. (Dalhousie) M a h , J . G . , B.A. (Brit. Col.), B.S.W. (Brit. Col.), M.S.W. (Toronto) M a n s f i e l d , L , B.A. (Brit. Col.), B.S.W. (Brit. Col.), M.S.W. (Brit. Col.) P e n n , M.H., B.A. (Alta.), M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) S c h m i d t , L.L., B . E d . (Alta.), M . E d . (Alta.), P h . D . (Alta.) Siegrist, B . G . , M.B.A. (Simon Fraser) In the c o u r s e , T.A. will be utilized to assist participants to increase effective c o m m u n i c a t i o n between themselves a n d others. G r o u p members will, through sharing with o n e another, be able to gain information regarding the verbal a n d non-verbal m e s s a g e s they are s e n d i n g , a n d how e a c h c a n " t a k e c h a r g e " of his/her o w n life. Enrolment will be limited. A n interview with M . P e n n is necessary. C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m 013 Sexuality W o r k s h o p (F,S) (0,0,2) C o u n s e l l i n g a n d Learning A s s i s t a n c e offer non-credit G r o u p P r o g r a m s as a service to students and the community without c h a r g e . The g o a l s of these programs are to provide p e o p l e with an opportunity to e x p a n d s e l f - a w a r e n e s s , pers o n a l and career options. The programs c o m b i n e elements of personal development a n d skills a c q u i s i t i o n . S o m e programs have limited enrolment. Registration i n formation may be gained from the C o u n s e l l i n g R e c e p t i o n d e s k or the G r o u p Programs brochure. A short term w o r k s h o p on a fascinating a n d beautiful part of life will be offered for students; the program will e m p h a s i z e the inter-personal aspect of sexual relationships. The c o m m e r c i a l i z a t i o n of sex in o u r culture a n d the w o r s h i p of sensuality will be c o n s i d e r e d . Participation of the group in meaningful content will be e n c o u r a g e d . L o o k for posters a n n o u n c i n g time a n d place or c o n t a c t the c o u n s e l l i n g r e c e p tion desk. C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m 017 W o m e n O n T h e M o v e (F,S,) (0,0,2) C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m 010 D e v e l o p i n g A C a r e e r ( F , S ) (0,0,2) A ten week group program devoted to individual career d e c i s i o n m a k i n g . The first half will assist students in a n evaluation of life goals a n d d e c i s i o n s about desirable life styles. The s e c o n d half will c o n c e n t r a t e on c h o i c e of career paths to realize the c h o s e n lifestyles. T h i s will include information gathering, career strategies, alternative c a r e e r s and career plan. The group will respond to the c o n c e r n s of students in a relatively unstructured format. The program may be taken separately, but w o u l d be e s p e c i a l l y beneficial if taken concurrently with the seminar on D e v e l o p i n g P e r s o n a l Potential. C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m 011 V a l u e s a n d Lifestyles (S) (0,0,2) Find out how other w o m e n h a n d l e returning to c o l l e g e in this d i s c u s s i o n group. T h i s is for women w h o want to meet others like themselves, in search of new g o a l s , ideas a n d plans for their future. This is an informal group d e s i g n e d for w o m e n w h o will enjoy sharing their support a n d s u c c e s s e s with o n e another. C o - s p o n s o r e d with W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e . C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m 018 S e i f - D l s c o v e r y ( F , S ) (0,0,2) T h r o u g h a series of structured e x e r c i s e s a n d small group d i s c u s s i o n s , this program will provide a setting where participants c a n explore those factors w h i c h have been significant in their self-development. We will be investigating s u c h areas as formative influences in c h i l d h o o d , personal c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , attitudes to self and others, and interpersonal roles. This program is d e s i g n e d to give participants a better understanding of themselves a n d their relationships with others. T h i s program will explore issues that affect our perspective on life, s u c h as values, formation a n d purpose and m e a n i n g of life. The goal of the program is to raise our a w a r e n e s s of the world that " t e n d s to s q u e e z e us into its m o l d . " A s e c o n d purpose is in c o n s e q u e n c e from the first . . . " t o allow for renewal of ourselves from within." T o p i c s s u c h as: technology, h o p e l e s s n e s s , freedom, our experience of evil, survival of personal life, the will to meaning and the valuing p r o c e s s will be d i s c u s s e d . C o u n s e l l i n g G r o u p P r o g r a m 012 D e v e l o p i n g A W i n n i n g Lifestyle - A S m a l l G r o u p E x p e r i e n c e E m p l o y i n g T r a n s a c t i o n a l A n a l y s i s (F,S) (0,0,2) Transactional A n a l y s i s is a method for improving u n derstanding of human relationships d e v e l o p e d by Dr. Eric Berne, author of G a m e s P e o p l e Play. 27 Learning Assistance Faculty A l d e r s o n , S.A., B.A. (Antioch), M.A. (Ohio State), E n g l i s h / Learning A s s i s t a n c e F a h l m a n , M.L., B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M.A. (Toronto), E n g l i s h / Learning A s s i s t a n c e Irvine, L., B.A. (U. of W p g ) , M.A. (Simon Fraser), Learning Assistance V a n Norman, D.L., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Simon Fraser), Learning A s s i s t a n c e Wright, D., B.S. (U. of Idaho), M.S. (Brigham Y o u n g ) , P h . D . (Arizona), Learning A s s i s t a n c e Learning Assistance Programs — Lynnmour The Learning A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e offers daytime and evening w o r k s h o p s and c o u r s e s to c o l l e g e students and community members. For s p e c i f i c times and dates, please c h e c k the L.A.C. B r o c h u r e . Learning Assistance Program 010 Learning and Study Skills Workshops (F,S,SU) (0,0,2) E a c h w o r k s h o p series c o n s i s t s of six hours of instruction and d i s c u s s i o n . Learning and Study S k i l l s W o r k s h o p topics include time management, note-taking, d i s c u s s i o n skills, concentration building, examination t e c h n i q u e s and essay writing. Learning Assistance Program 011 R e a d i n g Improvement ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) Through a series of intensive reading w o r k s h o p s , students learn and practice essential reading t e c h n i q u e s . T h e s e w o r k s h o p s are d e s i g n e d to increase reading s p e e d and c o m prehension. S p e c i a l i n - c l a s s w o r k s h o p s will be held at the request of faculty. Faculty are a s k e d to book prior to the beginning of term as these w o r k s h o p s are limited. The Learning A s s i s t a n c e Centre is open from 9:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.. M o n d a y to Friday. For more information and/or w o r k s h o p application forms visit the Centre on the South C a m p u s in A110 or c a l l 986-1911, local 353 or 356 (Also inquire about Learning A s s i s t a n c e Centre C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n c o - s p o n s o r e d c o u r s e s , Effective S p e e d R e a d i n g for B u s i n e s s and Professional people and V o c a b u l a r y E x pansion.) 28 Learning Assistance Program 012 V o c a b u l a r y Development ( F . S . S U ) (0,0,2) In the V o c a b u l a r y Development w o r k s h o p , students will acquire a methodology for systematically d e v e l o p i n g an effective vocabulary. A s w e l l , efforts will be made to provide students with some of the terminology appropriate to their fields of study. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 013 S p e l l i n g Improvement ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,1.5) The Spelling Improvement w o r k s h o p series will assist students in analyzing the strengths a n d w e a k n e s s e s of their spelling ability. There will be s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of c o m m o n error patterns, mnemonic strategies a n d traditional spelling rules. Students will receive a high degree of individual attention and will have a c c e s s to a taped spelling program. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 010 Learning and Study Skills Workshops (F.S.SU) (0,0,2) E a c h w o r k s h o p series c o n s i s t s of six hours of instruction and d i s c u s s i o n , Learning a n d Study S k i l l s W o r k s h o p topics i n c l u d e time management, note-taking, d i s c u s s i o n skills, concentration building, examination t e c h n i q u e s a n d essay writing. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 014 C o n c e p t u a l B l o c k b u s t i n g ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) Learning Assistance P r o g r a m 011 Reading Workshops ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) In these w o r k s h o p s , students will practice the strategies of defining a n d solving problems. Participants will " b l o c k b u s t " ideas and solve problems in groups to help define and clarify the thinking p r o c e s s e s . Creative thinking will be e n c o u r a g e d . Through a series of intensive reading w o r k s h o p s , students learn a n d practice essential reading t e c h n i q u e s . T h e s e w o r k s h o p s are designed to increase reading s p e e d and c o m prehension. Learning Assistance P r o g r a m 015 L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 012 Writing the C o l l e g e E s s a y ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) V o c a b u l a r y Development ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) In this workshop series, students will receive a brief i n troduction to the a p p r o a c h , format a n d method of the research paper. A library orientation, a note-taking method, and topic development will be d i s c u s s e d . In the V o c a b u l a r y Development w o r k s h o p , students will acquire a methodology for systematically d e v e l o p i n g an effective vocabulary. A s w e l l , efforts will be made to provide students with s o m e of the terminology appropriate to their fields of study. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 016 C o m m u n i c a t i o n Skills ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) The main e m p h a s i s will be on d e v e l o p i n g organization a n d c o n c i s e n e s s in oral e x p r e s s i o n . There will also be s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n . L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 017 T h i n k i n g with Clarity ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) The main e m p h a s i s of this w o r k s h o p will be on providing an introduction to logical thinking. Learning Assistance P r o g r a m 201 R e a d i n g D y n a m i c s ( F , S , S U ) (1.5,0, .5) This c o u r s e aims to improve reading s p e e d a n d c o m p r e h e n s i o n . T h e learning a n d practising of basic reading t e c h n i q u e s assists students in b e c o m i n g versatile, effective readers. Learning Assistance Centre — Squamish The Learning A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m provides a resourc ( base for those who seek to i n c r e a s e their learning efficiency. The Learning A s s i s t a n c e Centre h o u s e s materials on a wide variety of learning a n d t e a c h i n g practices. For example, information on note-taking, time management, a n d exam writing is available in handout form. In addition, students are w e l c o m e to use the library materials a n d audio-visual programs. Electric typewriters, cassette recorders a n d reading equipment are available for u s e in the centre. Students with learning difficulties are invited to talk over their c o n c e r n s with Learning A s s i s t a n c e Faculty during dropin hours. C o l l e g e and community members may also wish to participate in small group w o r k s h o p s . T i m e s a n d dates for these w o r k s h o p are published in the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e Centre Brochure. For more information and/or w o r k s h o p application forms, visit the Centre at 38038 C l e v e l a n d Ave., or c a l l 892-5322. 29 A c a d e m i c Studies c 31 Academic Studies / University Transfer A d a d e m i c transfer c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e provide the student with a variety of a c a d e m i c options within the framework of a two-year, c o m p r e h e n s i v e c o l l e g e . Students transferring to a university c a n select full programs of study a c c e p t a b l e for equivalency to c o u r s e s in the first two years of university (see note on C o u n s e l l i n g ) . Students who desire to take part-time a c a d e m i c studies or who are interested in a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s at the first or s e c o n d year level without the intention of continuing to upper-level study c a n select from a range of c o u r s e s in various d i s c i p l i n e s . Students in need of extra help in key areas of a c a d e m i c study c a n select c o u r s e s aimed at basic literacy (see notes on English placement exam and Math R e s o u r c e Centre.) Students interested in s p e c i a l fields of study s u c h as W o m e n ' s Studies, L a b o u r Studies, interdisciplinary studies or self-paced learning c a n select from innovative programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). Mature students, and people who have not attended c o l l e g e previously or for many years, are urged to enrol in any of these c o u r s e s and, in fact, form a large and s u c c e s s f u l portion of the a c a d e m i c student body. The f o c u s of a c a d e m i c instruction at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is on disciplinary and inter-disciplinary study of the highest int e l l e c t u a l c a l i b r e . T h e C o l l e g e c a r e f u l l y reviews its curriculum and a p p r o a c h e s to ensure a c a d e m i c currency and a c c e p t a b l e university equivalency. Associate in Arts and Science Diploma A student who has c o m p l e t e d the requirements of any fourterm C o l l e g e program may receive an A s s o c i a t e in Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma, provided s/he has fulfilled the following conditions: Adademic Studies a) C o m p l e t e d 60 credits, at least 30 of w h i c h must be c o m pleted at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . b) Obtained a ^ 0 0 Grade Point A v e r a g e or better. c) O b t a i n e d at least 45 credit hours from the following s u b ject areas, including at least 6 credit hours in E n g l i s h (100 level or better), and at least 6 credit hours from s u b jects listed in A : A Biology Chemistry Geography Geology Mathematics Physics A significant, basic library collection is available as are full media reference services to complement the c o u r s e s of study. A c o u n s e l l i n g and a d m i s s i o n s placement staff assists students in selecting the best program of studies. The final responsibility for c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n , however, rests with the student. B Anthropology Art Economics English Fine Arts French Geography Geology German History Mathematics Music Philosophy Political S c i e n c e Psychology Religious Studies Sociology Spanish Theatre Women's Studies Counselling A l l a c a d e m i c students are advised to see the A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r or a C o u n s e l l o r to plan their c o u r s e s of study. Students s h o u l d consult the G u i d a n c e information and the University transfer guide in this c a l e n d a r . English Placement Test T h o s e students who wish to enrol in E n g l i s h , Humanities G e n e r a l or G e n e r a l Studies c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B . C . Government E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students who have not taken the B . C . Government E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test are required to take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g Examination before registering for any E n g l i s h , Humanities G e n e r a l or G e n e r a l Studies course. S c h e d u l e s of English S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be posted in the reception area, Student Info Centre and the Humanities Division. English Tutorial Room (B166) This room is reserved on a permanent b a s i s to provide a drop-in w o r k s h o p for students requiring a s s i s t a n c e with their writing problems. Students may avail themselves of this service by signing the form posted outside the tutorial room. This is not a c o u r s e . 32 Mathematics Resource C e n t r e (NF108) This centre is e q u i p p e d with learning aids, d i a g n o s t i c tests, calculators and reference textbooks. Students taking mathematics c o u r s e s are e n c o u r a t e d to make use of this room to study mathematics, and to seek aid from the faculty member on duty. Self-study programs are available for students wishing to upgrade their mathematics ability through the Math 12 level. Refer to the c o u r s e descriptions of M a t h e m a t i c s 009 , 010, 011, 012 and consult with a M a t h e m a t i c s instructor for further information. Transfer To and From Other Institutions The A c a d e m i c Division takes seriously its responsibility to m a i n t a i n transferability with other p o s t - s e c o n d a r y i n stitutions. To this e n d , meetings are held with other institutions to ensure that current practice is c o m m o n l y a c c e p t a b l e and that a full transfer p a c k a g e c a n be articulated. C h a n g e s in programs, new c o u r s e s or new c o u r s e numberings are carefully c o m p a r e d between institutions and this C o l l e g e strives to offer the most c o m p l e t e two year p a c k a g e p o s s i b l e within budget and facility restraints. There is agreement a m o n g all public B . C . C o l l e g e s to a c cept e a c h other's credits upon transfer, if a p p l i c a b l e to a program given in the admitting c o l l e g e , and given suitable e q u i v a l e n c y . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual c o u r s e credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on a d m i s s i o n for a c c e p t a b l e work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits w h i c h are required at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for a certificate or d i p l o m a . Students wishing transfer credit s h o u l d present suitable d o c u m e n tation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student R e c o r d . Full information on transfer of specific c o u r s e s is available from the A d m i s s i o n s Advisor, C o u n s e l l o r s and in the pertinent Instructional Division. Transfer information a c c u r a t e to the time of printing is to be found in a s p e c i a l s e c t i o n b e g i n n i n g on p a g e 129 of this C a l e n d a r . Students are urged to read this s e c t i o n when establishing their programs of study. Academic Course Descriptions Full descriptions of all a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s c a n be found in the alphabetical listings following. Students are urged to read carefully the general d i s c i p l i n e information included in e a c h s u c h s e c t i o n . It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the s p e c i a l information needed to select academic courses. W o m e n ' s Studies P r o g r a m A W o m e n ' s Studies P r o g r a m , c o n s i s t i n g of a variety of transfer credit, c o l l e g e credit and credit-free c o u r s e s , has been developed at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . The W o m e n ' s Studies Committee, which is advisory to all s e g m e n t s of the W o m e n ' s Studies Program, is made up of representatives from the c o l l e g e faculty, staff, student body and the community. In addition to the W o m e n ' s Studies C o l l e g e credit and transfer credit c o u r s e s , there are a c a d e m i c and career courses in other disciplines of s p e c i a l interest to w o m e n . A brochure will be available e a c h term listing additional short, credit-free c o u r s e s , w o r k s h o p s , and other p r e s e n tations of s p e c i a l interest to women in the c o l l e g e and the community. Women's Resource Centre The W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e Centre provides a variety of programs available to students, staff, faculty and other members of the community. T h e s e include non-credit c o u r s e s , a C o m m u n i t y R e s o u r c e File for the North S h o r e , library materials, an o m b u d s service, c u s t o m - d e s i g n e d non-credit c o u r s e s , o n - c a m p u s w o r k s h o p s , and, with the C o u n s e l l i n g Division, drop-in c o u n s e l l i n g , testing, and life-planning. In addition to these activities, the W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n tre offers a lounge area where persons may meet with others or sit and read. For further information, contact M a r s h a Trew, W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e Centre, 986-1911, local 350, or drop in. Labour Studies The L a b o u r Studies Program is d e s i g n e d to serve the needs of trade-union organizations and workers in general. C o l l e g e students and members of the C o l l e g e community will also find the c o u r s e s of benefit. A Program Advisory Committee is established w h i c h gives on-going advice and direction on c o u r s e content, offerings, timetable, location of c o u r s e s and instruction. The Program offers both credit and non-credit instruction, as well as s p e c i a l seminars and workdays. For information, obtain the Labour Studies B r o c h u r e or c a l l Eduard Lavalle, 986-1911 (Local 334), or drop in to the S o c i a l S c i e n c e s Division. Self P a c e d L e a r n i n g (SPL) In k e e p i n g with the C o l l e g e ' s policy for the development of alternative instructional m o d e s , it is now possible for the student to pursue his studies in first year Political S c i e n c e and first year Chemistry on a self-paced time line. Refresher c o u r s e s in Mathematics up to the G r a d e 12 level are also available in this self study format. T h e s e p a c k a g e d c o u r s e s , prepared for home study with the aid of cassette tapes, manuals, slides and film loops, are d e s i g n e d to offer students w h o are unable to maintain regular attendance at the Lynnmour C a m p u s or a satellite centre the opportunity to pursue c o l l e g e c o u r s e s . They are also available to students who are attending any c o l l e g e centre, providing these students with a viable alternative to the usual lecture/tutorial instructional format. Focus Canada The S o c i a l S c i e n c e s / H u m a n i t i e s will offer the following two programs to students who wish to concentrate their studies on C a n a d i a n content c o u r s e s . All c o u r s e s hold full transfer credit within the appropriate d i s c i p l i n e , and transfer into the C a n a d i a n Studies Program at S . F . U . No prerequisites are required. Program I FALL G e o g r a p h y 106 History 203 B.C. Studies SPRING Anthropology 121 G e o g r a p h y 106 Political S c i e n c e 202 S o c i o l o g y 201 E n g l i s h 203 33 Program II FALL Anthropology 204 E n g l i s h 202 F r e n c h 160/161 F r e n c h 260/261 G e o g r a p h y 220 History 110 Q u e b e c Studies 100 S o c i o l o g y 200 Canadian Studies Students planning to pursue studies in E c o n o m i c s at U . B . C . must take M a t h 110. For H o n o r s E c o n o m i c s U . B . C . also requires Math 111; S . F . U . requires M a t h 108. SPRING E c o n o m i c s 101 E n g l i s h 203 F r e n c h 160/161 French 260/261 G e o g r a p h y 220 History 111 Q u e b e c Studies 101 W o m e n ' s Studies 104 P l e a s e c h e c k the pre-requisites given in the course description. B. Science Students Students transferring to a professional s c h o o l at U . B . C . s h o u l d consult the chart on page 35. Students transferring to the Faculty of S c i e n c e at a university s h o u l d take the following: C o u r s e descriptions for the above are all listed in their respective d i s c i p l i n e s within this calendar. Students may wish to c h o o s e electives in related subjects in Humanities and Natural S c i e n c e s . For further information, contact faculty in the appropriate division. A s well as these p a c k a g e s of c o u r s e s , it is p o s s i b l e to arrange timetables of other, related c o u r s e s . Students s h o u l d see a C o u n s e l l o r and mention the s p e c i a l interest they wish to emphasize. S o m e e x a m p l e s include: Protest in the Twentieth Century Religious expressions in various d i s c i p l i n e s P h i l o s o p h y and the P h i l o s o p h y of S c i e n c e E n v i r o n m e n t a l i s t s A Holistic i) Biological Sciences (including Biochemistry) First Year B i o l o g y 110/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h e m a t i c s 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) Second Year A c o m p l e t e selection of s e c o n d year c o u r s e s w h i c h meet the requirements of all three B . C . universities is available. C o n s u l t the B i o l o g y Department for the s p e c i f i c requirements to transfer into third year at the university of your c h o i c e . S o c i a l investigations from a labour viewpoint The position of women in society The position of e t h n i c / r e l i g i o u s / s e x u a l minorities T h e New individual Approach A new, interdisciplinary program is being established w h i c h will examine issues of the twentieth century e n vironment and the effect of our various environments on twentieth century people. The program will include credit and non-credit c o m p o n e n t s a n d will centre on various issues of c o m m o n c o n c e r n within our p h y s i c a l , spiritual, moral and a e s t h e t i c e n v i r o n m e n t s . C o u r s e s will e x a m i n e the methodology of scientific investigation of these topics and the topics themselves from various d i s c i p l i n e viewpoints. The program will eventually b e c o m e a d i p l o m a option and is being simultaneously d e s i g n e d to fit into regular B . S c . and B.A. programs of study. Students in 1979/80 c a n participate in non-credit offerings and related credit offerings already listed in this calendar, (e.g. G e o g r a p h y . Biology, Philosophy, E n g l i s h , C o m p u t e r M a t h , S o c i o l o g y ) . A s the program is in p l a n n i n g , final details may differ. For more information, speak to a C o u n s e l l o r or contact Biology, G e o g r a p h y or Humanities. ii) Chemistry First Year Chemistry 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h e m a t i c s 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) Elective (6 credits) Second Year Chemistry 200/201 Chemistry 204/205 (Transfers to U.B.C. consult a faculty member.) P h y s i c s 200/201 P h y s i c s 210/211 M a t h e m a t i c s 230, 231 or 235 (depending upon university — c o n s u l t a faculty member) M a t h e m a t i c s 200 Elective S c i e n c e Elective from M a t h e m a t i c s , P h y s i c s ( r e c o m m e n d e d Mathematics 235) iii) G e o l o g i c a l Geochemistry) Sciences (including Geophysics, First Year Only S c i e n c e : G e n e r a l Information A. Non-Science Students Students planning to continue studies at a university are advised to c o n s i d e r the following c o u r s e s to fulfill their S c i e n c e requirement: B i o l o g y 104, 105, (Note: Transfer credit for c o u r s e s is limited to n o n - s c i e n c e students) Chemistry 104, 105 G e o l o g y 110, 111 G e o g r a p h y 112, 114 M a t h e m a t i c s 100, 101, 102. 103, 104, 108 P h y s i c s 104, 105 34 G e o l o g y 110/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h e m a t i c s 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) iv) Mathematics First Year M a t h e m a t i c s 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits) Elective (12 credits)* (Mathematics 101, 102, 103 bound students.) are r e c o m m e n d e d for S.F.U. ' I n order to maintain options for other majors it is a d v i s a b l e to c o n s u l t c a l e n d a r s for requirements (e.g. to maintain P h y s i c s or Chemistry as p o s s i b l e alternatives. P h y s i c s 110/111, Chemistry 110/111 s h o u l d be taken). Second Year Mathematics Mathematics Mathematics Mathematics Electives v) 200 230/231 215 235 P h y s i c s 220/221 M a t h e m a t i c s 200 M a t h e m a t i c s 230 M a t h e m a t i c s 235 N o n - s c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) S c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) Students interested in H o n o u r s P h y s i c s s h o u l d consult P h y s i c s instructors. vi) Other Programs or Combinations of Programs: C o n s u l t Natural S c i e n c e Division for c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n , particularly with regard to S e c o n d Year c h o i c e s . Physics First Year Lab/Course Relationship P h y s i c s 110/111 or 108/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h e m a t i c s 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits) - see c o u r s e description N o n - s c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) Many c o u r s e s require that students complete a lab and/or tutorial. Students s h o u l d ensure that they are aware of any s u c h lab requirement and that their timetables include both lab and lecture hours. Students s h o u l d note that it is n e c e s s a r y to pass the lab in order to pass the c o u r s e . Second Year P h y s i c s 200/201 P h y s i c s 210/211 Science Transfer Requirements—U.B.C. X X X ENGINEERING X X X COMPUTING SCIENCE X X X GEOLOGY, GEOPHYSICS X X X PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY X X X X X X X P R E - M E D A N D P R E - D E N T I S T R Y a. AGRICULTURE a. X FORESTRY, PHARMACY HOME ECONOMICS X a. X N U T R I T I O N and DIETETICS X GENERAL X X X X c. X b. X X DENTAL HYGIENE b„ c. X X b. c. X X REHAB MEDICINE a. X P h y s i c s 104, 105 may be taken instead but U.B.C. may require P h 135 (U.B.C.) to be taken in transfer year. W h e n possible, students are e n c o u r a g e d to take the higher level c o u r s e s . W h e n Chemistry 104, 105 is required, Chemistry 110, 111 is not only a c c e p t a b l e , it is preferred. Pre-dental hygiene students must also take two semesters of psychology. 35 Anthropology Instructional Courses Faculty: Anthropology 200 Intermediate S o c i a l Anthropology B e r d i c h e w s k y . B.. P h . D . (Madrid) L i n d , K.. B.A. (U.B.C.) M.A. (U.B.C.) Students who intend to major or minor in Anthropology s h o u l d take both Anthropology 120 and 121 if they will be attending the University of British C o l u m b i a , S i m o n Fraser University or University of Victoria. Anthropology 200. 202 and 204 receive u n a s s i g n e d Anthropology credit at the above universities. A n t h r o p o l o g y / W o m e n ' s Studies 122 receives u n a s s i g n e d Anthropology credit at U . B . C . a n d S F U . Anthropology 120 Introduction to S o c i a l Anthropology ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A n examination of anthropological c o n c e p t s and theories of culture, as well as the analysis of cultural institutions s u c h as kinship, e c o n o m i c s , religion a n d politics. Anthropology 122 A study of the relations between ethnic g r o u p s including an examination of how ethnic groups c o m e to be defined, how they are maintained, stereotyping, a n d how these p r o c e s s e s interrelate with other s o c i a l variables s u c h as e c o n o m i c s , education, violence and the family. T h e f o c u s will usually be on B . C . Students will be e n g a g e d in s o m e primary research. Not offered in 1979/80. 123 Introduction to A r c h a e o l o g y a n d the Prehistoric (S) (3.1,1) Anthropology Past A survey of the g o a l s of archaeology, its theoretical framework, and the method and techniques to treat material. Relationship with other d i s c i p l i n e s , both in s o c i a l and natural s c i e n c e s . Reconstruction and interpretation of the prehistoric past. Illustrated with examples. Students will have the o p portunity to visit a r c h a e o l o g i c a l c o l l e c t i o n s a n d laboratories and they will participate in group laboratory s e s s i o n s . 36 The study of people, culture, environment. T h e m e s will inc l u d e the a r c h a e o l o g i c a l r e c a r d ; e c o l o g y or early food p r o d u c t i o n ; a d a p t i v e s t r a t e g i e s of h u n t e r s / g a t h e r e r s , pastoralists. and peasants: current e c o l o g i c a l c o n c e r n s from an anthropological perspective. (F) (3,0,1) S e e W o m e n ' s Studies 122 (W.S. 122) Anthropology A study of the s o c i a l structure and organization of various cultures of the world. E m p h a s i s on the d y n a m i c s of culture, the cross-cultural a p p r o a c h , the theoretical issues in a n thropology. F o c u s for 1979/80 - Latin A m e r i c a . A n t h r o p o l o g y 204 E t h n i c R e l a t i o n s (F) (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Anthropology 120 or by written permission of the instructor. W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y Pre-requisite: Anthropology 120 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n t h r o p o l o g y 202 Introduction to C u l t u r a l E c o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) A survey of the discipline to include the study of human evolution and our place a m o n g the primates; structure and organization of society a n d the individual and society. E m phasis will be p l a c e d on the comparative study of s o c i a l institutions of non-Western cultures. Anthropology 121 Introduction to S o c i a l Anthropology (F) (3,0,1) 249 Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in A n t h r o p o l o g y / G e o g r a p h y ( S U ) (3 or 6) Pre-requisite: Anthropology 120 or by written permission of the instructor. A n interdisciplinary c o u r s e to c o n s i d e r in depth a particular geographic area a n d its people. C o m p a r a t i v e institutions, cultural e c o l o g y , the l a n d s c a p e , methods of o b servation and study. Students a n d instructors study in the field: e a c h year will alternate between British C o l u m b i a / C a n a d a and another country. Not offered in 1979/80. Biology Courses Instructional F a c u l t y : C a m f i e l d , R.G., B . S c . (Monash), P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) Fitz-Earle, M., B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c . (Toronto), P h . D . (Toronto), C o o r d i n a t o r of B i o l o g y G i b s o n , W . G . , B.A. (Sask.), Dipl. E d . (Sask.), Dipl. E d . (Calgary), P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) Flicker, N.A., B.A. (Calif.), M . S c . (Brit. Col.), P h . D . (Brit. Col.) W a d e , L.K., B . S c . (Brit. Col.), M . S c . (Brit. Col.), P h . D . (A.N.U.) Laboratory S u p e r v i s o r s and Technician: C r a n e , S., B . S c . (Brit. Col.), Laboratory Supervisor. M c D o n e l l , L , B.H.E. (Brit. Col.), Laboratory Supervisor. S a n d e r s o n , C , B . S c . (Durham), Laboratory Supervisor. W i l l i a m s o n , B., Dipl. T e c h . (B.C.l.T.), Laboratory T e c h n i c i a n . The standard introductory biology c o u r s e for students w h o plan to take further c o u r s e s in this area. Major topics will inc l u d e the origin of life: c e l l structure and function; the types of c e l l d i v i s i o n : introductory g e n e t i c s ; a n d the p r o c e s s of development. B i o l o g y 111 Introductory B i o l o g y (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: B i o l o g y 110. A continuation of B i o l o g y 110 w h i c h further d e v e l o p s the d i s c u s s i o n of basic b i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s including b i o l o g i c a l systems, evolution and e c o l o g y . B i o l o g y 200 Genetics (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: B i o l o g y 110 and 111; however. B i o l o g y 214 is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Biology Department offers a variety of c o u r s e s . First year students may take the B i o l o g y 104/105 series to meet the s c i e n c e requirements for Arts students. T h o s e planning to major in B i o l o g y or s o m e other Life S c i e n c e (Dentistry, M e d i c i n e , Agriculture, Home E c o n o m i c s , etc.) s h o u l d enrol in B i o l o g y 110/111. A pre-requisite waiver e x a m i n a t i o n for B i o l o g y 110/111 is held during the first week of c l a s s e s in September. T h o s e p a s s i n g this exam receive a pre-requisite waiver for B i o l o g y 110/111, enabling them to register directly in s e c o n d year biology c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . N o credit, however, is given for Biology 110/111. T h e pre-requisite waiver exam is not intended for those students w h o must have credit in first year biology for their subsequent e d u c a t i o n a l g o a l s . A c o m p l e t e selection of s e c o n d year c o u r s e s is available w h i c h meet the requirements of all three B . C . universities. (Consult the Biology Department for s p e c i f i c c o u r s e requirements for third year transfer.) A l l Biology c o u r s e s require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips unless otherwise stated. There is a lab fee for these c o u r s e s . S o m e c o u r s e s also have extended field trips. A study of the principles of inheritance, M e n d e l i a n and n o n - M e n d e l i a n ; the c h e m i c a l nature of the g e n e , g e n e structure and function, gene duplication in bacteria and viruses as well as s o m e study of higher o r g a n i s m s including m a n . There is no laboratory with this c o u r s e . B i o l o g y 204 E c o l o g y I (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 105 or 111. ' The first term of an introductory c o u r s e in general e c o l o g y , stressing biotic-environmental relationships at the e c o s y s t e m level; c o n c e p t of the e c o s y s t e m , its c o m p o n e n t s a n d d y n a m i c s , energy flow in e c o s y s t e m s , nutrient c y c l i n g , b i o g e o c l i m a t i c z o n e s with e m p h a s i s on British C o l u m b i a , vegetation analysis. E m p h a s i s is on principles of plant e c o l o g y a n d on problems in this field. C o u r s e i n c l u d e s a 2day field trip to M a n n i n g Park a n d the Southern O k a n a g a n Valley. B i o l o g y 205 E c o l o g y II (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: B i o l o g y 204. B i o l o g y 104 H u m a n B i o l o g y (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: N o n e . A continuation of Biology 204, with e m p h a s i s on principles and problems of animal e c o l o g y . Included are s e l e c t e d n o n British C o l u m b i a n e c o s y s t e m s ; soils: population d y n a m i c s ; the human population e x p l o s i o n : e c o l o g i c a l a s p e c t s of animal behaviour. C o u r s e includes a 3-day field trip to the Tofino area. V a n c o u v e r Island. The first semester of a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d as a laboratory s c i e n c e elective for students w h o d o not plan to take further courses in the biological s c i e n c e s . B a s i c principles of human biology will be presented a n d the impact of the environment upon humans will be evaluated. Major topics will include human physiology, human g e n e t i c s a n d disorders of both. M o r p h o l o g y of N o n - V a s c u l a r B i o l o g y 105 Pre-requisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. E n v i r o n m e n t a l Biology (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: None. The s e c o n d semester of a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d as a laboratory • s c i e n c e elective for students who d o not plan to take further c o u r s e s in b i o l o g i c a l s c i e n c e s e x c e p t for B i o l o g y 204. B a s i c principles of e c o l o g y will be developed a n d the impact of contemporary society on the environment will be a s s e s s e d . Major topics include: e c o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s and environmental issues. B i o l o g y 110 Introductory Biology (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: N o n e : however, at least B i o l o g y 11 is strongly recommended. Biology 209 Plants (F) (3,3,1) A comparative study of the non-vascular plant groups, the algae, fungi, lichens a n d bryophytes with e m p h a s i s on the morphology, life-cycles, evolution, and e c o l o g y of e a c h of the groups. D i s c u s s i o n s of problems in non-vascular plant morphology. Biology 210 Morphology of V a s c u l a r P l a n t s (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. A comparative study of the v a s c u l a r plant groups, the pteridophytes, g y m n o s p e r m s a n d a n g i o s p e r m s with e m phasis on the evolution, morphology, e c o l o g y and function of e a c h of the groups. D i s c u s s i o n of problems in plant morphology. 37 Chemistry B i o l o g y 212 invertebrate Z o o l o g y Courses Instructional Faculty: (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 110 a n d 111. Gilchrist, A . B . , P h . D . (Simon Fraser) Le Couteur, P., B . S c . (Auckland), M . S c . ( A u c k l a n d ) , P h . D . (Calif.), Coordinator of Chemistry, G e o l o g y and P h y s i c s R e a d , D.W., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M . S c . (Brit. Col.), P h . D . (McGill) A comparative survey of the invertebrates. Major phyla a n d c l a s s e s , with e m p h a s i s upon evolutionary trends, adaptive biology and ecology of e a c h group. The c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d around the major unifying c o n c e p t of evolution. P r o b l e m s of contemporary interest in the field of invertebrate zoology. The c o u r s e will include a 3-day field trip to the Bamfield Marine Station. Laboratory S u p e r v i s o r s Biology 213 Vertebrate Zoology All Chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. There are lab fees for Chemistry c o u r s e s . (S) (3,3,1) and Technician: Smith, I., H.N.C. (Aberdeen), Laboratory Supervisor. S t e v e n s o n , B„ H.N.C. (Hatfield), Laboratory T e c h n i c i a n . Pre-requisite: Biology 110 a n d 111. A continuation from invertebrate zoology, covering the vertebrates and p r o t o c h o r d a t e s . E m p h a s i s again on evolutionary trends, e s p e c i a l l y in regards to morphology, function and e c o l o g y of e a c h class. Current c o n c e p t s a n d problems will be stressed. The lab is d e s i g n e d to examine representative s p e c i m e n s of existing c l a s s e s of vertebrates. The morphology a n d evolutionary trends in organ systems will be e m p h a s i z e d . B i o l o g y 214 C e l l Biology (F) (3,3,1) P r e - r e q u i s i t e : B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111 a n d c o n c u r r e n t registration in Chemistry 200, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A n integrated study of c e l l structure and function as determined by electron m i c r o s c o p y ; ultrastructure will be related to cell physiology a n d biochemistry. The interrelations among the various c o m p o n e n t s will be d i s c u s s e d from an evolutionary viewpoint. Laboratory e x e r c i s e s will concentrate on the u s e of light vs. electron m i c r o s c o p y and through this c o m p a r i s o n develop an appreciation for micro units. B i o l o g y 215 C e l l Biology (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 214 and concurrent Chemistry 201. if not already c o m p l e t e d . registration in A n examination of the biochemistry of the c e l l beginning with the fundamentals of thermodynamics. The bioenergetics of a living unit will be related to ultrastructure. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on the interaction of e x e r g o n i c a n d e n d e r g o n i c reactions. There is no laboratory with this c o u r s e . Biology 220 P r i n c i p l e s of M i c r o b i o l o g y (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 110 a n d 111, Chemistry 110 and 111. Transfer to U . B . C . requires Chemistry 200/201. A comprehensive treatment of introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, function, diversity a n d imm u n o l o g i c a l features of micro-organisms will be d i s c u s s e d . The lab provides practical experience in standard microbial techniques. Biology 221 Principles of M i c r o b i o l o g y (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 220. A continuation of B i o l o g y 220, e m p h a s i z i n g the growth, g e n e t i c s a n d e c o l o g y of micro-organisms. M i c r o - o r g a n i s m s in agriculture, forestry, various industries, health a n d sanitation. 38 C h e m i s t r y 030 A n Introduction to C h e m i s t r y ( S U ) P o s s i b l y (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: N o n e . (No University transfer credit.) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for those students w h o have h a d no previous chemistry, and w h o w i s h to g o on in S c i e n c e s . N o labs are given. The atom, atomic weights, the mole, c h e m i c a l formulas, ionic a n d convalent bonding. B a l a n c i n g equations, simple mathematical problems, solutions, a c i d s , b a s e s a n d salts, equilibrium. C h e m i s t r y 104 F u n d a m e n t a l s of C h e m i s t r y (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: N o n e , but some chemistry helpful. A c o u r s e s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d for n o n - s c i e n c e students w h i c h also fulfills first-year chemistry requirements for nurs i n g , home e c o n o m i c s a n d physical e d u c a t i o n , etc. (consult chart on page 35). A study of c h e m i c a l principles; stoichiometry: oxidation-reduction, s o l i d s , liquids and g a s e s ; the c h e m i c a l bond; atomic structure; c h e m i c a l periodicity. C h e m i s t r y 105 F u n d a m e n t a l s of C h e m i s t r y (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 104. A study of electrochemistry, introductory t h e r m o d y n a m i c s ; representative inorganic chemistry; equilibrium; a c i d s , bases and salts; organic chemistry. C h e m i s t r y 108 B a s i c C h e m i s t r y (F) (4.5,3,1.5) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 11, M a t h 12 or equivalent. (The Chemistry Department s h o u l d be c o n s u l t e d regarding mathematics requirements.) This c o u r s e covers the material of Chemistry 110 and, in addition, provides the b a c k g r o u n d n e c e s s a r y for a student who h a s not taken Chemistry 12. A student p a s s i n g this c o u r s e s h o u l d be able to enter Chemistry 111 in the S p r i n g . Transfer credit being applied for. C h e m i s t r y 110 C h e m i s t r y 200 P r i n c i p l e s a n d M e t h o d s of C h e m i s t r y (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 12, or Chemistry 030, and M a t h 12. Math 110 must be taken concurrently if not already c o m pleted. A c o u r s e for students w h o plan c a r e e r s in s c i e n c e . A study of stoichiometry; the g a s e o u s state; s o l i d s ; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the periodic s y s t e m ; c h e m i c a l b o n d i n g . O r g a n i c C h e m i s t r y (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 105 or 111. A study of nomenclature; structure; identification and s p e c t r o s c o p y of o r g a n i c m o l e c u l e s , a l k a n e s , a l k e n e s , alkynes, organometallic c o m p o u n d s , a l c o h o l s , aldehydes, ketones, ethers, a c i d s . C h e m i s t r y 201 C h e m i s t r y 110 S . P . L . - P r i n c i p l e s a n d M e t h o d s of ( F , 3 ) (3,3,0) Chemistry O r g a n i c C h e m i s t r y (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 200. Pre-requisite: Chemistry 12, or Chemistry 030, and Math 12. Math 110 must be taken concurrently, if not already c o m pleted. O p t i c a l isomerism; c a r b o h y d r a t e s ; amines, a m i d e s , nitriles, nitro, a z o , diazo and related c o m p o u n d s ; protein chemistry; electrophilic aromatic substitution; h e t e r o c y c l i c s ; polymers; natural products. A self-paced learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to Chemistry 110, open to any student but d e s i g n e d to be of particular value to those students w h o are unable to attend the Lynnmour C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, on a regular basis. C h e m i s t r y 204 C h e m i s t r y 111 P r i n c i p l e s a n d M e t h o d s of C h e m i s t r y (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 110. M a t h 111 must be taken c o n currently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . T h e r m o d y n a m i c s , equilibrium, a c i d s , bases, and salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; transition metals and their c o m p l e x e s ; organic chemistry. Introduction (F) (3,3,1) to Physical Inorganic Chemistry Pre-requisite: Chemistry 105 with " B " standing or Chemistry 111, and Math 111. A c o u r s e for students majoring in the b i o l o g i c a l s c i e n c e s and for those planning careers in m e d i c i n e , dentistry, agriculture or forestry. A study of t h e r m o d y n a m i c s , thermochemistry; equilibrium; a c i d s and b a s e s , pH determinations, solubility products, qualitative inorganic analysis, c h e m i c a l kinetics. B i o l o g i c a l application of these topics stressed. C h e m i s t r y 111 S . P . L . P r i n c i p l e s a n d M e t h o d s of ( F . S ) (3,3,0) Chemistry Pre-requisite: Chemistry 110. M a t h 111 must be taken c o n currently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A self-paced learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to Chemistry 111 and d e s i g n e d to be of particular value to those students w h o are unable to attend the Lynnmour C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, on a regular basis. T1| C h e m i s t r y 205 Introduction (S) (3,3,1) to Physical Inorganic Chemistry Pre-requisite: Chemistry 204. A study of electrochemistry; galvanic c e l l s , oxidationreduction in b i o l o g i c a l systems; m a c r o m o l e c u l a r systems, main g r o u p systematic chemistry; transition e l e m e n t s a n d coordination c o m p l e x e s . & f £f 39 Economics Courses Instructional Faculty: A m o n , N., B.A. (Kent), M.A. (S.F.U.) Legates. M., B.A. (Washington). M.A. (Yale), M.Phil. (Yale), Ph.D. (Yale) M i r z a , M.S.. B . S c . (Econs) Univ. London), P h . D . (S.F.U.) Sayre, J . E . , B.S.B.A. (Denver), M.A. (Boston) E c o n o m i c s is a s o c i a l s c i e n c e c o n c e r n e d with the allocation of s c a r c e resources and involving the production, distribution, and c o n s u m p t i o n of wealth. E c o n o m i c s 100 a n d 101 are introductory c o u r s e s w h i c h raise a n d explore the kinds of questions e c o n o m i s t s deal with. They also serve as an introduction to the study of formal e c o n o m i c theory in the 200 level c o u r s e s . Students w h o plan to major in E c o n o m i c s or C o m m e r c e s h o u l d complete E c o n o m i c s 200 a n d 201 before p r o c e e d i n g to third year c o u r s e s at U . B . C . S.F.U., or e l s e w h e r e . Students who plan to major in E c o n o m i c s at S.F.U. are also advised to complete E c o n o m i c s 120 a n d 121. E c o n o m i c s 120 E c o n o m i c History of the P r e - l n d u s t r i a l E r a (F) (3,0,1) A broad sweep of e c o n o m i c history from man's earliest b e g i n n i n g s to the Industrial R e v o l u t i o n . T h e e c o n o m i c s of pre-historic man, the River civilizations, G r e e c e , R o m e and Europe in the M i d d l e A g e s are studied, while e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on the transition from E u r o p e a n F e u d a l i s m to early forms of capitalism. E c o n o m i c s 121 E c o n o m i c History of the Industrial E r a (S) (3,0,1) A study of the Industrial Revolution a n d subsequent e c o n o m i c growth to the present in context of several c o u n tries including C a n a d a . Contrast is made between the paths of development of today's industrial nations a n d those nations that are now attempting to industrialize. E c o n o m i c s 100 Introduction to E c o n o m i c s (F) (3,0,1) E c o n o m i c s 200 P r i n c i p l e s of M a c r o e c o n o m i c A c o u r s e that involves the identification a n d study of current e c o n o m i c issues R e f e r e n c e is made to the nature and historical development of capitalism and how it has been c h a n g i n g and to the contrasts of c a p i t a l i s m a n d s o c i a l i s m . Government fiscal a n d monetary p o l i c i e s a n d s i m p l e e c o n o m i c c o n c e p t s s u c h as supply a n d demand are dealt with. Pre-requisite: A n y 2 E c o n o m i c s 100 level or E c o n o m i c s 201 The formal K e y n e s i a n theory of national i n c o m e determination and some contemporary critiques of this theory. Inc l u d e d is the study of the p o s s i b l e c a u s e s of and solutions to unemployment and inflation a n d the importance of international trade. Government f i s c a l a n d monetary policies are examined in detail. E c o n o m i c s 101 Canadian Economics M a c r o a n d Micro Considerations E c o n o m i c s 201 P r i n c i p l e s of M i c r o e c o n o m i c s (S) (3,0,1) An examination of the contemporary structure of the C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y with some historical reference. T h e i m portance of international trade a n d tariffs, the effects of foreign investment and ownership; the problems of regional disparities and poverty: the interplay of b u s i n e s s , government a n d unions a n d federal-provincial relations a n d taxation policies are c o n s i d e r e d . F o c u s is on the hard e c o n o m i c c h o i c e s the people of C a n a d a now face. 40 T h e o r y (S) (3,0,1) Theory (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: A n y 2 E c o n o m i c s 100 level c o u r s e s . A study of the theoretical c o n s t r u c t s of c o n s u m e r behaviour and the operation of b u s i n e s s firms in the market e c o n o m y under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, monopoly a n d monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium position a n d the determinants of income distribution. English Courses Instructional Faculty A l d e r s o n , S.A., B.A. (Antioch), M . A . (Ohio State) Burstein, F., B.B., B.A. (Wash St. Louis), M.A. (Boston), P h D (Boston) Clifford, J . , B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (U.B.C.) C o n n e l l , P.L., B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (U.B.C.) C o u p e , Ft., B.A. (Tasmania), P h D (U.B.C.) C o u p e y , P.L., B.A. (McGill), M.A. (U.B.C.) Fahlman Reid, M.L., B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (Toronto) Forst, G . N . , B.A. ( U . B . C ) , P h D (U.B.C.) Gilbert, S.R., B.A. (U.Vic), M.A. (U.B.C.) G l a s s , R., B.A. ( C a l i f ) , M . A . (Southern California) H i n d m a r c h , G . , B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (U.B.C.) H o w a r d , I., B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (U.B.C.) J a n t z e n , D.H., B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M . A . (York) M c K e o w n , T., B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (U.B.C.) S c h e r m b r u c k e r , W . G . , B.A. (Capetown), P.Grad Cert in E d . (London), M.A. ( U . B . C ) , P h D (U.B.C.) T h e s e n , S„ B.A. (S.F.U.), M . A . (S.F.U.) Whittaker, E.M., B.A. (U.B.C.) Courses E n g l i s h 010 L a n g u a g e Skills ( F , S ) (3,0,1) N O T E : Credit s e c t i o n s of this c o u r s e are transferable to S i m o n Fraser. Drop-in s e c t i o n s are non-credit. A n intensive Writing W o r k s h o p in the b a s i c l a n g u a g e skills to e n a b l e the student to p r o c e e d without difficulty through a regular c o l l e g e program. C u r r i c u l u m will evolve from the a s s e s s e d needs of the students. Most work will be practical. S t u d e n t s may enter the drop-in s e c t i o n s Writing W o r k s h o p during the semester by s i g n i n g a list posted in the Humanities Division for an individual half-hour appointment. English 090/091/092 E n g l i s h A s A n A d d i t i o n a l L a n g u a g e ( F . S ) (3,0,1.5) S e e listings at the end of E n g l i s h S e c t i o n ; E . A . S . L . is part of the Department of M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s . E n g l i s h 100 Composition G e n e r a l Information Students intending to transfer to universities s h o u l d take two first year English c o u r s e s other than 190, 191. T h o s e b o u n d for S i m o n Fraser University c a n obtain transfer credits for 010, if they desire. Intending majors and honours students s h o u l d complete E n g l i s h 200 and 201. and are e n c o u r a g e d to take another s e c o n d - y e a r E n g l i s h c o u r s e . E n g l i s h 200 a n d 201 are s o m e t i m e s required for certain Arts and E d u c a t i o n programs. Students should seek university c a l e n d a r s and help from A d visors in determining requirements. ( F . S ) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in the fundamentals of g o o d writing, giving students intensive practice in writing for a variety of purposes, with e m p h a s i s on the essay form. Throughout the Iterm, much attention is given to p r e c i s e , appropriate a n d effective s e l e c t i o n of words, with progressively i n c r e a s i n g e m p h a s i s on effective organization a n d development of material. P r o b l e m s in m e c h a n i c s of writing are dealt with individually, by revision of e s s a y s , and, if n e c e s s a r y , by group or individual drill. E n g l i s h 102 Composition C o u r s e s Not O f f e r e d 1979-80 The following E n g l i s h c o u r s e s are not offered in 1979-80. They will be reactivated when there is sufficient student interest. If you seriously wish to take o n e of these c o u r s e s , inform the E n g l i s h Department. E N G L I S H 160/161 R e a d i n g s in the 19th a n d 20th Century N o v e l , 165/166 J o u r n a l i s m : C o l l e g e N e w s p a p e r P r o d u c t i o n . 176/177 A n c i e n t a n d M e d i a e v a l M y t h o l o g y / F o l k Tales and L e g e n d s , Humanities 100/101. English Placement Test T h o s e students w h o wish to enrol in E n g l i s h , Humanities G e n e r a l or G e n e r a l Studies c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. Those students w h o have not taken the B . C . Government E n g l i s h Placement Test are required to take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for any E n g l i s h , Humanities G e n e r a l or G e n e r a l Studies course. S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be posted in the reception area, Student Info C e n t r e a n d the Humanities Division. (S) (3,0,1) A composition c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for those w h o require a more intensive a n d c o m p r e h e n s i v e a p p r o a c h to E n g l i s h C o m p o s i t i o n than offered by the usual first year c o m p o s i t i o n c o u r s e (English 100). E n g l i s h 104 Fiction ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A study of selected twentieth-century short stories and novels, e a c h of intrinsic literary merit. T h e chief aim of the c o u r s e , beyond broadening a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's u n derstanding a n d appreciation of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original responses to literary e x p r e s s i o n , and to increase the student's ability to e x p r e s s those r e s p o n s e s in w e l l d e v e l o p e d oral and written criticism. E n g l i s h 105 Poetry (F.S) (3,0,1) A study of selected major and significant minor twentiethcentury poets w h o s e poetry is of intrinsic literary merit. The chief a i m of the c o u r s e , beyond broadening a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original r e s p o n s e s to literary e x p r e s s i o n , and to increase the student's ability to e x p r e s s those r e s p o n s e s in well-developed oral a n d written criticism. 41 E n g l i s h 106 D r a m a (F,S) (3,0,1) E n g l i s h 201 E n g l i s h Literature s i n c e A study of selected and representative twentieth century plays especially since 1950. The chief aim of the c o u r s e , beyond broadening a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's u n derstanding and appreciation of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original responses to literary e x p r e s s i o n , and to increase the student's ability to express those r e s p o n s e s in welld e v e l o p e d criticism. Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. E n g l i s h 200 r e c o m m e n d e d , but not required. E n g l i s h 108 T h e m e s in C o n t e m p o r a r y Literature (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of twentieth-century w o r k s , e a c h of intrinsic, literary merit, arranged under a thematic heading of s i g n i f i c a n c e in the contemporary world. The theme heading for e a c h section of the c o u r s e will be a n n o u n c e d at the time of registration. W o r k s will be drawn from various genres a n d will be studied as artistically formed e x p r e s s i o n s of feelings and ideas, both separately a n d in relation to o n e another. E n g l i s h 110 Introduction to L i n g u i s t i c s 1660 ( F . S ) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 200, but c o v e r i n g the later period indicated. E n g l i s h 202 C a n a d i a n Literature (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize the student with major, representative authors from the c o l o n i a l b e g i n n i n g s of C a n a d a to World W a r II, A n investigation of various themes and styles which evolved through the early literature a n d w h i c h are reflected in contemporary C a n a d i a n literature. E x a m p l e s of significant F r e n c h - C a n a d i a n w o r k s studied in translation. E n g l i s h 203 C a n a d i a n Literature (S) (3,0,1) (F) (3,0,1) N O T E : S e e Separate heading under L I N G U I S T I C S E n g l i s h 111 Introduction to L i n g u i s t i c s (S) (3,0,1) Note: S e e separate heading under L I N G U I S T I C S Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; E n g l i s h 202 r e c o m m e n d e d but not required; or instructor's written permission. The continuation of E n g l i s h 202, b e c o m i n g more intensive in its investigation of individual major, modern authors of poetry, novels a n d plays in C a n a d a s i n c e W o r l d W a r II. A study of the e m e r g e n c e in modern form of themes a n d attitudes of a sensibility uniquely C a n a d i a n . E n g l i s h 190 C r e a t i v e Writing ( F , S ) (3,0,1) E n g l i s h 204 M a j o r A m e r i c a n Writers to 1850 (F) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is transferable to U . B . C . and the University of Victoria. Pre-requisite: Two of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106 or 108; or i n structor's written permission. A n intensive workshop c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to help students develop their skill in self-expression a n d craftsmanship in poetry, fiction, and drama. Students are required to write extensively in their c h o s e n genre, a n d to d e v e l o p an a w a r e n e s s , through written practice of at least o n e of the other genres. Students are also required to submit their writing regularly for group d i s c u s s i o n . Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to develop their work to the point at w h i c h it should b e c o m e a c c e p t a b l e for publication in T H E C A P I L A N O R E V I E W and other literary m a g a z i n e s . A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize the student with the writings of selected major representative A m e r i c a n writers, and to provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference. Texts c o n s i d e r e d both for their o w n literary merits a n d in historical context. Not offered in 1979/80. E n g l i s h 191 C r e a t i v e Writing (S) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is transferable to U . B . C . and the University of Victoria. A continuation of E n g l i s h 190. E n g l i s h 200 E n g l i s h Literature to 1660 ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108: or instructor's written permission. A study of texts in all major genres from s e l e c t e d major authors between mediaeval times a n d 1660. A n attempt to provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference as well as s o m e in-depth study of individual works. 42 E n g l i s h 205 Major A m e r l c e n Writers s i n c e 1850 (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106 or 108; or instructor's written permission. E n g l i s h 204 is r e c o m m e n d e d , but not required. A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 204, but c o v e r i n g the period from 1850 to 1930. Not offered in 1979/80. E n g l i s h 206 S e c o n d Y e a r D r a m a ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 106); or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . T h i s c o u r s e continues from E n g l i s h 106, in investigating various forms of dramatic literature c h o s e n largely from a pre-20th century reading list. Students will explore s p e c i f i c elements of style and form, various periods of drama history, and various s u b genres of d r a m a . This c o u r s e has transfer credit at U . B . C . a n d U.Vic. E n g l i s h 212 E n g l i s h 291 Readings C r e a t i v e Writing - Fiction (S) (3,0,1) In W o r l d Literature to 1880 (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106 or 108; or i n structor's written p e r m i s s i o n . Pre-requisite: E n g l i s h 190 or 191 or the instructor's written permission. A c o u r s e to acquaint students with a variety of major or influential works of literature from the c l a s s i c a l G r e e k era to the e n d of the 18th Century and to provide the student with a broad historical a n d critical frame of reference. Texts c o n sidered both for their o w n literary merits a n d in historical context. T h i s c o u r s e offers an intensive w o r k s h o p in the writing of fiction. It will c o n c e n t r a t e on furthering the student's k n o w l e d g e of the state of current fiction while giving the student the opportunity to develop an a w a r e n e s s of v o i c e , word c h o i c e a n d rhythm, d i a l o g u e , character, a n d points-ofview. E n g l i s h 213 R e a d i n g s in W o r l d L i t e r a t u r e s i n c e 1880 (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . E n g l i s h 212 r e c o m m e n d e d , but not required. Students will b e e x p e c t e d to read a variety of c o n temporary fiction a n d to d i s c u s s various t e c h n i q u e s . In their writing they will have the opportunity of trying out these techniques in both short a n d extended forms of fiction. Note: This c o u r s e has transfer credit at U . B . C . a n d U . V i c . Not offered in 1979/80. A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 212, but c o v e r i n g the period from 1880 to 1960. E n g l i s h 215 Poetry a n d P o e t i c s , Prior to the 20th C e n t u r y (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 105); or instructor's written permission. This c o u r s e offers an investigation of poetry before the 20th century. Students will have an opportunity to read long w o r k s and/or to concentrate on three or four major poets. Transfers to U.Vic., S . F . U . a n d U . B . C . Not offered in 1979/80. E n g l i s h 216 Poetry a n d Poetics of the 20th C e n t u r y (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 105); or instructor's written permission. This c o u r s e offers a study of theories of writing, theories of language, systems of thought a n d understanding of tradition as they relate to 20th century poetry a n d poetics. Not a survey, this c o u r s e presents the opportunity for intensive study of several significant poets or of the development of a particular form. Transfers to U.Vic., S . F . U . a n d U . B . C . Not offered in 1979/80. E n g l i s h 290 C r e a t i v e Writing - Poetry (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: E n g l i s h 190 or 191, or the instructor's written permission. T h i s c o u r s e offers an intensive w o r k s h o p in the writing of poetry. It will c o n c e n t r a t e on furthering the student's k n o w l e d g e of current poetic forms while at the s a m e time i n c r e a s i n g a w a r e n e s s of o n e ' s o w n v o i c e , o n e ' s individual ground for writing, and the development of o n e ' s o w n poetic. Students will be e x p e c t e d to read a variety of c o n temporary work, both p o e m s a n d statements poets have made about their o w n p o e t i c s or a e s t h e t i c s in their writing. They will have the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for i n stance, the short lyric, the serial p o e m , narrative verse, prose poetry. N o t e : T h i s c o u r s e h a s transfer credit at U . B . C . a n d U.Vic. Not offered in 1979/80. 43 English A s A Second P l e a s e contact the Department of M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s for more information. ( L o c a l 282). Language Inatructional Faculty G l a s s , R i c h a r d , B.A. (Calif.), M.A. (Southern Calif.). E n g l i s h 090 E n g l i s h a s a n A d d i t i o n a l L a n g u a g e (F.S.) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is not transferable to University. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide the student, w h o s e first l a n g u a g e is not E n g l i s h , with verbal a n d written skills in E n g l i s h . The c o u r s e will p r o c e e d with the patterns set by the students' needs, generally b e g i n n i n g with a review of b a s i c s . Included in the c o u r s e of study are: reading a n d oral c o m p r e h e n s i o n , sentence structure, paragraphs a n d short essays, c o m p o s i t i o n vocabulary, s p e l l i n g a n d verbal c o m munication. P l e a s e contact the Department of M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s for more information, (local 282) E n g l i s h 091 English a s an Additional L a n g u a g e (F.S.) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable to University. Pre-requisite: E n g l i s h 090 or written p e r m i s s i o n of the i n structor. This c o u r s e is similar in all r e s p e c t s to E n g l i s h 090 except that the student s h o u l d have a higher level of ability in the E n g l i s h l a n g u a g e , a n d the stress of study will b e on writing and d i s c u s s i o n . 44 E n g l i s h 092 English e s an Additional Language Note: This c o u r s e is not transferable to University. Pre-requisite: E n g l i s h 091 or written permission of the instructor. T h i s is a w o r k s h o p given o n a tutorial basis. C o u r s e inc l u d e s essay writing, dictation, punctuation a n d the study of various principles of E n g l i s h syntax. P l e a s e contact the Department of M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s for more information, (local 282). H u m a n i t i e s 100/101 Art a n d Literature in the 20th C e n t u r y (2,3,1.5) The E n g l i s h c o m p o n e n t of this c o u r s e explores through a rotation of lectures, seminars a n d w o r k s h o p s , s e l e c t e d g r o u p s and figures from recent literature. The c o m p o s i t i o n and literature c o m p o n e n t offers exemption from E n g l i s h 100 at the University of British C o l u m b i a provided it is taken at the equivalent of 3 hours per week over two terms. T h e Art c o m p o n e n t of this c o u r s e is equivalent to Art 100 offered in the C a r e e r Arts P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a n d , if the two semesters' study is complete, to Fine Arts 171 offered at the University of British C o l u m b i a . Not offered in 1979/80. Fine Arts Courses Instructional Faculty Fine Arts 210 J e n s e n , J . , B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) R o s e n b e r g , A., B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Toronto) M o d e r n Art (19th C e n t u r y ) (F) (3,0,1) G e n e r a l Information This c o u r s e is an in-depth study of E u r o p e a n art of the 19th Century. It c o n s i d e r s artists from F r a n c e , G e r m a n y , S p a i n and E n g l a n d , f o c u s e s on important art movements and c o u n ter-movements s u c h as N e o - c l a s s i c i s m , Romanticism, R e a l i s m a n d Impressionism. This c o u r s e is equivalent to Art 260 offered in the C a r e e r Arts P r o g r a m . A l l Fine Arts c o u r s e s are transferable to the Fine Arts Department at the University of British C o l u m b i a and University of Victoria a n d receive elective credit at S i m o n Fraser University. Articulation in progress for visual literacy. N o prerequisite. A c a d e m i c students have the option to take the following University of British C o l u m b i a transfer c o u r s e s in the Career Art P r o g r a m : Fine Arts 211 Art 100-1 (Equivalent to Fine Arts c o m p o n e n t of Humanities 100-1 a n d Visual Literacy 100-1.) M o d e r n Art (20th C e n t u r y ) ( S ) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. Art 260-1 (Equivalent to Fine A r t s 210-11.) A c a d e m i c students may also take studio art c o u r s e s and apply these to transfer credit at U . B . C . For details see C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e E q u i v a l e n c y guide. Note: Students s h o u l d also s e e Humanities 100/101: Art and Literature in the 20th Century. This c o u r s e is a continuation of Fine Arts 210 c o n centrating on the art of the 20th Century in E u r o p e a n d its s u b s e q u e n t d e v e l o p m e n t in t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s . N.B. T h i s c o u r s e is equivalent to Art 261 offered in the C a r e e r Art P r o g r a m . Fine Arts 210/211 has transfer credit to the Fine Arts P r o g r a m at the University of British C o l u m b i a . F i n e Arts 250/251 F i n e Arts 100 Renaissance T h e History of Art I (F) (3,0,1) D i r e c t e d S t u d y A b r o a d In F l o r e n c e N o prerequisite. No prerequisite. A n historical survey of art from prehistoric times to the late G o t h i c Period with consideration given to the painting, architecture and sculpture of e a c h s u c c e s s i v e era as well as to the artists themselves, their s o c i a l context. P r o b l e m s in style a n d period classification will be d i s c u s s e d T o be offered, d e p e n d i n g on enrolment, in M a y - J u n e 1980. F i n e Arts 101 T h e History of Art II (S) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. A consideration of painting, architecture a n d sculpture from the R e n a i s s a n c e to the present. T h e a p p r o a c h pursued in Fine Arts 100 is continued. A l t h o u g h students are e n c o u r a g e d to take Fine Arts 100 first, it is p o s s i b l e to enrol in the s e c o n d semester offering. a n d M a n n e r i s t Art: ( S U ) (6,0,1) T h i s five week survey of Italian Art a n d Architecture from the Early R e n a i s s a n c e (1400) through M a n n e r i s m (1600) c o n siders the work of major artists w h o lived in F l o r e n c e a n d R o m e . E m p h a s i s will be given to a study of the formation of the H i g h R e n a i s s a n c e style by L e o n a r d o , M i c h e l a n g e l o a n d R a p h a e l . Day trips to important sites (Rome, A r e z z o , etc.) will be arranged. The c o u r s e is five w e e k s long; an extra week is included for free travel. S o m e requirements prior to the c o u r s e (in terms of preparation through lecture attendance) c o m p l e t e the six-week credit unit. Interested p e r s o n s may contact the Humanities Division (locals 218, 281). V i s u a l Literacy 100 (F) (3,rjyl) No prerequisite. This c o u r s e intends to introduce the student through a series of readings, c l a s s r o o m e x p e r i e n c e s a n d suitable studio e x e r c i s e s to the field of visual literacy. The student will be made aware of: how h e / s h e s e e s ; the individual a n d culture i n d u c e d qualities of his/her visual memory; the possible meanings explicit or implied in a number of c o m m o n p l a c e visual e x p e r i e n c e s ; s o m e t e c h n i c a l means through w h i c h ideas, emotions e t c . may be visually e x p r e s s e d . N o prerequisite. V i s u a l Literacy 101 (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of the above. N o prerequisite. N.B. Articulation is in progress. 45 French Courses Instructional Faculty C a n t i n Orr-Ewing, L , B.A. (Montreal), M.A. (Simon Fraser) D y b i k o w s k i , A., B.A. (Hons.) (London) G l a s s , R., B.A. (Calif.), M.A. (South. Calif.) Hardy, D., L i c e n c e en lettres modernes (Rouen) R a v o l o , D., L i c e n c e (Paris), M.A. (Brit. Col.) K e m p o , O., B.A. (Alta.), M.A. (Brit. Col.), P h . D . (Brit. Col.), C o ordinator of D i a l o g u e C a n a d a R e i d , F., M.A. (Edinburgh) R i c h a r d s , C , M.A. (Washington) Students may opt to take a pair of c o u r s e s in one program, then c h a n g e to another pair of c o u r s e s in a different program. Students are also e n c o u r a g e d to take c o u r s e s in any two programs at the s a m e time. It w o u l d be advisable to c o n s u l t a member of the F r e n c h Department before registering. Description of C o u r s e s INTRODUCTORY F r e n c h 050 (F) (3,1) (credit ( applied for) Instructional Associates No prerequisite. B o u r g e o i s - T r u m a n , Marie Bouton, Denys G a c i n a , Jeannette G u a y , Lyse L a c h a n c e , Gabriel Pellerin, M i c h e l i n e Language Lab. For absolute beginners. P h o n e t i c s , pronunciation drills and s o m e grammar. F r e n c h 051 (S) Supervisor (3,1) (credit applied for) Prerequisite 050 This c o u r s e , together with 050, c o v e r s H i g h S c h o o l F r e n c h grades 8, 9, 10 and 11 and prepares the student for entry into D i a l o g u e C a n a d a 160 or F r e n c h 102. Jacquet, Joyce Program Developer K r o h n , L o u i s e , B . E d . (Montreal) Dialogue C a n a d a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers two different types of F r e n c h cours e s . Firstly there are D i a l o g u e C a n a d a c o u r s e s w h i c h have a one-day-per-week immersion a p p r o a c h : a 3 hour c l a s s followed by 1 £ hours of conversation with a f r a n c o p h o n e Instructional A s s o c i a t e and Vk hours of practice in the l a n g u a g e laboratory. The e m p h a s i s in the D i a l o g u e C a n a d a c o u r s e s is on C a n a d i a n content and the audio-visual method is u s e d . Students are required to supply two new tapes onto w h i c h a lesson is recorded for practice at home during the week. All students new to the D i a l o g u e C a n a d a program must attend a placement interview w h i c h will be held on the third and fourth W e d n e s d a y s of A u g u s t between 3:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. 1 F r e n c h 160 (F.S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: G r a d e 11 or F r e n c h 050/051 T h i s is a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d by C a n a d i a n linguists within a C a n a d i a n context. The method e m p h a s i z e s the s p o k e n language. F r e n c h 161 (F,S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 160 or written permission of the instructor. A continuation of F r e n c h 160. At this level the student will be expected to start writing small c o m p o s i t i o n s . S e c o n d l y , there are c o u r s e s with a format of twice weekly 1 £ hour c l a s s e s , plus one hour of conversation with a franc o p h o n e Instructional A s s o c i a t e and two A hour practice s e s s i o n s in the language laboratory. T h e s e c o u r s e s use either the audio-langual method or the traditional a p p r o a c h to language learning. F r e n c h 260 (F.S) (3,1.5,1) For complete beginners or those w h o have previously e x p e r i e n c e d difficulty in learning F r e n c h , the C o l l e g e also offers two introductory c o u r s e s , namely F r e n c h 050/051. A continuation of French 160/161. At this level the student will be e x p e c t e d to participate in short d i s c u s s i o n s , give oral presentations and write c o m p o s i t i o n s . 1 3 In addition to the c o u r s e s d e s c r i b e d above, D i a l o g u e C a n a d a also offers F r e n c h 290/291 a n d Q u e b e c S t u d i e s 100/101. Neither of these c o u r s e s has conversation c l a s s e s or labs. T h e Q u e b e c S t u d i e s c o u r s e will be given in F r e n c h and in E n g l i s h . B e g i n n e r s : 050/051 46 F r e n c h 261 (F,S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: French 260 or written permission of the instructor. A continuation of F r e n c h 260. F r e n c h 290 (F) (3,0,0) S u m m a r y of P r o g r a m s Dialogue Canada (prerequisite: 050/051 or equivalent) 160 161 260 261 290 Prerequisite: F r e n c h 160/161 or F r e n c h 102/103 or written permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: French 261 or written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. Audio-lingual (prerequisite: G r a d e 11) 102 103 202 203 Traditional a p p r o a c h (prerequisite: G r a d e 12) 110 111 210 211 T h i s c o u r s e is intended as a follow-up to F r e n c h 261. T h e ultimate goal of F r e n c h 290/291 is to bring students to a level of oral/written proficiency which will e n a b l e them to pursue their own study of the l a n g u a g e . O r a l a n d written p r o f i c i e n c y will be e n h a n c e d via the following methods: oral p r e s e n tations, dictation, v o c a b u l a r y e x e r c i s e s , a variety of grammatical e x e r c i s e s , the study of literary p a s s a g e s a n d recorded material. F r e n c h 211 (S) (3,1.5.1) F r e n c h 291 (S) (3,0,0) Prerequisite: French 290 or written p e r m i s s i o n of the in. structor. This course is intended as a follow-up to F r e n c h 290. T h e g o a l s of French 291 are (1) to pursue the students' oral and written proficiency and (2) to gain a better k n o w l e d g e of Q u e b e c via its literary works. Oral and written proficiency will be e n h a n c e d via the following methods: study of literary works, oral presentations, c o m p o s i t i o n s . Audlo-Llngual F r e n c h 102 (F) (3,1.5,1) Courses A conversational a p p r o a c h to the F r e n c h l a n g u a g e , inc l u d i n g instruction in b a s i c grammar. Prerequisite grade 11 or 050/051. F r e n c h 103 (S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 210. This c o u r s e should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following F r e n c h 210. A continuation of the work of F r e n c h 210; literary texts will be c h o s e n from 20th Century F r e n c h w o r k s ; b a c k g r o u n d reading required. C o u r s e includes cultural enrichment. Q u e b e c Studies 100 (F) (3,0,0) The aim of the c o u r s e is to familiarize the student with the important a s p e c t s of Q u e b e c culture, from its origins to the present day. The student s h o u l d gain a feeling of the c o n tinuity of the culture, its rapid transformation s i n c e 1960 and its p l a c e within confederation. This will be done by exploring Q u e b e c via its history, its politics, its literature, its m u s i c and its arts. The c o u r s e will be offered in E n g l i s h and F r e n c h . A continuation of F r e n c h 102, d e s i g n e d to give a limited fluency in s p e a k i n g and reading, as w e l l as s o m e written skills. F r e n c h 202 (F) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 102 and 103 or F r e n c h 12. French format: a series of four w e e k e n d w o r k s h o p s , 9:304:30 p.m. Sat. & S u n . E n g l i s h format: evening c l a s s Quebec Studies (S) (3,0,0) 101 Prerequisite: Q u e b e c Studies 100 A n intermediate c o u r s e to continue oral fluency with grammar review, some dictation and oral c o m p o s i t i o n ; continues the work of French 103. This course is a continuation of Q u e b e c S t u d i e s 100 with the same format as before. F r e n c h 203 (S) (3,1.5,1) Transfer Prerequisite: French 202. This c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken whenever p o s s i b l e , in the term following French 202. A continuation of the work of F r e n c h 202, with further e m p h a s i s on oral and written e x p r e s s i o n . Traditional Method F r e n c h 110 (F) (3.1.5,1) Courses Prerequisite: French 102/103 or F r e n c h grade 12 or s p e c i a l permission from the instructor. To be taken by all students intending to p r o c e e d to the Major or Honours program at another institution. G r a m m a r revision, e x e r c i s e s , dictation, weekly assignments. S o m e French literature. F r e n c h 111 (S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 110. A continuation of the work done in 110; including c o m position and s o m e study of F r e n c h literary texts. F r e n c h 210 (F) (3,1.5,1) Information S.F.U. Students who wish to p r o c e e d to S . F . U . and to pursue further c o u r s e s in French are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S . F . U . for all C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F r e n c h c o u r s e s . Exemption from and placement in higher c o u r s e s are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted w h i c h w o u l d count toward a major in F r e n c h . C o u r s e s w h i c h d o not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U.B.C. Students with F r e n c h G r a d e 11 who wish only to satisfy the U.B.C. Faculty of Arts l a n g u a g e requirement need C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e French 102 and 103. If they plan to major in F r e n c h , they should take F r e n c h 202 and 220 during their third year at U . B . C , by permission of the U . B . C . F r e n c h Department. Students with F r e n c h G r a d e 12 w h o intend to major at U.B.C. should complete F r e n c h 110 and 111, as well as F r e n c h 210 and 211. They may then p r o c e e d to U . B . C . F r e n c h 220, w h i c h may be taken during their third year by permission from the Department. Course Equivalency Prerequisite: French 110, 111 or c o n s i d e r a b l e previous experience in written and oral work. Capilano A n a d v a n c e d course with e m p h a s i s on written work, inc l u d i n g formal translation, stylistic e x e r c i s e s , dictation, and c o m p r e h e n s i o n tests. Literary works c h o s e n from 20th C e n tury novels will be studied, requiring some b a c k g r o u n d reading. The c o u r s e includes cultural enrichment through medium of slides, films and music. F r e n c h 160/161 F r e n c h 260/261 French 290/291 F r e n c h 102/103 French 202/203 F r e n c h 110/111 F r e n c h 210/211 U.B.C. first year F r e n c h (3 credits) F r e n c h 115 F r e n c h 215 F r e n c h 110 F r e n c h 120 F r e n c h 120 F r e n c h 202 47 Geography Courses Instructional Faculty B r o w n . D., B.A. (Carleton), M.A. (S.F.U.) B r o w n , T., B . S c . (Bristol) E w i n g , K., B.A., M . S c . (Univ. of M i c h i g a n ) J o r d a n , R.P., B . S c . ( U . B . C ) , M . S c . (U.B.C.) McGillivray, B., B.A., M.A. (Brit. Col.) W i l s o n , G„ B . S c . (N.Y. State), M.A. (Brit. Col.) G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s are planned for students w h o wish to major in this field as well as for those who wish electives. M o r e than one g e o g r a p h y c o u r s e may be t a k e n simultaneously. Students intending to transfer to U . B . C . may .combine G e o g r a p h y 111 and 200 to receive credit for U . B . C . G e o g r a p h y 200/201. Students p l a n n i n g to transfer to S . F . U . may take the geography c o u r s e s in any s e q u e n c e with the exception of G e o g r a p h y 216, 220 and 221 c o u r s e s which require prerequisites. G e o g r a p h y 112 and 114 are equivalent to G e o g r a p h y 101 at U.B.C. and fulfill the lab s c i e n c e requirement at U . B . C . and U.Vic. Note: All geography c o u r s e s have university transferability. G e o g r a p h y 101 H u m a n Perception a n d E n v i r o n m e n t a l C h a n g e (F) (2,1,1) How do you interpret your environment? How d o e s your lifestyle affect your environment? H o w d o e s the environment affect the way you live? What are the effects of waste d i s p o s a l on our e c o s y s t e m ? What are the basic issues regarding our energy u s a g e ? What are the c o n s e q u e n c e s of 2-4-D and 2-45T on our food s u p p l i e s ? A r e there realistic alternatives to some of these c o n c e r n s ? This c o u r s e examines the relationship between the Natural or P h y s i c a l systems and the H u m a n U s e S y s t e m s a n d thus provides a framework in which all environmental issues may be examined. The c o u r s e will be c o m p r i s e d of lectures, seminars, field and laboratory work, in addition to films, s l i d e s and guest lectures. Geography 106 British C o l u m b i a : A R e g i o n a l A n a l y s i s (F,S) (3,1,0) T h i s c o u r s e is b a s e d on a g e o g r a p h i c b a c k g r o u n d to many historical and contemporary i s s u e s in this P r o v i n c e . It d e a l s with p h y s i c a l regions in B . C . and d i s c u s s e s the relationship between physical systems and human use systems. T o p i c s Include natives and their problems, minority groups and racism, the influence of the C . P . R . , energy and alternative s o u r c e s , B.C.'s industries, the preservation of agricultural land, and a range of other topics that will be a p p r o a c h e d through films, s l i d e s , simulation g a m e s , and lectured i s c u s s i o n groups. G e o g r a p h y 110 T h e S c o p e of G e o g r a p h y (F) (3,1,0) G e o g r a p h y is and c o n t i n u e s to be very diverse in its offerings (for example, urban geography, e c o n o m i c geography, geomorphology, etc.). However, this c o u r s e does not confine you to a s p e c i f i c theme; rather, it s t r e s s e s many themes and d i s c u s s e s the methods of inquiry and t e c h n i q u e s of analysis that are c o m m o n in the study of people in their p h y s i c a l and h u m a n environments. Field trips, d i s c u s s i o n groups, media, lectures, and literature t o p i c s s u c h as how you perceive the w o r l d a n d how w e u n d e r s t a n d the l a n d s c a p e a s geographers, will be utilized. 48 G e o g r a p h y 111 H u m a n G e o g r a p h y (F) (3,1,0) A n examination of human cultural c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s and a c tivities in different environmental situations. The distribution and characteristics of human populations are e x a m i n e d in both a g l o b a l and contemporary North A m e r i c a n context. C o n c e p t s stressed will be those of p e r c e p t i o n , culture and diffusion, as well as environmental relationships to resource use and urban growth. G e o g r a p h y 112 introduction to E a r t h E n v i r o n m e n t s (F,S) (3,2,1) A n introduction to P h y s i c a l G e o g r a p h y u s i n g films, lectures, labs and field trips to explain p r o c e s s e s in geomorphology. S o m e of the environments to be c o n s i d e r e d are: g l a c i a l , v o l c a n i c , c o a s t a l , arid and f l u v i a l . M a p s a n d aerial photographs will be used to illustrate the various features. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n - C a n a d i a n e x a m p l e s and the interactions between people and their p h y s i c a l environment. G e o g r a p h y 114 Weather a n d C l i m a t e (F,S) (3,2,1) A c o u r s e introducing students to the study of our atmospheric! environment P r i n c i p l e s of climatology and meteorology will be explained (using films, lectures, labs and d i s c u s s i o n groups), to permit a b a s i c understanding of the weather we e x p e r i e n c e daily. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on C a n a d i a n e x a m p l e s and the interactions between climate and other elements of our environment, i n c l u d i n g m a n . G e o g r a p h y 200 T e c h n o l o g y a n d E c o n o m i c E n v i r o n m e n t s (S) (3,1,1,) A n examination of the c o n c e p t s and themes of e c o n o m i c geography in terms of production and c o n s u m p t i o n . The traditional primary, s e c o n d a r y , tertiary, a n d quaternary d i v i s i o n s in e c o n o m i c geography a r e r e v i e w e d in t e r m s of contemporary issues s u c h as development v e r s u s underdevelopment, poverty, a n d the location of industrial a c tivities. G e o g r a p h y 201 U r b a n S t u d i e s (S) (3,1,0) A c o u r s e based on the themes and problems e n c o u n t e r e d in the field of urban geography r e c o g n i z i n g the i n c r e a s i n g interdisciplinary nature of urban area a n a l y s i s and e x a m i n i n g urbanization as an historic and rapidly c o n t i n u i n g p r o c e s s . T h i s c o u r s e also e x a m i n e s the growth of urban regions and patterns of settlement, the d y n a m i c s of urban structure and land use, and the critical p r o b l e m s that f a c e m a n k i n d today due to past developments in the spatial, e c o n o m i c and s o c i a l organization of cities. E x a m p l e s will be taken from many parts of the world, though s p e c i a l attention will be made to the Lower M a i n l a n d of B C Geology Instructional Faculty G e o g r a p h y 216 Our Atmospheric E n v i r o n m e n t (F.S) (3,2,1) A n e x p a n s i o n of the c o n c e p t s outlined in G e o g r a p h y 114. Large and small scale atmospheric phenomena are d e s c r i b e d , and the p r o c e s s e s leading to their forms a n d distributions are d i s c u s s e d . Films, lectures, labs a n d d i s c u s s i o n groups will be used to explain some basic p h y s i c a l laws and how they c a n be applied to the p r o c e s s e s we observe. The subjects of atmospheric energy, moisture and motion will be c o v e r e d , with an a i m to provide the student with a deeper understanding of the atmosphere a n d its interactions with the Earth environment. Prerequisite: G e o g r a p h y 114 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . G e o g r a p h y 220 Canada: (3,1,0) Courses Its R e g i o n s , Peoples a n d Problems (F,S) Prerequisite: any one of G e o g r a p h y 106, 110, 111,112 or 114. This c o u r s e d e a l s with C a n a d a as a political region, a n d d i s c u s s e s regional issues b a s e d on C a n a d a ' s historical, s o c i a l and e c o n o m i c development. The c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to present information on past a n d contemporary C a n a d i a n issues, and draws on films, slides, and guest lectures to c o m plement s e l e c t e d readings. Athaide, D., B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Certificate (Brit. C o l . ) T h o m l i n s o n , A . G . , B.A. (Brit. Col.), M . S c . (Brit. Col.), Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Certificate (Brit. C o l . ) G e o l o g y c o u r s e s include weekly two-hour laboratory periods or equivalent field projects. T h e s e c o u r s e s are d e s i g n e d for students w h o wish to gain a general k n o w l e d g e of the earth's structure, c o m p o s i t i o n a n d history, as well as for those w h o intend to p r o c e e d to further studies in earth s c i e n c e s at a university. Students planning to transfer to U . B . C . may c o m b i n e G e o l o g y 110 and 111 to gain credit for U . B . C . G e o l o g y 105. G e o l o g y 110 Physical Geology (F) (3,2,1) T o p i c s to be studied i n c l u d e : structure and identification of c o m m o n minerals; e c o n o m i c mineral d e p o s i t s ; origin and c l a s s i f i c a t i o n of r o c k s ; weathering and e r o s i o n ; development of landforms; composition a n d structure of continents a n d ocean basins; volcanoes and earthquakes; palaeomagnetism, continental drift, sea-floor s p r e a d i n g a n d tectonics of lithospheric plates, internal constitution of the earth; origin of the earth. Transfer Credit for this c o u r s e is available to all local universities, as well a s the C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s program at S i m o n Fraser University. A s these topics entail the study of c h e m i c a l a n d p h y s i c a l p r o c e s s e s acting upon earth materials, students w h o have a little s c i e n c e b a c k g r o u n d s h o u l d consult the instructor to determine how they c a n best learn the n e e d e d principles. G e o g r a p h y 221 G e o l o g y 111 Historical G e o l o g y (S) (3,2,1) Map a n d Airphoto Interpretation (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisites: G e o g r a p h y 112 a n d 114 or written permission of the instructor. This c o u r s e deals with the u s e of maps a n d aerial photography to interpret natural a n d man-made p h e n o m e n a . Major topics: P h y s i c a l l a n d s c a p e s , urban development a n d regional land use. Lecture and labs will i n c l u d e t o p o g r a p h i c and g e o l o g i c m a p s ; vertical a n d o b l i q u e air photos; a n d b l a c k / w h i t e a n d c o l o u r photography. L a n d - u s e m a p s a n d multi-spectral remote s e n s i n g t e c h n i q u e s will be additional topics covered. Transfer to S.F.U.'s 250. G e o g r a p h y 249 Comparative Cultures: A Field Study Course In Geography (SU) (3) Prerequisite: D e p e n d s upon study area or written permission of instructor. This course applies the tools, techniques, c o n c e p t s a n d methods of the geographer to e x a m i n i n g the l a n d s c a p e . The f o c u s is primarily on these field r e s e a r c h t e c h n i q u e s as they apply to a study area; and the study area will alternate e a c h year between B . C . and/or C a n a d a and foreign countries. Note: B e c a u s e of c o s t s , instructor expertise, a n d the overall ability to offer a l l g e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s it s h o u l d be noted that this c o u r s e may not be offered in s o m e years; a n d may not be interdisciplinary. Prerequisite: G e o l o g y 110 or equivalent. The g e o l o g i c a l evolution of continents a n d o c e a n basins constitutes the main theme of this c o u r s e . T o p i c s to be studied include: relative a n d absolute a g e of minerals a n d r o c k s ; fossils and stratigraphic palaeontology; g e o l o g i c timescale; ancient environments and organic evolution; g e o l o g i c a l history of the North A m e r i c a n continent a n d the Atlantic a n d P a c i f i c o c e a n - b a s i n s ; g e o l o g i c a l history of o u r immediate environment. German Courses Instructional Faculty G e r m a n 200 H a n k i n , B., B.A. (Brit. Col.) M.A. (Wash.) S e c o n d Y e a r G e r m a n (F) (3,1,1) Instructional A s s o c i a t e Prerequisite: G e r m a n 101, or its equivalent with written permission of the Instructor. Freiberg, Renate A c o u r s e w h i c h includes c o n v e r s a t i o n , grammar, c o m position a n d the study of modern literary s e l e c t i o n s . S.F.U. Students who wish to p r o c e e d to S . F . U . and to pursue further c o u r s e s in G e r m a n are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S.F.U. for alt C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e G e r m a n c o u r s e s . Exemption from and placement in higher c o u r s e s are determined by the results of a placement test or other a s s e s s m e n t procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted w h i c h would count toward a major in G e r m a n . C o u r s e s w h i c h do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U.B.C. In the c a s e of U . B . C . present equivalent standards provide transfer on the following basis: Capilano College G e r m a n 100 a n d 101 (3 credits each) G e r m a n 200 a n d 201 (3 credits e a c h ) U.B.C. 100 (3) 200 (3) The student w i s h i n g to major fulfills d e p a r t m e n t a l requirements with G e r m a n 223, w h i c h may be taken in the third year by permission of the Department. Note: A l l c o u r s e s in G e r m a n include a total of five and o n e half hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; o n e a n d one-half hours of laboratory practice; a n d one hour of conversational practice with a native speaker. Native s p e a k e r s of G e r m a n w h o w i s h to take a first or s e c o n d - y e a r G e r m a n c o u r s e must consult with the G e r m a n instructor first. University rules governing s u c h students differ within departments, but the L a n g u a g e Department has c o r r e s p o n d e n c e dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer a n d point of entry; in order to avoid any m i s u n derstanding, s u c h students are invited to d i s c u s s these problems with the department prior to enrolment. G e r m a n 100 First Y e a r G e r m a n (F) (3,1.5,1) A c o m p r e h e n s i v e introduction to the G e r m a n l a n g u a g e using a multiple a p p r o a c h : e m p h a s i s on understanding a n d s p e a k i n g with reinforcement through reading a n d writing. G e r m a n 101 First Y e a r G e r m a n (S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 100, or its equivalent with written permission of the Instructor. This c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, whenever p o s s i b l e , in the term following G e r m a n 100. R e c o m m e n d e d also for those who are c o n s i d e r i n g taking G e r m a n 200 at a later date a n d need review work. 50 G e r m a n 201 S e c o n d Y e a r G e r m a n (S) (3,0,1.5) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 200, or its equivalent with written permission of the Instructor. This c o u r s e should be taken, whenever p o s s i b l e , in the term following G e r m a n 200. A continuation of the work in G e r m a n 200. C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n : C o n s u l t C . E . flier for information re non-credit conversational G e r m a n c o u r s e s . History Courses Instructional Faculty A n d r e w s , M., B.A. (Denison), M . A . (Brit. C o l . ) C a m p b e l l , R., A . A . (Glendale), B.A. (Calif.), M.A. (U.B.C.) Legates, M., B.A. (St. Louis), M . A . M.Phil., P h . D . (Yale) Students planning to major in history s h o u l d have at least four history c o u r s e s at the C o l l e g e . T h e s e c a n be any four c o u r s e s . A n intended major s h o u l d also have a broad s a m pling of c o u r s e s in the S o c i a l S c i e n c e s a n d Humanities. Students planning to major in history at S i m o n Fraser University should take six history c o u r s e s in the first two years. Students planning to take honours s h o u l d acquire a reading k n o w l e d g e of an appropriate n o n - E n g l i s h language. History 201 T h e City, 1800 T o T h e Present (S) (3,0,1) A study of North A m e r i c a n urban life, with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s p l a c e d on the p r o c e s s of urbanization in tha United States a n d C a n a d a . History 203 L o c a l History S e m i n a r ( S , S U ) (3,0,1) Interview with instructor required. A c o u r s e on the North S h o r e a n d Lower M a i n l a n d in the context of British C o l u m b i a history. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on methodology a n d research t e c h n i q u e s . History 103 Q u e b e c in C a n a d a ( S , S U ) (3,0,1) A n historical a p p r o a c h to the conflicts between E n g l i s h and French C a n a d i a n s a n d between "federalist" a n d " s e p a r a t i s t " French C a n a d i a n s . Not offered 1979/80. History 106 E u r o p e in World History, I (F) (3,0,1) A study of selected themes in Western European s o c i a l and political history from approximately 500 A . D . to 1500 A.D., with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s given to E u r o p e ' s c o n t a c t s a n d relations with other nations, cultures a n d peoples. History 107 E u r o p e in World History II (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to follow History 106, a n d covering the period from approximately 1500 A . D . to the present. History 108 Issues a n d T h e m e s in U . S . History (F) (3,0,1) A study of U.S. history, 1620 to 1877, f o c u s s i n g on s e l e c t e d themes a n d topics. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on the-growth of an " A m e r i c a n " culture. History 109 Issues a n d T h e m e s in U . S . History (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to follow History 108, a n d c o v e r i n g the period from 1865 to the present. History 110 C a n a d a Before C o n f e d e r a t i o n (F) (3,0,1) A n overview of the history of New F r a n c e and British North A m e r i c a , with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s given to the problems of a colonial culture a n d the development of C a n a d i a n society. History 111 C a n a d a S i n c e C o n f e d e r a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) A course d e s i g n e d to follow History 110, a n d to focus on the development of a C a n a d i a n culture and identity. History 200 T h e City, 1350-1850 (F) (3,0,1) A n analysis of Western E u r o p e a n urban life, including the mediaeval, mercantile a n d early industrial eras. S p e c i a l e m phasis is placed on the E n g l i s h City. 51 Humanities Courses Labour Instructional Faculty instructional Faculty Are s e c o n d e d from the E n g l i s h and Fine Arts departments. Lavalle, E., B . C o m m . , L L . B . , (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Duke) A m o n . N„ B.A. (Kent), M . A . (S.F.U.) K e l g a r d , D., B.A. ( U . B . C ) , M.A. (U.B.C.) M c G r a d y . L . B.A. (Toronto) L L . B . (Man.) M a c L e a n , A . H . . B.A. (Alta.) L L B . (U.B.C.) Paterson. C , L L . B . (Western Ont.) L L . M . (Harvard) R u s h , S„ B.A. (Western Ont.) L L . B . (U.B.C.) Sanguinetti, S., B.A.. M.A. (U.B.C.) S u n . C , B.A. (Hons.) (S.F.U.) L L . B . (Dalhousie) H u m a n i t i e s 100 Art and Literature in the Twentieth Century (F) (3,2,1.5) Humanities 100 is an interdisciplinary c o u r s e meeting in a rotation of lectures, s e m i n a r s a n d w o r k s h o p s . S e l e c t e d works and the important artistic movements of 19th and 20th century art and literature will be studied. Studies A continuation of Humanities 100. with an e x c l u s i v e focus on 20th century art and literature. The L a b o u r Studies Program is committed to meet the s p e c i a l education needs of B . C . workers, their o r g a n i z a t i o n s , and the labour movement in general. From its inception in 1974. the Labour Studies Program has been a co-operative venture of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e and the B . C . Federation of Labour. Note: University Transfer credit approved T o obtain equivalent credit for Fine Arts 171 and E n g l i s h 100 at the University of British C o l u m b i a , the student must do both terms. These c o u r s e s fulfill first year E n g l i s h requirements and carry equivalency to 6 hours credit in Fine Arts in the C a r e e r Art Program (Art 100-1). C o u r s e s in Labour Studies are offered on both a credit and non-credit basis. The Fall program is offered in O c t o b e r a n d N o v e m b e r and the Spring P r o g r a m in February through A p r i l . E a c h Fall and Spring a s p e c i a l brochure d e s c r i b i n g the courses to be offered is issued. This brochure is available by writing the Program or telephoning 986-1911 ( L o c a l 334). H u m a n i t i e s 101 Art a n d Literature in the Twentieth Century (S) (2,3,1.5) C o u r s e s are offered in the e v e n i n g a n d on w e e k e n d s . Many participants in the Program have their registration fees p a i d by the Education Department of their U n i o n . S o m e of the credit c o u r s e s offered in the P r o g r a m are as follows: Introduction to E c o n o m i c s For T r a d e U n i o n i s t s ( L S P 100) Introduction to the ba^ic c o n c e p t s of e c o n o m i c theory with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on their use for labour. In addition to basic analytical c o n c e p t s the c o u r s e will look at the problems of employment, inflation, r e c e s s i o n , government f i s c a l i n tervention, trade and tariffs, etc. Labour L a w : B . C . L a b o u r C o d e ( L S P 110) Fundamentals of labour law for unions under the provincial jurisdiction. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on s k i l l s n e c e s s a r y for arbitration procedures as well as main elements of the C o d e . Labour Law: C a n a d a L a b o u r C o d e ( L S P 111) Fundamentals of labour law for unions under the federal jurisdiction. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on t e a c h i n g the unionist how to research and assert C o d e and contract rights. L a b o u r L a w : P u b l i c S e r v i c e Staff Relations A c t ( L S P 113) F u n d a m e n t a l s of labour law for federal public e m p l o y e e s with a s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on the P u b l i c S e r v i c e Staff Relations Act. In addition to a review of legislation, the c o u r s e will introduce the fundamentals of certification, unfair labour practices, collective bargaining, arbitration and g r i e v a n c e s , strikes and picketing and t e c h n o l o g i c a l c h a n g e . C h a n g e s in legislation, s u c h as Bill C-22 will also be d i s c u s s e d . 52 Linguistics Issues in O c c u p a t i o n a l Health a n d Safety ( L S P 115) L i n g u i s t i c s 110 A general overview of the main s o c i a l , m e d i c a l , e c o n o m i c , t e c h n i c a l and legal issues involved in the health and safetyissues facing workers. Part of the c o u r s e will deal specifically with the provincial a n d federal jurisdictions on a separate basis. Introduction to L i n g u i s t i c s T h e Workers' C o m p e n s a t i o n A c t a n d T h e Workers' C o m p e n s a t i o n B o a r d ( L S P 116) A look at the statutory framework providing for W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n in B . C . and the procedures for c l a i m s and a p peals under the statute. Introduction to U n e m p l o y m e n t Insurance ( L S P 117) Procedures Introduction to the general theory a n d principles behind UIC with practical information on benefits, c l a i m s , appeals etc. R a c e a n d Ethnic Relations in the Union ( L S P 131) A c o u r s e to help unionists b e c o m e sensitive to c o m plexities of race and ethnic relations with a view to assisting the unions in integrating minorities a n d dealing with biases and prejudices at the w o r k p l a c e a n d in the community. History of the L a b o u r M o v e m e n t in C a n a d a ( L S P 140) A survey of the history of the labour movement in C a n a d a from the formation of the w o r k i n g c l a s s in the 19th century through the period of m a s s industrial unionism. E a c h period will highlight the struggles the labour movement had to w a g e to gain its rights to o r g a n i z e , obtain union recognition, a n d bargain collectively. In addition, there are a wide variety of labour education c o u r s e s offered on a non-credit basis, including personal service c o u r s e s d e s i g n e d to help the worker in dealing with day-to-day financial a n d legal problems. Special Labour Education Requests: Trade unions w h i c h wish s p e c i a l short c o u r s e s for seminars a s part of their in-house e d u c a t i o n programs for members or stewards have available the services of the L a b o u r Studies Program. W e offer a wide variety of labou a n d labour-related e d u c a t i o n a l programs: trade union history, e c o n o m i c s , law, o c c u p a t i o n a l health and safety, civil rights, parliamentary procedures a n d public s p e a k i n g , corporate financial analysis. C a n a d i a n politics, race a n d ethnic relations, a n d a host of other subjects s p e c i a l l y tailored to trade unions needs. Courses I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E n g l i s h 100 This course offers an introduction to language with e m phasis on the history a n d development of the E n g l i s h language. A d i s c u s s i o n of various problems related to language will be introduced. The c o u r s e also e x a m i n e s the intellectual a n d cultural s i g n i f i c a n c e of language and meaning, a n d presents various w a y s of recording language. Not offered 79/80. L i n g u i s t i c s 111 Introduction to L i n g u i s t i c s II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: English 100, L i n g u i s t i c s 110 r e c o m m e n d e d . The objective of this c o u r s e as an extension of L i n g u i s t i c s 110, is to survey the various a p p r o a c h e s to l a n g u a g e study, from normative grammar to generative grammar, a n d from historical linguistics to formal linguistics. The e m p h a s i s will be on contemporary studies in transformational grammar and in structural and formal linguistics. Not offered 79/80. Mathematics Courses Instructional Faculty Bentley, A.E.T., B . S c . (Brit. Col.), A . M . (Missouri), P h . D . (Missouri), Coordinator of Mathematics Goff, W m . S . , B . S c . (Victoria), M . S c . (Brit. C o l . ) Hauschildt, Ft., B . S c . (Hons) (Queen's), M . S c . (Brit. C o l . ) Rennie, R.R., B.S. (Brigham Young), M . S . (Brigham Young), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), Division C h a i r m a n , Natural S c i e n c e Division T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c . (Simon Fraser), M . S c . (Simon Fraser) V e m e r , R.H., B . S c . (Brit. C o l ) , M . S c . ( E . W . S . C ) , B . C . T e a c h i n g Certificate (Brit. Col.) Waterman, A., B . S c . (Brit. C o l ) , M . S c . (Simon Fraser). B . C . T e a c h i n g Certificate The Mathematics Department offers c o u r s e s primarily aimed at the first a n d s e c o n d year university level. For students requiring refresher c o u r s e s in mathematics or mathematics upgrading through the G r a d e 12 level, two o p tions are available: Option 1: M a t h 0 0 9 , 0 1 0 , 0 1 1 . 0 1 2 These courses are offered in the M a t h e m a t i c s R e s o u r c e Centre on a self study format. D i a g n o s t i c tests, w o r k b o o k s , audio tapes and individualized instruction are available. Registration for e a c h c o u r s e is o n g o i n g throughout the a c a d e m i c year. For placement within the series it is suggested that you c o n s u l t with a mathematics instructor. Post secondary institutions in B . C . r e c o g n i z e the s e q u e n c e of Math 010, 011 and 012 as an A l g e b r a 12 equivalent. These courses receive no transfer credit at U . B . C . or U. V i c . but the s e q u e n c e Math 010, 011 and 012 receives transfer credit for S.F.U.'s Math 100. B. S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G T O P R O C E E D IN A R T S O R C O M MERCE PROGRAMS. Students planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of Arts, w h o wish to satisfy a one-year s c i e n c e c o u r s e e l e c tive, normally take one of the following two c o u r s e packages: Math 101 a n d 100 Math 101 a n d 102 Math 101 a n d 103 (not for S.F.U.) Math 108 a n d 103 (not for S.F.U.) M a t h 108 a n d 100 Math 108 a n d 101 Students planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of C o m m e r c e normally take: a) for transfer to U . B . C , one of the following p a c k a g e s : Math 101 a n d 100 Math 108 a n d 100 b) for transfer to S.F.U., o n e of the following c o u r s e s : M a t h 100 or M a t h 105. F o r H o n o u r s E c o n o m i c s : M a t h 108. (In addition, Math 101 is advised.) Students planning to study E c o n o m i c s at U . B . C . must take M a t h 110, M a t h 111 is a l s o required for H o n o u r s E c o n o m i c s at U . B . C . M a t h 009 Arithmetic ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: None. A review of the basic arithmetic operations. A p p l i c a t i o n s to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas a n d volumes. This is a self-study c o u r s e primarily intended for returning students who require a basic math refresher. Option 2: M a t h 1 0 5 Math 105 is a p r e c a l c u l u s c o u r s e at the A l g e b r a 12 level w h i c h is recognized by post-secondary institutions in B . C . as an A l g e b r a 12 equivalent. It is run on a regular c l a s s r o o m format a n d requires a " C " grade or better in A l g e b r a 11 as a pre-requisite. Math 105 receives no transfer credit to U.B.C. or U.Vic, but does receive transfer credit for S.F U.'s Math 100. Entering students s h o u l d u s e the following two s e c t i o n s , Parts A and B, as guidelines for selecting mathematics courses at the first year level. D u e to the s p e c i a l i z e d needs of s o m e programs at the universities, the M a t h e m a t i c s Department advises students to consult the university c a l e n d a r and to seek g u i d a n c e from a c o l l e g e c o u n s e l l o r or mathematics instructor for the appropriate c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n . A. S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G T O P R O C E E D IN S C I E N C E . MATHEMATICS, ARCHITECTURE. ENGINEERING A N D FORESTRY. T h e s e students normally take Math 110, 111 during their first year. C o m m e n t s : 1. Math 101, 102 are r e c o m m e n d e d by s o m e s c i e n c e departments at S . F . U . 2. S c i e n c e students s h o u l d consider taking Math 103 as an elective in their first year. 3. Math 110, 111 replaces the previous c a l c u l u s s e q u e n c e Math 112. 113. 114. 54 M a t h 010 Elementary A l g e b r a ( S U , F . S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: Math 009 or permission of instructor. Reviews and develops basic algebraic skills n e c e s s a r y in the solution of algebraic equations a n d the factorization of polynomials. Introduction to analytic geometry with e m p h a s i s on straight lines. The c o u r s e is offered on a self-study format. M a t h 011 Intermediate A l g e b r a ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: Math 010 or permission of instructor. This c o u r s e continues the development of the algebraic skills introduced in M a t h 010. Inequalities; functions, exponential a n d logarithmic functions; systems of linear equations; analytic geometry with e m p h a s i s on the c o n i c sections. This c o u r s e is offered on a self-study format. M a t h 012 Trigonometry ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: Math 011 or permission of instructor. Introduction to the trigonometric functions, trigonometric identities; inverses; triangles; vectors a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s . This c o u r s e is offered on a self-study format. M a t h 100 Introduction to C o l l e g e M a t h e m a t i c s (F,S) (3,0,1) M a t h 110 C a l c u l u s I (F.S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 or Math 010. Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 12 or Math 105 or Math 012 A study of set theory; matrices, probability, optimization t e c h n i q u e s . linear programming; Math 101 Introduction to Statistics (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 or Math 010. An introduction to the l a n g u a g e of statistics a n d some statistical methods, including random variables a n d their distribution; random sampling; normal distribution, estimation of parameters a n d testing hypotheses. M a t h 102 Statistical M e t h o d s (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 101. A study of important statistical methods c o m m o n l y used in the analysis of research data, i n c l u d i n g : t-tests and their n o n parametric competitors, o n e a n d two-way a n a l y s i s of variance, chi-square tests a n d regression analysis. M a t h 103 Introduction to C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m m i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Any first year Math c o u r s e w h i c h may be taken concurrently. A n introduction to B A S I C programming for simple s c i e n tific c a l c u l a t i o n s , as well as various data p r o c e s s i n g problems in statistics a n d a c c o u n t i n g to provide a general understanding of computers a n d s p e c i f i c e x p e r i e n c e in writing and executing programs. A brief review of f u n c t i o n s : trigonometry; analytic geometry; the derivative, techniques of differentiation, a p plications of the derivative to M A X - M I N a n d related rate problems, the definite integral, logarithmic and exponential functions. M a t h 111 C a l c u l u s II (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: Math 110 A study of the anti-derivative; the integral, techniques of integration and applications of the integral; vector algebra, the c a l c u l u s of vector v a l u e d functions, c o m p l e x numbers, s e q u e n c e s , infinite series a n d Taylor's T h e o r e m . THE MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT OFFERS A FULL S E C O N D Y E A R U N I V E R S I T Y T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M IN MATHEMATICS. STUDENTS PLANNING TO TAKE 200 MATHEMATICS SHOULD SEEK ADVICE MATHEMATICS INSTRUCTORS. LEVEL FROM M a t h 200 L i n e a r A l g e b r a (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C " grade. A study of vector s p a c e s , linear transformation, matrices, determinants, e i g e n v a l u e s , quadratic forms. M a t h 215 Introduction to A n a l y s i s I (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: At least a " B " average in Math 110 and 111. Math 104 E l e m e n t s of C o m p u t e r S c i e n c e (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 103 A projects c o u r s e with projects oriented to computer structure; programming i a n g u a g e s ( F O R T R A N , C O B O L , machine and/or assembler); algorithms: a n d applications to numerical and non-numerical problems. M a t h 105 Pre-Calculus M a t h e m a t i c s (F,S) (3,0,1) N O T E : T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable to U . B . C . A c o u r s e for students w h o plan to p r o c e e d in mathematics. L o g i c , sets, functions, limits of s e q u e n c e s and series: introduction to continuity, the derivitive, R i e m a n n Integral. M a t h 230 C a l c u l u s III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C " grade. Math 200 s h o u l d be taken concurrently, if not already completed Analytic geometry of three d i m e n s i o n s : partial differentiation, applications; double a n d triple integrations; transformations to various coordinate systems. Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 with at least a " C " grade or Math 010. M a t h 231 C a l c u l u s IV (S) (3,0,1) A review of algebra a n d a d i s c u s s i o n of functions, graphs and trigonometry. Primarily for students w h o anticipate taking c a l c u l u s c o u r s e s or w h o wish to take an introductory c o u r s e in physics but are weak in mathematics. Prerequisite: Math 230 M a t h 108 C a l c u l u s for B u s i n e s s a n d S o c i a l S c i e n c e s (F) (3,0,1) Line and surface integrals; G r e e n ' s T h e o r e m ; vector fields; divergence theorem; S t o k e ' s T h e o r e m ; applications. M a t h 235 Introduction to Differential E q u a t i o n s (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 12 or Math 105 or M a t h 011 Prerequisite: Math 230 a n d Math 200 with at least a " C " grade in e a c h . A brief review of algebra and functions. The derivative with applications to curve s k e t c h i n g , optimization, growth a n d decay. Functions of several variables, partial derivatives a n d applications. The integral with applications. A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; s e c o n d order linear equations; first order linear systems; phase plane; applications to physics, geometry a n d electrical circuits. 55 Philosophy Courses Instructional Faculty Philosophy 200 Battersby, M„ B.A. (NYU), Philosophy, P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) D i x o n , J„ B.A. (Brit. Col.), P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) Political Philosophy A l l of the P h i l o s o p h y c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a . Prospective philosophy majors should consult the faculty. This c o u r s e s e e k s to provide an analysis of the rationale for political institutions a n d action. S o m e of the questions c o n s i d e r e d : Are we really obliged to obey the law? C a n the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation of law in the p o l i c e m a n ' s holster? D o e s the State, have good reas for involving itself in c o m p u l s o r y programs of e d u c a t i o n ? This is not a study in the history of political thought, and every effort is made to view problems from c o n temporary perspectives. Philosophy 101 Introductory P h i l o s o p h y (F) (3,0,1) (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. No prerequisite. A n introduction to the philosophies of morality, politics, k n o w l e d g e , and the invisible world, with e m p h a s i s on the relationship between law a n d morality; civil d i s o b e d i e n c e ; reason and p a s s i o n ; Existentialism; F e m i n i s m ; freedom and determinism; C o m m u n i s m : doubt and certainty; the nature of reality. The e m p h a s i s of this c o u r s e varies from instructor to instructor, and prospective students s h o u l d consult the outlines of d i f f e r e n t instructor's courses when registering. Philosophy 201 Political Philosophy (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of P h i l o s o p h y 200. Philosophy 210 Metaphysics a n d Epistemology (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. Philosophy 102 Introductory Philosophy (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of P h i l o s o p h y 101. Note: There is no prerequisite for this c o u r s e (one does not need completed credit in P h i l o s o p h y 101 to take it). Students entering the C o l l e g e are w e l c o m e to begin their introduction to philosophy with this c o u r s e . A n introduction to s o m e of the traditional problems of metaphysics and epistemology. S o m e of the questions c o n sidered are: Does free will exist? Is s e n s e perception a primary or reliable source of k n o w l e d g e ? What is the nature of c a s u a l i t y ? Is materialism true? What is the nature of mind? What is the relationship between mind and body? What is the scientific method? While this is not an historically oriented c o u r s e , it will cover some of the c l a s s i c a l attempts to answer these questions. Philosophy 211 M e t a p h y s i c s a n d Epistemology Philosophy 110 L o g i c a l S e l f - D e f e n s e (F) (3,0,1) A continuation of P h i l o s o p h y 210. Philosophy 220 Philosophy in Literature (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. A n introduction to the basic rules of clear a n d rational thought. The student will be taught through extensive e x a m ples how to detect false reasoning, illegitimate a p p e a l s to emotions, i n c o n s i s t e n c i e s and contradictions. The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point that we c a n no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, and c a n develop our own arguments with clarity and c o n f i d e n c e . Philosophy 111 Reason and Freedom: A n Introduction Philosophy of P s y c h o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) to the No prerequisite. C a n there really be a s c i e n c e of human behaviour? H a s p s y c h o l o g y shown that w e are not in control of our personality a n d behaviour? O r c a n p s y c h o l o g y show us how to attain freedom through a w a r e n e s s of our u n c o n s c i o u s n e s s drives? D o e s psychology have ethical i m p l i c a t i o n s ? D i d Freud, for example, prove that w e s h o u l d live sexually unrepressed lives? T h e s e and similar questions will form the f o c u s of this inquiry into the p h i l o s o p h i c a l implications of psychology. 56 (S) (3,0,1) Not offered in 79/80. P h i l o s o p h y 221 E x i s t e n t i a l i s m in Literature (S) (3,0,1) Not offered in 79/80. Physics Courses Instructional Faculty Freeman, M., B . S c . (Brit. Col.), M . S c . ( C a l . Tech.), P h . D . (Brit. Col.) Henry, M.I., B.A. (Alta.), M . S c . (Brit. C o l . ) Palffy-Muhoray, P., B . A . S c . (Brit. Col.), M . A . S c . (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Brit. C o l . ) A l l first-year P h y s i c s c o u r s e s include bi-weekly laboratory periods. There are lab fees for laboratory c o u r s e s . P h y s i c s 104 P r e r e q u i s i t e : P h y s i c s 200, M a t h e m a t i c s 230, 200. M a t h e m a t i c s 235 is a pre or corequisite. P h y s i c s 211 must be taken concurrently. The study of electric and magnetic fields; fundamentals of a.c. theory; L R , R C , L R C circuits; r e s o n a n c e ; m e c h a n i c a l a n a l o g s ; forced and d a m p e d oscillations. P h y s i c s 210 P h y s i c s Laboratory I (F) (1,3,0) Principles of P h y s i c s I (F) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: N o P h y s i c s prerequisite. M a t h e m a t i c s Mathematics 100 or M a t h e m a t i c s 105 is required. P h y s i c s 201 Electric C i r c u i t s (S) (3,0,1) 12, This course, together with P h y s i c s 105, will serve as an introduction to physics for students with little or no b a c k g r o u n d in the subject. They are intended for students not taking further studies in s c i e n c e . T o p i c s include m e c h a n i c s , energy, ray optics a n d heat. P h y s i c s 105 P r i n c i p l e s of P h y s i c s II (8) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: as for P h y s i c s 200, which must be taken c o n currently. A weekly three-hour lab in mathematical methods, e l e c trical measurements a n d optics. P h y s i c s 211 P h y s i c s Laboratory II (S) (1,3,0) Prerequisite: as for P h y s i c s 201, which must be taken c o n currently. A weekly three-hour lab in electron d y n a m i c s , electricity, Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 104 or 110. and electronics. A continuation of P h y s i c s 104, e m p h a s i z i n g electricity, magnetism, gravitation, relativity, light, quantum theory, a n d nuclear physics. P h y s i c s 220 M e c h a n i c s I (F) (3,0,1) P h y s i c s 108 B a s i c P h y s i c s (F) (4.5, 1.5, 1.5) P r e r e q u i s i t e : P h y s i c s 110 or 108, M a t h e m a t i c s 111. M a t h e m a t i c s 230 is a pre or corequisite. Prerequisite: M a t h e m a t i c s 12 or 105. M a t h e m a t i c s 110 is a pre or corequisite. Elementary m e c h a n i c s of particles using c a l c u l u s , v i s c o u s forces, energy conservation, c o l l i s i o n s , rigid body d y n a m i c s . The c o u r s e covers the material of P h y s i c s 110, together with those topics from P h y s i c s 104 needed by a student with no previous b a c k g r o u n d in p h y s i c s . A student p a s s i n g this c o u r s e s h o u l d be able to enter P h y s i c s 111 in the S p r i n g . This c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 221, is required for students majoring in p h y s i c s and r e c o m m e n d e d for students majoring in mathematics or computer s c i e n c e . P h y s i c s 221 M e c h a n i c s II a n d S p e c i a l Relativity (S) (3,0,1) P h y s i c s 110 G e n e r a l P h y s i c s I (F) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 12, P h y s i c s 11 or P h y s i c s 104: a n d M a t h e m a t i c s 110 is a pre or corequisite. A survey o f m e c h a n i c s c o v e r i n g v e c t o r s , s t a t i c s , kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration and s p e c i a l relativity. P r e r e q u i s i t e : P h y s i c s 220, M a t h e m a t i c s 230, 200, M a t h e m a t i c s 235 is a r e c o m m e n d e d corequisite. A continuation of P h y s i c s 220 to simple harmonic motion, a c c e l e r a t e d frames of reference, s p e c i a l relativity, a n d c e n tral forces and orbits. A n introduction to s p e c i a l relativity using space-time. P h y s i c s 111 G e n e r a l P h y s i c s II (8) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 110 or 108 a n d M a t h 130, 112 or 110. M a t h e m a t i c s 111 is a pre or corequisite. Electrical and magnetic fields, circuits, wave optics, a n d atomic a n d nuclear p h y s i c s . P h y s i c s 200 Heat, Kinetic Theory a n d O p t i c s (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 111 or 108 a n d M a t h e m a t i c s 111. M a t h e m a t i c s 200 and 230 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. P h y s i c s 210 must be taken concurrently. Heat, temperature, the first a n d s e c o n d laws of therm o d y n a m i c s , kinetic theory, and p h y s i c a l optics. This c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 201, 210 a n d 211, is required for students majoring in p h y s i c s or chemistry. 57 Political S c i e n c e Courses Instructional Faculty J a c k s o n , A . , B . S c . (London), M . S c . (London) Lavalle, E., B . C o m m . , L L . B . (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Duke) Mier, P., B.A. (S.F.U.), M . A . (Toronto) Sanguinetti, S., B.A., M.A. (U.B.C.) Political S c i e n c e 100 C o m p a r a t i v e G o v e r n m e n t ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the elements of government and politics in a comparative perspective. This c o u r s e will take two or more political cultures a n d examine the formal a n d informal political structures and p r o c e s s e s in e a c h . Political S c i e n c e 100 Political S c i e n c e 200 C a n a d i a n G o v e r n m e n t (F) (3,0,1) A study of the p r o c e s s e s , i d e o l o g i e s a n d government structures which make up the C a n a d i a n political reality. T h i s c o u r s e will examine the role of the prime minister's office, the bureaucracy, political parties, federal-provincial relations, and C a n a d i a n foreign policy. Political S c i e n c e 201 International Relations (F) (3,0,1) A study of a s p e c t s of global conflict a n d world politics. T h e c o u r s e provides students with the b a c k g r o u n d n e c e s s a r y for an understanding of s o u r c e s of power, t e c h n i q u e s of wielding influence and the formulation of foreign policy. The c o u r s e will examine the origins of the C o l d War, Imperialism, local and global wars, detente, and problems of militarization and disarmament. S P L C o m p a r a t i v e G o v e r n m e n t ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A self-paced learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to Political S c i e n c e 100 open to any student but d e s i g n e d to be of particular value to those students w h o are unable to attend the Lynnmour C a m p u s or a satellite centre on a regular basis. T w o visits to the Lynnmour C a m p u s or other satellite centres will be required of all registered students; these visits to be arranged by the student a n d instructor. (Not offered in 1979-80.) Political S c i e n c e 202 Government a n d Politics of British Columbia (S) (3-0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will examine the government structure a n d political p r o c e s s of British C o l u m b i a . Not offered in 79/80. Political S c i e n c e 203 International O r g a n i z a t i o n s (S) (3,0,1) Political S c i e n c e 101 C o n t e m p o r a r y Ideologies ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the historical development of c o n temporary ideologies with an examination of the ideas exp r e s s e d in the political p r o c e s s . The c o u r s e includes a critical analysis of L i b e r a l i s m , C o n s e r v a t i s m , F a s c i s m , S o c i a l Democracy and Marxism-Leninism. Political S c i e n c e 103 Political A n a l y s i s (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to political analysis a n d methodology. U s i n g C a n a d a as a focus, students will b e c o m e familiar with the theories and tools used by political scientists to analyze problems. Political S c i e n c e 120 P u b l i c Policy (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will look at the structure a n d organization of the administrative branch of the government at all three levels. It will examine the role and function of regulatory bodies a n d tribunals in the area of citizen interactions with the administrative branch. Political S c i e n c e 199 Introduction to L a b o u r Relations ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A study of the nature a n d function of labour management relations as they have e m e r g e d in C a n a d a in the 20th c e n tury. It includes a history of the trade union movement. It also e x a m i n e s the practices a n d procedures of bargaining and settlement of disputes; negotiations, g r i e v a n c e a n d arbitration, strikes a n d lock outs. Included is an analysis of provincial and federal labour legislation. T h i s c o u r s e is r e c o m m e n d e d by the Labour Studies P r o g r a m . 58 S i n c e the e m e r g e n c e of the C o n c e r t of Europe in 1815, i n ternational organizations have played an i n c r e a s i n g l y important role in world politics. This c o u r s e e x a m i n e s the history a n d development of international a n d regional governmental and non-governmental o r g a n i z a t i o n s w h i c h act in the international arena. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on t h e U n i t e d N a t i o n s , the N o r t h A t l a n t i c Treaty O r g a n i z a t i o n , the Warsaw Pact, a n d the E u r o p e a n E c o n o m i c Community. Psychology Courses P s y c h o l o g y 204 Instructional Faculty Avery, P., B.A. (York), M . E d . (Toronto) E c c l e s , E., R.N. (St. Pauls), B.A., M.A. (U.B.C.) Hawrylko, R., B.A. (Hunter), M.A. (S.F.U.) J e a n , P., B.A. (McMaster), M.A. (Windsor) M a c N e i l l , M., B.A. (Univ. of Alberta), M.A. (Manitoba), P h . D . (Calgary) M o e , S., B.A. M.A. (Mexico) Pareis, N., B . S c . (Rutgers), P h . D . (Texas) Developmental Psychology (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 A study of the c h i l d ' s development from infancy to a d o l e s c e n c e , including the development of s o c i a l behaviour, personality, language and cognitive p r o c e s s e s . Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to do research projects a n d observations. P s y c h o l o g y 205 The Psychology of A g i n g (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 Psychology 100 Introduction to P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to introduce the beginning p s y c h o l o g y student to some of the major c o n c e p t s a n d a p p r o a c h e s necessary to an understanding of human behaviour from a p s y c h o l o g i c a l perspective. T o p i c s c o v e r e d include learning, development, motivation, emotion, stress, sexuality, personality theory, behaviour disorders, humanistic p s y c h o l o g y a n d problems in society. A c o u r s e dealing with the p s y c h o l o g i c a l development of the individual from early adulthood to death, with e m p h a s i s on intellectual a n d personality c h a n g e s , and the s o c i a l c o n text of aging. A s well as being e x p o s e d to basic research in the area, students will be e n c o u r a g e d to d e v e l o p an e m phatic understanding of the aging p r o c e s s through s u c h means as community projects. P s y c h o l o g y 206 Adolescent Psychology (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 P s y c h o l o g y 101 B e h a v i o u r a l Theory (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 A c o u r s e for those students w h o desire a complete survey of the b a s i c areas of p s y c h o l o g y (when c o m b i n e d with P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 ) , before p r o c e e d i n g to an in-depth study of particular areas. T h e 1 0 1 c o u r s e c o v e r s s u c h topics as statistics, experimental d e s i g n , p s y c h o l o g i c a l assessment, l e a r n i n g theory, memory a n d c o g n i t i o n , p h y s i o l o g i c a l p s y c h o l o g y , sensation a n d perception, altered states of c o n s c i o u s n e s s , therapy a n d environmental p s y c h o l o g y . P s y c h o l o g y 200 Social Psychology ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 A study of the d y n a m i c s and effect of s o c i a l influence on individual human behaviour. T h e c o u r s e entails a look at s u c h t o p i c s a s attitudes a n d a t t i t u d e - c h a n g e , group p r o c e s s e s , leadership, prejudice, impression formation, c o n formity, altruism a n d interpersonal attraction. P s y c h o l o g y 201 G r o u p D y n a m i c s (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 This c o u r s e will examine the research findings and theories pertaining to the development a n d behaviour of a d o l e s c e n t s . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will include b i o l o g i c a l and s e x u a l maturation, personality, intelligence, motivation and s o c i a l issues s u c h as d e l i n q u e n c y and family relationships. P s y c h o l o g y 220 Theory of Personality (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 A study of the various theories of personality from p s y c h o a n a l y t i c a l theory to learning theory. Included will be the ideas of Freud, R o g e r s , M a s l o w and others. C o n c e p t s to be c o n s i d e r e d will include the development of personality, and the structure a n d d y n a m i c s of personality. T h e c o u r s e will include consideration of theoretical problems, a n d students will b e c o m e familiar with empirical research in the area. P s y c h o l o g y 222 Abnormal Psychology (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 1 0 0 A study of the various models and perspectives for viewing patterns and treatment of abnormal behaviour. Included will be an examination of the research as to how the medical model, behaviouristic s c h o o l , humanistic s c h o o l a n d interpersonal s c h o o l view normal a n d abnormal behaviour. The c o u r s e will also f o c u s on the historical a n d c o n temporary a p p r o a c h e s to treatment. A study of the behaviour of people in small groups, inc l u d i n g research methods, verbal a n d non-verbal c o m munication, interaction d y n a m i c s , interpersonal influence and perception, sensitivity a n d encounter groups, group therapy for normals, and contemporary theories of human interaction. The student will have an opportunity intellectually to explore the d y n a m i c s of small groups, a n d to e x p e r i e n c e what goes on when s / h e interacts with others. This c o u r s e provides an intellectual a n d experiential a p proach to small group theory and allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive, small group setting. 59 Religious Studies Courses Instructional Faculty: G a l l a c h e r , R.J., B.A. (Brit. Col.), T e a c h e r ' s Cert. (B.C.), M.A. (Brit. Col.), R e l i g i o n , P h . D . (Walden U.) Religious S t u d i e s 210 T h e O l d T e s t a m e n t (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. R e l i g i o u s Studies c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit to all universities in British C o l u m b i a . Students who wish to concentrate on one facet of religion or on one religion's tradition are e n c o u r a g e d to make an a p pointment with the instructor for enrolment under s p e c i a l arrangements. The f o c u s of this c o u r s e will be an examination of the O l d Testament texts; L a w , P r o p h e t s a n d Writings through historical, theological a n d literary p e r s p e c t i v e s a n d how s p e c i f i c O l d Testament texts have influenced contemporary and subsequent literature through the a g e s . C o u r s e format will include lectures (where appropriate), d i s c u s s i o n s , guest s p e a k e r s and field trips to J e w i s h a n d C h r i s t i a n S e r v i c e s . Religious Studies 100 J u d a i s m , Christianity, Islam (F) (3,0,1) Religious S t u d i e s 211 T h e New T e s t a m e n t (S) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. No prerequisite. A n investigation of the religions of the West: J u d a i s m , Christianity, Islam. E m p h a s i s will be on the origins and c o n temporary beliefs, rites a n d forms of worship in e a c h of the three religions dealing with the ultimate c o n c e r n s of m a n . C o u r s e format will include d i s c u s s i o n s a n d use of m e d i a as well as guest s p e a k e r s a n d field trips to relgious services. A n examination of the New Testament writings with s p e c i f i c e m p h a s i s on the life and t e a c h i n g s of J e s u s and the development of the Christian C h u r c h . Included will be a study of the literature influenced by N e w Testament texts. C o u r s e format will include lectures (where appropriate), d i s c u s s i o n s , guest s p e a k e r s a n d field trips to Christian services, Religious S t u d i e s 101 Hinduism, Buddhism, Sikhism (S) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. A n investigation of the religions of India: H i n d u i s m , S i k h i s m and B u d d h i s m ; the interaction of B u d d h i s m with Taoism and C o n f u c i a n i s m in C h i n a and the development and contemporary beliefs of these religions with particular e m p h a s i s on s p e c i f i c themes s u c h as suffering, revelation, salvation a n d e x i s t e n c e . C o u r s e format will include d i s c u s s i o n s , use of media as well as guest s p e a k e r s a n d field trips to religious services. Religious S t u d i e s 102 S e a r c h for M e a n i n g (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. This c o u r s e will focus on the need for meaning in our lives and the ways in w h i c h religious thinkers have e x p r e s s e d that need. T o p i c s will include varieties of religious e x p e r i e n c e , the need for religion and whether or not religion c a n provide humans with ultimate meaning. T o p i c s will be presented through contemporary religious a n d literary writings. C o u r s e format will include d i s c u s s i o n s a n d films as well as guest s p e a k e r s and visits to c h u r c h e s , s y n a g o g u e s , temples and a parish Religious S t u d i e s 103 S e a r c h for M e a n i n g in Religious Literature (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. The focus in this c o u r s e will be on s p e c i f i c investigation of themes — free will, salvation, alienation, s e c u l a r i s m , church and myth — and how e a c h of these is portrayed in the major religions of m a n . R e a d i n g s will i n c l u d e contemporary religious a n d literary writings as well as s e l e c t i o n s from religious texts s u c h as the Bible, Koran, Bhagavad Qita, Tao Te Ching, e t c . C o u r s e format will include d i s c u s s i o n s a n d films as well as guest s p e a k e r s a n d visits to c h u r c h e s , s y n a g o g u e s , temples a n d a parish. 60 N B : R e l i g i o u s Studies 100 and 101 were formerly R e l i g i o u s Studies 200 a n d 201 (see C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e C a l e n d a r , 78/79). Re-articulation is in progress. Sociology Courses Instructional Faculty S o c i o l o g y 222 G r o v e s , P. Heffron, B.A. (U. of Toronto), P h . D . (U.B.C.) M i n h a s , S., B.A. (U. of Toronto), M.A. (Western) Speier, M., B.A. (New York), M.A., P h . D . (Berkeley) Sociology of the Arts (F) (3,0,1) A l l c o u r s e s in S o c i o l o g y are geared to help the student c o m p r e h e n d personal a n d global events in a relevant a n d meaningful way. S o c i o l o g y s h o u l d thus help the student in his/her endeavour to c o p e with o u r increasingly c o m p l e x society. A major in s o c i o l o g y leads to work in the following areas: s o c i a l work, t e a c h i n g , probation work, c r i m i n o l o g y , industrial s o c i o l o g y , c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , media, government research, and related areas. Students registering for S o c i o l o g y c o u r s e s s h o u l d note that although there are no prerequisites for any of the courses, c o u r s e material is, generally, of a cumulative nature. T h o s e w h o intend to major s h o u l d c o m p l e t e S o c i o l o g y 100 and 101. A l l 200-level c o u r s e s will provide the S i m o n Fraser transfer student with a s s i g n e d credit toward 2nd-year courses. The U.B.C. transfer student will be provided with u n a s s i g n e d credit toward a major. Sociology 100 A m u s i c a l , artistic a n d s o c i o l o g i c a l study of creative e n d e a v o u r s of western civilization through painting, music and sculpture to c i n e m a . Lectures are illustrated with both pictures a n d m u s i c . The c o u r s e will relate the various art forms to the s o c i a l context in w h i c h they exist; h e n c e , it will develop an understanding of the interrelationships between ideas (expressed as Art), s o c i a l institutions a n d s o c i a l behaviour. T h i s c o u r s e may be taken by itself or as a c o m plement to S o c i o l o g y 211, M e d i a and S o c i e t y . S o c i o l o g y 211 M e d i a a n d Society (S) (3,0,1) A n intensive a n d fascinating study of the relationship b e tween a s o c i e t y ' s c o m m u n i c a t i o n systems a s m e d i a a n d its t e c h n o l o g i c a l , e c o n o m i c , a n d political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. T h i s will e n c o m p a s s current forms of television, radio, m a g a z i n e s , all forms of advertisement, news production, a n d the movies. This c o u r s e may be taken by itself or as a complement to S o c i o l o g y 222 — S o c i o l o g y of the Arts. S o c i a l Structures (F,S) (3,0,1) The c o u r s e systematically c o v e r s major topics a n d issues of c o n c e r n to anyone w h o w i s h e s to begin to understand, and c o m e to terms with the modern world in a personally and s o c i o l o g i c a l l y relevant way. The b a s i c theme of the c o u r s e is that w e are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, p r o d u c e d , structured and run by the " s o c i a l m a c h i n e " . This " s o c i a l m a c h i n e " c o m p r i s e s institutions s u c h as the family, religion, inequality, mass media, e d u c a t i o n as well as rules, c u s t o m s , laws, e t c . This c o u r s e looks at how we are i n fluenced by this " m a c h i n e " and, in turn, how we react to that influence. Sociology 123 C u r r e n t S o c i a l Issues (F) (3,0,1) A study of s o c i a l c o n c e r n s and cultural problems c o m m o n to current conditions in the twentieth century in our society and in global perspective. C l a s s i c a l s o c i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s will be used to analyze media c o v e r a g e a n d popular perception of issues and problems. Current issues are placed in the context of the student's daily world, a s it i s h a p p e n i n g now — this s h o u l d develop the student's s o c i o l o g i c a l imagination. Note: S o c i o l o g y 100 a n d 101 transfer together as a unit to S i m o n Fraser University. S o c i o l o g y 210 S o c i o l o g y of U n d e r D e v e l o p m e n t ( S ) (3,0,1) Sociology 101 Concepts a n d T h e o r i e s of Society (F,S) (3,0,1) With current s o c i a l c o n d i t i o n s in mind, this c o u r s e analyzes the general development of s o c i o l o g i c a l thought in the nineteenth a n d twentieth centuries. W e will look at the two major a p p r o a c h e s to understanding society (functionalism a n d conflict theory) a n d employ these a p p r o a c h e s to analyze events of current interest. Note: S o c i o l o g y 100 a n d 101 transfer together as a unit to Simon Fraser University. S o c i o l o g y 200 C a n a d i a n Society (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the study of C a n a d i a n society a n d culture, including an a n a l y s i s of the major C a n a d i a n institutions studied on a na'iongi basis, with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on the dynamics of c h a n g e within e a c h . A study of the major theories of under development, e m pirical studies of under development, s o c i a l a n d cultural responses to under development, and the inter-relationship of s o c i a l institutions in a n d between the " d e v e l o p e d " a n d "under-developed" societies. This c o u r s e will provide students with an opportunity to better understand the s o c i a l , e c o n o m i c , and political c a u s e s and effects of under development. Both s o c i o l o g i c a l a n d " n o n - s o c i o l o g i c a l " literature on the meaning a n d effects of "under d e v e l o p m e n t " will be c o n s i d e r e d . This c o u r s e may be taken by itself or as a complement to S o c i o l o g y 223, Current S o c i a l Issues. Transfer credit c o m plete for U . B . C . in p r o c e s s for S i m o n Fraser. Sociology 201 British C o l u m b i a Society (S) (3,0,1) A continued s o c i o l o g i c a l a p p r o a c h to the d y n a m i c s of C a n a d i a n society with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on British C o l u m b i a . C l o s e attention will be given to s o c i a l movements a n d cultural developments w h i c h have s h a p e d British C o l u m b i a n society. 61 Spanish Courses Instructional Faculty Furstenwald, C , B.A. (Mexico) S o u z a , A . G . , B.A. (Hons.), M . A . (U.B.C.) Instructional Associates G a c i n a , Jeannette M c L e l l a n , Olga S e w e r i n , Margarita, B.A. (U.B.C.) S.F.U. Students who wish to p r o c e e d to S . F . U . and to pursue further c o u r s e s in S p a n i s h are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S.F.U. for all C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S p a n i s h c o u r s e s . Exemption from and placement in higher c o u r s e s are determined by the results of a placement test or other a s s e s s m e n t procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted w h i c h w o u l d count toward a major in S p a n i s h . C o u r s e s which d o not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U.B.C. At U . B . C , present equivalent standards equate S p a n i s h 100 a n d 101 with S p a n i s h 100; S p a n i s h 200 a n d 201 with S p a n i s h 200. The student w h o plans a major in S p a n i s h may enter U.B.C.'s S p a n i s h when he c o m p l e t e s the C a p i l a n o courses. Note: A l l courses in S p a n i s h include a total of five and one-half hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; o n e and one-half hours of laboratory practice; a n d one hour of conversational practice with a native speaker. Native s p e a k e r s of F r e n c h , G e r m a n or S p a n i s h who wish to take first or second-year c o u r s e s in these l a n g u a g e s must consult with the L a n g u a g e Co-ordinator first. University rules governing s u c h students differ within departments, but the L a n g u a g e Co-ordinator h a s c o r r e s p o n d e n c e dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any misunderstanding, s u c h students are invited to d i s c u s s these problems with the L a n g u a g e Co-ordinator prior to enrolment. S p a n i s h 100 First Y e a r S p a n i s h (F) (3,1.5,1) A b a s i c c o u r s e in the oral a n d written l a n g u a g e , with oral e m p h a s i s on grammar, c o m p o s i t i o n a n d conversation. S p a n i s h 101 First Y e a r S p a n i s h (S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: S p a n i s h 100. This c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, wherever possible, in the term following S p a n i s h 100. A continuation of the work of S p a n i s h 100. S p a n i s h 140 S t u d i e s in Latin A m e r i c a n C u l t u r e s (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. A study of the peoples and cultures of selected Latin A m e r i c a n regions. The countries to be studied are M e x i c o , G u a t e m a l a , C h i l e and Peru. The c o u r s e will begin with an historical overview of e a c h region. 62 A study of selected Latin A m e r i c a n literature in translation, and of this literature's roots in history, including the history of p r e - C o l u m b i a n civilizations (e.g. M a y a n , Inca). The literature will be read in translation but o n e of the two seminar s e s s i o n s e a c h week will be e s p e c i a l l y structured for students w h o wish to read w o r k s in S p a n i s h . T h e w o r k s selected for reading in S p a n i s h will be those that c a n be read by students w h o have c o m p l e t e d the s e c o n d year S p a n i s h course at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . S p a n i s h 141 S t u d i e s in Latin A m e r i c a n C u l t u r e (S) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. A continuation of 140. T h e countries to be studied are Argentina, C u b a a n d the C a r i b b e a n . S p a n i s h 200 Second Year Spanish (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: S p a n i s h 100, 101 or a placement test. A continuation of the work of S p a n i s h 101 with e m p h a s i s on oral d i s c u s s i o n a n d translation of literary texts. S p a n i s h 201 Second Year Spanish (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: S p a n i s h 200 or c o n s i d e r a b l e perience in written and oral work. previous e x - A d v a n c e d c o u r s e with e m p h a s i s on oral d i s c u s s i o n a n d translation of S p a n i s h and L a t i n - A m e r i c a n literary w o r k s . C O M M U N I T Y E D U C A T I O N : C o n s u l t flier for information re non-credit conversational S p a n i s h c o u r s e s . Theatre Arts Courses Instructional Faculty Moore, D., B.F.A. (U.Vic.) M u r d o c h , W., B.F.A. (U-Vic.) The Theatre Program at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is d e s i g n e d to introduce the student to the theatre arts through c o u r s e s in acting, theatre history, a n d theatre-craft labs. It will provide training in the craft of performing and will prepare actors for further work in other institutions a n d acting s c h o o l s , a n d it will e n c o u r a g e their participation in recreational community theatre. Daytime and e v e n i n g s e c t i o n s of most c o u r s e s are offered to allow both full-time a n d part-time students to take a d vantage of the Theatre P r o g r a m . Theatre c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit or elective credit at British C o l u m b i a ' s major universities or are in the p r o c e s s of articulation. P l e a s e consult Transfer G u i d e and instructor. Theatre 200 T h e P r a c t i c a l S i d e of T h e a t r e (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 101 or permission of the instructor A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e exploring scripted drama. R o l e development and character interaction is explored through a variety of scripted materials taken from u n c o n v e n t i o n a l sourc e s as well as from c l a s s i c and contemporary plays. Traditional v o c a l and p h y s i c a l e x e r c i s e s will be taught to expand the student's abilities a n d to develop a warm-up regime. Labs: The theatrecraft labs provide e x p e r i e n c e in the support areas of theatre. , T h e a t r e 201 R e h e a r s a l a n d P e r f o r m a n c e (S) (3,2,1) T h e a t r e 201 (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 200 or permission of the instructor. T h e a t r e 100 P r a c t i c a l Arts of T h e a t r e (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. A n introduction to the craft of acting. Theatre 100 e m p h a s i z e s personal a n d group exploration of body and v o i c e , sensory observation, awareness, and recall; mime: mask; and character and role creation. T h e s e areas are explored through improvised and scripted s c e n e work. Theatre 101 P r a c t i c a l Arts of Theatre (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 100 or permission of instructor. A n exploration of P e r f o r m a n c e Improvisation. Theatre 101 trains the performer in the art of improvisation. It e m p h a s i z e s e n s e m b l e performing, narrative skills, c h a r a c t e r relationship, c o m i c technique, a n d a n understanding of the nature of dramatic structure. There will normally be a performance at term e n d demonstrating acquired improvisation technique. T h e a t r e 120 Introduction to T h e a t r e History (F) (3,0,1) A practical c o u r s e exploring the p r o c e s s w h i c h leads to performance. Development of a warm-up regime will c o n tinue while students rehearse and produce a one-act play. There will normally be a p u b l i c performance at term end. O n e c l a s s i c a n d o n e contemporary m o n o l o g u e will also be d e v e l o p e d to prepare the student for entrance to other theatre c o u r s e s a n d auditors. L a b s : Students will d e s i g n , construct, p u b l i c i z e , a n d crew the one-acts. Students will a l s o be instructed in the c o m pilation of a professional resume. S e e a l s o : W o m e n ' s Studies 192 W o m e n and Theatre: A n Introduction (3,0,1) No prerequisite. W o m e n ' s Studies 193 W o m e n and Theatre (3,0,1). N o prerequisite. C O M M U N I T Y E D U C A T I O N : Non-credit c o u r s e s in performing d e s i g n e d for students who have c o m p l e t e d the four regular acting c o u r s e s will often be offered through the C o m munity E d u c a t i o n program of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S u p plementary w o r k s h o p s in v o i c e , mime, d a n c e , fencing etc may also o c c a s i o n a l l y be offered at students' request. P l e a s e contact instructor for further information and read the C o m munity Education Flier. No prerequisite. A practical a p p r o a c h to the study of Theatre History. In the first term several periods from 5th century B . C c l a s s i c a l theatre through to the 17th century will be covered using seminars, research presentation, play readings, as well as s o m e lectures to d i s c o v e r e a c h era. A practical discovery of the c o s t u m e s , set, acting a n d writing styles will be e m phasized. T h e a t r e 121 Introduction to T h e a t r e History (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 120 or permission of instructor. A continuation of Theatre 120, Theatre 121, utilizes similar techniques to discover major periods from the 17th to early 20th century. 63 W o m e n ' s Studies Instructional Courses Faculty W o m e n ' s Studies offerings are taught by fully qualified instructors with e x p e r i e n c e in the field required by e a c h c o u r s e . These faculty.are s e c o n d e d from relevant d i s c i p l i n e s to W o m e n ' s Studies. Transfer: S.F.U.: Students who wish to pursue further courses in W o m e n ' s Studies are advised that S . F . U . has instituted a minor program in W o m e n ' s Studies. Transfer credit has been received for W o m e n ' s Studies 104, 110, 120 and 122, and is being sought for 193. U . B . C : W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 122 - Anthropology credit U.Vic: W o m e n ' s Studies 104 (under review) Note: Further transfer status at U . B . C . a n d U.Vic, is being sought. W o m e n ' s Studies 104 Contemporary E n g l i s h - C a n a d i a n W o m e n Writers (F) (3,0,1) A discussion-oriented c o u r s e intended to broaden and intensify the students' a w a r e n e s s of and appreciation of the literature in English being p r o d u c e d by C a n a d i a n women writers today, with e m p h a s i s on the current, l o c a l , West C o a s t literary s c e n e ; to examine and d i s c u s s the portraits of w o m e n , and of w o m e n ' s c i r c u m s t a n c e s revealed in these writings. In addition to students' reading and d i s c u s s i o n of the literature, there will be c l a s s visits for readings and d i s c u s s i o n by several prominent West C o a s t C a n a d i a n women writers. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 110 W o m e n a n d P s y c h o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) A p s y c h o l o g i c a l examination of sex-role definitions, their origins, development in c h i l d h o o d and maintenance in adult life. The course will examine the differences in life patterns between men and w o m e n and the effect these have on personality development a n d self-concept. It will i n c l u d e a critical examination of male and female c o n s c i o u s n e s s and the extent to w h i c h these affect and determine potential for human growth and freedom. R e f e r e n c e will be made to major p s y c h o l o g i c a l s c h o o l s of thought in terms of sexual bias. Non-sexist alternatives to present psychiatric practices will be explored. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 120 W o m e n and the P a s t : A n H i s t o r i c a l Survey (S) (3,0,1) A survey of the lives of w o m e n in previous eras. A n uncovering of w o m e n ' s participation in and contribution to the m a k i n g of history. Private lives as well as public and political activities will be studied. The course will examine reasons behind the extent to w h i c h women have been " h i d d e n from history." Primary data will be c o l l e c t e d from s u c h s o u r c e s as diaries, memoirs, letters, pictures, literary works and oral interviews. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 122 W o m e n In Anthropology (F) (3,0,1) The anthropological perspective applied to w o m e n in different cultures of the world: their role in e c o n o m i c , political, 64 \ religious kinship, expressive systems. Exploration of the work of w o m e n anthropologists and the effect of theory on u n derstanding w o m e n . What is the w o m a n ' s e x p e r i e n c e in cultures and areas s u c h as the E s k i m o , A m a z o n jungle, Israeli kibbutz, G r e e c e , A f g h a n i s t a n , India, M e x i c o and Africa. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 193 W o m e n a n d Theatre (S) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. W o m e n ' s Studies 193 explores personal creative potential, d e v e l o p s improvisational skills, and e n s e m b l e performance. S c e n e s and short plays will be d e v e l o p e d based upon t h e m e s w h i c h are c o m m o n to w o m e n . W o m e n as playwrights, actors, directors, and other theatre professionals in the 19th and 20th centuries will be investigated. This is a practical course open to both men and w o m e n . The following W o m e n ' s Studies c o u r s e s will not be offered in 79/80. Any student who is interested in these c o u r s e s s h o u l d contact the W o m e n ' s Studies Co-ordinator, L o c a l 252, Humanities. W o m e n ' s Studies 100 - Introduction to W o m e n ' s Studies W o m e n ' s Studies 101 - W o m e n and Work W o m e n ' s Studies 105 - C o n t e m p o r a r y French-Canadian W o m e n Writers W o m e n ' s Studies 106 - C o n t e m p o r a r y .United States W o m e n Writers W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 107 - C o n t e m p o r a r y E u r o p e a n W o m e n Writers (in translation) W o m e n ' s Studies 1 1 2 - W o m e n and Religion W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 121 - W o m e n a n d P o w e r in W e s t e r n Society W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 150 - S o u n d R e s o u r c e s W o r k s h o p for Women W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 151 - V i s u a l R e s o u r c e s W o r k s h o p for Women W o m e n ' s Studies 192 - W o m e n and Theatre Visual Literacy Courses Instructional Faculty R o s e n b e r g , A . , B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Toronto) * N B . Articulation in progress. V i s u a l Literacy 100 (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e intends to introduce the student through a series of readings, c l a s s r o o m e x p e r i e n c e s a n d suitable studio exercises to the field of v i s u a l literacy. T h e student will be made aware of: how s h e / h e s e e s ; the individual a n d culture i n d u c e d qualities of his/her visual memory; the p o s s i b l e m e a n i n g s explicit or implied in a number of c o m m o n p l a c e visual e x p e r i e n c e s ; s o m e t e c h n i c a l means through w h i c h ideas, emotions, etc., may be visually e x p r e s s e d . V i s u a l Literacy 101 (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: V i s u a l Literacy 100 or by permission of i n structors. A continuation of the above. S e e also: Fine Arts 100/101, Fine Arts 210/211, F i n e Arts 250/251 Humanities 100/101 Art P r o g r a m : Art 100/101 Art P r o g r a m : Art 260/261 for other c o u r s e s in Art History Career Programs era 53 67 Career Programs C a r e e r Programs offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e prepare adults for employment in b u s i n e s s and industry. A l l s e c o n dary s c h o o l graduates are eligible for a d m i s s i o n : those without G r a d e XII standing may also apply and will be c o n sidered on the basis of their particular e x p e r i e n c e , maturity, ability and interest. The suggested curriculum for e a c h program includes required, r e c o m m e n d e d and elective c o u r s e s . Every attempt is made to plan a program of studies best suited to individual n e e d s : however, e a c h student must a s s u m e final responsibility for selecting his/her program. T o provide the student with an insight into human nature, studies in the humanities and behavioural s c i e n c e s form an important part of C a r e e r P r o g r a m s . The student studies some of the methods of inquiry into the nature of man, the natural world and s o c i a l institutions. T h e s e studies provide the prospective graduate with an opportunity to learn about the relationship of his/her career to the e c o n o m i c world in w h i c h s/he must perform. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e s also form part of every C a r e e r P r o g r a m . These are d e s i g n e d to assist the student to write clearly and speak well. S u c h c o u r s e s provide the resources to b a c k up the s p e c i a l talents of the C a r e e r P r o g r a m graduate. In most programs "on-the-job" work e x p e r i e n c e forms part of the c u r r i c u l u m . T h i s type of e x p e r i e n c e brings relevancy to the material under study. Enrolment in s o m e C a r e e r P r o g r a m s may be curtailed d u e to s p a c e and equipment limitations. C o n s e q u e n t l y , those students w h o contemplate entrance to C a r e e r P r o g r a m s are e n c o u r a g e d to apply early. A p p l i c a n t s are required -to have an interview with the P r o g r a m Co-ordinator prior to a d mission to any of the C a r e e r Programs. Students granted s u c h exemptions will have their total c o u r s e load reduced by the number of e x e m p t e d credit hours to the maximum of two c o u r s e s or six credit hours per a c a d e m i c year without effect upon the status of the C e r tificate or Diploma in the particular program. S u c h exempted credit hours are not necessarily transferable to other institutions. Exemption in e x c e s s of two c o u r s e s , or six credit hours, may be awarded a student only upon the r e c o m m e n d a t i o n of the appropriate program co-ordinator and the D e a n , C a r e e r Programs. T r a n s f e r T o a n d From Other Institutions There is agreement among all public B . C . C o l l e g e s to a c cept e a c h other's credits upon transfer, if a p p l i c a b l e , to a program given at the admitting c o l l e g e , and given suitable equivalency. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual c o u r s e credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on a d m i s s i o n for a c c e p t a b l e work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits w h i c h are required a~t C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for the certificate or d i p l o m a . Students w i s h i n g transfer credit s h o u l d present suitable d o c u m e n tation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student R e c o r d . Full information on transfer of s p e c i f i c c o u r s e s is available from the A d m i s s i o n Advisor, C o u n s e l l o r s and in the pertinent instructional Division. C a r e e r P r o g r a m s Offered Student C o u r s e a n d Work Load 1 C a r e e r Program c o u r s e work approximates 2 1 / 2 hours per week. However, some programs may require as many as 32 hours and others as few as 16 hours per week. It is therefore strongly r e c o m m e n d e d that students not a c c e p t employment while undertaking full-time studies in any one of the C a r e e r P r o g r a m s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . E m p l o y m e n t Opportunities for the Graduate A l t h o u g h employment opportunities for the graduates of career programs have to date been g o o d , the C o l l e g e is in no position to guarantee job positions for the graduates of particular career programs. Employment opportunities are largely based on the a d v i c e of specialist Advisory C o m m i t t e e s . The advice provided by these committees may be tempered by rapidly c h a n g i n g e c o n o m i c conditions, alterations in the requirements of certifying bodies, and the specific needs of particular employers. T h e s e conditions c a n completely alter the employment possibilities for individual graduates in a very short time. Exemption Standing - Career Students Students enrolling in a C a r e e r P r o g r a m may be exempted from certain c o u r s e s within the program upon the s u c c e s s f u l demonstration of acquired skills and k n o w l e d g e in specific c o u r s e areas. S u c h exemption standing will be noted on the Permanent Studies R e c o r d . 68 The C a r e e r Division prepares its graduates for positions in b u s i n e s s and industry as well as in the field of the applied arts. The c o u r s e s offered in the various programs are under constant review to make certain that students are e x p o s e d to the latest of techniques and skills. A d v i s o r y committees, c o m p o s e d of e m p l o y e r s in the b u s i n e s s , i n d u s t r i a l , professional and s o c i a l s e r v i c e s are constantly reviewing and m a k i n g r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s for all programs. The particular career program, and s p e c i f i c options within the various program divisions offered in the 1979/80 a c a d e m i c year are listed below. Arts P r o g r a m s ( D e t a i l s p a g e 70) 1. Fine Art Program/Arts & S c i e n c e Diploma - 2 years 2. Crafts P r o g r a m / A r t s & S c i e n c e D i p l o m a - 2 years 3. C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m / A r t s & S c i e n c e D i p l o m a - 2 years 4. Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ' / C e r t i f i c a t e - 1 year 5. A d v a n c e d C o m m e r c i a l Art O p t i o n ' / C e r t i f i c a t e - 1 year ' P e n d i n g Approval of Ministry of E d u c a t i o n B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m s ( D e t a i l s p a g e 83) 1. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t Program - 2 years 2. M a r k e t i n g M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years 3. C o m p u t e r S y s t e m s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years 4. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years 5. B u s i n e s s Administration Program - 1 year 6. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years (evenings) 7. S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Program - 3 years (evenings) B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g and C a r e e r D e v e l o p m e n t (Details p a g e Media Resources 92) 106) 1. M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program - 2 years 1. G e n e r a l Secretary P r o g r a m - 2 years 2. L e g a l Assistant Program - 2 years ) 3. L e g a l Assistant Studies Option - 1 year C h e m i c a l and Metallurgical Technology B.C.I.T. Transfer Music Program (Contact Chemistry Department for details.) Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n (Details on p a g e (Details on page (Details on page 1. C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m s - 1 and 2 years 2. M u s i c Transfer P r o g r a m - 2 years 3 M u s i c Therapy Program - 2 years Recreation 102) 1. Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m - 2 years 2. Program for Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d - 2 years 109) (Details on p a g e 115) 1. Outdoor Recreation M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years 2. W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Program - Vlt years 3. Fitness L e a d e r s h i p Program 4. Leisure C o u n s e l l i n g 5. Natural C h a l l e n g e Activities Retail F a s h i o n (Details on page 1. Retail Fashion Program - 2 years 120) Art Program G e n e r a l Description 3. For s p e c i f i c requirements in the C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m please refer to that s e c t i o n . This program offers a wide variety of Fine Art, C o m m e r c i a l Art and Craft C o u r s e s and will expand its o f f e r i n g s ' in the Fall of 1979 to include: II 1. Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n 2. A d v a n c e d C o m m e r c i a l Art Option ' D e p e n d e n t upon approval from the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n . T r a n s f e r Credit T h e transfer guide in the c a l e n d a r s h o u l d be referred to regarding transferability of s p e c i f i c c o u r s e s . The student s h o u l d understand that a d v a n c e d standing in any institution is usually based on interview and portfolio s u b m i s s i o n , as well as credits held. Lab Fees There are lab fees for most art c o u r s e s . P l e a s e consult timetable for details. Admission and Spring Term Prerequisites W h e r e prerequisites are indicated it s h o u l d be understood that these may be waived in writing by either the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r or the instructor c o n c e r n e d when it is felt that a student p o s s e s s e s the ability to c o p e with the requirements of any given c o u r s e . History of Art 2. For the purposes of a d m i s s i o n to art c o u r s e s a fulltime student means a person of any age who takes a full C a r e e r P r o g r a m w h i c h may i n c l u d e s o m e of the Art c o u r s e s and some of the A c a d e m i c courses, or exclusively Art O p t i o n c o u r s e s w h i c h , upon completion in one or two years of study, entitles the student to either a C o l l e g e Certificate or the A s s o c i a t e of Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma, or e n titles the student to seek transfer credit to other post-secondary learning institutions which r e c o g n i z e C C A . P . standards for a d m i s s i o n to their programs. 3. A student is c o n s i d e r e d as " r e g i s t e r e d " in the Art Program when his/her Registration Form and a valid c h e q u e for the full amount of tuition fees, lab fees and student society fees are deposited, registered and a c k n o w l e d g e d with and by the Art Program Coordinator and C o l l e g e Registrar's Off i c e s . T h e m e r e f a c t of d e p o s i t i n g those d o c u m e n t s with the C o o r d i n a t o r ' s office does not constitute the "fait a c c o m p l i " of registration, as the factors of registration are subject to priorities as required by the program. 4. Students w i s h i n g to repeat a course means: Any student who has taken an art course at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e and who has passed that c o u r s e may retake it only after all available s p a c e s have been filled by those students who wish to enrol in the course the first time. STUDENTS MAY NOT REPEAT A C O U R S E MORE THAN O N C E WITHOUT AN A P P R O V A L IN WRITING F R O M T H E C O O R D I N A T O R . Students in the Art Program may wish to c o n s i d e r the following c o u r s e s offered elsewhere in this C a l e n d a r under " F i n e A r t s " : Fine Arts 100, Fine Arts 101, Fine Arts 200 and Fine Arts 201, and Fine Arts 210. T h e s e c o u r s e s provide transferability to U.B.C. and to certain other institutions. Program A . F i n e Art Program O p e n to both full and part-time students. Students w i s h i n g to obtain future a d v a n c e d standing at the Emily C a r r S c h o o l of Art, U . B . C . or other c o l l e g e s , s h o u l d c h e c k the transfer guide in the c a l e n d a r and as well, c h e c k with the requirements of the institution where transfer may be applied for. Students planning to enter a program leading to a B.A. degree with a major in Fine Arts are a d v i s e d to apply to the university after four semesters of c o u r s e work at the c o l l e g e . Students planning to enter the S t u d i o P r o g r a m leading to the B. F.A. degree are advised to apply to the university after two semesters of c o u r s e work at the c o l l e g e . T h e m a x i m u m credit for the studio c o u r s e Fine Arts 181 is three units. A student who has s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d the s e c o n d year of the c o l l e g e Fine Art program will be provided an additional six units of credit in studio c o u r s e s to c o r r e s p o n d to Fine Arts 281. Students applying for the B.F.A. are reminded that a d m i s s i o n to the program is by s e l e c t i o n b a s e d on standing and c o u r s e s and an assessment of a folio of art work. The year of a d m i s s i o n whether s e c o n d or third year will be at the discretion of the Department. in A r t s a n d Science Registration - Art D i p l o m a S t u d e n t s Fall Term 1979 1. Returning students for 2nd year Art Diploma P r o g r a m : A p r i l 15-30. 2. A l l other diploma program Full-time: M a y 1-10 Part-time May 15-31 70 Descriptions A. Fine Art P r o g r a m / Arts & S c i e n c e D i p l o m a B. Crafts P r o g r a m / Arts & S c i e n c e D i p l o m a C . C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m / Arts & S c i e n c e D i p l o m a D. Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s * / Certificate E. A d v a n c e d C o m m e r c i a l Art O p t i o n ' / Certificate ' P e n d i n g A p p r o v a l of Ministry of E d u c a t i o n Associate I Courses Registration P r o c e d u r e s N O T E : 1. C o m m e r c i a l Art students s h o u l d refer to s p e c i a l requirements noted in that s e c t i o n . Advanced 1980 1. Returning students for Art diploma program, full and part time - Nov. 19 - D e c . 14. students Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l Education Requirements Electives Diploma Credit Hours Lab Hours 63 g 6 12 ~75 12 First Term Art 100 or V L 1 0 0 Art 154 Art 158 Art 167 Art 171 Art 182 C m n s . 150 Crafts Curriculum Art History I, or V i s u a l Literacy I G e n e r a l Drawing I Design I Sculpture I Painting I Printmaking I Basic Communications First Term 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 _p 21 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 Art 100 or V L 100 Art 154 Art 158 Art 160 Art 163 Art 168 Art History I, or V i s u a l Literacy I G e n e r a l Drawing I . . . Design I Fabric Printing I Pottery I Weaving I 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 JO 3 _3 18 Second Term Art 101 or V L 101 Art 172 Art 174 Art 178 Art 183 Art 164 Second Term Art History II, or V i s u a l Literacy II Painting II Sculpture II D e s i g n II Printmaking II G e n e r a l Drawing II 0 0 3 0 0 3 3 18 _§ 3 Art 101 or V L 101 Art 161 Art 164 Art 165 Art 169 Art 178 History of Art II or V i s u a l Literacy II Fabric Printing II G e n e r a l Drawing II Pottery II W e a v i n g II D e s i g n II 3 3 3 3 3 5 18 Third Term Art 152 Art 250 Art 257 Art 260 Art 282 Elective Third Term Life Drawing I Painting M e d i a I Sculpture III 19th & 20th C e n t u r y Art I Prjntmaking III 3 3 3 0 0 3 3 3 3 18 0 0 _0 3 3 3 0 0 3 3 3 _3 0 3 0 _0 3 Fourth Term Art 184 Art 255 Art 261 Art 265 Art 283 Elective Life Drawing II Painting M e d i a II 19th & 20th Century Art II Sculpture IV Printmaking IV 18 B. Art 267 Art 273 Art 284 C m n s 150 Elective Weaving III Pottery III Fabric Printing III Basic Communications 3 3 3 3 __3 _p 15 3 3 3 3 0 0 3 3 _ 3 0 _0 3 0 3 0 0 Fourth Term Art 268 Art 274 Art 285 C ' n n s 153 Weaving IV Pottery IV Fabric Printing IV Communications and the Arts Elective 15 Crafts Program The c o r e content of this program c o n s i s t s of w e a v i n g , fabric printing and pottery but is supported by c o u r s e s in drawing and d e s i g n . T h o s e w h o graduate m a y . s e e k e m ployment as instructors in a variety of community art programs or in institutions m a k i n g use of O c c u p a t i o n a l Therapy. Alternatively, they may establish themselves as practicing artists on either a full-time or part-time basis. The crafts offer ideal opportunities for individuals w i s h i n g to extend their leisure time horizons and for students in other programs s e e k i n g electives. Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l Education Requirements Electives Credit Hours 54 6 _6 Lab Hours 12 0 _0 66 12 C. Commercial Art Program This is a two year program to provide training for those w h o like to draw and enjoy developing a c o n c e p t from its b e g i n n i n g into finished c o m m u n i c a t i o n . Students are trained in d e s i g n , visual imagery, media c h o i c e , typography and c o n ceptual thinking. In short, the student b e c o m e s a problem solver. This is a c o m m e r c i a l artist's function, the resolution of problems that affect the way people think, play, work, travel, s p e n d their money or c h a n g e their habits. Instructors are professionals w h o take time away from their o w n c a r e e r s to t e a c h . T h e program relates to the current d e m a n d s of b u s i n e s s and industry, and these professionals bring immediate k n o w l e d g e of what is happening now and what c h a n g e s c a n be projected for the future. Real and simulated problems are taken from initial c o n c e p t to finished art and reproduction. Frequently g u e s t s from all levels of the profession are brought in to evaluate student projects. 71 The graduate prepares a portfolio of work to present to future employers or transfer to art s c h o o l . A graduate's e d u c a t i o n here gives them a wide spectrum of career or education opportunities. Associate in Arts a n d Science Diploma Credit Hours Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l E d u c a t i o n Requirements 72 6 78 Lab Hours 39 0 39 First T e r m Admission Requirements: The C o m m e r c i a l Art Program requires an unusually high level of maturity and integrity. Students with a year or more of life experience following high s c h o o l are usually more k n o w l e d g e a b l e and mature in their c h o i c e of direction and are better prepared. However, highly motivated high s c h o o l students without this year or more of e x p e r i e n c e c a n s u c c e e d here; and we e n c o u r a g e those students to apply. A d m i s s i o n is b a s e d on a portfolio, past work and experience in related fields, general ability and the applicant's interests. A rolling a d m i s s i o n procedure is used. A p p l i c a t i o n s and portfolios s h o u l d b e submitted no later than four (4) months before the desired entrance date. Portfolio R e q u i r e m e n t s : There should be a minimum of 12 s a m p l e s of original work representing your current abilities. If p o s s i b l e , include work related to your major. Imaginative and experimental drawings in any medium are a w e l c o m e addition to the portfolio. S a m ples must be flat, not rolled, framed or g l a s s e d . It is not n e c e s s a r y to mat s a m p l e s . W e cannot a c c e p t portfolios larger than 2 0 " x 2 6 " . C o l o u r slides or prints of any larger work may be sent. However, photographs or slides do not replace the required minimum of 12 s a m p l e s of your original work. Y o u r name and " C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m " s h o u l d be on the outside of the portfolio in large printed letters If you wish your portfolio returned, you must s e n d either stamps or c h e q u e to cover the cost of return postage. Do not s e n d any portfolios by c r o s s - c o u n t r y bus system as they are not delivered to C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e and we have no facilities for c o l l e c t i n g portfolios from bus depots and airports P a r c e l post insured or air parcel post insured is usually the best way to have portfolios sent and returned. Every possible care is taken, but C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e cannot a c c e p t responsibility for loss or d a m a g e to an a p p l i c a n t ' s work. U n c l a i m e d portfolios will be destroyed after a few w e e k s , as we have no storage s p a c e . Acceptance: A p p l i c a n t s will be notified of the a d m i s s i o n s committee's d e c i s i o n in writing no later than four to six w e e k s after receipt of completed program application, including portfolio and personal interview. W h e n a c c e p t e d , instructions will be sent as to further procedure. 72 Art Art Art Art 152 154 162 175 Art 177 Art 192 C m n s 150 Second Life Drawing 1 G e n e r a l Drawing I Lettering and Type Photography for the G r a p h i c A r t s Graphic Design I Applied Design I Basic Communications 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 21 3 3 0 3 3 0 3 o Term Art 164 Art 170 Art 176 Art 179 Art 184 Art 193 Art 173 G e n e r a l Drawing II G r a p h i c Arts I Studio and Location Photography G r a p h i c D e s i g n II Life Drawing II A p p l i e d D e s i g n II Introduction to Graphics 3 3 3 3 3 21 3' 3 0 0 _o 9 Third Term Art 251 Art 252 Art 277 Art 278 Art 295 C o m n s . 153 Experimental Illustration I . . A p p l i e d D e s i g n III Environmental D e s i g n I . . . . . G r a p h i c Arts II Advertising Illustration I.... C o m m u n i c a t i o n s and the Arts 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 0 18 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 3 0 18 12 Fourth T e r m Art 253 Art 269 Art 279 Art 280 Art 298 M e d i a 054 A p p l i e d D e s i g n IV Experimental Illustration II . Environmental D e s i g n II . . . Portfolio Studio Advertising Illustration II . . . ' S t u d e n t s w h o wish to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m munications 150/153 may do so with the Art C o - o r d i n a t o r ' s approval. D. E. Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s This program is to provide a sound base for further serious art study. It does not replace the regular first year of the two year program at the C o l l e g e . Students are, however, e n c o u r a g e d to consider the "Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s " before b e g i n n i n g a regular program at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e or e l s e w h e r e . „ Major Program Requirements 36 Viscom Viscom Viscom Viscom Experimental and Creative C o n c e p t s I T e c h n i q u e s and M e d i u m s I Basic Skills 1 Audio/Visual Usage Research Methods History of V i s u a l Communication I 3 3 3 3 3 211 212 214 215 ' E l e c t i v e s - D e s i g n Option Electives-lllustration Option 18 18 18 18 " C h o o s e one of two options 30 30 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 'Design Option C / A r t 405 A d v a n c e d Advertising D e s i g n II C/Art 410 P a c k a g e Design C / A r t 415 Film G r a p h i c s Expe ...ental and Creative C o n c e p t s II T e c h n i q u e s and M e d i u m s II B a s i c S k i l l s II . Photographic Usage History of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n II 3 3 3 3 3 3 'Illustration Option C/Art 421 Figurative Painting C/Art 422 Advertising Illustration C / A r t 423 Story Illustration 3 3 __3 3 3 3 30 30 'Illustration Option C / A r t 321 Head and Figure P a i n t i n g . . C/Art 322 Advertising Illustration C/Art 323 Fashion Illustration 3 3 3 3 0 Second 3 0 C/Art 401 C/Art 420 18 12 Term V i s c o m 210 Lab Hours 12 C / A r t 301 Advanced Graphic Design I C/Art 320 S k e t c h i n g for Illustration . . . "Design Option C/Art 305 A d v a n c e d Advertising Design I C/Art 310 Typography D e s i g n C / A r t 315 Film D e s i g n Lab Hours First T e r m Second Credit Hours 12 First T e r m Credit Hours 111 112 113 114 115 Option Major Program Requirements (Required by all students) Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Certificate Viscom Viscom Viscom Viscom Viscom C o m m e r c i a l Art T h e s p e c i f i c aim of the program is to provide a professional calibre illustration or d e s i g n portfolio. T h e program is d e s i g n e d for both full time and part time students w h i c h will allow working professionals the opportunity to upgrade their portfolio. Through introduction to a c o m b i n a t i o n of experimental c o n c e p t s , t e c h n i c a l skills and e x p o s u r e to guest instructors from a variety of professional creative fields, the student will have an opportunity to develop an understanding of the potentials offered in a very broad area of art. V i s c o m 110 Advanced A one year program to provide a d v a n c e d training in the fields of illustration and graphic d e s i g n . This program is d e s i g n e d for either a two year c o m m e r c i a l art program graduate or mature students who have w o r k e d professionally in illustration or graphic d e s i g n . A one year exploratory program d e v e l o p e d to e x p o s e students to a wide range of creative learning e x p e r i e n c e s . 3 3 3 6 3 3 0 6 3 0 18 12 Term A d v a n c e d G r a p h i c D e s i g n II A d v a n c e d Rendering Techniques N O T E : It is intended that those c o u r s e s with labs will provide a series of w o r k s h o p s , seminars, lectures and fieldtrips in order to c a p i t a l i z e on available expertise both on and off-campus. T h e s e events will bring the students into direct contact with a variety of personalities and p l a c e s relating directly and indirectly to their studies and will e n s u r e a c o n t i n u i n g e x p o s u r e to what is happening in the " r e a l " world outside the c o l l e g e . Visits to studios, galleries, c o m m e r c i a l e n terprises and plants will assist the students to gain a realistic appraisal of the career alternatives open to them and to better determine their individual goals. This direct contact with professionals in many fields is c o n s i d e r e d to be an essential component of the Introduction to V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s year and will be exploited as fully as possible. 73 Art Courses Instructional Faculty Art 100 C o s g w e l l , Barry, TNTHR.D.D., N.D.D. (Hammersmith), S c u l p ture, G e n . Drawing. D e g g a n , P a u l , Diploma (Worthing C o l . , England), Sculpture. Dyke, S i d , Inst. T e c h . & Art (Calgary) Lettering, Typography, Photography, G r a p h i c Art. Eastcott, W a y n e , S r . Cert. (V.S.A.), R.C.A., Printing. Forster, Fred, Alberta C o l l e g e of Art, Advertising Illustration. J e n s e n , J o s e p h i n e , B.A., M.A. (Br. Col.) - Art History. K i n g a n , T e d , N.D.D. (Blackpool), A.T.D. (Manchester), R.C.A. T e a c h . Cert. (Manchester), B . C . T e a c h . Certificate G e n e r a l Drawing, P a i n t i n g , D e s i g n . L e s k a r d , S t e p h e n , Dipl. (St. Martins, London), G e n . Drawing, D e s i g n , Painting, Life Drawing. Llewellyn, Marion, B.A. (Manchester) G r a p h i c D e s i g n . L o n g , J o h n , B.P.A. Art C e n t e r (Los A n g e l e s ) , G r a p h i c D e s i g n . M a c L a g a n , David, A . O . C . A . , I.D.C., F.C.A., Coordinator, Illustration, G e n . Drawing. M c L a r e n , D o n n a , Cert. (Sheridan C o l l e g e ) , B.H. S c . (Guelph), Pottery. M a r s h a l l , Dave, Cert. (B.C.), Sculpture. Mees, Mieneke, Weaving. Molnar, Frank, Dipl. (Pennsylvania), Anatomy, Life Drawing, Painting. N a u m a n n , Rose, Cert. (V.S.A.), C r e d . (Inst. Allende), W e a v i n g . N e w t o n - M a s o n , J o h n , Dipl. (Worthing C o l . England), E n vironmental D e s i g n . R i c h m o n d , Lesley, M . Art E d . (Washington State Col.), T e a c h . Cert. (London), Fabric Printing. R o s e n b e r g , A n n , B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Art History, V i s u a l Literacy. Sharpe, David, Dip. (Alta. C o l . of Art), G e n e r a l Drawing. Stribley, Roger, C e r a m . (Birmingham) (Lund Univ. Sweden), Pottery. W o o d , A l a n , Dip., Art T e a c h . Dipl. (Liverpool), Experimental Painting, G e n . Drawing, Life Drawing. Y a s k i n s k i , Daniel, Photography. Introduction to the V i s u a l Arts I (F) (3,0,1) Z i m m e r m a n , A l , Art Center, (Los A n g e l e s ) , Ass't. to C o o r dinator, A p p l i e d D e s i g n . Course Descriptions G e n e r a l : 1. A l l c o u r s e s not marked with a star are open to full or part-time students, see registration regarding priorities. 2. Students w h o are not full-time may take the required c o u r s e s over an extended period of time in order to r e c e i v e an A s s o c i a t e in Arts & Science Diploma. 3. C o u r s e s having a star are restricted to full-time students in that particular program a n d are not available on a part-time basis. Art 059 Pottery for B e g i n n e r s I (F) (3,0,1) A n introductory c o u r s e for those with little or no previous e x p e r i e n c e . Instruction in the b a s i c pottery p r o c e s s e s of clay preparation, hand building, wheelwork, a p p l i c a t i o n of g l a z e s , kiln loading a n d firing a n d studio d i s c i p l i n e s . Art 060 Pottery for B e g i n n e r s II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite Art 059 Further development of basic pottery skills. A n introduction to wheelwork, g l a z e theory a n d application. 74 A n introduction to the c o n c e p t s of v i s u a l arts, art theories and the development of painting, sculpture and architecture based on the historical survey of O c c i d e n t a l Art from the prehistoric to the G o t h i c period. E m p h a s i s on d e v e l o p i n g visual a w a r e n e s s a n d understanding of creative p r o c e s s , aesthetic and critical appreciation of formal a n d s o c i a l a s p e c t s of visual arts as needed by practicing artists. Note: T h i s c o u r s e c o m b i n e d with Art 101 carries 3 transfer units to U . B . C . Art 101 Introduction to the V i s u a l Arts II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A R T 100 A further study of c o n c e p t s and development of O c c i d e n t a l Art. Major art movements from the late G o t h i c to the late 18th Century. Further investigation of the v o c a b u l a r y of v i s u a l arts and the creative p r o c e s s against the s o c i o - h i s t o r i c a l background. Note: This c o u r s e c o m b i n e d with Art 100 carries 3 transfer units to U . B . C . Art 152 Life D r a w i n g (F) (3,0,1) The study of drawing from the observation of the human figure; e x e r c i s e s in d e v e l o p i n g v i s u a l perception, memory and b a s i c drawing skills. Study of the proportions of the h u m a n body. Structure a n d action d r a w i n g s with e m p h a s i s on empathy a n d perception of graphic elements; instinctive and structured rendering; d e v e l o p i n g thought-hand c o ordination. Study of line a n d line c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s in p e n c i l , pen, conte and c h a r c o a l techniques on newsprint, manilla and cartridge paper. C o n t o u r , c r o s s - c o n t o u r , gesture a n d volume drawings from draped a n d undraped model. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio P r o g r a m at U . B . C . Art 154 G e n e r a l D r a w i n g I (F) (3,0,1) The study of primary drawing media and b a s i c t e c h n i q u e s , including p e n c i l , p e n a n d ink, a n d brush a n d ink. Study of p e r s p e c t i v e d r a w i n g from d i r e c t o b s e r v a t i o n , printed reference material, a n d the imagination. Study of r e p r e s e n tational rendering t e c h n i q u e s of objects, structures, s u r f a c e s and textures. Learning to v i s u a l i z e in graphic terms, s y m bolizing, stylizing in terms of line a n d line c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . D e v e l o p i n g power of observation a n d g r a p h i c sensitivity. Note: 1. This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . 2. G e n e r a l drawing, s e c t i o n two (154-2) and (164-2) are restricted to the C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m . , 3. T h e remaining s e c t i o n s are o p e n a n d it s h o u l d be noted that 154-1 is a more structured and traditional a p p r o a c h to d r a w i n g , w h i l e 154-4 is more c o n ceptual in a p p r o a c h . Art 158 Design (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the c o n c e p t s and principles of visual art fundamentals with analytical a n d creative study of b a s i c elements of pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n . P r o c e s s a n d nature of visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , form c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s (shape, line, value, texture, colour, mass) are investigated with reference to fine arts, crafts and applied arts. E x e r c i s e s in creating meaningful graphic c o m m u n i c a t i o n s o n set a n d freely c h o s e n topics will be e m p l o y e d . M e d i a will i n c l u d e p e n c i l , paint, ink, c o l l a g e materials a n d mixed media. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 160 F a b r i c Printing I (F) (3,0,1) T h e study of hand printing t e c h n i q u e s on fabrics, block printing, batik and s i l k - s c r e e n i n g . U s e of these techniques for repeat yardages a n d w a l l - h a n g i n g s with the addition of quilting. Study of different types of d y e s . Art 161 F a b r i c Printing II (S) (3,0,1,) Prerequisite: Art 160 The study of resist dyeing of fabrics, including tie-dye a n d paste resist for garments or yardages. U s e of these dyeing techniques with the addition of stitching, padding and a p plique for wall-hangings. * Art 162 Lettering a n d T y p e (F) (3,0,1) Historical origins of the alphabet, numerals a n d letter styles. Proportion and s p a c i n g . Lettering indication in p e n c i l , brush, c h a l k s a n d felt m a r k e r s . C o m p r e h e n s i v e a n d reproduction lettering. Art 163 Pottery I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to basic p r o c e s s e s of pottery, including p i n c h , dug-out, coil and slab, elementary wheelwork, g l a z e theory and application, kiln loading a n d firing. Art 164 G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 154 Further exploration of drawing media a n d techniques with an e m p h a s i s on a more individual and interpretive a p p r o a c h , developing themes for drawings aimed at illustration a n d reproduction. Study of drawing styles a n d modes of graphic e x p r e s s i o n . Interpretive stylization a n d distortion. D r a w i n g with pen and ink; w a s h e s , ink a n d brush, felt markers, mixed media. Study of mass, light and dark, plane, depth and s p a c e , and their graphic representation through v a r i o u s drawing techniques. Note: Art 164-2 is restricted to the C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m . This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . 164-1 is a more structured and traditional a p p r o a c h to drawing, while 164-4 is more c o n c e p t u a l in a p p r o a c h . Art 165 Pottery II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 163 Further study of wheelwork with progressively more a d v a n c e d s h a p e s and d e s i g n s . A n introduction to g l a z e theory and exploration of g l a z e materials. Art 166 A n a t o m y I (F) (3,0,1) The main purpose of this c o u r s e is to teach the students to draw a n d understand the human body. T e a c h i n g will be concentrated on drawing the bones a n d m u s c l e s to e n a b l e the students to gain insight of their functions s o they will be able to apply this k n o w l e d g e in their Fine and A p p l i e d Arts C o u r s e s . In both semesters s p e c i a l attention will be paid to the a p plication of anatomical k n o w l e d g e to the problems and functions of fashion, illustration and interior d e s i g n . For this purpose we will use projections, charts a n d the live model. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 167 S c u l p t u r e I (F) (3,3,1) T h e study of fundamentals of sculpture a n d three d i m e n sional form. E x e r c i s e s in s k e t c h i n g and modelling in clay on the b a s i s of direct observation from the m o d e l . T h e study of 3 d i m e n s i o n a l form through the investigation of inner structure surface and mass. A n introduction to the p r o c e s s of plastermould m a k e u p will be a c o m p o n e n t of the c o u r s e . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 167-1 is a more traditional and structured a p p r o a c h to sculpture while Art 167-2 is more c o n c e p t u a l in a p proach. Art 168 W e a v i n g I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the materials and primary equipment of weaving, including spinning a n d dyeing, projects on the branch loom, Salish loom, board a n d frame w e a v i n g . The history of weaving. W e a v i n g a tapestry. Art 169 W e a v i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 168 Introduction to the m e c h a n i c a l loom. T h e b a s i c w e a v e s and their derivatives, pattern drafting, g a u z e and leno weaves. A n approach to texture a n d colour. Garment weaving. * Art 170 Graphic A r t s I (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 175 A basic c o u r s e in graphic arts p r o c e s s e s , including letterpress, gravure, lithographic a n d s i l k s c r e e n reproduction. Instruction in the t e c h n o l o g y of c o l o u r reproduction by four c o l o u r p r o c e s s and by pre-separation. Students will produce line a n d halftone negatives a n d offset plates a n d perform b a s i c negative stripping operations a n d s i l k s c r e e n printing. Field trips to printers a n d plate makers. 75 Art 171 • Art 176 P a i n t i n g I (F) (3,0,1) Studio and Location Investigation of the characteristics a n d possibilities of acrylic a n d oils through e x e r c i s e s and experiments dealing with paint chemistry, mixing, application a n d control. Development of k n o w l e d g e of elements of picture making s u c h as form, c o m p o s i t i o n a n d structure, colour, volume and s p a c e through projects u s i n g figurative, abstract a n d n o n figurative themes. G r o u p a n d one-to-one d i s c u s s i o n s and analysis of the student's own objectives, problems regarding imagery, content, methods, s c a l e , media a n d materials. Examination of traditional a n d contemporary methods and styles through slides, personal r e s e a r c h , gallery a n d studio visits. Prerequisite: Art 175 Note: 1. This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. 2. Art 171-1 is a more traditional a n d structured a p proach to painting, while Art 171-2 is more experimental a n d c o n c e p t u a l in nature. P h o t o g r a p h y (S) (3,3,1) Instruction in studio lighting a n d p r o c e d u r e s . P h o t o g r a p h y on location a n d a d v a n c e d d a r k r o o m t e c h n i q u e s for black and white film. Introduction to c l o s e - u p photography and the effective exposure of c o l o u r film. * Art 177 Graphic Design I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to d e s i g n e l e m e n t s (shape, line, v a l u e , texture, colour) to demonstrate the versatility and a p p l i c a t i o n of e a c h . E x e r c i s e s to develop a s o u n d g r a s p of d e s i g n princ i p l e s and to e n c o u r a g e experiment and d i s c o v e r y as well as how these elements work in c o m b i n a t i o n . M e d i a will include p e n c i l , paint, c o l l a g e materials a n d mixed media. Art 178 D e s i g n II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 158 Art 172 P a i n t i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 171 Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to be self-motivated a n d to develop a personal style. C o n t i n u e d experiment with new a n d traditional painting media through individual a n d group projects, investigating possibilities of mixed m e d i a , large s c a l e , environmental a n d dimensional painting, etc. G r o u p critiques and lectures, artist visitors a n d studio a n d gallery visits a n d field trips, a c cumulation of personal ideas a n d information in s k e t c h b o o k s , preliminary s k e t c h e s a n d series of w o r k s . Note: 1. This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . 2. Art 172-1 is a more traditional a n d structured a p proach to painting, while Art 172-2 is more e x perimental a n d c o n c e p t u a l in nature. Art 174 S c u l p t u r e II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 167 Further study a n d practice of sculpture, investigating three-dimensional form. Introduction to w o o d - c a r v i n g with e m p h a s i s on basic d e s i g n c o n c e p t s a n d individual expression. Note: 1. T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . 2. Art 174-1 is a more traditional a n d structured a p proach to sculpture while Art 174-2 is more c o n ceptual in a p p r o a c h . * Art 175 P h o t o g r a p h y for the G r a p h i c Arts (F) (3,3,1) B a s i c photography with e m p h a s i s on optical and c h e m i c a l principles, to prepare students for G r a p h i c Arts I in the S p r i n g term. T h e u s e of the 35mm c a m e r a . 76 Further study of d e s i g n principles, pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n , characteristics of visual form a n d media. E x t e n s i v e study of form a n d c o l o u r characteristics as a means of e x p r e s s i o n and c o m m u n i c a t i o n of moods, attitudes, a n d a s s o c i a t i o n s derived from non visual e x p e r i e n c e s . Study of form s y m bolism in contemporary society. Individual a n d g r o u p p r o j e c t s a i m e d at c o m m u n i t y a n d e n v i r o n m e n t i m provements. Introduction to three-dimensional s p a c e a n d form. Experiments with various materials a n d exploration of the principles of d e s i g n as applied to crafts, fine a n d applied arts. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. • A r t 179 Graphic Design • Art 192 Applied Design II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 177 Further study of d e s i g n principles, pictorial organization, characteristics of visual form. C o m b i n i n g d e s i g n elements of the previous semester with the new e l e m e n t s of typography and photography. M e d i a will include a wide variety of material and an experimental a n d inventive a p p r o a c h will be stressed. (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n and the role of professional designers. D e s i g n principles, layout techniques, learning tools, methods, materials and media. E m p h a s i s will be on concept rather than on " c o m p r e h e n s i v e " finish. • Art 193 Applied Design II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisites: Art 177 a n d Art 192 Art 182 P r i n t m a k i n g I (F) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in techniques relating to presentation of ideas at a professional level. M a k i n g rough layouts and tight c o m p s . Ideas evaluated against criteria established. A foundation c o u r s e for those with little or no e x p e r i e n c e . A n introduction to the basic techniques of hardground, softground, drypoint and aquatint. L i n o , w o o d , relief a n d mono prints. Most work will be p r o d u c e d in black a n d white, with s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of the u s e of c o l o u r e d inks. • Art 204 A d v a n c e d Stone C a r v i n g Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer Studio Program at U . B . C . units to the B.F.A. Art 183 P r i n t m a k i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 182 C o n c e n t r a t e d study of black and white and c o l o u r printing methods. Study of ink formulation a n d grinding, single a n d multiple plates a n d the c o l l o g r a p h . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 184 Life D r a w i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 152 Further study of drawing from the direct observation of the human figure. E x e r c i s e s in perceiving a n d graphically interpreting the elements of plane, mass, rhythm a n d form; relating perceptual elements to drawing media. Reportage of visual experience and graphic interpretation of personal attitudes. Investigation of more c o m p l e x drawing techniques and materials. P e r c e i v i n g graphic elements in life form and action; drawing from memory a n d imaginative reflection upon visual e x p e r i e n c e . Student's individual experimentation with drawing materials related to effects aimed at. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. Art 188 Art A n a t o m y II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 166 Further study of human anatomy as applied to the visual arts, including the study of anatomy for pragmatic purposes in contemporary d e s i g n . In this term s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s will be given to the muscular a s p e c t s of male a n d female anatomy. S o m e study will be given to the structure of the human head as it relates to human portraiture. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. I (F) (3,3,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. A study of traditional a n d contemporary a p p r o a c h e s to stone carving including e x p e r i e n c e with hand tools, airpowered carving guns and grinders, and electrical tools. The investigation of personal modes of expression as related to the stone carving p r o c e s s . E m p h a s i s o n three-dimensional d e s i g n c o n c e p t s , the efficient u s e of tools, materials and equipment. Students will be required to p u r c h a s e their marble from the c o l l e g e . • Art 206 Foundry P r a c t i c e I (S) (3,3,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor E x p e r i e n c e in the use of the lost wax method of casting using c e r a m i c shell molds. Information for d e s i g n i n g a n d operating a small foundry suitable for c a s t i n g p i e c e s in aluminum and/or bronze. • Art 216 A d v a n c e d E d i t i o n i n g - intaglio a n d Relief I (F) (3,0,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor D e s i g n e d to meet the needs of the student/artist w h o . although trained in e t c h i n g techniques, has not matured as an intaglio image-maker owing to lack of a c c e s s to suitable equipment, facilities and g u i d a n c e . The student will develop procedures arising from individual needs, enabling the production of finished editions of prints a n d an e x p a n s i o n of k n o w l e d g e with respect to the intaglio p r o c e s s . Extended studio time will be a feature of this c o u r s e . • Art 217 Advanced (3,0,1) Editioning - Intaglio a n d Relief II (S) A d m i s s i o n by instructor Essentially a continuation of Art 216, this c o u r s e will c o n centrate on the needs of the individual w h o w i s h e s to develop personal editioning procedures a n d bridge the g a p between the student-artist and the exhibiting-artist. The practical problems of e s t a b l i s h i n g a relationship with a gallery and putting on a one-man show will be d i s c u s s e d , as will other methods of gaining recognition by appropriate a g e n c i e s . It is anticipated that practising artists and gallery pers o n n e l will appear as guest speakers. 77 • Art 253 • Art 250 P a i n t i n g M e d i a I (F) (3,0,1) A p p l i e d D e s i g n IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisites: Art 184 a n d 172 Prerequisite: Art 252 The investigation of painting media on the b a s i s of student interest a n d preference. S p o n t a n e o u s a n d sustained a p p r o a c h e s to a variety of themes derived from nature, objects and the imagination. Introduction to painting the nude model. Students should be prepared to b e c o m e involved in o c c a s i o n a l group or set projects. Investigation of materials, colour, problems of pictorial structure a n d c o m p o s i t i o n , the art of the past and present. A d v e r t i s i n g a g e n c y o r i e n t e d . T h e i n t e r w e a v i n g of illustration, photography, graphics a n d television into a d vertising, p a c k a g i n g , and point of p u r c h a s e . C o n s u l t a t i o n on student portfolios. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. Art 251 E x p e r i m e n t a l Illustration I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 164, Art 184 C o m b i n i n g drawing skills a n d the u s e of a variety of mediums to create c o n c e p t s for book a n d m a g a z i n e illustration, murals a n d illustration as it relates to merc h a n d i s i n g . A n e m p h a s i s is put on learning to see and draw objects correctly a n d in proportion a n d to render them professionally and imaginatively. Art 255 P a i n t i n g M e d i a II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 250 Further study and practice of painting in the medium of the student's individual c h o i c e . S u s t a i n e d development of ideas and themes through s k e t c h b o o k s , n o t e b o o k s , studies, e t c . D i s c u s s i o n will take p l a c e on a one-to-one tutorial basis. M o d e l s will be available for nude and c o s t u m e painting. C o n tinuing investigation of contemporary art a n d materials (as well as talks on artists from the past and present). Studio and gallery visits. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 257 S c u l p t u r e III (F) (3,3,1) * Art 252 A p p l i e d D e s i g n III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisites: Art 179 a n d Art 193 The application of d e s i g n and rendering skills to the development of solutions to print advertising. Explores c o m panies, products, s e r v i c e s , corporate identification a n d their relationship to print advertising layouts a n d tight c o m p s prepared for c l a s s critiques. Prerequisite: Art 174 A study of c l a s s i c a l and modern s c u l p t u r e ; the investigation of modern sculpture forms through the student's work; experimentation a n d work in several m e d i a : metal, plastics, w o o d , cloth, paper, stone and those p r o d u c i n g both soft a n d hard three-dimensional forms a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n s . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o Program at U . B . C . I hi A WUM 78 Art 260 19th a n d 20th C e n t u r y Art I (F) (3,0,1) develop their individual style. Field trips to galleries a n d , when possible, to sculptors' studios. Prerequisite: Fine Arts 100 a n d 101, or Humanities 100 a n d 101, or Art 100 a n d 101. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer S t u d i o Program at U.B.C. A study and d i s c u s s i o n of key movements a n d figures in the 19th and early 20th C e n t u r i e s . A study in depth of trends, philosophies, styles and s c h o o l s from the N e o - c l a s s i c i s m to the Pre-Raphaelites. E m p h a s i s on preparing the student to understand the formal and artistic problems through studio experimentation; on appreciating the d e e p c h a n g e s and new trends in the philosophy a n d t e c h n o l o g y of visual arts s i n c e 1775. Note: This c o u r s e c o m b i n e d with Art 261 carries 3 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio P r o g r a m at U . B . C . units to the B.F.A. Art 267 W e a v i n g III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 169 A d v a n c e d loom t e c h n i q u e s : double w e a v e , M o o r m a n technique, rug w e a v e s , Ikat. Explorations of the techniques with increasing e m p h a s i s on craftsmanship and d e s i g n in order to create w a l l h a n g i n g s . Study of contemporary work in B . C . and abroad. Art 261 19th a n d 20th C e n t u r y Art II (S) (3,0,1) Art 268 W e a v i n g IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 260 Prerequisite: Art 267 The growth of two and three-dimensional design in 20th Century art movements from " A r t N o u v e a u " , B a u h a u s a n d through all contemporary E u r o p e a n a n d North A m e r i c a n trends and movements. Survey of C a n a d i a n Art a n d new directions in global art of the present day. Study of 'the evolution non-ioom p r o c e s s e s . C r e a t i n g fiberstructures with a variety of techniques: c o i l i n g , crochet, knotless netting, basketry a n d S p r a n g . E m p h a s i s will be on three-dimensional design c o n c e p t s . Field trips to weaver studios, art galleries and potential work situations. Note: This c o u r s e c o m b i n e d with Art 260 carries 3 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio P r o g r a m at U . B . C . Art 262 Advanced * Art 269 E x p e r i m e n t a l Illustration II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 251 Life D r a w i n g I (F) (3,0,1) The continuation and e x p a n s i o n of Art 251. Prerequisite: Art 184 Life drawing with e m p h a s i s on an interpretive and creative a p p r o a c h , study in depth of drawing t e c h n i q u e s and styles in reference to contemporary trends in fine applied arts. Further exploration of graphic elements derived from observation of the human body, action a n d character to expand perception and control of different media in order to develop a personal style in drawing. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 263 Advanced units to the B.F.A. Art 273 Pottery III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 165 Further exploration of pottery techniques, particularly wheelwork and g l a z e materials; study of contemporary styles and creative c e r a m i c s . Field trips to c e r a m i c studios a n d art galleries. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer Studio Program at U . B . C . Life D r a w i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 262 Further study a n d practice of interpretive a n d creative life drawing, including stylization and abstraction of human form; d e s i g n element in figurative drawing, experiments with drawing media. Individual a n d c l a s s criticisms, d i s c u s s i o n s and demonstrations regarding techniques and experimentation with materials to broaden the individuals u s e of a wide range of materials. Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to be self-motivated and develop a personal style or direction in their work. units to the B.F.A. Art 274 Pottery IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 273 Increasing e m p h a s i s on craftsmanship and d e s i g n . A n exploration of more c o m p l e x forms, mainly made on the w h e e l ; development of original g l a z e s . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer Studio Program at U . B . C . units to the B.F.A. * Art 277-1 E n v i r o n m e n t a l D e s i g n I (F) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer Studio Program at U . B . C . units to the B.F.A. Art 265 S c u l p t u r e IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 257 A d v a n c e d problems in sculptural forms. Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to experiment in the media of their c h o i c e and to Prerequisites: Art 164, Art 179 This section is intended to give the student an insight into the procedures involved in the d e s i g n of small c o m m e r c i a l retail structures s u c h as boutiques a n d service s h o p s in s h o p p i n g centres a n d malls. M o d e l - b u i l d i n g t e c h n i q u e s are studied as well as the u s e of c o l o u r in m e r c h a n d i s i n g and display. During this section the e m p h a s i s is on exterior d e s i g n . * Art 278 Art 283 Graphic P r i n t m a k i n g IV (S) (3,0,1) Arts II (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 170 Prerequisite: Art 282 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . S u p e r v i s e d exploration of graphic arts a n d printing techniques a n d the application of these to real or simulated reproduction problems. Contact with outside trades and suppliers in the c o u r s e of completing a s s i g n m e n t s . D e s i g n e d for the a d v a n c e d printmaking student, the main c o n c e r n will be with combination t e c h n i q u e s b a s e d upon the individual's needs. This c o u r s e will also help familiarize the student with print exhibitions, competitions, printmaking s o c i e t i e s , w o r k s h o p s , etc. T h e students will mount a show of their work as a final project. * Art 279 Environmental Design II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 277 For the duration of this section the student will work on the design of the interior of a shop plus methods of presentation. The psychology of colour in m e r c h a n d i s i n g will be covered as well as the use of indoor s i g n i n g a n d insignia for shop identification. Designer-client relationships will be d i s c u s s e d with methods of presentation. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U . B . C . Art 284 Fabric Printing III (F) (3,0,1) M o r e in-depth c o l o u r experiments with dyes. U s i n g fabric in sculptural relief c o m b i n e d with printing a n d stencilling t e c h n i q u e s . U s i n g more a d v a n c e d methods of stencil a n d s c r e e n printing techniques for repeat yardage d e s i g n . * Art 280 Art 285 Portfolio S t u d i o (S) (3,3,1) Fabric Printing IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisites: Art 252, Art 278 S t u d e n t s will prepare personal portfolios a n d s a m p l e s for display as well as designing a n d p r o d u c i n g s p e c i f i c items. Projects will be selected to c a p i t a l i z e on the student's acquired k n o w l e d g e and skills and will involve their contact with outside agents a n d suppliers. T h e student will be responsible from initial c o n c e p t to finished, product. Study of different printing inks. P h o t o g r a p h i c s c r e e n printing methods both for repeat d e s i g n a n d for u s e in three d i m e n s i o n a l projects c o m b i n i n g printing, applique a n d more a d v a n c e d stitchery techniques. • Art 295 A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 164, Art 184 Art 282 P r i n t m a k i n g III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 183 or instructor's permission. A c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of techniques a n d materials from presentation. contemporary illustration original c o n c e p t to final A c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of Intaglio a n d relief printing methods, this c o u r s e is primarily d e s i g n e d for the a d v a n c e d e t c h i n g student. Other areas that c o m e under consideration will include dimensional prints, photographic techniques, the lucite print, uninked e m b o s s i n g , e t c . A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration II (S) (3,3,1) N o t e : This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer Studio Program at U . B . C . Further exploration of illustration t e c h n i q u e s using a variety of mediums and t e c h n i q u e s with the e m p h a s i s on a c tual studio working methods. 80 units to the B.F.A. • Art 298 Prerequisite: Art 295 Visual Communications • V i a c o m 110 Experimental a n d C r e a t i v e C o n c e p t s I (F) (3,3,1) A studio c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to e x p a n d the student's a p p r o a c h a n d attitude t o w a r d s c r e a t i v e p r o b l e m - s o l v i n g through a series of e x p e r i e n c e s w h i c h concentrate on the p r o c e s s e s through which d e s i g n e r s arrive at original a n d workable solutions to given problems, rather than on the production of " f i n i s h e d " w o r k s as s u c h . The intention is to establish work-habits a n d thought-patterns w h i c h c o m b i n e invention with practicality a n d w h i c h are c a p a b l e of a p plication in all areas of the V i s u a l Arts. * V i s c o m 111 T e c h n i q u e s & M e d i u m s I (F) (3,3,1) This c o u r s e will introduce the student to a wide range of the materials and t e c h n i q u e s used in visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s i n c l u d i n g printmaking a n d c o m m e r c i a l printing, book production, casting a n d forming t e c h n i q u e s , fabric, glass, w o o d and metal crafts, painting mediums s u c h as oils, a c r y l i c s , c o l l a g e , water color, a s s e m b l a g e s , p a c k a g i n g , display production and make them aware of these and many other " t o o l s " of creative c o m m u n i c a t i o n . • V i s c o m 112 B a s i c Skills I (F) (3,3,1) A c o u r s e in w h i c h the student w o r k s with colour, c o m position, a n d drawing in order to develop an understanding of the skills necessary for the e x p r e s s i o n of visual c o m munications. A studio c o u r s e with e x e r c i s e s structured towards developing skill in these beginning areas. • V i s c o m 113 Audio Visual Usage (F) (3,3,1) A n exploration of the c a m e r a a n d the tape recorder as recording and interpretive tools for the creative person in the V i s u a l Arts. Introduction to the b a s i c s of photography a n d audio. Exposure to creative a n d a d v a n c e d u s e s of these media, as well as s p e c i f i c careers in these fields. B a s i c skills learned will include, exposure, photographic c o m p o s i t i o n , microphone usage, editing, simple mixing and c o m b i n e d u s e of slides a n d tapes. Courses * V i s c o m 210 Experimental and Creative Concepts II (S) (3,3,1) A continuation of V i s c o m 110 with more e m p h a s i s o n selfinitiated projects a n d individual research into problems of a more complex nature. R e s e a r c h into current a n d future trends a n d possibilities. * V i s c o m 211 T e c h n i q u e s a n d M e d i u m s II (S) (3,3,1) A continuation of V i s c o m 111 with added e m p h a s i s on c o m b i n i n g materials a n d methods. R e s e a r c h into recent developments, both t e c h n i c a l and c o n c e p t u a l . * V i s c o m 212 B a s i c Skills II (S) (3,0,1) More a d v a n c e d studies of drawing a n d d e s i g n . A d v a n c e d c o l o u r theory, including the p h y s i o l o g i c a l a n d p s y c h o l o g i c a l effects. Contemporary alternatives to traditional a p p r o a c h e s . Attention to the ability to produce original d e s i g n s for given p r o c e s s e s a n d functions. * V i s c o m 213 T h e M o v i n g Image (S) (6,6,2) * A n introduction to filmmaking, video, a n d film animation. During this c o u r s e the student will explore the creative possibilities of expressing ideas through visual motion a n d sound in combination. The aim will be to acquaint students with the potential and the visual grammars of film, video, a n d animation. T e c h n i q u e s taught will i n c l u d e shooting s k i l l s , b a s i c lighting, editing, a n d titling. Many e x a m p l e s of these media will be seen and d i s c u s s e d . E a c h student will d o basic e x e r c i s e s in all of these media, a n d two short final productions in o n e . * V i s c o m 215 History of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n II (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of V i s c o m 115 with e m p h a s i s on the sophisticated techniques employed in the 20th century. P o s s i b l e future developments in this field. Individualized study a n d projects. * V i s c o m 114 R e s e a r c h M e t h o d s (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is supportive of all a s p e c t s of the Foundation P r o g r a m s i n c e it will provide practical experience in locating, retrieving a n d assembling information from a variety of sourc e s , including libraries, n e w s p a p e r s , journals, magazines,'arc h i v e s , museums, galleries, individuals, etc. a c c o r d i n g to individual needs. E a c h student will prepare written, oral, a n d audio-visual c l a s s r o o m presentations on the resources a n d talents they have r e s e a r c h e d . T h e s e presentations will inc l u d e research into activities, organizations, and people local to the Lower M a i n l a n d a n d British C o l u m b i a . * V i s c o m 115 History of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n i (F) (3,0,1) A n informative a n d critical overview of M a n ' s attempts to c o m m u n i c a t e through the use of s i g n s , symbols, images, etc. S o c i a l , political, cultural, religious, e c o n o m i c , ethical a n d other considerations will be studied as they relate to the role of the artist in society and the c o m m u n i c a t i o n arts in general. 81 Commercial • C/Art Art Courses 301 Advanced Graphic Design I (F) (3,3,1) P r o b l e m s demonstrating visual logic, e c o n o m y of thought and study of basic forms. Solution to realistic promotional programs, graphic c o m m u n i c a t i o n s a n d corporate identity projects incorporating the elements of c o n c e p t , composition and structure, colour, symbology, typography, production, presentation. • C / A r t 305 Advanced I (F) (3,3,1) • C / A r t 310 Typography I (F) (3,3,1) Theoretical and a p p l i c a b l e principles of typographic c o m position. Variation and d e s i g n departures from established letter styles allows for freedom of e x p r e s s i o n as a prelude to the design of logotype and the redesign of alphabets. • C / A r t 315 Film D e s i g n (F) (3,3,1) Designing film storyboards a n d working through all steps from c o n c e p t to client presentation. Development of scripts through the three basic phases of pre-production, production and post-production. Students produce a o n e to three minute 8mm silent film. • C / A r t 320 S k e t c h i n g for Illustration (F) (3,3,1) Drawing from clothed human figures, with props a n d furniture. Contemporary, period and character situations. E m phasis on drawing, looking at people a n d things more a c curately and understanding them. C/Art 321 H e a d a n d Figure Painting (F) (3,3,1) W o r k i n g in oil, both the clothed and the nude figure are used. Structural painting of the head a n d figure and their character. E m p h a s i s on mature paint manipulations. • C / A r t 322 A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration (F) (3,3,1) D e v e l o p i n g and finishing illustrations for advertising a n d decorative use. Design a n d application of illustrations with consideration for reproduction requirements. Line, black and white, limited a n d full colour. A l l media. • C / A r t 323 F a s h i o n Illustration (F) (3,3,1) Introduction to the fashion figure. A w a r e n e s s of clothing as a means of describing the figures used in advertising layouts. • C/Art 401 Advanced Graphic Design II (S) (3,3,1) S o l v i n g problems which include the study of letterforms as typographic units. G o e s deeper into the effects by w h i c h students are c a p a b l e o* oo*rtmg u p witft ideas: -(ssyefopiRf 82 * C / A r t 405 Advanced Advertising Design (S) (3,0,1) C a m p a i g n d e s i g n and preparation of national s p a c e a n d television advertising for final a c c o u n t presentation. Individually planned advertising projects for portfolios. * C / A r t 410 Advertiaing D e s i g n Advertising art direction on a professional level from c o n cept to finish of an idea for m a g a z i n e , newspaper, outdoor and television. • abilities to a more sophisticated level, using p r o b l e m s geared to e x p e r i e n c i n g this a w a r e n e s s . Package D e e i g n (S) (3,3,1) Retail p a c k a g i n g a n d p a c k a g i n g for entire lines of related products are d e v e l o p e d . E m p h a s i s on graphic treatment a n d physical structure. Innovative solutions are e n c o u r a g e d from c o n c e p t through c o m p r e h e n s i v e model s t a g e s . P r i n c i p l e s of marketing, c o n s u m e r attitudes, materials, p r o d u c t i o n , printing techniques a n d legal requirements are c o v e r e d . * C / A r t 415 Film G r a p h i c s (S) (3,3,1) Film graphics production t e c h n i q u e s as p r a c t i c e d by animation studios and independent film makers. T h e problems of animation d e s i g n . P r e p a r i n g artwork, the use of animation camera a n d w a y s to create movement on the screen. * C / A r t 420 A d v a n c e d Rendering Techniques (S) (3,3,1) A l l media, including oil in e x e r c i s e s a n d illustration form E n c o u r a g e s many directions for individual development with an e m p h a s i s on contemporary t e c h n i q u e s . * C / A r t 421 Figurative Painting (S) (3,3,1) R e p r e s e n t a t i o n a l painting p r o j e c t s w h i c h i n v e s t i g a t e possibilities through uses of illusionism, replication, s i g n s and symbols. Exploration of historical a n d contemporary ideas related to subject matter. * C / A r t 422 A d v a n c e d Advertising Illustration II (S) (3,3,1) T a k i n g illustration beyond the point of l o o k i n g , s e e i n g a n d c o p y i n g , to interpretation, feeling, thinking a n d problem solving. A n initiation to d e a d l i n e s , budgets a n d restrictions. * C / A r t 423 Story Illustration (S) (3,3,1) Illustrations d e a l i n g with text from m a g a z i n e s a n d b o o k s . Editorial policies a n d layout d e s i g n s are d i s c u s s e d . Idea s k e t c h e s are prepared first in relation to the text a n d p a g e layout. Final presentations include the finished illustration and a layout of text a n d illustration in thumbnail. M e d i a 054 Introduction to the M o v i n g Image (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to filmmaking, video, or film animation. During this c o u r s e the student will explore the creative possibilities of e x p r e s s i n g ideas through visual motion a n d s o u n d in c o m b i n a t i o n . The a i m will be to acquaint students with the potential a n d the visual grammars of film, v i d e o , or animation. T e c h n i q u e s taught will include s h o o t i n g s k i l l s , .basic lighting, editing, a n d titling. M a n y e x a m p l e s of these m e d i a will be seen and d i s c u s s e d . Business M a n a g e m e n t Programs Business Management Programs Marketing Management Program 1. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t Program - 2 years 2. Marketing M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years 3. Computer S y s t e m s M a n a g e m e n t Program - 2 years 4. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years 5. B u s i n e s s Administration P r o g r a m - 1 year 6. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m - 2 years (evenings) 7. S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Program - 3 years (evenings) The student w h o enrols in this program will, in the first year, take c o u r s e s that will acquaint him/her with a broad based understanding of the b u s i n e s s environment. In the s e c o n d year of the program, the student c o n c e n t r a t e s on s u c h areas as Retailing, C o n s u m e r Behaviour, Elements of Advertising Strategy, M a r k e t i n g R e s e a r c h , M e r c h a n d i s i n g , International Marketing and Marketing M a n a g e m e n t . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Full T i m e Day T i m e P r o g r a m s T h e s e day-time programs provide the student with a c o m prehensive education in b a s i c m a n a g e r i a l skills, and give a practical foundation for those w h o wish to enter a career in business either as an independent entrepreneur or as a prospective employee-manager. The following Two Year Programs are offered by the S c h o o l of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t beginning in September of e a c h year: 1. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m 2. Marketing M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m 3. Computer S y s t e m s M a n a g e m e n t Program 4. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t Program A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D i p l o m a is awarded upon s u c c e s s f u l completion of 96.0 credit hours as outlined below. In addition, the following 10 Month Accelerated Business Administration Programs are offered beginning in July of e a c h year for mature students already p o s s e s s i n g extensive b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e . D e t a i l s c a n be o b t a i n e d from C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l Office. 1. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t 2. Marketing M a n a g e m e n t 3. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate is awarded upon s u c c e s s f u l completion of a minimum of 57 credit hours. Due to the limited s p a c e in these programs, interested pers o n s s h o u l d apply early. A l l c a n d i d a t e s must have an interview with the Coordinator of the program. Entry to the programs will be based on high s c h o o l grades, b u s i n e s s exp e r i e n c e , maturity, interest and aptitude. In addition, students must write the E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test. Projects, c a s e problems, s p e c i a l a s s i g n m e n t s , and field trips are extensively used to stimulate the application of theory and principles, and to develop analytical abilities to a c h i e v e greater o c c u p a t i o n a l c o m p e t e n c e . This particular program prepares the student for a wide variety of c h a l l e n g i n g positions requiring s p e c i a l skills in s u c h fields as retailing, buying, advertising, insurance selling, and market r e s e a r c h . Computer Systems Management Program In North A m e r i c a , the number of computer installations has grown from about 2000 in 1960 to 100,000 in 1970 and is estimated to reach 400,000 by 1980. The c o m p u t i n g industry is currently growing at a 20 per cent annual rate indicating that it will not be too many years until this industry will have the s a m e e c o n o m i c impact as the auto industry has today. This rapid growth has p r o d u c e d a serious shortage of qualified computer programmers and systems analysts. Up to 1967, due to c o s t s , c o m p u t e r s were available only to the larger b u s i n e s s . Today a need exists for versatile c o m puter personnel, people trained in computer operation, programming, systems analysis, the application of c o m puters, and management. Developments in the last d e c a d e have brought computer capability to an ever-expanding circ l e of smaller organizations. O n e s u c h development has been the creation of efficient and low-cost minicomputers and small b u s i n e s s computers. In terms of number of installations, these small and minicomputers now represent 83 per cent of the total number of computer installations. T h e s e small organizations cannot afford s p e c i a l i s t s in e a c h segment of computer a p p l i c a t i o n . This two year program provides the students with the c o m prehensive training required to satisfy this new b u s i n e s s need for a more versatile computer person. Accounting/Financial Management Program This program is d e s i g n e d to provide the student with the opportunity to obtain a sound understanding of a c c o u n t i n g principles and c o n c e p t s as well as other a s p e c t s of b u s i n e s s . The program prepares the student for a career in public a c counting or financial management in c o m m e r c i a l or industrial enterprises as well as government o c c u p a t i o n s . The student concentrates in his/her s e c o n d year on courses in financial management s u c h as: C o s t A c c o u n t i n g , F i n a n c e and M a n a g e r i a l A c c o u n t i n g , Taxation and Auditing. A p p l i c a t i o n of principles and theories is stressed through the use of case-method and problem-solving t e c h n i q u e s . Further preparation for work in m a n a g e m e n t will be a c h i e v e d by developing the student's ability to analyze b u s i n e s s problems and to arrive at logical solutions. U p o n graduation the student has received approximately 5 5 % of the credits required towards a C . G . A . , S . M . A . or A . P . A . diploma. 83 F U L L TIME D A Y TIME P R O G R A M S FIRST TERM (FALL) Business Management 150 Business Management 158 Business Management 170 Business Management 172 Business Management 175 Business Management 180 Business Management 182 Business Management 184 Communications 150 Economics 200 MARKETING MANAGEMENT Business Mathematics — Marketing I 3 Mathematics of Business and Finance 4.5 Administrative Practices and Organization 3 Organizational Behaviour 3 Introduction to Data Processing 3 Systems Analysis and Application I — Accounting I 4.5 Communications 3 Principles of Macro Economic Theory _3_ 27 ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT — 3 COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 3 3 4.5 — 3 3 3 3 — 3 3 4.5 3 3 4.5 3 _3_ jj^ 27 25.5 — • 3 4.5 .3 . 4.5 SECOND TERM (SPRING) Business Management 151 Business Management 159 Business Management 171 Business Management 176 Business Management 180 Business Management 181 Business Management 182 Business Management 183 Business Management 185 Communications 151 Economics 201 Statistical Analysis and Application — Marketing II 3 Applied Business Statistics . . . 4.5 Management in Industry .' 3 Introduction to Data Processing — "BASIC" Programming II — Systems Analysis and Application I 3 "RPG II" Programming I — Accounting II 4.5 Business Writing 3 Principles of Micro Economic Theory _3_ THIRD TERM (FALL) Business Management 230 Business Management 240 Business Management 255 Business Management 260 Business Management 263 Business Management 264 Business Management 271 Business Management 272 Business Management 273 Business Management 275 Business Management 280 Business Management 292 Business Management 293 Business Management 295 Business Management 297 LAP 201 FOURTH TERM (SPRING) Business Management 220 Business Management 230 Business Management 231 Business Management 232 Business Management 241 Business Management 253 Business Management 256 Business Management 257 Business Management 261 Business Management 265 Business Management 274 Business Management 276 Business Management 277 Business Management 278 Business Management 284 Business Management 294 Business Management 296 84 24 Salesmanship I 3 Business Law I 3 Financial Accounting I — Finance I 3 Advanced Data Processing — — Cost and ManagerialAccounting— Merchandising I 3 Consumer Behaviour 3 Elements of Advertising Strategy 3 Marketing Research 3 ..., Auditing — "COBOL" Programming I — Systems Analysis and Application II — "BASIC" Programming III — "RPG II'! Programming II — Reading Dynamics 1.5 22.5 Business Readiness Salesmanship I Merchandising II Channels of Distribution Business Law II Management Responsibility in Labour Relations Financial Accounting II Corporation and Society Finance II Quantitative Aids to Decision Making Cost and Managerial Accounting II Marketing Management International Marketing Sales Management Taxation "COBOL" Programming II Management Information Systems 3 . — . — . — 4.5 3 . 6 4.5 3 . 3 24 24 . 3 . 3 . 3 . 3 4 5 — • — • — • — • 3 — — • — • — • 1 -5 21 . 3 . 3 . 3 . 1.5 25.5 1.5 — 3 1.5 3 15 — • — • — . 3 . . 1.5 . 3 3 — 1.9 — 3 3 . — 3 — 3 3 3 — 3 — — .. — . 3 ... — • 22.5 24 1 5 3 . • 21 Business Management Evening Programs/Courses The evening program of c o u r s e s is d e s i g n e d to satisfy the following student needs: A. Provide a practical exposure to the B a s i c M a n a g e r i a l S k i l l s required in b u s i n e s s . Students enrolled in this program complete a series of eight c o u r s e s taking two c o u r s e s per term over a two year period. W h i l e the particular s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s is not rigid, the following s e q u e n c e is r e c o m m e n d e d : Term 1: B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I B S M G 176: M a n a g e m e n t in Industry Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 172: Administrative P r a c t i c e s a n d Organization Term 3: B S M G 163: P r i n c i p l e s of Supervision and L e a d e r s h i p B S M G 150: B u s i n e s s M a t h e m a t i c s Term 4: B S M G 180: Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g B S M G 240: B u s i n e s s L a w I Satisfactory completion of the above c o u r s e s will provide the student with a Certificate in Administrative M a n a g e m e n t . The total number of credit hours for this certificate is 27 credit hours. B. Provide a practical exposure to the M a n a g e r i a l Marketing S k i l l s required in operating a small b u s i n e s s . Students enrolled in this program c o m p l e t e a series of twelve courses, taking two courses per term, over a three year period. Term 1: B S M G 172: Administrative P r a c t i c e s a n d Organization B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 158: M a r k e t i n g I Term 3: B S M G 210: S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t B S M G 163: P r i n c i p l e s of S u p e r v i s i o n Term 4: B S M G 180: Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g B S M G 240: B u s i n e s s L a w I Term 5: B S M G 260: F i n a n c e I B S M G 273: E l e m e n t s of Advertising Strategy Term 6: B S M G 230: S a l e s m a n s h i p I B S M G 176: M a n a g e m e n t in Industry Satisfactory completion of the above c o u r s e s will provide the s t u d e n t with a C e r t i f i c a t e in S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t . The total number of credit hours for this certificate is 39 credit hours. C . Provide an opportunity to take c o u r s e s that carry credit into other certificate and diploma programs. T h o s e professional areas currently r e c o g n i z i n g c o u r s e s taken at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e are: -Chartered A c c o u n t a n t ( C A . ) -Certified G e n e r a l A c c o u n t a n t (C.G.A.) -Society of M a n a g e m e n t A c c o u n t a n t s (S.M.A.) -Institute of A c c r e d i t e d P u b l i c A c c o u n t a n t s -Institute of Chartered Secretaries a n d Administrators -Certificate in M u n i c i p a l Administration - B a c h e l o r of C o m m e r c e Degree (U.B.C.) - B a c h e l o r of Arts: E c o n o m i c s and C o m m e r c e (S.F.U.) - A s s o c i a t e of the Trust C o m p a n i e s Institute (A.T.C.I.) D. Provide the opportunity for those people interested in furthering their b u s i n e s s skills and k n o w l e d g e to enrol in one or more courses without any obligation of having to complete diploma or certificate requirements. Students interested in any of these evening programs s h o u l d contact the S c h o o l of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t (local 390) or the Coordinator (local 396) for further information. 85 Business M a n a g e m e n t Instructional Faculty B a g s h a w , R., B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l . ) , M.A. (Colorado), M E d . , Counsellor Barbazuk Wm., B.A. (Sask.), B.Ed., (Sask.), T e a c h i n g C e r tificate (Sask.) Carter, A.W., B . S c . (U. of Alta.), C & Q Cert. (Enfield T e c h . C o l l e g e , London) Dow, B., R.I.A. Duzita, W„ B . C o m m . (U.B.C.) E n t i c k n a p , S., L L . B . (U. of Sask.) Pract. Cert. (Law. S o c . of B.C.) Fane, G . , R.I.A. Farrell, G . , DIPI.T. (Fin. Mgmt.) (B.C.l.T.), M . B . C . ( G e n . Bus.) (S.F.U.), R.I.A. Flanders, A . , B . C o m m . (U. of Sask.) Goff, W m . S„ B . S c . (Victoria), M . S c . (Brit. Col.) G r u e n , F., B . M . R e n s s e l a e r P o l m Inst., M . A . S c . (Waterloo) Heinz, B., Computer A n a l y s t / P r o g r a m m e r , R e d River C o m m . College Humphries, T. Wm., B . S c , ( U . B . C ) , Chartered A c c o u n t a n t Irvine, L , B.A. (U. of W.), M.A. (S.F.U.) K i l i a n , C , B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (S.F.U.) K u b i c e k , R., B.A. (Concordia) L a C o s t e , W.H., D i p l o m a T e c h . (B.C.l.T.), R.I.A. LeFlufy, R . C Loblaw, J.D., B.A. (Toronto) M c K a y , R.B., L L . B . (Alberta), B . C o m m . (U.B.C.) M a r s h a l l , J.R., Diploma-Operations Mgmt. (B.C.l.T.), S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s & D e s i g n ( C o l l e g e of N e w C a l e d o n i a ) M c i n t o s h , C , B . C o m m . ( U . B . C ) , C . G . A . (U.B.C.) M i c h a e l s , L , B . S c . (Alta.), B . E d . (Alta.), M . E d . (Alta.) M o s e l e y , B., B.A. (Calif.), M.B.A. (Calif.) N i c h o l s , R . C , B . C o m m . (Alta.), R.I.A. N i x o n , P., B . S c (U.Vic.) Norris, R., C A . (Inst, of C A . ) Oberndorf, A . G . , B.S. (U. N e w Haven), M.I.M. (Thunderbird Grad., S c h o o l of International B u s i n e s s ) O ' C o n n o r , R., B u s . A d m i n . Degree (Ryerson) Powley, M . , B.Ed., (Brit. Col.), M.B.A. (S.F.U.) Praill, A., Industrial Relations (Queen's) Priester, C L , F.C.B.A. (Queen's), B.A. (Sir G e o r g e William), M.A. (Brit. Col.) Rennie, R., B.S. (Brigham Young), M.S. (Brigham Young), Ph.D. (Brit. C o l . ) Richter, M . , B.A. (Sask.), B . E d . (Sask.) Schmidt, L , B . E d . (Alta.), M . E d . (Alta.), P h . D . (Alta.), C o u n sellor Smyth, W m . , B . C o m m . (Dalhousie) Taylor, M„ B . S c . (Alta.) T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c . (S.F.U.) V a n N o r m a n , D.L., B.A., (Brit. C o l . ) , M.A. (Brit. Col.) V i c k , A . H . , B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l . ) Y a c k n e s s , H.B., B . C o m m . (Brit. Col.), M.B.A. ( S . F . U ) , C A . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 150 B u s i n e s s M a t h e m a t i c s ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) A review of basic mathematics a p p l i c a b l e to b u s i n e s s a n d industry including fundamental algebraic operations, ratios, proportions a n d percent; the mathematics of finance inc l u d i n g retail operations, simple a n d c o m p o u n d interest, discounts, annuities, depreciation methods a n d discounted c a s h flow; if time permits, computer m o d e l s are applied. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 151 Statistical A n a l y s i s a n d A p p l i c a t i o n ( F , S ) (4.5,0,1.5) The theory and application of statistics as it applies to 86 Courses business i n c l u d i n g : data presentation a n d d e s c r i p t i o n ; probability theory and distributions; tests of h y p o t h e s i s ; a n d predictive a n d analytic t e c h n i q u e s . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 152 P e r s o n a l F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to total life a n d estate p l a n n i n g . This c o u r s e aims to direct the student towards an understanding of how to c o p e with financial p l a n n i n g . T o p i c s c o v e r e d inc l u d e : b a n k i n g , credit, investments, loans, i n s u r a n c e , wills, probate, tax shelters, real estate, incorporation, family financ i a l planning, s t o c k s , bonds, a n d mortgages. T h e topics revolve around planning a n d a c h i e v i n g g o a l s . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158 M a r k e t i n g I ( F . S ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the C a n a d i a n marketing environment and marketing institutions. A detailed study to e n a b l e the student to understand the realistic, p r a c t i c a l w o r k i n g s a n d functions of product planning, promotion, market r e s e a r c h , selection of trade c h a n n e l s , m e r c h a n d i s i n g , advertising a n d s a l e s m a n s h i p with e m p h a s i s on both c o n s u m e r a n d i n dustrial g o o d s and services. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 159 M a r k e t i n g II ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158: M a r k e t i n g I or by permission of the Program C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s c o u r s e is a continuation ot M a r k e t i n g I. It i s intended to add more depth to the basic marketing k n o w l e d g e and e x pand on the overall use of the marketing c o n c e p t in today's competitive environment. Field trips and student projects will form part of the content of this c o u r s e . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 163 Principles of Supervision and Leadership (F,S) (3,0,1) Study of human elements in o r g a n i z a t i o n s , with e m p h a s i s on group behaviour. C o n c e p t s in p e r s u a s i o n , g u i d a n c e a n d understanding of the individual within the group. A p plications of human relations m a n a g e m e n t , i.e., leadership, power, authority, group d y n a m i c s , formal a n d informal organization, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , conflict a n d the introduction of c h a n g e . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 165 E s s e n t i a l s of B o o k k e e p i n g I ( F , S U ) (3,0,1) A n introductory c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to c o v e r b a s i c terminology, t e c h n i q u e s a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of a c c o u n t i n g , i n c l u d i n g the theory and practice of k e e p i n g adequate r e c o r d s ; use of s p e c i a l journals; controlling a c c o u n t s a n d subsidiary ledgers; periodic adjustments, c l o s i n g p r o c e d u r e s a n d preparation of financial statements. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 168 E s s e n t i a l s of B o o k k e e p i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B M 165; or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Instructor and/or Coordinator. A continuation of work begun in B M 165 with e m p h a s i s on c a s h , receivables, payroll a n d other b a s i c b o o k k e e p i n g f u n c tions. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 170 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180 M a t h e m a t i c s of B u s i n e s s a n d F i n a n c e (F) (4.5, 0,1.5) Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g A review of fundamental a l g e b r a i c operations; ratios, proportions and percent; mathematics of managerial planning; d i s c o u n t s , markups, margins, selling price, markd o w n s ; simple interest, c o m p o u n d interest, d i s c o u n t i n g negotiable instruments, instalment p u r c h a s e s ; annuities, s i n k i n g funds, amortization tables, d e p r e c i a t i o n , investment bonds. Provides a b a s i c understanding of important E D P c o n cepts, terminology a n d t e c h n i q u e s used in business. Provides a general orientation to the computer — what it is, how it functions, and what it c a n and cannot do. Provides an understanding of the " B A S I C " programming l a n g u a g e as it relates to the solution of problems a n d tasks in the mathematical a n d b u s i n e s s application areas. (F,S) (3,0,1) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 171 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181 Applied " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g II (F.S) (3,0,1) B u s i n e s s Statistics (S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) A n examination of frequency distributions, averages, index numbers, probability, linear correlation reliability a n d s a m pling. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172 Administrative P r a c t i c e s a n d O r g a n i z a t i o n s (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the b a s i c nature of b u s i n e s s problems and to the administrative p r o c e s s involved in handling them. Study and d i s c u s s i o n of actual b u s i n e s s situations s e l e c t e d to illustrate typical problems met in industry requiring managerial analysis, d e c i s i o n a n d action. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 173 O r g a n i z a t i o n a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e p r o v i d e s a b a s i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of organizational c o m m u n i c a t i o n . Continuity of ideas a n d c o n tent is provided by starting with the individual c o m munication p r o c e s s and then e x p a n d i n g through the twoperson relationships to groups a n d finally to the total organizational level. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180 or by written permission of the Instructor or Coordinator. This c o u r s e is an extension of B M 180 strengthening the student's k n o w l e d g e of programming in the " B A S I C " programming language to solve b u s i n e s s problems. A r e a s of study include: program flowcharts, program organization, table handling techniques, file m a i n t e n a n c e , desk file organizations, a c c e s s methods, and programming efficiently. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182 S y a t e m s A n a l y s i s & A p p l i c a t i o n I (F,S) (3,0,1) Provides a basic understanding of system c o n c e p t s inc l u d i n g the life-cycle and the c o n c e p t of a b u s i n e s s as an information system. Introduces the skills that are the working tools of systems analysis including form d e s i g n , c o d i n g , charting, flowcharting a n d written a n d v e r b a l c o m munication. Provides detailed understanding of the four lifec y c l e phases (Study, D e s i g n , Development a n d Operation) through their application in a detailed c o n t i n u o u s c a s e study. Provides an understanding of the logical a p p r o a c h to solving a problem. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183 "RPG B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 175 O r g a n i z a t i o n a l B e h a v i o u r ( F , S ) (3,0,1) The f o c u s of this c o u r s e is on human behaviour within organizations. Students will actively participate in role p l a y i n g a n d other s i m u l a t e d a c t i v i t i e s d e a l i n g with organizational and personal factors that influence different types of work behaviour, s p e c i f i c t o p i c s s u c h as motivation, leadership, c h a n g e within organization, a n d formal a n d informal organizations will be explored. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 176 M a n a g e m e n t In Industry ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172, or by written perm i s s i o n of the Instructor a n d / o r Coordinator. II" P r o g r a m m i n g I (S) (6,0,2) This c o u r s e provides the student with a practical training in the application of the R P G II programming language to solve b u s i n e s s problems. A r e a s of study include programming fundamentals, c o m p i l a t i o n , d e s k - c h e c k i n g , d e b u g g i n g and basic R P G II programming c o n c e p t s as well as multi-file p r o c e s s i n g , control breaks, internal sub-routines, a n d table and array handling. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 A c c o u n t i n g I (F.S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) A n introduction to b a s i c a c c o u n t i n g principles and procedures including the recording of transactions, and a d justments for b a s i c a c c o u n t i n g records. The student will prepare financial statements for a proprietorship a n d will study, in detail, the a c c o u n t i n g and reporting of c a s h , a c c o u n t s receivable, m e r c h a n d i s e inventory a n d long-lived assets. A n orientation into the nature of b u s i n e s s in the private e n terprise system, with e m p h a s i s on the role and interaction of the three levels of government with b u s i n e s s ; the role of financial intermediaries and the C a p i t a l Market in influencing the behaviour of firms: a n d the financial function of management. N o t e : B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172 a n d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 176 taken together receive 3 semester hours credit in C o m m e r c e at S . F . U . 87 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 185 A c c o u n t i n g II (F,S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 230 S a l e s m a n s h i p I (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 or by permission of the Coordinator. A n introduction to professional selling. C o m m u n i c a t i o n i n c l u d i n g effective listening, probing, problem finding a n d solving and creativity will be c o v e r e d . S p e c i f i c t e c h n i q u e s of professional selling including p r o s p e c t i n g , qualifying a n d contracting prospects. T h e c o u r s e will also cover, in depth, the organization and management of s a l e s activities. A continuation of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184. A n a l y s i s of funds flow, both c a s h a n d working capital. M a n a g e m e n t uses of a c c o u n t i n g : c a s h budgeting, forecasting, profit planning, and responsibility a c c o u n t i n g . A c c o u n t i n g for manufacturing operations. Note: W h e n both B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 a n d 185 are c o m p l e t e d , they receive 6 semester hours credit in C o m merce at S.F.U. a n d 1.5 hours credit for C o m m e r c e 151 a n d 1.5 unassigned C o m m e r c e credit at U . B . C . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 231 M e r c h a n d i s i n g II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 271 A survey c o u r s e of w i d e l y r a n g i n g merchandising techniques a n d strategies covering many c o m m o d i t i e s Where possible extensive u s e of s u c c e s s f u l m e r c h a n d i s e r s as guest lecturers will be made. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 187 Essentials of M a n a g e r i a l P r a c t i c e s ( F . S . S U ) (3,0,1) (This course is a c o n d e n s a t i o n of the theoretical a s p e c t s of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172 and B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 176) In this course the five key tasks in m a n a g i n g an enterprise, i.e. P l a n n i n g , A c q u i s i t i o n of R e s o u r c e s , O r g a n i z a t i o n , A c tivation and Control are explained. In addition, the key organizational functions of Marketing, P r o d u c t i o n , F i n a n c e and Personnel are c o v e r e d . The c o u r s e is essentially an overview of the theoretical framework of the task of management. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 232 C h a n n e l s of Distribution (S) (1.5, 0, .5) Provides a b a s i c understanding of the C h a n n e l s of Distribution and the distributive pipe-line. A r e a s of study inc l u d e : c l a s s i f i c a t i o n , definition of M / C alternative c h a n n e l s , functions performed in c h a n n e l s , transactions in the distributive pipe-line. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 233 Interactive F o r e c a s t i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) Provides a b a c k g r o u n d market area. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 210 S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t (F,S) (3,0,1) This course offers students a s p e c i a l opportunity to develop skills and c o n c e p t s in areas of " S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t " where they r e c o g n i z e s p e c i f i c , personal needs. They will learn down-to-earth t e c h n i q u e s for dealing with many of the multiplicity of d e m a n d s p l a c e d upon the manager of a small business. Further, there will be a significant opportunity for students to s h a p e the e m p h a s i s of this dynamic set of mini-courses. After a three to four s e s s i o n survey of s u c h issues as S m a l l B u s i n e s s S u c c e s s a n d Failure, Methods a n d Forms of O r g a n i z a t i o n , P u r c h a s e of F r a n c h i s e s and G o i n g C o n c e r n s ; topical e m p h a s i s will be determined by the class. T o p i c s will be selected from the following areas: 1. C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 2. F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t for S m a l l B u s i n e s s 3. C a s h Management for S m a l l B u s i n e s s 4. B u d g e t s a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 5. Credit Granting and the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 6. Y o u r Bank M a n a g e r and the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 7. Taxation for C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s 8. C o m m e r c i a l Law for C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s 9. Government and the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 10. Electronic Data P r o c e s s i n g for the S m a l l B u s i n e s s in forecasting within an active A r e a s of study include a day-to-day u s e of b u s i n e s s statistics, forecasting models in a lower mainland operating business. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 240 B u s i n e s s L a w I (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will e m p h a s i z e the application of legal principles to business relationships through the study of court d e c i s i o n s (case law), hypothetical fact situations, a n d legislation. The areas of study to be particularly c o v e r e d are the Law of Contract, the S a l e of G o o d s A c t a n d C o n s u m e r Protection, S e c u r e d Transactions a n d Creditors Rights_and A g e n c y a n d Partnership. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 241 B u s i n e s s L a w II (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will e m p h a s i z e the application of legal principles to business relationships through the study of court d e c i s i o n s (case law) and respective legislation. The areas of study to be particularly covered are the Law of Partnership, C o m p a n y L a w and the B . C . C o m p a n i e s A c t , Torts a n d Ins u r a n c e , a n d Real Property. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 253 M a n a g e m e n t Responsibility in L a b o u r Relations B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 220 B u s i n e s s R e a d i n e s s (S) (1.5, 0, .5) This course summarizes and integrates the 4 distinct B u s i n e s s Management options with e m p h a s i s on career goals, planning and effective job placement procedures. 88 (F,S) (3.0,1) A study of management's responsibility and role in present day labour relations. T o p i c s include history of u n i o n i s m , c o n temporary unionism, B . C . L a b o u r C o d e a n d C o l l e c t i v e Bargaining. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255 F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185 or by permission of the Coordinator. D e c i s i o n - m a k i n g and planning in organizations using a c counting tools. The nature of a c c o u n t i n g controls. C o m m o n control methods. M e a s u r e s of m a n a g e m e n t performance. The role of the management cost accountant. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 265 T h i s c o u r s e studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, a n d is a logical continuation and r e i n f o r c e m e n t of the m a t e r i a l c o v e r e d in B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185. The c o u r s e e n c o m p a s s e s the study of F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g at the intermediate level. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 256 Financial Accounting II (S) (3,0,1) Quantitative A i d s to D e c i s i o n M a k i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 170/171 or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Coordinator. Quantitative tools in use in modern management. Inventory models, E O Q , buffer levels a n d lead times, project planning, P E R T , linear regression as a forecasting tool, linear programming as an optimization technique. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 266 This c o u r s e is a logical s e q u e l to B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255 in that it studies current d e v e l o p m e n t s in financial a c c o u n t i n g a n d their effects on f i n a n c i a l statement p r e s e n tation. T h e course e n c o m p a s s e s the study of F i n a n c i a l A c counting at a level beyond B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255. C a n a d i a n F i n a n c i a l Institutions a n d M o n e y Markets (F) (1.5, 0, .5) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 257 T h e Corporation a n d Society (S) (3,0,1) A study of the interaction of b u s i n e s s firms with societies of w h i c h they are part: a n e x a m i n a t i o n of s o c i a l r e s p o n sibility, legitimacy, accountability as related to profit making organizations; the firm's responsibility with c o n s u m e r s , shareholders, labour, the community a n d government. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 260 F i n a n c e I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184, 185 a n d 176. B u s i n e s s risk and uncertainty, financial measurements, ratio analysis, annual rate of return, net present value, i n ternal rate of return; annual cost, pay-back period. A n ticipating financial needs of the firm. T a x considerations. C a s e studies covering financial problems will form a major part of this c o u r s e . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 261 F i n a n c e II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 260 A c q u i r i n g financial r e s o u r c e s , cost of capital, internal financing, allocating financial r e s o u r c e s within the firm, leverage a n d liquidity, administering circulating capital, financial a s p e c t s of mergers a n d take-overs. C a s e studies will form an integral part of this c o u r s e . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 263 A d v a n c e d Data P r o c e s s i n g (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180 This c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180. Areas of study include the m e a s u r e m e n t s a n d c o s t s of resources, the criteria for e s t a b l i s h i n g s p e c i f i c a t i o n s , the criteria for evaluating resources, the resources available on the West C o a s t , installing a computer system a n d m a n a g i n g the computer system. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 264 Cost and Managerial Accounting I (F.S) (4.5,'o, 1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185 or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Coordinator. Examination of financial intermediaries and their role in the c o m m e r c i a l structure of society. M o n e y a n d capital markets as allocators of credit. A firm's a n d individual's a c c e s s to these resources. Examine structure of C a n a d i a n Monetary System. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 270 Personnel M a n a g e m e n t ( F , S ) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will explore management skills development in the personnel field. Heavy e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on providing the students with practical tools a n d e x p e r i e n c e s in s u c h i n t e r v i e w i n g a r e a s a s recruitment s e l e c t i o n , p l a c e m e n t of personnel, job descriptions a n d analysis; training a n d performance a p p r a i s a l ; w a g e a n d salary a d ministration; union management relations, e t c . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 271 M e r c h a n d i s i n g I (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to acquaint the student with the retailer's role in the distribution p r o c e s s , the types of retail establishments and their relative strengths and w e a k n e s s e s , the analysis of a trading area, site location, store layout, the influence of c h a n g i n g life styles on c o n s u m e r d e m a n d patterns, techniques for determining customer d e m a n d , policy formulation, store image, the organization and operation of a retail establishment. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 272 C o n s u m e r Behaviour (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is to 1) acquaint the student with the b a s i c c o n c e p t s of c o n s u m e r behaviour, 2) explain the interrelationship that exists between the important variables, 3) develop an understanding of c o n s u m e r d e c i s i o n p r o c e s s e s . M o r e specifically the c o u r s e will analyze the foundation for c o n s u m e r behaviour, the individual, the environmental i n f l u e n c e s on c o n s u m e r s , b u s i n e s s effects, and c o n s u m e r purchase decisions. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 273 E l e m e n t s o l A d v e r t i s i n g Strategy ( F , S ) (3,0,1) The purpose of this c o u r s e is to treat advertising as an a c c e p t e d part of marketing and to indicate to management and the public the place of advertising in modern society. More specifically the c o u r s e will c o v e r advertising c o n c e p t s , a d vertising strategy, the preparation of the advertisement, media mix, r e s e a r c h , the integration of advertising programs and legal aspects. 89 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 274 Cost and Managerial Accounting II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 264 A more in-depth study of subjects covered in B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 264. C o s t determination for manufacturing operations, P l a n n i n g and Cost Control Systems, Performance Evaluation Methods. Strategic D e c i s i o n M a k i n g Methods. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 275 Marketing R e s e a r c h (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158/159. This c o u r s e c o v e r s auditing p r o c e d u r e s for intangibles, proprietorship, financial statement preparation, the audit report, legal requirements, audit p r o c e d u r e s for small b u s i n e s s e s , share capital and c h a n g e s in surplus. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 284 T a x a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) A study, largely d e p e n d i n g upon the c a s e study method of the Income Tax Act and determination of taxable i n c o m e and tax payable, thereon for individuals a n d corporations. Strategic planning to achieve tax minimization is an integral part of this c o u r s e . This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d as an introductory c o u r s e in the b a s i c s of marketing research. It will indicate the methods of making the most effective use of marketing research. Through some practical applications of a research project the student will learn the elements of research d e s i g n , basic methods of collecting data, analysis a n d reporting. T h e student will gain a k n o w l e d g e in the procedures a n d applications of C a n a d i a n and A m e r i c a n research. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 291 " R P G II" P r o g r a m m i n g II (F) (6,0,2) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 276 Marketing M a n a g e m e n t (S) (3,0,1) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292 " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g I (F) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158/159 Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180 This course introduces the student to the a p p r o a c h e s and problems of the marketing management d e c i s i o n making u n der the influence of controllable a n d uncontrollable c o n ditions. Marketing strategy a n d planning, buyer behaviour, distribution strategy, product strategy a n d integrated programs will be studied. Provides the student with a practical training in the organization and writing of programs in the C O B O L language. T o p i c s i n c l u d e : program o r g a n i z a t i o n , program flow c h a r t s , p r o g r a m i n s t r u c t i o n s , c o m p i l a t i o n , desk c h e c k i n g and d e b u g g i n g . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 277 International M a r k e t i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 293 S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s a n d A p p l i c a t i o n II (F) (3,0,1) A study of the m e c h a n i c s of international trade, foreign exc h a n g e rates, tariffs, e t c . Product-distribution-promotion mixes for export markets of C a n a d i a n industry with e m p h a s i s on P a c i f i c R i m and U.S.A. market influences. Adapting domestic marketing techniques to foreign conditions. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 278 S a l e s M a n a g e m e n t (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183 This c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183, strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of R P G II. Areas of study inc l u d e desk file organizations, a c c e s s methods, file m a i n t e n a n c e and matching record p r o c e s s i n g . This c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182 furthering the student's ability to a n a l y z e the managerial requirements of information systems. It provides a practical e x p e r i e n c e in the detailed d e s i g n of on-line s y s t e m s for business applications. T o p i c s include on-line c o n c e p t s , security, audit controls, file management, s c r e e n d e s i g n and system documentation. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 230 The s c o p e of this c o u r s e includes all of the activities which the person in c h a r g e of an outside sales force is likely to e n counter. M o r e s p e c i f i c a l l y it covers sales organization, operations, planning, analysis and evaluation, and s a l e s m a n s h i p techniques. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 280 Auditing I (F,S) (3,0,1) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 294 " C O B O L ' P r o g r a m m i n g II ( F , S ) (3,0,1) 1 Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292 This c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292, strengthening the student's k n o w l e d g e of C O B O L . A r e a s of study include: table handling t e c h n i q u e s , master file u p dates, file maintenance, program instructions related to disk file handling techniques and programming for efficient execution. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 185 This course c o v e r s auditing procedures for intangibles, proprietorship, financial statement preparation, the audit report, legal requirements, audit procedures for small business, share capital a n d c h a n g e s in surplus. "BASIC" B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 282 A u d i t i n g II (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181, strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of B A S I C . A r e a s of study inc l u d e disk file organizations, s c r e e n formatting, a c c e s s methods, file maintenance and file reorganization. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 280 90 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 295 P r o g r a m m i n g III ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 296 M a n a g e m e n t Information S y s t e m s (S) ( 4 . 5 , 1, 1.5) Prerequisites: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292, 295, 293. This c o u r s e brings together the various computer c o n c e p t s that have been studied in the previous three semesters. It i n volves an in-depth computer study of a c o m p a n y situation. T o p i c s include integrated information systems, integrated data bases, controls, distributed p r o c e s s i n g , feasibility studies, systems development p h a s e s , and project management c o n c e p t s . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 297 "RPG II" P r o g r a m m i n g II (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183 This c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183, strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of R P G II. A r e a s of study include disk file organizations, a c c e s s methods, file maintenance and matching record p r o c e s s i n g . C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 B a s i c C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F) (3,0,1) A course in the development of writing and s p e a k i n g skills, with material largely related to s p e c i f i c career g o a l s . P r a c t i c e in improving English b a s i c s , numerous writing assignments, and at least o n e spoken presentation. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 151 B u s i n e s s Writing (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in the b a s i c s of b u s i n e s s writing; resumes, b u s i n e s s letters, a n d reports. Attention is paid to b u s i n e s s writing formats a n d to developing an effective style. S p o k e n presentations may be required. E c o n o m i c s 200 P r i n c i p l e s of M a c r o e c o n o m i c Theory ( F , S ) (3,0,1) The formal K e y n e s i a n theory of national i n c o m e determination a n d some contemporary critiques of this theory. Inc l u d e d is the study of the p o s s i b l e c a u s e s of and solutions to unemployment a n d inflation a n d the importance of international trade. Government fiscal a n d monetary policies are examined in detail. E c o n o m i c s 201 Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c Theory ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A study of the theoretical c o n s t r u c t s of c o n s u m e r behaviour and the operation of b u s i n e s s firms in the market e c o n o m y u n d e r c o n d i t i o n s of p e r f e c t competition, oligopoly, monopoly a n d monopolistic competition. Inc l u d e d is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium position a n d the determinants of i n c o m e distribution. L A P 201 R e a d i n g D y n a m i c s ( F , S U ) (1.5,0,2) The a i m of this c o u r s e is to provide students with the reading skills essential to efficient functioning within both c o l l e g e and b u s i n e s s communities. R e a d i n g s p e e d and c o m prehension will be improved through a combination of lectures and practice s e s s i o n s . &r#jjj_fj 91 Business Training and Career Development Instructional Faculty B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g and A l b o r g . Gerrie. B A . (Reading), M.A. (U.B.C.). Standard T e a c h i n g Credentials (U.K.) T e a c h i n g C r e d e n t i a l (U. of Calif.) Blanney. Diane, Lab Supervisor B o n d . E l l e n , L L . B (U. of Vic.) Brady. S h a r o n , Lab Supervisor Bury. N a n c y , B.A. ( U . B . C ) , A.C.I. - Coordinator B u s i n e s s Office Training Clark. Doris, Lab Supervisor Freund. Shirley, Instructor G a l l o w a y , Leilani, B.A. (U.B.C.) Prof. T e a c h i n g Certificate (U.B.C.) Griffiths. A l i s o n . M.A. (U. of Alta.) H a m m o n d . D o n n a , Lab Supervisor Heys, V i c k i e . Lab Supervisor Hogg, Wm. J . . C.G.A. J a m e s o n . Margaret. B . S c . ( U . B . C ) K a s s a m . Nurdin, L L . M . (Yale) d e K e r u z i c , Denis, L L . B . (U.B.C.) This is a diverse department committed to meeting the needs of the individual by providing a variety of options in B u s i n e s s Training and C a r e e r Development. The programs are of two types: C a r e e r and V o c a t i o n a l . K i s s . A n d r e a , B.Ed. (U.B.C.) - Coordinator of B u s i n e s s Training and Career Development Kyle, Robert M„ B.A. (Portland State) L e e s . Yetta, B.A. (S.F.U.) Little. Diane, R.N. (St. P a u l ' s ) . P.H.N. (U.B.C.) Ludgate, A n n e , Instructor M a c D o n a l d . M a r i o n . B.Ed. (U.B.C.) May. Gary. B.A. ( U . B . C ) , L L . B . ( U . B . C ) M c B r i d e , J o h n . B . E d . (U.B.C.) M c C a n d l e s s . C a r o l . B.A. (Hon.) (S.F.U.) M c G r a d y . L e o ; B.A. (U. of T.), L L . B . (Man.) M c P h e d r a n . L o u i s e . Lab Supervisor Phillips. Donna. Instructor Piekaar. M a u r e e n , B.A. (S.F.U.) Plant. Lila. I.D. (U.B.C.) Potts. Frank. B.A. ( U . B . C ) . L L . B (U.B.C.) Richards, Valerie, Business Management Certificate (Regent Street Polytechnic), L e g a l Assistant Diploma (Capilano College), Coordinator, L e g a l Studies Program Roberts. Barry, B.A. (S.F.U.), P r o f e s s i o n a l T e a c h i n g C e r tificate (S.F.U.) Robertson. Catherine, B.A. (U. of Sask.). B . J . (Carleton U.) S a k a m o t o , Renata. I.D. (U.B.C.) Salusbury, P a m e l a . Instructor Smart. Lynn. I.D. (U.B.C.) Smith. Betsy, B.A. ( U . B . C ) , P r o f e s s i o n a l T e a c h i n g Certificate (U.B.C.) Spicer. Beverley, Standard T e a c h i n g Certificate (U.B.C.) Spicer. Larry. B . C o m m . (U.B.C.) P r o f e s s i o n a l T e a c h i n g C e r tificate (U.B.C.) Stacey. C o l e e n . Legal Assistant Diploma (Capilano C o l l e g e ) Stewart. Walter. B.A. (S.F.U.) Tilley, W a n d a , B . E d . (U.B.C.) V i c k a r s , Karin. B.Ed., (U.B.C.) Walker. A l a n . L L . B . (U.B.C.) White. A n n e , Lab Supervisor W i l l i a m s o n . J . , B.A. (U. of V i c ) . L L . B . (U.B.C.) Career Development The C a r e e r P r o g r a m s (Secretarial, L e g a l Assistant and the L e g a l Assistant Studies Option) provide c o l l e g e credit at $7.00 per credit hour. The V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s (Business Office Training, Legal Stenographer. M e d i c a l Office Assistant and B a s i c E m ployment Skills Training) are funded directly by the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n and provide 30 hours per week instruction at a cost of $15.00 per month. The C a r e e r Alternatives Program is Part-time V o c a t i o n a l and c o s t s $30.00 per term. Part-time Evening V o c a t i o n a l Programs, s u c h as the A d ministrative Assistant and the Executive Secretary, are d e s i g n e d for people already working who want to upgrade their skills. S e e p a g e s 127 and 128 for information about the vocational programs. Legal Assistant Associate Program in A r t s a n d Science Major Program Requirements Recommended Courses Diploma Credit Hours Lab Hours 63 13 76 0 L e g a l Assistants are highly trained men and women who o c c u p y important positions in law offices. The graduates of this program are skilled t e c h n i c i a n s or s p e c i a l i s t s who have studied legal theory and procedures and who c a n apply this k n o w l e d g e to assist legal practitioners. L e g a l A s s i s t a n t s will be w o r k i n g in a professional environment, directly or independently, under the supervision of a Barrister/Solicitor. S i n c e one of the functions of a legal assistant is to relieve the lawyer of many routine legal and administrative responsibilities, students will learn to prepare legal d o c u m e n t s in a c c o r d a n c e with the S u p r e m e Court R u l e s and various Statutes, to carry out investigations and interview witnesses, to handle legal c o r r e s p o n d e n c e and to act in a supportive capacity with the law firm or legal department. In c o m plicated legal matters a legal assistant may work directly with the lawyer, but in many c a s e s independent judgment is required. The demand for para-legal assistance is a relatively recent professional development in British C o l u m b i a but the future for legal assistant personnel appears exciting and unlimited. Program requirements: Students are expected to maintain a " B " average throughout the P r o g r a m . A " B " grade is usually 8 0 % and up in procedural c o u r s e s and 7 0 % and up in theory c o u r s e s . In order to receive the A s s o c i a t e of Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma, students must complete a six month work study practicum in relevant legal work. This s h o u l d be e m barked upon at the end of the third or fourth term. Students must take four terms of E n g l i s h made up of two first year English c o u r s e s , C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 and 151 or 152. Transfer credits for E n g l i s h taken at other a c a d e m i c institutions c a n be arranged on application by the student. Entry into the program is in the Fall Term of e a c h year only. Students should arrange an interview with the Coordinator of 92 the L e g a l Studies P r o g r a m s in early S p r i n g of the year in w h i c h they wish to apply for entry into the P r o g r a m . First Term This Program is a pilot project of the Law S o c i e t y of B . C . and the C a n a d i a n Bar, B . C . B r a n c h for the training of L e g a l A s s i s t a n t s in British C o l u m b i a and this P r o g r a m has the approval of these Bar A s s o c i a t i o n s . C m n s 150 L e g a l Studies 150 L e g a l Studies 152 Students who cannot take Legal Studies 170 on a Saturday during the months of May and J u n e between the s e c o n d and third terms will have to take this c o u r s e during May and J u n e after they complete thir fourth term. Legal Assistant Studies Option This option is d e s i g n e d for students who have at least two years legal e x p e r i e n c e , who wish to s p e c i a l i z e in the following areas of study: C o m m e r c i a l and Corporate Specialty Litigation Specialty Probate and Property S p e c i a l t y Legal A i d Specialty L e g a l Office M a n a g e m e n t S p e c i a l t y Credit Hours 3 Lab Hours Basic Communications Introduction to the Study of Law 3 B a s i c Litigation Procedures I 1.5 B a s i c Corporate P r o c e d u r e s 1.1.5 Land Registry System 1.5 L e g a l Studies 153 L e g a l Studies 154 L e g a l Studies 161/ 171 Legislative P r o c e s s I & II 3 L e g a l Studies 176 L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s I . . . . 3 Office Training 252 Interpersonal Skills and Organizational P s y c h o l o g y . . . 3 19.5 0 Second Term It is anticipated that students on this option will be in a position to c h a l l e n g e the basic procedural c o u r s e s . A l t h o u g h some procedural c o u r s e s are s u g g e s t e d , the e m p h a s i s in the L e g a l Assistant Studies option is on providing students with a thorough grasp of the theoretical a s p e c t s of the practice of law and p r a c t i c e s within the legal office. C o u r s e s may be taken in any order and individuals are e n c o u r a g e d to adapt a program that meets their s p e c i f i c interests and requirements. P r o g r a m s must be approved by the Coordinator. Students must provide e v i d e n c e that they have legal office experience before being admitted; a research paper must be completed before a Certificate is awarded. C m n s . 151 or 152 L e g a l Studies 151 L e g a l Studies 155 L e g a l Studies 157 Legal Legal Legal Legal Studies Studies Studies Studies 162 163 177 179 Credit Lab Hours Hours B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s or T e c h n i c a l Report Writing 3 Introduction to the Study of Law II 3 B a s i c C o n v e y a n c i n g and Mortgaging 1.5 Wills and Probate Procedures 1.5 Litigation P r o c e d u r e s II 3 Corporate P r o c e d u r e s II 3 L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II . . .3 Legal Interviewing ^3 21 0 Capilano College Certificate Credit Major Program Requirements Recommended Courses v Hours ..18 j21 Third and Fourth Terms 39 Required Courses E n g l i s h 100/200 or C m n s . 150/151 L e g a l Studies 150 Introduction to Legal Studies L e g a l Studies 170 Legal R e s e a r c h L e g a l Studies 180 Contracts I 6 6 3 ^3 18 P l u s 18 credits to be taken from the various legal studies c o u r s e s that are offered on the evening program. Summer Term Legal Studies 170 Legal R e s e a r c h 3 3.0 0 Students who cannot take L e g a l Studies 170 on a Saturday during the months of May and J u n e between the s e c o n d and third terms will have to take this c o u r s e during May and J u n e after they complete their fourth term. In the third and fourth terms students will take an a d ditional 24.0 credits and c o u r s e s will be offered from the following: Credit Lab Hours Hours English Two c o u r s e s of any of the first year E n g l i s h Offerings 6 L e g a l Studies 159 A c c o u n t i n g for the L e g a l Assistant 3 L e g a l Studies 160 L e g a l Theory 3 L e g a l Studies 165 A d v a n c e d C o n v e y a n c i n g and Mortgaging 3 L e g a l Studies 172 L e g a l D o c u m e n t s 3 L e g a l Studies 180 C o n t r a c t s I 3 L e g a l Studies 181 C o n t r a c t s II 3 L e g a l Studies 252 Torts 3 L e g a l Studies 253 C o m p a n y Law 3 L e g a l Studies 254 Real Property 3 L e g a l Studies 256 Family Law I 3 L e g a l Studies 257 Estate Law 3 L e g a l Studies 258 C r i m i n a l P r o c e d u r e s 3 L e g a l Studies 266 Family Law II 3 L e g a l Studies 268 Criminal Law 3 L e g a l Studies 270 Labour Law 3 93 Health Courses Secretarial Program Health 158 M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s Secretarial training provides a graduate with many employment opportunities. This program is geared s p e c i f i c a l l y towards improving practical skills a n d towards providing students with an understanding of b u s i n e s s procedures, particularly within the area students c h o o s e to seek e m ployment. Students who s u c c e s s f u l l y complete this program may elect to go on to the legal stenographer or medical office assistant programs. This is an introduction to office p r o c e d u r e s c o m m o n to general medical offices and hospitals. Students will gain expertise in making appointments; k e e p i n g m e d i c a l r e c o r d s ; k e e p i n g financial records; billing; d e a l i n g with patients, e t c . Students will also b e c o m e familiar with the p r o f e s s i o n a l ethics of the para-medical. (F.S) (3,0,1) H e a l t h 159 M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s Capilano College (F,S) (3,0,1) Certificate Major Program Requirements Electives (Optional) Credit Lab Hours Hours 39 13.5 First Term C m n s . 150 Communications 3 Office Training 154 B a s i c B o o k k e e p i n g 3 Office Training 162 Typing II, or Typing III 4.5 (or 163) (or 3) Office Training 165 Typing S k i l l s a n d S p e e d Development 1.5 Office Training 170 B e g i n n i n g Shorthand or (or 174) Shorthand S p e e d 4.5 Development (or 3) Office Training 185 Office T e c h n o l o g y I 3 Office Training 300 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e ..A 20.5 Second Term C m n s . 151 Communications 3 Office Training 163 Typing III or Typing IV 3 (or 164) Office Training 166 Typing Skills a n d S p e e d Development 1.5 Office Training 174 Shorthand S p e e d (or 175) Development 3 Office Training 186 Office T e c h n o l o g y II 3 Office Training 187 W o r d P r o c e s s i n g 1.5 Office Training 252 Interpersonal S k i l l s a n d Organizational P s y c h o l o g y . . .3 Office Training 301 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e . . _ J 19 2 3 2 .5 Continuation of Health 158. Health 160 Introduction to Health C a r e ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Students will learn about c l i n i c a l p r o c e d u r e s pertinent to the doctor's office a n d the hospital setting. T h e c o u r s e inc l u d e s general information about physical and mental health; m e d i c a t i o n s and health products. Students will also learn how to u s e a n d maintain m e d i c a l office equipment. Half the time is spent on First A i d , a n d students will receive a S t a n dard First A i d Certificate upon c o m p l e t i o n of this p h a s e of the c o u r s e . Health 161 Introduction to Health C a r e (F.S) (3,0,1) Continuation of Health 160. 7.5 Health 162 A n a t o m y a n d Physiology (F.S) (3,0,1) 2 A study of the structure, function a n d inter-relationships of the organic systems of the body. C o m m o n m e d i c a l disorders, operative procedures and related terminology will be studied in conjunction with the systems. 2 5 1.5 Health 163 A n a t o m y a n d Physiology ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Continuation of the work begun in Health 162. H e a l t h 164 6 M e d i c a l Terminology ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to Greek a n d Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots and c o m b i n i n g forms c o m m o n to m e d i c a l terminology. Health 165 M e d i c a l Terminology (F.S) (3,0,1) Continuation a n d reinforcement of terminology in Health 164. Refer to page 128 for M e d i c a l Office Assistant P r o g r a m . 94 Legal Studies Courses L e g a l S t u d i e s 150 Introduction to L e g a l S t u d i e s I (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is an introduction to legal c o n c e p t s and legal reasoning. It will c o v e r the historical development of legal i n stitutions and the principles of c o m m o n law a n d equity. The interpretation of statutes, the doctrine of precedent, and the roles of lawyers a n d courts. There will be a critical analysis of the system a n d its strength a n d w e a k n e s s e s . L e g a l S t u d i e s 151 Continuation of work begun in L e g a l S t u d i e s 153. For Secretarial students only. L e g a l Assistant students s h o u l d take L e g a l Studies 163. L e g a l S t u d i e s 157 Wills a n d P r o b a t e P r o c e d u r e s (F) (1.5, 0, .5) A n examination of the Wills Act, Probate F e e s A c t , and A d ministration A c t . Students will prepare the n e c e s s a r y d o c u m e n t s to obtain Letters Probate a n d Letters of A d ministration in the S u p r e m e Court of British C o l u m b i a . Introduction to L e g a l S t u d i e s II (S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is a continuation of L e g a l S t u d i e s 150 a n d is an introduction to private law. The areas covered will include law of contracts, sale of g o o d s , partnership a n d c o m p a n y law. Although some statutes will be c o n s i d e r e d , e m p h a s i s will be on case law a n d current development in the law. The development of the laws of n e g l i g e n c e through various court d e c i s i o n s will be d i s c u s s e d . The c o u r s e will also cover some a s p e c t s of procedure, basic rules of e v i d e n c e , capacity a n d status of parties. L e g a l S t u d i e s 152 B a s i c Litigation I (F) (1.5, 0, .5) Introduction to the court p r o c e d u r e s in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y and Supreme C o u r t s of British C o l u m b i a . The c o u r s e will cover procedures in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of d o c u m e n t s , the use of p r e c e d e n t s in S m a l l C l a i m a n d C o u n t y and S u p r e m e C o u r t s . L e g a l S t u d i e s 153 Basic Corporate Procedures I (F) (1.5, 0, .5) A n examination of the British C o l u m b i a C o m p a n i e s A c t and the various d o c u m e n t s that a legal assistant or secretary must b e familiar with in order to incorporate a c o m p a n y a n d attend to routine filings a n d resolutions. R e c o r d s office requirements, annual p r o c e e d i n g s , preparing share certificates a n d registration, e t c . will also be coveFed. L e g a l S t u d i e s 154 Land Registry S y s t e m (F) (1.5, 0, .5) History a n d examination of the land registry system in British C o l u m b i a . Land Registry A c t requirements, d o c u m e n t s n e c e s s a r y for registration; the nature a n d effect of transfers and c h a r g e s ; s e a r c h procedures will be c o v e r e d . L e g a l S t u d i e s 155 Basic Conveyance (1.5, 0, .5) and Mortgage Procedures (S) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 154 This c o u r s e c o v e r s interim agreements, L a n d Registry A c t requirements, procedures, d o c u m e n t s a n d forms involved in c o n v e y i n g title a n d registering various c h a r g e s . E m p h a s i s will be on preparing a c c e p t a b l e d o c u m e n t s , D e e d s of L a n d , M o r t g a g e s , A g r e e m e n t s for S a l e a n d n e c e s s a r y related forms. L e g a l S t u d i e s 158 B a s i c Litigation II (S) (1.5, 0, .5) Prerequisite: L e g a l S t u d i e s 152 Continuation of work b e g u n in L e g a l S t u d i e s 152. For Secretarial students only. L e g a l Assistant students s h o u l d register for L e g a l Studies 162. L e g a l S t u d i e s 159 A c c o u n t i n g for the L e g a l A s s i s t a n t ( F , S ) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for the L e g a l Assistant w h o wants to understand basic a c c o u n t i n g principles without taking a formal introductory a c c o u n t i n g c o u r s e . The student c o m pleting this c o u r s e c a n expect to have a g o o d understanding of the a c c o u n t i n g function, the s e r v i c e s it c a n provide the L e g a l Assistant, a n d how to interpret statements, reports, budgets, e t c . in the preparation of files in the law office. Through lectures and problem-solving labs the student is e x posed to the a c c o u n t i n g c y c l e , a n d the a n a l y s i s of financial statements. E m p h a s i s on this a c c o u n t i n g c o u r s e is p l a c e d on the interpretation, analysis a n d use of a c c o u n t i n g data. T h e m e c h a n i c s of b o o k k e e p i n g will not be a function of this course. L e g a l S t u d i e s 160 L e g a l Theory ( F , S ) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is an introduction to the major theories of law; the nature of legal obligation, a n d the relationship between law and morality. A l t h o u g h it is a c o u r s e in legal philosophy, the principal studies will be d i s c u s s e d in the context of s u c h practical issues as defending the guilty, o b e y i n g immoral laws, legislating morals, penal reform, law a n d s o c i a l c h a n g e s , a n d the u s e a n d a b u s e of legal technicalities. The e m p h a s i s will be on the role the legal system plays in o u r society, a n d the role it ought to play. L e g a l S t u d i e s 161 L e g i s l a t i v e P r o c e s s I (S) (1.5,0,.5) A study of the electoral p r o c e s s in relation to the formation of federal and provincial statutes. A n a l y s i s of the relationship between legislative, administrative tribunals a n d the courts, the nature a n d limits of e x e c u t i v e ; legislative a n d judicial power, articulation of government policy in statutory form, translation of public policy into legislation a n d legal problems in implementing legislated policy. L a b F e e : $10.00 L e g a l S t u d i e s 162 L e g a l S t u d i e s 156 Basic Corporate Procedures Litigation P r o c e d u r e s (S) (3,0,1) II (S) (1.5, 0, .5) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 152 Prerequisite: L e g a l S t u d i e s 153 This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for L e g a l Assistant personnel 95 assisting in litigation. It will deal with problems encountered in the p r o c e s s of litigation and how to anticipate or intercept difficulties. The c o u r s e will cover in detail the u s e of the S u p r e m e Court R u l e s , divorce p r o c e d u r e s , enforcement of judgments, and appeal procedures. T h o s e students with work experience in this field may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. L e g a l S t u d i e s 163 Corporate Procedures ( S ) (3,0,1) L e g a l S t u d i e s 176 L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e to prepare legal stenographer and legal assistant s t u d e n t s for p o s i t i o n s in law o f f i c e s . Instruction in timekeeping and a c c o u n t i n g systems, u s e of transcripts, legal briefs, use of a law library, library i n d e x i n g , use of data p r o c e s s i n g equipment in the law office, ethical r e s p o n sibilities, legal terminology a n d other p r o c e d u r e s particular to the legal profession. Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 153 This course includes a study of extra-provincial c o m panies, reporting c o m p a n i e s a n d various problems e n countered in corporate procedures. Work students with legal office experience in this field may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. L e g a l S t u d i e s 165 Mortgages and Conveyancing II (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Legal Studies 154 & 155 This course is a continuation of L e g a l S t u d i e s 154 and 155 with a more intensive a n d in-depth a p p r o a c h to all L a n d R e g i s t r y d o c u m e n t s a n d d i f f i c u l t title c o n v e y a n c e s , statements of adjustment, reconciliation. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on client a p p r o a c h , preparation of d o c u m e n t s , free structure, transfer a n d mortgaging of equities, power of attorney, s u b right to p u r c h a s e , strata titles, transfers, foreclosures and d i s c h a r g e s . L e g a l S t u d i e s 169 C i t i z e n A d v o c a c y (F,S) (3,0,1) A practical c o u r s e e n c o m p a s s i n g law a n d community a c tion; the law relating to civil liberties; legal a i d s e r v i c e s ; the examination of the "lawyering p r o c e s s " , analysis of skills n e c e s s a r y for i n t e r v i e w i n g , e x a m i n i n g w i t n e s s e s a n d negotiating. L e g a l S t u d i e s 170 L e g a l R e s e a r c h ( S U ) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will acquaint the legal assistant with the techniques a n d methodology of legal research a n d will i n c l u d e functions s u c h as reading briefs and legal d o c u m e n t s ; using e n c y c l o p e d i a e , annotated reports, restatements, law reviews, c a s e c o m m e n t s ; locating d e c i s i o n s a n d citations. II (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 161 Continuation of Legal Studies 161. L e g a l S t u d i e s 172 L e g a l D o c u m e n t s (F,S) (3,0,1) The aim of this c o u r s e is to e n a b l e students to write and to read legal d o c u m e n t s with some fluency. C o u r s e work inc l u d e s the drafting of agreements; methods for the rapid r e a d i n g of l e g i s l a t i o n a n d s o l i c i t o r s ' a n d s t a t i o n e r s ' d o c u m e n t s ; the drafting of c l a i m s and d e f e n c e s in litigation p r o c e e d i n g s ; a n d a study of the rules of statutory interpretation. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on developing a general style, rather than obtaining a detailed k n o w l e d g e of the specific law. 96 II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 176 H o w to make a legal office run more efficiently; an examination of office m a c h i n e s , printed forms a n d human r e s o u r c e s available in small a n d large law firms; an examination of b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s for a law office including trust a c c o u n t s , filing a n d c o m munications systems; u s e of office equipment a n d relating c o s t s of machinery a n d s e r v i c e s ; s p e c i a l stationery. N o t e : Students w h o have n o ! taken L e g a l S t u d i e s 176 at the C o l l e g e but w h o do have legal office e x p e r i e n c e c a n c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite by either preparing a s s i g n m e n t s or writing an examination. L e g a l S t u d i e s 179 L e g a l Interviewing (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will give an understanding of the role of the legal assistant and an understanding of the p r o c e s s of legal interviewing. Students will acquire skills in c o n d u c t i n g various types of interviews a n d recording minutes of evidence. L e g a l S t u d i e s 180 C o n t r a c t s I (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the student e x p o s u r e to the law of contract. It will cover all major a s p e c t s of the law of contracts. In the p r o c e s s , students will be made aware of how law in general and the law of c o n t r a c t s in particular fits into the overall pattern of society, a n d its pursuits. T o this end students will d i s c u s s critically in the c l a s s as many c a s e s as time will permit. L e g a l S t u d i e s 181 C o n t r a c t s II (S) (3,0,1) L e g a l S t u d i e s 171 Legislative Procedures L e g a l S t u d i e s 177 L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 180 This c o u r s e is a continuation of L e g a l S t u d i e s 180. Students will be able to e x p a n d their k n o w l e d g e from L e g a l Studies 180 in order to a c h i e v e greater depth a n d sophistication in the field a n d to learn various a s p e c t s of b u s i n e s s law. T o p i c s c o v e r e d will include s p e c i a l types of contracts s u c h as agency, bailment a n d i n s u r a n c e ; credit transactions s u c h as chattel mortgages and conditional s a l e s and partnership a n d c o m p a n y law. L e g a l S t u d i e s 199 C a r e e r P r a c t i c u m ( F , S , S U ) (3,1,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to e n a b l e L e g a l Assistant students to undertake a practicum position in a law firm for a period of. 3 months. This is the first half of the 6 month P r a c t i c u m i n volved in the Legal Assistant P r o g r a m . Students with work experience in this area may c h a l l e n g e L e g a l Studies 250 L a w in Society (F.S) (3,0,1) the prerequisite. This c o u r s e will examine how the law has affected certain groups in our society, our lives, a n d the world in w h i c h we live. The c o u r s e is a seminar a n d deals with important a n d topical issues related to the law. Other areas that will be e x a m i n e d : Law and E c o l o g y , Law and M e d i a , Law and C o m puters, Law a n d the Native P e o p l e of B . C . L e g a l S t u d i e s 252 Torts ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A n introductory study of "torts"; the protection of personal interest from interference a n d the way in which the courts meet this need in a c h a n g i n g society. P r i n c i p a l topics to be studied are: intentional torts, n e g l i g e n c e , strict liability, defamation a n d n u i s a n c e , c o n c e p t s of standard of care, causality, duty and remoteness. S t u d e n t s will be required to pre-read c a s e s for d i s c u s s i o n in c l a s s . L e g a l S t u d i e s 253 C o m p a n y L a w (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 153 & 163 The law relating to corporations a n d partnerships in C a n a d a ; historical formation, structure and reorganization of a c o r p o r a t i o n ; authority a n d f i d u c i a r y o b l i g a t i o n of management; legal c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s ; rights a n d duties of officers, directors a n d shareholders. Students who have e x p e r i e n c e in this field may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. L e g a l S t u d i e s 254 M u n i c i p a l L a w (F,S) (3,0,1) A functional study of the legislative a n d administrative p r o c e s s of local government; the power of municipal by-laws and their validity; municipal taxation; planning, z o n i n g , land use a n d development. L e g a l S t u d i e s 255 R e a l Property ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 165 The c o m m o n law relating to real property, as modified by legislation including the L a n d Titles A c t and The C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d Law of Property A c t , will be Studied in this c o u r s e using the c a s e analysis methods. Concurrently, seminars will be held on more complex c o n v e y a n c i n g problems. Students having work e x p e r i e n c e c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. in this field may L e g a l S t u d i e s 256 Family L a w I (F.S) (3,0,1) L e g a l S t u d i e s 258 Criminal Procedures (F) (3,0,1) A n examination of the C r i m i n a l C o d e , theory of criminal responsibility; legal elements of a crime; criminal p r o c e d u r e ; the law respecting the u s e of force, rules of e v i d e n c e , c o n f e s s i o n ; identification procedures and s e n t e n c i n g . T h i s course will receive three general elective credits at S . F . U . L e g a l S t u d i e s 266 Family L a w II (F.S) (3,0,1) Continuation of Legal S t u d i e s 256. L e g a l S t u d i e s 268 C r i m i n a l L a w (S) (3,0,1) Substantial elements of selected criminal offenses a n d consideration of the rules of e v i d e n c e . Particular subjects i n c l u d e the nature of real a n d circumstantial e v i d e n c e , burden of proof, hearsay, c o n f e s s i o n and admission, c o m p e t e n c e , comellability and witnesses. This c o u r s e will receive three general elective credits from S.F.U. L e g a l S t u d i e s 269 H u m a n Rights II ( F , S ) (3,0,1) An extensive study of H u m a n Rights Legislation a n d practice in C a n a d a . The acts will be examined as well as the operation of the C o m m i s s i o n s . A l s o the work a n d role of a human rights officer will be studied. Students will learn how to investigate a c a s e , to determine its validity, and to p r o c e e d with an action. P u b l i c e d u c a t i o n , specific interest groups, and organizations, as well as the expanding field of C i v i l Liberties L a w will be explored. L e g a l S t u d i e s 270 L a b o u r L a w (F.S) (3,0,1) U n i o n - M a n a g e m e n t relations, the collective bargaining p r o c e s s ; arbitration and c o n c i l i a t i o n procedures. The c o u r s e will include detailed consideration of the B . C . L a b o u r C o d e and a study of d e c i s i o n s of the B . C . L a b o u r Relations B o a r d . L e g a l S t u d i e s 299 C a r e e r P r a c t i c u m II ( F . S . S U ) (3,1,1) Prerequisite L e g a l Studies 199 This c o u r s e is a continuation of Legal Studies 199 and is the completion of the 6 month P r a c t i c u m involved in the L e g a l Assistant P r o g r a m . Law and the family marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties of s p o u s e s and parents; the law in respect to child c a r e ; custody; a c c e s s , g u a r d i a n s h i p , a d o p t i o n ; the role of family court, juvenile courts a n d human resource a g e n c i e s . L e g a l S t u d i e s 257 Estate L a w ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L e g a l Studies 157 The law of Wills, S u c c e s s i o n , Intestate S u c c e s s i o n , principles of probate a n d administration of estates a n d m i s c e l l a n e o u s estate problems. 97 i Office Training Courses O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 150 B o o k k e e p i n g I (F) (3, 1.5, 1) A n introductory c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to cover b a s i c terminology, techniques, a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of a c c o u n t i n g , i n c l u d i n g the theory and practice of k e e p i n g adequate records; u s e of s p e c i a l journals; controlling a c c o u n t s a n d subsidiary ledgers; periodic adjustments; c l o s i n g procedures and preparation of financial statements. T h e c o u r s e will include 3 hours of lecture a n d d i s c u s s i o n material and 1.5 lab hours per week. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 151 B o o k k e e p i n g II (S) (3, 1.5, 1) Prerequisite: Student must have a minimum of " B " standing in Office Training 150. A continuation of work begun in Office Training 150 with e m p h a s i s on practical a p p l i c a t i o n of b a s i c b o o k k e e p i n g functions. This c o u r s e includes 3 hours of instruction and 1.5 lab hours per week. typing t e c h n i q u e ; operation and c a r e of typewriters; d e v e l o p ment of s p e e d and a c c u r a c y . Introduction to styles and formats of b u s i n e s s letters and memos. Students s h o u l d be able to type 30 w p m at the e n d of four months. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 162 T y p i n g II (F,S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) Prerequisite: K n o w l e d g e of k e y b o a r d , typing s p e e d of 30 wpm. Continuation of s p e e d development and a c c u r a c y in typewriting with e m p h a s i s on production, c o m p o s i t i o n of letters and letter styles and extensive practice in typing various office forms. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 163 P r o d u c t i o n T y p i n g I ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Typing speed of 50 w p m . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d upon developing a professional and practical a p p r o a c h to typing problems with a minimum of O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 152 supervision. Students are given timed production P r a c t i c a l A c c o u n t i n g I (F) (3, 1.5, 1) ments and a c c e p t a b l e work standards are stressed. Prerequisite: B o o k k e e p i n g 12, " C " grade or better, or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Coordinator. P r o d u c t i o n T y p i n g II ( F , S ) (3,0,1) assign- O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 164 Prerequisite: Office Training 163 A review of the b a s i c s of a c c o u n t i n g , with e m p h a s i s o n practical problem-solving. Material will include s p e c i a l i z e d journals, adjustments, c l o s i n g procedures, financial statements, payrolls and other matters related to the a c c o u n t i n g function. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 165 O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 153 T y p i n g S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t I ( F , S ) (1.5,0,.5) P r a c t i c a l A c c o u n t i n g II (S) (3, 1.5, 1) R e m e d i a l drills, power drills, short a n d s u s t a i n e d timed writings to increase speed and a c c u r a c y in typewriting. Prerequisite: Satisfactory completion of Office Training 152 (formerly B u s i n e s s 152); a grade " B " or better in Office Training 150 (formerly B u s i n e s s 150); or by written permission of the Instructor, and/or Coordinator. Further development of work started in the first term, e m p h a s i z i n g s u c h problem areas as d e p r e c i a t i o n , inventory evaluation, partnerships, limited c o m p a n i e s . Production problems of a more c o m p l e x nature will be introduced. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 166 T y p i n g S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t II ( F , S ) (1.5,0,.5) Continuation of Office Training 165 O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 167 T y p i n g S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t III ( F , S ) (1.5,0,.5) O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 154 E s s e n t i a l s of B o o k k e e p i n g (F) (3, 1.5, 1) This c o u r s e provides a general overview of b o o k k e e p i n g p r a c t i c e s used in general offices. Theory will be presented as it relates to particular b o o k k e e p i n g p r o c e s s e s . Students are e n c o u r a g e d to w o r k i n d e p e n d e n t l y a p p l y i n g the b o o k k e e p i n g p r i n c i p l e s to p r o j e c t s s i m u l a t i n g a c t u a l business situations. Continuation of Office Training 166. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 168 T y p i n g S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t IV ( F , S ) (1.5,0,.5) Continuation of Office Training 167. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 170 B e g i n n i n g S h o r t h a n d (F,S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 160 C o m p o s i t e B u s i n e s s O f f i c e S k i l l s ( S U ) (4.5, 0, 1.5) A practical c o u r s e dealing with the application of skills relating to office m a c h i n e s a n d office procedures. Operation of w o r k - p r o c e s s i n g typewriter, dictation a n d transcription equipment, copying and duplicating m a c h i n e s , c a l c u l a t o r s , or shorthand m a c h i n e . Increase in typing s p e e d , production, b o o k k e e p i n g and shorthand skills may form part of the course. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 161 T y p i n g I ( F , S ) (4.5, 0, 1.5) Introduction to typewriting for students with no previous i n struction. Mastery of keyboard by touch systems; correct 96 B e g i n n i n g study of an alphabetic, G r e g g or Pitman shorth a n d system with e m p h a s i s on application of theory a n d development of speed utilizing high frequency vocabulary. S u c c e s s f u l students s h o u l d be able to take dictation at 80 wpm after completing o n e term. This c o u r s e requires an a d ditional 1.5 hours of lab time per week. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 174 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t I ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Office Training 170 or a shorthand s p e e d of 60 wpm. Continuation of speed development a l o n g with theory review, increased vocabulary, dictation of familiar a n d u n familiar material aiming at 9 5 % a c c u r a c y in transcription. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 175 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Office Training 174 or a shorthand s p e e d of 80 wpm. Continuation of speed development with 9 5 % a c c u r a c y in transcription, increased v o c a b u l a r y , dictation of familiar and unfamiliar material. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on reinforcing theory. utilization of personnel, supervisory style, staff s e l e c t i o n , labour/management relations, job c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s will b e : d i s c u s s e d . Current models of b a s i c office equipment will be demonstrated, including word p r o c e s s i n g , printing and duplicating m a c h i n e s . Students will be provided with the o p portunity to investigate, in depth, the operations of a selected business office. Office T r a i n i n g 186 Office Technology Office T r a i n i n g 176 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t III ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Office Training 175 or a shorthand s p e e d of 100 wpm. A d v a n c e d speed development to rates of 100-140 w p m . Dictation of unfamiliar material for varied time lengths, i m provement of rapid and a c c u r a t e transcription skills and shortcuts in shorthand systems. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 180 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n I ( F , S ) (1.5,1.5,.5) II ( F , S ) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: Office Training 185 or written permission of the Instructor. This c o u r s e s u p p l e m e n t s Office Training 185 with e m p h a s i s on office procedures and management systems that m a k e an o r g a n i z a t i o n run more e f f i c i e n t l y . Time management, meetings, data control, filing systems, travel and c o n f e r e n c e arrangements, image of the firm, reception and telephone manners, and the office environment as it relates to morale and efficiency will be c o v e r e d . Office T r a i n i n g 187 Word Processing Prerequisite: Typing s p e e d of 40 w p m G e n e r a l , legal or m e d i c a l m a c h i n e transcription. P r a c t i c e in transcribing forms, letters and reports from Lanier Edisette dictation equipment. This c o u r s e entails a mandatory 1.5 lab hours. Office T r a i n i n g 181 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II ( F , S ) (1.5, 1.5, 5) (F,S) (1.5,1.5,.5) W o r d p r o c e s s i n g — the transformation of ideas into typewritten or printed form has always been a major function of a secretary. This c o u r s e will acquaint the student with ways to c u r b the time and cost spent on paperwork. T o p i c s covered include: P r o c e s s i n g incoming m a i l ; taking and giving dictation; delegating work to W o r d P r o c e s s i n g C e n t r e ; Stationery; and the Word P r o c e s s i n g C e n t r e . Office T r a i n i n g 188 Prerequisite: Office Training 180 C a l c u l a t o r s a n d C a l c u l a t i o n s ( F , S ) (1.5,1.5,.5) Continuation of work begun in Office Training either general, legal or m e d i c a l transcription. 180 on O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 182 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n I (F) (1.5,0,.5) General Students learn to transcribe mailable b u s i n e s s letters, reports and minutes from a variety of transcribing m a c h i n e s at an initial rate of 50 w p m . Legsl L e g a l letters, a c c o u n t s , wills a n d corporate work. B a s i c c o m m e r c i a l and litigation d o c u m e n t s , writs, statements of c l a i m a n d d e f e n c e , affidavits, h o t i c e s of motion, etc. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide students with a marketable skill in the operation of c a l c u l a t o r s . A c c u r a c y in fundamental arithmetic computations will be s t r e s s e d . Office T r e l n i n g 189 B a s i c P r o c e d u r e s In L e g a l , M e d i c a l , E n g i n e e r i n g a n d O t h e r S p e c i a l i z e d O f f i c e s I (F) (1.5,1.5,.5) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for secretaries w h o may find a position in a m e d i c a l , legal, engineering or other s p e c i a l i z e d office. The c o u r s e will include terminology and b a s i c office procedures pertaining to these s p e c i a l i z e d areas. Lab F e e : $10.00. Medical Office T r a i n i n g 190 M e d i c a l terminology and transcription of c a s e s and m e d i c a l reports d e s i g n e d to prepare students to b e c o m e m e d i c a l secretaries and typists. B a s i c P r o c e d u r e s In L e g a l , M e d i c a l . E n g i n e e r i n g a n d other S p e c i a l i z e d O f f i c e s II (S) (1.5, 1.5, .5) Prerequisite: Office Training 189 O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 183 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II (S) (1.5,0,.5) T h i s is a continuation of Office Training 189. Prerequisite: Office Training 182. Continuation of work begun in Office Training 182 on either L e g a l or M e d i c a l Transcription. Office T r a i n i n g 185 O f f i c e T e c h n o l o g y I ( F , S ) (3,1.5,1) This c o u r s e will acquaint students with the current trends and developments in office t e c h n o l o g y and will indicate the impact and effects of m e c h a n i z a t i o n o n office personnel, systems, procedures and equipment. T o p i c s s u c h as 99 O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 250 Office T r a i n i n g 261 P r o f e e e l o n a l D e v e l o p m e n t S e m i n a r ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) Public Relations II (F,S) (3,0,1) A seminar c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide an opportunity for women to meet in a group setting to explore present or future career c o n c e r n s relating to status, age, image, opportunities for employment, job security and advancement. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d upon meeting the needs of the individual within her personal a n d professional geography. The c o u r s e will include guest s p e a k e r s , films a n d extensive group discussion. Office T r a i n i n g 252 Interpersonal Skills (F,S) (3,0,1) and Organizational Psychology Continuation of P u b l i c R e l a t i o n s I. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 300 D i r e c t e d Work E x p e r i e n c e (F) (1,30,2) In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving approximately eight l e c ture hours and at least 30 hours of related office experience in the field. A l s o c o v e r e d is the r e s u m e , job application, cover letter, and interview. There will be a panel d i s c u s s i o n by s e l e c t e d office managers, personnel administrators, and e x p e r i e n c e d senior secretaries from the m e d i c a l , legal a n d executive areas w h o will d i s c u s s current job information regarding opportunities, salaries a n d qualifications. This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide students with basic p s y c h o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s and experience in several skill areas important in business. It i n c l u d e s practice in relating, assertion, feedback and problem solving skills. Other topics inc l u d e small group behaviour; verbal a n d non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n ; d y n a m i c s of personality; leadership styles; supervisory difficulties a n d conflict resolution. A n e x periential approach allows the student to practice c o n structive interpersonal s k i l l s in a supportive setting. D i r e c t e d Work E x p e r i e n c e ( S , S U ) (1,30,2) Office T r a i n i n g 254 C a r e e r s S e m i n a r (F,S) (1,2,5) E n d of term work experience involving six lecture hours and at least sixty hours in the field. W e e k l y informal meetings with s u c c e s s f u l p e r s o n s from many segments of the community, including lawyers, bankers stockbrokers, retailers, insurance a n d advertising executives, accountants, p u r c h a s i n g agents, personnel managers, computer programmers, editors, public servants, c o l l e g e administrators, c o u n s e l l o r s a n d others. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d upon d i s c u s s i o n of career opportunities for women within these areas and upon practical information related to the s p e a k e r s ' expertise a n d the students' interests. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 303 Office T r a i n i n g 257 Office T r a i n i n g 301 D i r e c t e d Work E x p e r i e n c e II (S) (1,30,2) In-term work experience involving three lecture hours a n d at least thirty hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 302 ^ Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e (F) (1,30,1) In-term work experience involving three lecture hours a n d at least thirty hours in the field. Office T r a i n i n g 304 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e (S) (1,30,1) In-term laboratory involving three least thirty hours in the field. lecture hours a n d at Office Administration ( F , S ) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the student an overview of the office as an organizational unit. The main c o m p o n e n t s of an office system are the p e r s o n n e l a n d the job to be done. This c o u r s e will d i s c u s s the following as they relate to the off i c e , selection and appraisal systems; research techniques for preparation of department reports a n d proposals, princ i p l e s of supervision and motivation factors; planning and organizing of personnel a n d work flow. Office T r a i n i n g 258 W o m e n in M a n a g e m e n t (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e dealing with the role of w o m a n managers in organizations and b u s i n e s s e s i n c l u d e s practice in problemsolving a n d d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g through p r a c t i c e in innovative or creative thinking and analysis of effective management styles. Meeting procedures (Roberts' Rules), debating, strategies a n d tactics also will be studied in order to gain and increase managerial skills. Office T r a i n i n g 260 Public Relations (F,S) (3,0,1) E c o n o m i c and s o c i a l factors that affect relations between the public and media in s h a p i n g public o p i n i o n . P r o b l e m s e n c o u n t e r e d in interpreting an organization to its various publics. P r a c t i c a l information on how to utilize media (print, radio, T.V., etc.) a n d how to d e v e l o p or increase public relations skills. 100 O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 305 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e ( S , S U ) (1.5,60,1) E n d of term laboratory involving s i x lecture hours a n d at least sixty hours in the field. V o c a t i o n a l Office T r a i n i n g 350 V o c a t i o n a l Skills Laboratory ( F , S ) S k i l l s laboratory in b u s i n e s s E n g l i s h a n d c o r r e s p o n d e n c e . U p to 30 hours of lab work per week are involved in this course. V o c a t i o n a l Office T r a i n i n g 351 V o c a t i o n a l Skills L a b o r a t o r y ( F , S ) S k i l l s laboratory in shorthand. U p to 8 hours of lab work per week are involved in this c o u r s e . V o c a t i o n a l Office T r a i n i n g 352 V o c a t i o n a l Skills L a b o r a t o r y ( F , S ) S k i l l s laboratory in typewriting. U p to 8 hours of lab work per week are involved in this c o u r s e . V o c a t i o n a l Office T r a i n i n g 360 V o c a t i o n a l Skills Laboratory ( F . S ) T h i s c o u r s e entails up to 8 hours of lab work per week in bookkeeping and accounting. Communications Department The C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Department of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e has the b r o a d o b j e c t i v e of p r o v i d i n g s t u d e n t s in t h e C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s with c o m p e t e n c e in the u s e of the E n g l i s h language and in media c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . B a s i c t e c h n i c a l writing, research papers, s p o k e n p r e s e n tations, b u s i n e s s reports, press reports, a n d briefs are s o m e of the t o p i c s studied in a c o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e . Instructional Faculty < C o b l e y , J . , B.A. (Brigham Y o u n g ) , M.A. ( U B C ) G o l d b e r g , G„ B.A. (McGill), M . A . ( U B C ) Kilian, C , B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (Simon Fraser) K u b i c e k , R., B.A. (Sir G e o r g e Williams), M.A. (Simon Fraser) R e i d , B„ B.A. (Alberta) Wittman, M . , B.A. (Toronto), M . A . ( U B C ) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 154 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation (S) (3,0,1) Writing and s p e e c h related to Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t : reports, memorandums, press releases, articles a n d briefs. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 155 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s In Early C h i l d h o o d (3,0,1) Development of writing a n d s p e a k i n g skills, with material largely related to s p e c i f i c career g o a l s . Extensive practice in improving English b a s i c s , numerous writing a s s i g n m e n t s , and at least o n e s p o k e n presentation. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 151 B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ( F , S ) (3,0,1) The b a s i c s of b u s i n e s s writing: resumes, memorandums, business letters, a n d reports. Development of suitable styles for different b u s i n e s s purposes. At least o n e s p o k e n p r e s e n , tation. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 152 Report Writing ( F , S ) (3,0,1) The b a s i c s of b u s i n e s s reports a n d t e c h n i c a l writing: research p r o p o s a l s , memorandums, abstracts, a n d research methods. Attention to presentation of t e c h n i c a l material to non-technical readers. S p o k e n presentations may be required. (S) Effective verbal a n d non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d the writing of letters, reports a n d briefs. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 156 Media Resources C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 B a s i c C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Education C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (S) (3,0,1) Writing and s p e a k i n g skills related to the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s student. E m p h a s i s o n interviewing t e c h n i q u e s , storyboarding, a n d adaptive writing. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 170 Public S p e a k i n g (F.S) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h i n g , o r g a n i z i n g , a n d presenting different kinds of s p e e c h e s . Attention to v o i c e training, non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d public s p e a k i n g in various contexts. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 190 M a g a z i n e Article Writing ( F S ) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h i n g a n d writing articles for publication in news media and m a g a z i n e s , e s p e c i a l l y " t r a d e " and special-interest periodicals. A n a l y s i s of m a g a z i n e readership, t e c h n i q u e s of research and interviewing, the current market for articles, and development of an effective prose style. Students will write three articles, in suitable format, a n d submit them for publication in established periodicals. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 153 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s a n d the A r t s (S) (3,0,1) The use of language in c o m b i n a t i o n with graphic and other arts. Attention to g r a p h i c s a n d l a n g u a g e used in advertising and p r o p a g a n d a . S p o k e n presentations using audio visual aids are required. 101 Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n is a two-year program preparing the graduate to be in c h a r g e of nursery s c h o o l s day-care centres or to work as support staff in s p e c i a l i z e d programs for pre-school a g e children. A l t h o u g h the f o c u s ol the program centres primarily on children from 3-5 years, it is not confined to that group. E x p a n d e d community needs require the training of personnel to work with both older and younger children in the day-care field. The core material of the program c o n c e n t r a t e s on the study of human development and the foundations and philosophy of Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n . A n interrelated series of c o u r s e s permits detailed study of program organization, curriculum content and g u i d a n c e methods. Other areas of study include health, nutrition, first aid, family life, the exceptional c h i l d , parent-teacher relationships and the administration of pre-school centres. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program, as students spend regular periods e a c h term o b s e r v i n g and participating in the C o l l e g e Day C a r e Centre and other p r e - s c h o o l s under the supervision of C o l l e g e Instructors. C o u r s e s are presented in a manner w h i c h promotes active student participation through labs, practical demonstrations, reports, projects and general d i s c u s s i o n . C o n s i d e r a b l e responsibility is given students, e n a b l i n g them to develop into creative, independent, k n o w l e d g e a b l e persons. A p p l i c a n t s are required to present a m e d i c a l certificate and a T.B. X-ray certificate, as well as to arrange an interview with the Program Co-ordinator, prior to a c c e p t a n c e into this program. A p p l i c a n t s who have previously taken Early C h i l d h o o d Education courses e l s e w h e r e , including Adult E d u c a t i o n c o u r s e s for which recognition has been granted by the Provincial C h i l d C a r e Facilities L i c e n s i n g B o a r d , may submit a record of these c o u r s e s for consideration for credit towards the C o l l e g e A s s o c i a t e in Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a . Individual c o u r s e s may be taken by students working toward accreditation by the P r o v i n c i a l C h i l d C a r e Facilities B o a r d , but not wishing to pursue the full diploma. A p p l i c a n t s in either of the above two categories should consult with the Program Co-ordinator for c o u r s e approval. A s s o c i a t e in Arts a n d S c i e n c e Diploma Credit Hours Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l Education Requirements Practicum Lab Hours 42 6 _24 10 72 10 3 3 3 2 First Term C o m n s . 150 E d u c a t i o n 152 E d u c a t i o n 154 Education 1 5 5 * * E d u c a t i o n 364 Basic Communications Program Development I Health and Nutrition I . . H u m a n Growth and Development I Practicum I 3 6 18 2 * * E d u c a t i o n 155 Human Growth and Development I must be taken prior to or concurrently with E d u c a t i o n 152. 105 Program Second Term E d u c a t i o n 151 E d u c a t i o n 153 E d u c a t i o n 156 E d u c a t i o n 164 E d u c a t i o n 365 Literature for Y o u n g Children P r o g r a m D e v e l o p m e n t II Human Growth and Development II Health and Nutrition II P r a c t i c u m II 3 3 2 2 3 3 6 18 4 3 3 2 Third Term E d u c a t i o n 157 E d u c a t i o n 250 E d u c a t i o n 254 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 367 The C h i l d and Family Life Program Development III Foundations of Early Childhood Education . . . Special Education P r a c t i c u m IV 3 3 6 2 18 4 Fourth T e r m C m n s . 155 E d u c a t i o n 252 E d u c a t i o n 264 E d u c a t i o n 268 E d u c a t i o n 366 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Early Childhood Education . . . Creative Arts for the Young Child Pre-school Administration Interpersonal relations in teaching P r a c t i c u m III 3 3 3 3 6 18 0 Education Courses E d u c a t i o n 156 H u m a n G r o w t h a n d D e v e l o p m e n t II (S) (3,0,1) Instructional Faculty Adier, M.T., B.A. (Toronto), M.S.W. (Brit. C o l . ) B r o w n , J . , B . S c , H . E c (Man.), P . G . (Van. Gen.) C u m e l l a , A . W . M . , B.A. (York), Primary S p e c i a l i s t Cert. (Toronto), Perm. T e a c h i n g Cert. (Toronto), G r a d u a t e Dipl. (Brit. C o l . ) Little., D.V., R.N. (St. Paul's), P.H.N. (Brit. C o l . ) R e n n i e , L.J., B . S c . (Brigham Y o u n g ) Warrell, E.M., Dipl. P h y s i c a l E d . (Liverpool), M . E d . (Western W a s h . State) W o r m a n , E., B.A. (Toronto), Dipl. C h i l d Study (Toronto) Coordinator E d u c a t i o n 151 Literature for Y o u n g C h i l d r e n (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Education 152 or by written permission of the Program Coordinator. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize students with b o o k s , poetry a n d stories for children. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on the development and stimulation of language and thought in y o u n g children. A brief history of c h i l d r e n ' s literature will be analyzed including its reflection of the cultural attitudes of the day. Students will present many a s s i g n m e n t s in small groups and make use of audio visual aids. Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 155 A continuation of Education 155 following the pre-schooler through the middle years of c h i l d h o o d , a d o l e s c e n c e a n d launching into adulthood. E d u c a t i o n 157 T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life (F) (3,0,1) S o c i o l o g i c a l perspective on the family in our culture a n d others. Examination of differences a n d similarities in family life and socialization of the young child related to ethnic, racial, s o c i o - e c o n o m i c groupings, cultural values a n d ideology. F o c u s on the nuclear family, single parents, the elderly, contemporary lifestyles — conventional and counter cultural. Implications for the pre-school teacher. Education 164 Health a n d Nutrition II S ) (3,0,1) The s e c o n d of a two-part study of the p r e - s c h o o l c h i l d with particular e m p h a s i s on the nutritional n e e d s of early c h i l d h o o d and how they c a n be met in the p r e - s c h o o l setting. Education 165 Field Survey (S) (3,0,1) E d u c a t i o n 152 P r o g r a m Development I (F) (3,2,1) A n introduction to the planning a n d development of programs for pre-school centres (with major f o c u s on Day Care). Attention will be given to activities that e n c o u r a g e exploration, experimentation, s e l f - e x p r e s s i o n a n d self-esteem. B a s i c principles a n d methods of g u i d a n c e will be studied. W e e k l y lab s e s s i o n s provide direct involvement with materials. Education 153 P r o g r a m Development II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 152 a n d 155 Further study of program planning a n d development with particular reference to day care and to meeting the needs of the individual c h i l d in a group setting. C o n s i d e r a t i o n will be given to the child under three, the three to five year old child and to s c h o o l age children. L a b s e s s i o n s provide further involvement with materials a n d activities. Education 154 A c o u r s e w h o s e major g o a l s will be to familiarize students with various types of facilities for the developmentally handi c a p p e d . The survey will include observations, seminar reports a n d d i s c u s s i o n s dealing with programs and services d e s i g n e d for those with s p e c i a l n e e d s from infancy to adulthood. Education 250 P r o g r a m Development III (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Education 153 and E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written permission of the Program Coordinator. A detailed look at children's early c o n c e p t development in s c i e n c e , s o c i a l studies and mathematics. Students will work on individual and group presentations of materials, activities and e x p e r i e n c e s for the young c h i l d . E m p h a s i s will be placed on the integration of these with other curriculum areas of achieve a b a l a n c e d , flowing, creative program. Included is a w e e k e n d field trip early in the term a n d w e e k l y lab experiences. A n additional fee will be levied to c o v e r c o s t s of the field trip. Health a n d Nutrition I (F) (3,0,1) The first of a two part study of the y o u n g c h i l d with a particular e m p h a s i s on physiology a n d the c o m m o n d i s e a s e s and disorders of c h i l d h o o d . Twelve lectures of this series are c o n c e r n e d with first aid p r a c t i c e s and p r o c e d u r e s a p p l i c a b l e in the pre-school setting. A fee will be levied to cover c o s t s associated with the St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e First A i d C e r tificate (Exceptions will be made for people with current First A i d Certificates) Education 155 H u m a n G r o w t h a n d D e v e l o p m e n t I (F) (3,0,1) The first half of a two-part s e q u e n c e . A study of human growth and development from birth to the end of the pres c h o o l years. A n introductory study of theories, principles of development a n d child study t e c h n i q u e s . E d u c a t i o n 252 C r e a t i v e Arts for the Y o u n g Child (S) (3,0, i) Prerequisite: Education 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written permission of the Program Coordinator. A c o u r s e w h i c h c o m b i n e s theory a n d participation in Art, M u s i c a n d Movement for young children. The c o u r s e builds on the experience a n d k n o w l e d g e gained in previous courses. It is d e s i g n e d to extend the c o n c e p t of activity plans and to further the student's teaching skills. E d u c a t i o n 254 F o u n d a t i o n s of Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n (F) (3,0,1) A n overview of historical s o u r c e s a n d modern impacts which are reflected in present p r e - s c h o o l procedures. 103 E d u c a t i o n 262 Special Education (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Education 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written permission of the Program Coordinator. A course whose major g o a l s will be the introduction to and general study of special needs of children in order that the student may increase her/his abilities to identify a n d work with exceptional pre-school children in regular or s p e c i a l programs. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on community facilities serving exceptional children a n d application will be made to the gifted, developmentally-delayed, neurologically h a n d i c a p p e d , emotionally disturbed a n d multi-handicapped child. E d u c a t i o n 264 P r e - S c h o o l Administration (S) (3,0,1) Administration and management of p r e - s c h o o l s with major f o c u s on day care. T o p i c s studied will include licensing regulations; procedures for setting up a centre; financial operation; personnel p o l i c i e s ; staff relationships a n d superv i s i o n ; working with a board of directors. Education 268 Interpersonal Relationships In T e a c h i n g (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 and E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written permission of the Program Coordinator. A n examination of the role of the pre-school teacher in establishing meaningful relationships with parents, c o l l e a g u e s and community representatives. S p e c i f i c c o m munication skills will be d e v e l o p e d through the group process, role play, s o c i o d r a m a a n d interviewing techniques. Community resources a n d referral procedures will also be studied. E d u c a t i o n 270 Volunteer P l a c e m e n t (F) (3,0/1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide practical e x p e r i e n c e of a volunteer nature in a s p e c i a l needs facility. Supervision will be provided through weekly seminars a n d reports. Education 271 Individual Project (S) (3,0,1) In consultation with the instructor the student will u n dertake an in-depth study of a program or an area of i n dividual development related to the s p e c i a l needs person. Education 364 P r a c t i c u m I (F) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: Taken concurrently with E d u c a t i o n 152 or by written permission of the Program Coordinator. The first of a four-part practicum s e q u e n c e . E a c h student s p e n d s two w e e k s in the C o l l e g e Day C a r e Centre, f o c u s i n g on individual differences among c h i l d r e n , developing skill in observing and recording the behaviour of young children a n d participating in the program under direct supervision. 80 hrs. 104 E d u c a t i o n 365 P r a c t i c u m II (S) (6,0,2) P r e r e q u i s i t e : E d u c a t i o n 364. T a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y with E d u c a t i o n 153 or by written permission of the P r o g r a m C o o r dinator. S u p e r v i s e d participation in o n e program for young children. S e m i n a r s are held w e e k l y during the p r a c t i c u m block. 150 hours. E d u c a t i o n 366 P r a c t i c u m III (S) (6,0,2) P r e r e q u i s i t e : E d u c a t i o n 365. T a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y with E d u c a t i o n 250 or by written permission of the Program C o o r dinator. The student participates as a student assistant in one c e n tre. 90 hours. W e e k l y seminars throughout the term. E d u c a t i o n 367 P r a c t i c u m IV (F) (6,0,2) P r e r e q u i s i t e : E d u c a t i o n 366. T a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y with E d u c a t i o n 262 or by written permission of the P r o g r a m C o o r dinator. The student visits a number of different centres for children with s p e c i a l needs and s p e n d s an extended b l o c k of time in one s u c h centre. 120 hours. W e e k l y seminars are held during the practicum block. Program for the Developmentally instructional Faculty Adler, M.T., B.A. (Toronto), M.S.W. (Brit. Col.) B r o w n , J . , B . S c , H . E c (Man.), P . G . ( V a n . Gen.) C u m e l l a , A . W . M . , B.A. (York), Primary S p e c i a l i s t Cert. (Toronto), Perm. T e a c h i n g Cert. (Toronto), G r a d u a t e Dipl. (Brit. C o l . ) Little., D.V., R.N. (St. Paul's), P . H . N . (Brit. Col.) R e n n i e , L.J., B . S c . (Brigham Y o u n g ) Warrell, E.M., Dipl. P h y s i c a l E d . (Liverpool), M . E d . (Western W a s h . State) W o r m a n , E., B.A. (Toronto), Dipl. C h i l d Study (Toronto) Coordinator Handicapped * * E d u c a t i o n 155 H u m a n Growth a n d Development I must be taken prior to or concurrently with E d u c a t i o n 152. Second Term E d u c a t i o n 151 E d u c a t i o n 153 E d u c a t i o n 156 E d u c a t i o n 164 E d u c a t i o n 365 E d u c a t i o n 165 Literature for Y o u n g Children Program DevelopH u m a n Growth and Development II Health and Nutrition P r a c t i c u m II Field Survey II 3 2 3 2 3 3 6 3 21 This program is a two-year c o u r s e of studies preparing graduates to work as support staff in facilities which serve persons with s p e c i a l n e e d s including infant intervention programs, recreational, residential and rehabilitation programs. The program has been granted Level I accreditation by the National Institute on Mental Retardation. The C o r e material of the program is the study of human growth and development b a s e d on "normative s t a n d a r d s " . B u i l d i n g . o n this foundation, the student is introduced to an overview of developmental h a n d i c a p s of a sensory, mental, p s y c h o l o g i c a l and emotional nature. A n interrelated series of courses permit detailed study of program planning, g u i d a n c e methods a n d interpersonal relationship. Theory and practice are c l o s e l y related throughout the program, as students s p e n d regular periods e a c h term o b serving and participating under supervision in a variety of programs including day c a r e centres and other pre-school settings as well as in facilities for the h a n d i c a p p e d . Third Term E d u c a t i o n 157 Education Education Education Education 250 262 270 367 The C h i l d and Family Life P r o g r a m Development III Special Education Volunteer P l a c e m e n t . . . P r a c t i c u m IV 4 3 3 3 3 6 2 2 4 18 Fourth T e r m C o m n s . 155 E d u c a t i o n 252 E d u c a t i o n 268 E d u c a t i o n 271 E d u c a t i o n 366 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Early Childhood Education . . . Creative Arts for the Young Child Interpersonal R e l a t i o n ships in T e a c h i n g Individual Project P r a c t i c u m III 3 3 3 3 6 18 C o u r s e s are presented in a manner w h i c h promotes active student participation through practical demonstrations, reports, projects and d i s c u s s i o n s . C o n s i d e r a b l e responsibility is given to students e n a b l i n g them to develop into creative, independent k n o w l e d g e a b l e persons. B e c a u s e this program is c l o s e l y allied with the C o l l e g e ' s current Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m , students c o m pleting the program for the Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d will also be qualified to work in day care centres a n d other p r e - s c h o o l s at a supervisory level. A p p l i c a n t s are required to present a m e d i c a l certificate and a T . B . X-ray Certificate, as well as to arrange an i n terview with the Program Co-ordinator, prior to a c c e p t a n c e into this program. A s s o c i a t e In Arts a n d S c i e n c e Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l E d u c a t i o n Requirements Practicum Diploma Credit Lab Hours 45 6 _24 Hours 10 75 10 3 3 3 2 First T e r m C o m n s . 150 E d u c a t i o n 152 E d u c a t i o n 154 Education 1 5 5 * * E d u c a t i o n 364 Communications Program Development I Health and Nutrition I . . H u m a n Growth & Development I Practicum I 3 6 18 2 i K at 105 Media Resources Media Resources Program Program The M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program trains students tor the growing opportunities in using intermediate-level media t e c h n o l o g i e s in all forms of education and training. The program is oriented toward e d u c a t i o n a l institutions at all levels, s o c i a l a g e n c i e s , community media and journalism, as well as industry. Work opportunities in this field include production, distribution, training for media skills and s o c i a l animation roles. The core of the program involves production training in basic and a d v a n c e d photography, g r a p h i c s , audio, film, multi-media, and television. A l l students are trained in the basic technical and aesthetic skifls in these media and complete finished productions in them. In addition the program includes c o u r s e s in learning theory, resource centres and libraries, basic electronic systems, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s and the politics of media. A s s i g n m e n t s and c o u r s e s focus on the types of needs now being expressed in the media field. Field practicums o c c u p y m u c h of the student's time in the fourth term. The program c o n s i s t s of four terms of study and begins e a c h year in the Fall Term. Option Second Term M e d i a 151 M e d i a 153 M e d i a 155 C o m n s . 156 M e d i a 163 M e d i a 171 M e d i a 182 M e d i a 185 253 254 260 261 271 M e d i a 287 Fourth T e r m M e d i a 256 M e d i a 301 M e d i a 302 M e d i a 303 The M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program c o u r s e s generally have a lab fee component w h i c h must be paid by the student taking these c o u r s e s . L a b fees are c o l l e c t e d at the time of registration and go towards payment for supplies and depreciation c o s t s of equipment. Information about lab fee amounts will be available at the time of registration. A s s o c i a t e in Arts and S c i e n c e Major Program Requirements Electives 154 161 181 183 M e d i a 189 106 3 Filmmaking 6 M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s III . . 3 Audio Visual Graphics 3 T e c h n i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s III 3 Educational Television Systems 6 A u d i o for Film and Television 3 3 3 24 6 3 3 3 6 3 9 C h o i c e of: M e d i a 263 3 3 3 15 21 Learning R e s o u r c e s Centres S p e c i a l Instructional Aids Instructional M e d i a Productions The M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t in Education and Training T e c h n i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s IV OR Elective Studio Lab Hours 87 3 33 90 33 Instructional Faculty First T e r m Media Media Media Media _3 24 Diploma Credit Hours C o m n s . 150 M e d i a 152 3 3 3 Third Term Media Media Media Media Media • Fees: 3 3 3 3 3 Courses E a c h term the department will offer several c o u r s e s that are open to college students and community members not enrolled full time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program. T h e s e c o u r s e s carry c o l l e g e credit and will count towards a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D i p l o m a . In general, these c o u r s e s are numbered M e d i a 050 to M e d i a 074. C h e c k the timetable to see which ones will be offered in a given term. Lab G r a p h i c s for MultiMedia Productions Film Animation M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s II . . . Media Resources Communications T e c h n i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s II S m a l l Format Television Advanced Audio Production A d v a n c e d Photography . Basic Communications G r a p h i c s for the M e d i a Specialist Media Applications I . . . Technical Applications B a s i c A u d i o Production Theory and A p p l i c a t i o n s of P h o t o g r a p h i c Production Research Methods 3 3 6 3 3 6 3 3 27 3 Azaroff, P., B.A. (Heb. U. Israel) B i z z o c c h i , J.V., B.A. (Michigan), T e a c h i n g Cert. (Sec.) (Michigan) C o o k , R.D., B.A. (Toronto), A . A . S . , M e d i a S p e c . Cert. (Capilano College) K e l l i n g t o n , T.P., A . A . S . , M e d i a S p e c . Cert. ( C a p . C o l l e g e ) L y n c h , N„ B.A. (Western Ontario), M.A. (U.B.C.) van den O u d e n , C , G r a p h i c s Dipl. (V.S.A.), A . R . B . A . (Illinois) van den O u d e n , R., T e c h n o l o g y Diploma (B.C.I.T.), C.E.T. (B.C.S.E.T.) S i m p s o n , M., B.A. (Brit. Col.) Stirloff, W., M e d i a C o m m u n i c a t i o n s D i p l . (V.S.A.) Taylor, P.A., E l e c t r o n i c T e c h n o l o g y Dipl. (V.V.I.) C.E.T. (ISCET) T h o m p s o n , P., B.A. (Stanford), M . E d . (Minnesota) Media Courses M e d i a 076 M e d i a 050 D o c u m e n t a r y Film A p p l i c a t i o n s ( F , S ) (1,0,5) (Open) Documentary films, their a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d utilization will be explored in this c o u r s e . T h i s film c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for people working in Adult E d u c a t i o n a n d w h o w i s h to make more use of film as an e d u c a t i o n a l tool. A n i m a t i o n ( S U ) (3,3,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in film animation similar to M e d i a 153. This c o u r s e for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program M e d i a 077 M e d i a 051 A n i m a t i o n - O p e n L a b (F.S) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) V i d e o S t u d i e s , (F,S) (1,0,.5) (Open) A n introduction to the role of video in a variety of c o m munity situations. Students will study the effect of T V on o u r society and look at other uses for video in affecting c h a n g e . M e d i a 052 A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in film animation similar to M e d i a 153. The c o u r s e will provide a c c e s s to production facilities rather than faculty supervised laboratory instruction. This c o u r s e is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a Resources Program. S m a l l Format M e d i a S t u d i e s (F,S) (1.0..5) (Open) M e d i a 081 The uses of small format e d u c a t i o n a l media will be explored in this c o u r s e . Filmstrips, slide tape, still photography and other media will be d i s c u s s e d and analyzed. B a s i c A u d i o Production M e d i a 053 Film Studies (F) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) ( S U ) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) A n introduction to the b a s i c s of audio production techniques for students not enrolled in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program. M e d i a 151 A study of contemporary and historical films. The lectures, d i s c u s s i o n s , a n d a s s i g n m e n t s will be b a s e d on films s h o w n in the c l a s s a n d on s e l e c t e d readings in film history, criticism, and history. T h i s c o u r s e is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . M e d i a 059 Graphics Audio Applications A n introduction to the equipment and t e c h n i q u e s used by the graphic designer in media productions. M o s t of the course is devoted to studio assignments, involving layout and typography, photography, s i l k s c r e e n a n d o v e r h e a d transparencies a n d their application to media production. (F,S) (1,0, .5) ( O p e n ) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for people w h o wish to m a k e more effective use of their tape recorders and w h o w i s h to learn simple editing procedures. M e d i a 060 Graphic Applications ( F . S . S U ) (1,0, .5) ( O p e n ) The use of graphics as it applies to media production. Lettering, s i l k s c r e e n i n g a n d other forms of g r a p h i c s will be studied as they apply to media s u c h as film, T V , slide tape, overhead transparencies. M e d i a 061 Slide-Tape Productions ( F . S . S U ) (1,0, .5) (Open) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for p e o p l e w i s h i n g to improve their present skill in slide tape productions. Students will produce a slide tape using their o w n s l i d e s a n d sound tracks. M e d i a 062 Photographic Usage (S) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) A n introduction for b e g i n n i n g photographers. T h e c o u r s e will cover s u c h topics as e x p o s u r e , depth of field, treatment of motion, c h o i c e of l e n s e s , b a s i c lighting, creativity in photography, a n d purchasing of equipment. Participants to supply their o w n c a m e r a s a n d supplies. T h i s c o u r s e is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program. M e d i a 074 B a s i c Film M a k i n g ( S U ) (3,3,1) ( O p e n ) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in film m a k i n g , similar to M e d i a 253. This c o u r s e is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . M e d i a 075 B a s i c Film M a k i n g - O p e n L a b ( F , S ) (3,0,1) (Open) A p r a c t i c a l a n d lecture c o u r s e in cinematography, similar to M e d i a 253, but more limited in s c o p e a n d depth of c o v e r a g e . T h i s c o u r s e w i l l provide a c c e s s to production facilities rather than structured laboratory instruction. Not for students enrolled full time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . for M u l t i - M e d i a P r o d u c t i o n s (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in audio-visual g r a p h i c s to produce g r a p h i c s a p propriate for u s e in slide-tape s h o w s , animated films, e t c . M e d i a 152 Graphics for the M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t (F) (3,0,1) M e d i a 153 Film A n i m a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to film animation techniques using Super 8 film, b a s i c motion picture c a m e r a a n d studio lighting t e c h n i q u e s in lectures, demonstrations a n d w o r k s h o p exerc i s e s , including a wide range of film animation m e d i a ; drawing on film; b l e a c h i n g ; table top animation; cutouts; c a m e r a animation of g r a p h i c s a n d photographs; titling a n d b a s i c animation c e l l t e c h n i q u e s . M e d i a 154 Media Applications (F) (6,0,2) A n introduction to the e d u c a t i o n a l a n d s o c i a l uses of media. E m p h a s i s will be on projects involving basic media, photography, graphics, transparencies, e t c . M e d i a 155 Media Applications II (S) (3,0,1) Intermediate c o u r s e in the e d u c a t i o n a l and s o c i a l uses of media. Introduction to theories of learning, c o m m u n i c a t i o n systems, and educational applications. M e d i a 161 Technical Applications I (F) (3,0,1) A beginning c o u r s e to familiarize students with the capabilities a n d limitations of equipment. P r a c t i c a l e x perience in care, maintenance a n d s i m p l e repairs of still c a m e r a s , projectors, a n d other b a s i c equipment. M e d i a 163 Technical Applications II (S) (3,0,1) C a p a b i l i t i e s and limitations of audio, slide tape, film animation, a n d video portapack systems. P r a c t i c a l e x perience in care and m a i n t e n a n c e of these systems. 107 M e d i a 171 S m a l l Format T e l e v i s i o n (S) (3,0,1) Introduction in television production. The c o u r s e will c e n tre on uses of the half-inch portable "rover" system. M e d i a 181 B a s i c A u d i o Production (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to b a s i c production techniques for educational materials. E m p h a s i s will be on interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, and mixing. T h e c o u r s e will also cover the proper operation of m i c r o p h o n e s , tape recorders and dub/mix facilities. M e d i a 182 A d v a n c e d A u d i o Production (S) (3,0,1) A practical and lecture c o u r s e c o v e r i n g documentaries, drama, satire, dramatization, music recording a n d s p e c i a l learning formats. S o m e of the work will involve the department's production studio. M e d i a 183 Theory a n d A p p l i c a t i o n s (F) of P h o t o g r a p h i c Production (6,3,2) A beginning c o u r s e in photographic theory a n d practice, examining basic principles of c a m e r a operation; e x p o s u r e ; developing and printing. purposes, film or television productions, including w o r k s h o p a s s i g n m e n t s with colourtone t e c h n i q u e s ; photographic paste-up a n d reduction t e c h n i q u e s ; the production of d i a g r a m s ; b a s i c display a n d flow charts. M e d i a 261 T e c h n i c a l Applications III (F) (3,0,1) C a p a b i l i t i e s a n d limitations of television a n d film s y s t e m s . P r a c t i c a l e x p e r i e n c e in use, care a n d m a i n t e n a n c e of those systems. M e d i a 263 Technical Applications IV (S) (3,0,1) D e s i g n i n g of systems for media production a n d delivery. Includes budgeting and p u r c h a s i n g of equipment systems, a c c o m m o d a t i o n of systems, d e s i g n i n g to institutional n e e d s and resources, and interfacing of different types of systems. M e d i a 271 Educational Television Systems (F) (6,0,2) A production c o u r s e in medium format television, i n c l u d i n g portable 1 / 2 " and 1 " videotape equipment, s i n g l e - c a m e r a productions, documentaries, and full studio productions. Training includes c a m e r a work, directing a n d s w i t c h i n g , lighting, editing, g r a p h i c s , telecine. M e d i a 287 A u d i o for Film a n d T e l e v i s i o n (F) (3,0,1) M e d i a 185 A d v a n c e d Photography (S) (3,3,1) T e c h n i q u e s of audio recording, editing and d u b b i n g in film and television production. The application of photographic t e c h n i q u e s , with e m p h a s i s on c o m b i n i n g shot s e q u e n c e s to tell a story, as well as editing, layout and presentation. M e d i a 301 Specialized M e d i a 189 R e s e a r c h M e t h o d s for the M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t (S) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h and b a c k g r o u n d techniques for media productions. The role of the media specialist in consultation with clients a n d content experts in interviewing, a n d in utilizing libraries, newspapers a n d other s o u r c e s of material. M e d i a 253 Film M a k i n g (F) (6,3,2) A n introduction to basic motion picture production; c a m e r a , film stock, lighting; exposure controls; lenses and perspectives; camera movement; pictorial a n d directional continuity; editing, titling, scripting, with e m p h a s i s upon film as a graphic medium. A production c o u r s e e m p h a s i z i n g c o n tinuity, dramatic a n d e d u c a t i o n a l films, utilizing Super 8 equipment. M e d i a 254 M e d i a Applications III (F) (3,3,1) Further work in uses and applications of media in a field setting. The role of the R e s o u r c e Centre in an institution. M e d i a 256 L e a r n i n g R e s o u r c e s C e n t r e (S) (3,3,1) A c o u r s e in which the student will produce a plan of an audio-visual resource in relation to the d e v e l o p i n g c o n c e p t of total learning resources services. M e d i a 260 Audio Visual Graphics (F) (3,0,1) A basic c o u r s e in the principles of graphic information a n d preparation of graphic materials for c l a s s r o o m instructional 108 Instructional A i d s (S) (3,6,1) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of the specialty c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e in the planning a n d preparation of s p e c i a l graphic and instructional aids for c l a s s r o o m , film a n d TV productions, a s well a s the study of production t e c h n i q u e s , colourtone production and other display media. A field practicum c o u r s e involving one or more major a s s i g n ments. M e d i a 302 Instructional M e d i a P r o d u c t i o n s (S) (3,9,1) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of specialty c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e in media productions, including audio, slide, tape, film, v.t.r. a n d e.t.v. as these relate to e d u c a t i o n a l a n d training n e e d s , with production styles for s p e c i f i c needs and a u d i e n c e s . A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e i n volving o n e or more assignments. M e d i a 303 The Media Specialist (3,3,1) in E d u c a t i o n a n d T r a i n i n g (S) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of specialty c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A c o u r s e c o n c e r n e d with the uses of media for motivation, triggers, information transmission, emotive learning and selfa w a r e n e s s : the relationship of the M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t to education in general, with e m p h a s i s on the tasks confronting him. A field practicum c o u r s e involving o n e or more major assignments. Music Programs C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers three music programs: The C o m mercial M u s i c Program, the M u s i c Therapy Program and the M u s i c Transfer Program. M o s t c o u r s e s are open to part-time students. Commercial Music Programs This program offers the aspiring jazz m u s i c i a n an in-depth grounding in his/her field. T h e working musician will also gain deeper understanding and practice of his/her craft as a part-time student. Six theory c o u r s e s offer a thorough insight into the tonal period and 20th century techniques. Orchestration and arranging c o u r s e s will e n a b l e the student to use his/her theoretical k n o w l e d g e in more practical ways. Improvision and Private M u s i c Instruction c o u r s e s develop the soloistic performance of the student. E n s e m b l e c o u r s e s will permit the student to e x p e r i e n c e work in a large stage band or in smaller jazz e n s e m b l e s . A s s o c i a t e in Arts a n d S c i e n c e Diploma Major Program Requirements Credit Hours 75 Lab Hours 18 Students must demonstrate p r o g r e s s in a small e n s e m b l e performance situation or as a soloist in their s e c o n d year before the A s s o c i a t e in Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a will be awarded. Approximately eight hours per week for rehearsal s h o u l d be allocated in the student's timetable. Students must play in a prescribed number of concerts, to be determined by the music faculty. N.B.: Those students who wish to enter Theory 100 should know the Rudiments of Theory (Music 010). Students who do not have e n o u g h b a c k g r o u n d in theory will be required to take M u s i c 010. Music Transfer Program This program is d e s i g n e d for students who desire to go on to a degree program at a C a n a d i a n University. A l l c o u r s e s in this program carry transfer to the M u s i c Department of the University of B . C . Transferability has also been arranged with the Faculty of M u s i c at the University of V i c t o r i a . The program c o n s i s t s of a liberal arts education and s p e c i a l i z e d music training, including theory, history and applied music. A s s o c i a t e in Arts a n d S c i e n c e First T e r m M u s i c 100 M u s i c 150 M u s i c 193 M u s i c 164 M u s i c 176 M u s i c 180 M u s i c 178 M u s i c 198 Theory V Ensemble History of J a z z Private M u s i c Instruction . Improvisation Class Piano Repertoire Improvisation E n s e m b l e i Second Term M u s i c 101 Theory VI M u s i c 151 Ensemble M u s i c 165 Private M u s i c Instruction . M u s i c 181 Class Piano M u s i c 177 Improvisation M u s i c 179 Repertoire M u s i c 158 Orchestration M u s i c 194 History of R o c k M u s i c 199 Improvisation E n s e m b l e . . Third T e r m M u s i c 200 M u s i c 252 M u s i c 264 M u s i c 270 M u s i c 280 M u s i c 254 M u s i c 276 M u s i c 298 M u s i c 153 Fourth T e r m M u s i c 201 M u s i c 253 M u s i c 265 M u s i c 271 M u s i c 281 M u s i c 255 M u s i c 277 M u s i c 299 M u s i c 152 Theory VII Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction . Arranging Class Piano Repertoire Improvisation Improvisation E n s e m b l e . . S o n g Writing Theory VIII Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction . Arranging Class Piano Repertoire Improvisation Improvisation E n s e m b l e .. C o m m e r c i a l Relations in M u s i c 3 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 1 2 1 4 3 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 1.5 1.5 1 2 1 English Music Music Music Music 120 150 164 162 M u s i c 262 M u s i c 180 M u s i c 256 Elective 8 Any transferable English c o u r s e History I Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction . C l a s s Strings OR Class Woodwinds Class Piano Theory III C h o s e n in consultation with the C o o r d i n a t o r 4 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 2 2 19.5 5 1 2 Music Music Music Music 121 151 165 163 M u s i c 263 M u s i c 181 M u s i c 257 Elective Third T e r m E n g l i s h 200 M u s i c 100 M u s i c 252 M u s i c 162 M u s i c 262 M u s i c 190 M u s i c 164 M u s i c 280 Elective 5 1 0 3 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 1 1 3_ 2 Term 2 1.5 Lab Hours 10 4 21 Second English 19.5 19.5 Credit Hours 60 ._24 First T e r m 16.5 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l E d u c a t i o n Requirements Diploma Any transferable English course 3 History II 3 Ensemble 3 Private M u s i c Instruction . 1.5 C l a s s Strings OR Class Woodwinds 3 Class Piano 1.5 Theory IV 3 C h o s e n in consultation with the C o o r d i n a t o r —? 1 1 2 Literature to 1660 Theory V Ensemble C l a s s Strings OR Class Woodwinds History III Private M u s i c Instruction . Class Piano C h o s e n in consultation with with the Coordinator 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 1 2 3 21 3 109 Fourth T e r m E n g l i s h 201 M u s i c 101 M u s i c 252 M u s i c 163 M u s i c 263 M u s i c 191 M u s i c 265 M u s i c 281 Elective Literature since 1660 . . . . Theory VI Ensemble C l a s s Strings OR Class Woodwinds History IV Private M u s i c Instruction . Class Piano C h o s e n in consultation with the Coordinator 3 3 3 psychiatric nurses, c l i n i c a l p s y c h o l o g i s t s , d e p e n d i n g on their delegated amount of responsibility on a therapeutic team. Semester 1 3 3 1.5 1.5 M u s i c 110 M u s i c 140 M u s i c 164 M u s i c 176 M u s i c 366 P s y c h . 204 Credit Hours Music Appreciation 3 M u s i c Therapy I 3 Private M u s i c Instruction . 1.5 Improvisation 1.5 Practicum I 6 Developmental P s y c h o l o g y j3_ _3_ 21 Both the c o m m e r c i a l and m u s i c transfer programs offer students enrolled in other C o l l e g e programs a continuing education in music and elective credit. N u m e r o u s m u s i c c o u r s e s are available for part-time students. A l l applicants for either the C a r e e r or the M u s i c Transfer programs must do the following: Lab Hours 18 Semester 2 M u s i c 102 Music Music Music Music 111 141 165 361 Interpersonal S k i l l s for M u s i c Therapists Music Appreciation M u s i c Therapy II Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m II 1.5 3 3 1.5 6 15 Semester 3 1. C o m p l y with general admission requirements of C a p i l a n o College. 2. Participate in a private interview with the Coordinator of M u s i c and/or Program Instructor. 3. Write a theory placement examination. Music Music Music Music 4. Play an audition on their major P s y c h . 201 instrument. Note: A l l music students are e x p e c t e d to pay a lab fee. Information about amounts of lab fees will be available at the time of registration. A l l interviews, auditions and placement tests will be held in May and August of 1979. Interested persons are a s k e d to phone the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Department, 986-1911, for further information. Music Therapy Program This program trains students to use m u s i c as a therapeutic medium in a variety of treatment settings. M u s i c therapists c a n be employed in psychiatric settings, s c h o o l s and homes for retarded children and adults, general hospitals, facilities for h a n d i c a p p e d people, correctional institutions, extended c a r e units and geriatric hospitals, s c h o o l s for emotionally disturbed and behaviour problem children as well as centres concentrating on preventative m e d i c i n e s u c h as human growth and awareness institutes. Students will be introduced to several established therapeutic models, will develop their m u s i c a l and interpersonal skills, and apply these d e v e l o p i n g s k i l l s in practicum settings. P r a c t i c u m p l a c e m e n t s presently include: Riverview Hospital, U . B . C . P s y c h i a t r i c Day C a r e , The M a p l e s (adolescent unit), V . G . H . , Banfield Extended C a r e , G.F. Strong Rehabilitation Centre (children's unit), O a k r i d g e S c h o o l , U.B.C. P r e - S c h o o l for S p e c i a l C h i l d r e n . The list will c h a n g e slightly from semester to semester. S t u d e n t s will be e x p e c t e d to s y n t h e s i z e p e r s o n a l therapeutic a p p r o a c h e s from their own v a l u e s and abilities. as well as from the c o u r s e information. G r a d u a t e s will be equipped to d e s i g n m u s i c therapy programs for any age group with mental, physical or emotional disabilities. The graduates c a n expect to work in s u c h settings as s c h o o l s , group homes, small treatment centres or provincial treatment institutions offering psychiatric, s p e c i a l e d u c a t i o n and some physiotherapy programs. M u s i c therapists should expect to earn salaries c o m p a r a b l e with o c c u p a t i o n a l therapists, 110 240 264 362 242 M u s i c Therapy T e c h n i q u e s Private M u s i c Instruction . P r a c t i c u m III M u s i c Through the Creative Arts Group Dynamics 3 1.5 6 1.5 3 15 Semester 4 M u s i c 241 M u s i c 265 M u s i c 363 M u s i c 364 P s y c h 222 Professional Development Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m IV C l i n i c a l Orientation Abnormal P s y c h o l o g y . . . 3 1.5 6 3 3 16.5 Granting of the Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma in this program w i l l be c o n t i n g e n t u p o n d e m o n s t r a t i o n of a d e q u a t e professional skills evaluated on an o n - g o i n g b a s i s by the student, music therapy instructors and field supervisors. The c o u r s e s listed above have been offically r e c o g n i z e d by the C a n a d i a n A s s o c i a t i o n for M u s i c Therapy and c a n be applied towards accreditation with C.A.M.T. A s s o c i a t e In Arts and S c i e n c e Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l Education Requirements Diploma Credit Hours 55.5 9 Lab Hours 8 All students entering Music Therapy must: 1. C o m p l y with the general c o l l e g e entrance requirements. 2. Participate in an interview with the M u s i c Coordinator and/or a M u s i c Therapy Instructor. 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument and demonstrate both technique and repertoire of a G r a d e 7 Toronto Conservatory level (or equivalent). 4. T a k e a theory placement test, and demonstrate a grasp of tonal harmony. 5. H a v e s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d a c o u r s e in introductory psychology. 6. H a v e s o m e experience with (or exposure to) people with s p e c i a l needs. Music Courses Instructional Faculty A r d i e l , F., C o m m e r c i a l Guitarist, M u s i c Beatty, B„ B . S c . (Phys. Ther.), (McGill), C P . A . T e a c h e r s Cert. (McGill), M u s i c Therapy P r o g r a m Falls, L , A.R.C.T. (Toronto), B . M u s . (Brit. Col.), M . M u s . (Brit. Col.), M u s i c Coordinator F e i n g o l d , S., B.A. (Hons.) E n g l i s h (S.F.U.), C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c Program G r a y s o n , J . , M.A. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ( S . F . U ) , M u s i c Therapy Program K e e n l y s i d e , T., B.Mus. ( U . B . C ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c Program K i n g , S., B . M u s . ( U . B . C ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m K o b y l a n s k y , K.A., B.Mus. (Brit. Col.), M . M u s . (Brit. Col.), Krebs, J . J . B . , Diploma I (Inst, of C h e m . T e c h n o l o g y ) , Diploma II, R e s e a r c h T e c h n o l o g y ( R o y a l D u t c h S o c i e t y of Chemistry), D i p l o m a , M u s i c Therapy (U. of Vienna), Registered M u s i c Therapy (West Germany), M c M a s t e r , N., B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M u s i c Therapy Program Reveley, M.T., B.Mus. (Brit. Col.), C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c Program S i m p s o n , J . , B.Mus. ( U . B . C ) , M . M u s . ( U . B . C ) , M u s i c S l e m o n , P., B.A. (U. of Toronto), B . S c . ( U . B . C ) , B . M u s . ( U . B . C ) , M.M.A. (McGill), M u s i c W o l d , A„ B.Mus. ( U . B . C ) , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), M u s i c 100 Theory V (F) (3,2,1) A study of music from c a . 1600 to c a . 1800. A study of harmony; triads, non-harmonic materials, dominant seventh and derivatives, secondary dominants, simple modulation. Elementary forms, analysis of 17th and 18th century literature. Sight s i n g i n g , m e l o d i c rhythmic, and h a r m o n i c d i c tation. Keyboard harmony; playing of c a d e n c e types, modulation to closely related keys, realization of elementary figured bass. M u s i c 101 Theory VI (S) (3,2,1) A study of music from c a . 1800 to the dissolution of tonality. C h r o m a t i c harmony and an introduction to 20th c e n tury techniques. Extended forms and analysis of 19th and early 20th century literature. K e y b o a r d h a r m o n y ; improvisation, figured bass in baroque style. Sight s i n g i n g and dictation. M u s i c 200 Theory VII (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will offer a study of the various u s e s of c h r o m a t i c i s m , pedal point, and parallelism in tonal harmony. It will begin a study of traditional forms and continue with aural training started in Theory IV and V, concentrating on melodic and rhythmic dictation, sight-singing, and chord recognition. THEORETICAL STUDIES M u s i c 010 Theory I (F) (3,1,1) A c o u r s e designed to teach m u s i c rudiments i n c l u d i n g : the staff, the clefs, notes and rests, major and minor s c a l e s , intervals and c h o r d s . Ear training will i n c l u d e recognition of all intervals — melodically and harmonically — major, minor, augmented and diminished triads. Sight singing will e n c o m p a s s e x a m p l e s in duple and triple metre in major and minor keys using stepwise and disjunct melodic motion. M u s i c 201 Theory VIII (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will continue with the study of form and ear training. It will also introduce the student to harmonic c o u n terpoint, modal writing, " b l u e s " harmony, and a d v a n c e d t e c h n i q u e s for c h o r d v o i c i n g . M u s i c 158 O r c h e s t r a t i o n (S) (3,1,1) A c o u r s e in the b a s i c s of orchestration intended to give the student a working k n o w l e d g e of the orchestral instruments and some electronic d e v i c e s u s e d in c o m m e r c i a l m u s i c . M u s i c 011 Theory II (S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 010. M u s i c 256 Theory III (F) (3,2,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to e m p h a s i z e sight s i n g i n g and ear training. A study of music of the m e d i a e v a l a g e ( c a . 900 to c a . 1400). G r e g o r i a n chant to 3-part writing, notation, rhythmic modes, c h u r c h modes, cadential formulas. M u s i c 257 Theory IV (S) (3,2,1) A n intensification of ear training and sight s i n g i n g t e c h n i q u e s . A study of the m u s i c of the R e n a i s s a n c e (ca. 1400 to c a . 1600). Sixteenth century counterpoint, the development of tonality, a survey of the work of the theorists. Attention will also be paid to analysis and c o m p o s i t i o n . 111 M u s i c 270 A r r a n g i n g I (F) (3,0,3) T h i s c o u r s e will survey various b a s i c arranging t e c h n i q u e s . A thorough study will be undertaken of sectional writing from two part through the c o n c e r t e d b i g band. — melodic and rhythmic variation — 2 horn section writing — 3 horn section writing — block harmony — open voicings — adding tensions to block harmony — a p p r o a c h techniques — tension resolve — independent bass instrument M u s i c 191 History IV (S) (3,0,1) A study of music from B e e t h o v e n to the present. M u s i c 193 History of J a z z (F) (1.5, 0,1) A survey of jazz through styles and stylists from its roots in Africa to the present. M u s i c 194 History of R o c k (S) (1.5, 0,1) A survey of rock styles from its roots to the present. APPLIED STUDIES M u s i c 271 A r r a n g i n g II (S) (3,0,2) C l a s s Instruments This c o u r s e will offer study of a d v a n c e d arranging techniques. It will include introductions and modulations, e n d i n g s and b a c k g r o u n d writing, a n d a methodical application of these to various styles of rock, jazz a n d popular m u s i c . M u s i c 262 C l a s s W o o d w i n d s (F) (3,2,1) — b a c k g r o u n d writing — five part harmony — dominant harmonization of a line — practical application of theoretical work with voicing in fourths, modal writing a n d c h o r d v o i c i n g — writing in s p e c i f i c styles — introductions, e n d i n g s , modulations HISTORIAL STUDIES M u s i c 110 Music Appreciation (F) (3,1,1) A practical study of the violin family. M u s i c 263 C l a s s W o o d w i n d s (S) (3,2,1) A continuation of M u s i c 262. M u s i c 180 P i a n o C l a s s ( F , S ) (1.5, 2, .5) G r o u p piano lessons for m u s i c majors. M u s i c 181 P i a n o C l a s s (F,S) (1.5, 2, .5) A continuation of M u s i c 180. A study of western music through a penetrating look at various parameters. Rhythm, metre, a n d tempo, pitch, tone colour, d y n a m i c s , attach a n d d e c a y , texture. S p e c i a l attention will be paid to student creations u s i n g various parameters. M u s i c 280 P i a n o C l a s s (F) (1.5,2, .5) M u s i c 111 Music Appreciation M u s i c 281 P i a n o C l a s s (F) (1.5, 2, .5) (S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 110. M u s i c 120 History I (F) (3,0,1) A study of m u s i c a l history from the time of ancient G r e e c e to Dufay. A continuation of M u s i c 181. A continuation of M u s i c 280. Ensembles M u s i c 150, 151, 252, 253 a l l have 3 s e c t i o n s . S e c t i o n 1 is choir, section 2 is orchestra, section 3 is stage band. A l l ens e m b l e s will perform publicly. M u s i c 150 M u s i c 121 History II (S) (3,0,1) A study of music history from Dufay to Monteverdi. M u s i c 153 S o n g Writing (F) (1.5, 0, .5) Ensemble ( F , S ) (3,1,1) G r o u p performance e x p e r i e n c e . M u s i c 151 E n s e m b l e (F,S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 150. A n investigation of the t e c h n i q u e s a n d roles of lyrics and lyric writing for popular s o n g styles. M u s i c 252 E n s e m b l e (F,S) (3,1,1) M u s i c 190 History III (F) (3,0,1) M u s i c 253 E n s e m b l e (F.S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 151. A study of m u s i c history from Monteverdi to B e e t h o v e n . 112 A continuation of M u s i c 252. INDIVIDUAL S T U D I E S M u s i c 276 M u s i c 164 i m p r o v i s a t i o n (F) (1.5, 0, .5) Private M u s i c Instruction ( F , S ) (1.5, 0, .5) A c o u r s e primarily d e s i g n e d to permit the student to pursue in-depth study of his/her o w n m u s i c specialty from qualified music instructors in the community. Students will be e x p e c t e d to show p r o g r e s s at the b e g i n n i n g and at the e n d of the term for the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Faculty in order to assist the evaluation by m u s i c faculty in conjunction with the private m u s i c teacher. T h e c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of ten hour lessons. A continuation of M u s i c 177. M u s i c 277 Improvisation (S) (1.5, 0 .5) A continuation of M u s i c 276. M u s i c 178 R e p e r t o i r e (F,S) (3,0,1) M u s i c 165 This is a flexible c o u r s e open to students in the c o m mercial program w h o wish to gain e x p e r i e n c e in rehearsal techniques a n d performance. Students will rehearse under supervision as vocalists or instrumentalists, individually or in small groups. The c o u r s e requirements include about four hours of rehearsal per week plus a given number of public performances. Private M u s i c Instruction ( F , S ) (1.5, 0, .5) A continuation of M u s i c 164. M u s i c 179 M u s i c 264 R e p e r t o i r e ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is available to those students enrolled in 15 credit hours of music c u r r i c u l u m . T h o s e students with less than 15 credit hours of m u s i c c u r r i c u l u m a n d who desire credit for M u s i c 164 must c o n s u l t the M u s i c C o o r d i n a t o r prior to registration. Private M u s i c Instruction ( F , S ) (1.5, 0, .5) A continuation of M u s i c 165. A continuation of M u s i c 178 M u s i c 254 M u s i c 265 R e p e r t o i r e (F,S) (3,0,1) P r l v s t e M u s i c Instruction ( F , S ) (1.5, 0, .5) A continuation of M u s i c 179. A continuation of M u s i c 264. M u s i c 255 M u s i c 196 Private Music (F,S) (1.5) R e p e r t o i r e ( F , S ) (3,0,1) Instruction Secondary Inatrument This c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of ten half-hour l e s s o n s o n the student's secondary instrument when that instrument is not a piano. Students will study with qualified music instructors in the community and will be e x p e c t e d to s h o w p r o g r e s s at the end of the term for the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Faculty. Note: Students are responsible for payment of the private m u s i c teacher for this c o u r s e . M u s i c 198 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (F) (1.5, 0,1) P r a c t i c a l e x p e r i e n c e in a small group situation. M u s i c 199 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (S) (1.5, 0,1) A continuation of M u s i c 198. M u s i c 197 Private Music (F,S) (1.5) A continuation of M u s i c 254. Instruction Secondary Instrument M u s i c 298 Improvisation E n s e m b l e A continuation of M u s i c 196. (F) (1.5, 0,1) A continuation of M u s i c 199. M u s i c 296 Private Music (F,S) (1.5) Instruction - S e c o n d a r y M u s i c 299 Instrument (S) (1.5, 0,1) A continuation of M u s i c 298 A continuation of M u s i c 197. M u s i c 152 M u s i c 297 Private M u s i c (F,S) (1.5) Improvisation E n s e m b l e Instruction - Secondary Instrument A continuation of M u s i c 296. M u s i c 176 Improvisation (F) (1.5, 0, .5) C o m m e r c i a l R e l a t i o n s In M u s i c (F) (1.5, 0, .5) A c o u r s e involving a s p e c t s of the music industry including stage presentation, copyright, contracts, performing rights organizations and the recording industry. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to teach the b a s i c s of jazz improvisation through the study of c h o r d s c a l e s a n d their a p plication in harmonic progression. M u s i c 177 MUSIC THERAPY C O U R S E S Improvisation (S) (1.5, 0, .5) This c o u r s e will study the development of music as therapy and its relationships to psychotherapy, art therapy, play therapy, p s y c h o d r a m a a n d m u s i c e d u c a t i o n . Students will A continuation of M u s i c 176. M u s i c 140 M u s i c T h e r a p y I (F) (3,0,0) 113 study the s c i e n c e from the time of P y t h a g o r u s to c o n temporary investigations of Stainer, Orff, Kodaly, and Nordoff-Robbins. M u s i c 242 Music Through M u s i c 141 M u s i c T h e r a p y II (S) (3,0,0) This c o u r s e will attempt to create new techniques for every unique setting, thus exploring adaptability a n d creativity in therapy. Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to extend their a w a r e n e s s of the range of m u s i c and their s e n s e of style. The c o u r s e will analyse the effective impact of m u s i c . Students will log impressions for future u s e . M u s i c 240 Music Therapy Techniques (F) (3,0,0) This c o u r s e will provide e x p e r i e n c e a n d analysis of music therapy techniques appropriate to a range of c l i n i c a l settings. The analysis will develop the exposure to basic therapeutic models in M u s i c 141. Students will be observing techniques used by the instructor and by e a c h other in the c l a s s setting. M u s i c 241 Professional D e v e l o p m e n t (S) (3,0,0) This course will develop the professional skills of o b serving, recording and reporting music therapy activities. It will also examine the possible relationships of a music therapist to staff organization in existing treatment centres and to local resources in the community. M u s i c 366 P r a c t i c u m I (F) (6,0,2) This is the first of a four part practicum s e q u e n c e . During the first part of the term the student will observe different settings at various institutions in the community. The student shall then gradually a s s u m e responsibility in one of the institutions. W e e k l y seminars shall be held during the term. M u s i c 361 P r a c t i c u m II (S) (6,0,2) The student participates a s a student therapist in o n e centre. 80 hours. W e e k l y seminars thoughout the term. M u s i c 362 P r a c t i c u m III (F) (6,0,2) The student participates as a student therapist in one c e n tre. 80 hours. W e e k l y seminars throughout the term M u s i c 363 P r a c t i c u m IV (S) (6,0,2) T h e student participates as a student therapist in one c e n tre. 80 hours. W e e k l y seminars throughout the term. M u s i c 102 Interpersonal Skills for M u s i c T h e r a p i s t s (F) (1.5) This c o u r s e will acquaint students with several skill areas w h i c h are relevant to M u s i c Therapy, particularly c o m munication skills and observation skills. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s k i l l s will i n c l u d e b e h a v i o u r d e s c r i p t i o n , p r e c e p t i o n c h e c k i n g , paraphrasing a n d description of feeling. O b - 114 servation skills will include group interaction, interviewing and small group e x e r c i s e s . Both theory a n d practice will be included. the C r e a t i v e Arts (F) (1.5) This c o u r s e will acquaint students with creative arts w h i c h c a n be used therapeutically in c o n j u n c t i o n with m u s i c , for e x a m p l e : p s y c h o d r a m a , d a n c e , visual art, art and poetry. The c o u r s e will be experiential. D i s c u s s i o n s will explore p o s s i b l e goals and extensions of the activities presented in c l a s s . M u s i c 364 C l i n i c a l Orientations (S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will provide the students with p r a c t i c a l skills and k n o w l e d g e of the p h y s i c a l a s p e c t s of therapy required to function effectively in a variety of hospital a n d c l i n i c a l settings. C o u r s e content will i n c l u d e b a s i c k n o w l e d g e in anatomy a n d physiology related to s p e c i f i c h a n d i c a p s ; a c q u a i n t a n c e with b a s i c terms c o m m o n l y in u s e in psychiatric and m e d i c a l facilities; a n d a review of drugs a n d their effects. M u s i c 365 D e s i g n i n g M u s i c T h e r a p y A c t i v i t i e s (S) (1.5) In d e s i g n i n g music therapy activities, the students will learn to identify the nature of s p e c i f i c groups a n d their i n dividual members, to c h o o s e suitable c h a l l e n g e s , structure and materials, and the degree of therapist intervention, a n d then to observe a n d analyze group r e s p o n s e s , to evaluate both the d e s i g n and execution of their activities, and to identify corrections a n d indications for s u b s e q u e n t activities. O u t d o o r Recreation Programs Outdoor Recreation is playing an increasingly important role in the s o c i a l and e c o n o m i c life of British C o l u m b i a . A n increase in available leisure time and public interest in the preservation of natural areas have i n c r e a s e d the need for qualified, well-trained graduates c a p a b l e of planning and directing recreation programs, facilities and t e a c h i n g outdoor activity skills. A s s o c i a t e In A r t s a n d S c i e n c e Major Program Requirements G e n e r a l E d u c a t i o n Requirements First T e r m C o m n s . 150 Recreation 152 Outdoor Recreation Management Program Recreation 154 The C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m trains P a r a - P r o f e s s i o n a l s to work effectively in a variety of o u t d o o r r e c r e a t i o n e m p l o y m e n t situations. R e s o u r c e and facility management job opportunities exist in Provincial and M u n i c i p a l Park and R e c r e a t i o n a g e n c i e s and in ski areas. Leadership, instructional and programming job opportunities exist in a variety of community, private and government a g e n c i e s . The program will provide the graduate with skills required to plan and operate g o o d outdoor recreation programs and to m a n a g e facilities and recreational land and water resources. S k i l l s in summer, winter, and aquatic w i l d e r n e s s leadership will be developed in the skills development c o u r s e s . E m p h a s i s is placed on e x p e r i e n c e in the field situation. The program c o m m e n c e s with a ten day b a c k p a c k i n g expedition w h i c h serves as a lab for c l a s s r o o m work. Other trips are p l a c e d throughout the program. Recreation 160 E a c h student's particular program concentration will be d e c i d e d in consultation with the program coordinator. Flexibility in the s e c o n d year of the program e n a b l e s students to s p e c i a l i z e in their areas of interest. Students will be required to take first aid as part of their skills development program and will be required to pay an additional levy to cover partial c o s t s of equipment, field trips, and skills development c o u r s e s . In the fieldwork c o u r s e s , student attitude and leadership c a p a c i t y will bp taken into a c c o u n t in the instructor's evaluation profile. S p e c i a l i z e d interest areas in the program include parks and recreation area m a n a g e m e n t , s k i area m a n a g e m e n t , l e a d e r s h i p a n d programming, and environmental education. Students acquire working skills in s p e c i a l i z e d areas during their practicum placements. Recreation 161 R e c r e a t i o n 166 Second Term C m n s . 154 Recreation 151 R e c r e a t i o n 153 Recreation 157 Recreation 159 R e c r e a t i o n 163 Recreation 164 Diploma Credit Hours 54.5 12 Lab Hours 25 66.5 25 Basic Communications .. Introduction to Outdoor Recreation Outdoor Recreation Facilities > P h y s i c a l Fitness in Theory and P r a c t i c e Wilderness Backpacking I Environmental E d u c a t i o n ' C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation Outdoor Recreation Environments Work, L e i s u r e and Society S k i l l s Development Outdoor Recreation Administration W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I . . . Nordic S k i i n g 3 3 3 3 3 6 2 21 2 3 3 2 3 1.5 3 3 3 3 19.5 Third Term B u s . Mgmt. 173 R e c r e a t i o n 180 Recreation 190 Recreation 257 Recreation 250 A p p l i c a n t s for the Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t Program s h o u l d familiarize themselves with the following a d mission requirements. R e c r e a t i o n 254 1. Arrange an interview with the C o o r d i n a t o r of the program. (Interviews are held throughout the year.) 2. In order to be c o n s i d e r e d for the program, applicants must be at least nineteen years of a g e at the date of entry into the program. 3. After the interview, the C o o r d i n a t o r of the Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m will request the following documentation: a) At least two letters of reference. b) H i g h s c h o o l of P o s t - S e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n transcripts where applicable. c) A letter of application, including a resume of past experiences. d) A doctor's certificate of health, including a chest X-ray. Recreation 259 Recreation 263 Organizational C o m m u n i cations (optional) 3 Fitness L e a d e r s h i p (optional) 3 Leisure C o u n s e l l i n g (optional) 3 Introduction to Landscape Design (optional) 3 Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n Ecology 3 Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n Program P l a n n i n g R e s i dential C a m p s M a n a g e m e n t Lab 4.5 S k i l l s Development 1.5 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II (optional) 3 18 5 2 2 3 3 10 Note: Students will enrol in R e c r e a t i o n 250, 254 and 259, plus at least two of the options listed above. A d d i t i o n a l optional c o u r s e s c a n be undertaken with the permission of the Coordinator. Fourth Term R e c r e a t i o n 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum 9 115 Second Wilderness Leadership Program The Wilderness Leadership Program is designed for the individual currently involved in recreation leadership, either as a vocation or as an avocation. The goal of the program is to provide a means by which individuals realize Wilderness Leadership roles with confidence, safety and a sense of responsibility. The courses are activity-oriented, based on the theory that wilderness leadership can best be promoted by experience over time. Each of the three program areas (Nordic, Canoeing and Backpacking) are covered over a two term period. Field trips are scheduled on weekends with classroom lectures on weekday evenings. Students will enrol in one course per term, and must successfully complete each course in order to continue in the program. Students must also obtain a B grade or better in order to progress to the next course. It is necessary the activity skills and leadership qualities be high in outdoor activities where leaders are responsible for people's lives. A student receiving a " C " grade may repeat the course or show proficiency in that activity during the following appropriate term, before continuing in the program. This must be arranged with the consent of the program Coordinator and the Course Instructor. An additional fee is charged for each course to cover field trips and equipment costs. Term Recreation 262 Recreation 263 Wilderness Canoeing II Wilderness First Aid II ... 3 3 Wilderness Backpacking Option Capilano College Certificate Major Program Requirements Wilderness Backpacking _12 12 Option First T e r m Recreation 161 Recreation 163 Second Wilderness Backpacking I . Wilderness First Aid-1 3 3 Wilderness Backpacking II Wilderness First Aid II 3 3 Term Recreation 261 Recreation 263 New P r o g r a m s U n d e r D e v e l o p m e n t In O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n The Outdoor Recreation Department is curently developing skills upgrading programs in the following areas: Fitness Leadership Leisure Counselling Natural Challenge Activities Details on these programs are available from the Outdoor Recreation Department. In addition to the two year certificate program, an expedition course, Recreation 360, will be offered in each of the three program areas once every three years. Prerequisite to this course is completion of the Wilderness Leadership Program or similar experience approved by the Coordinator and a Faculty member. Wilderness Leadership Wilderness Nordic Skiing Option Credit Capilano College Certificate Hours Major Requirements J5 15 Wilderness Nordic Skiing Options First Term Recreation 161 Recreation 163 Recreation 164 Second Wilderness Backpacking I Wilderness First Aid I Wilderness Nordic Skiing I Term Recreation 263 Recreation 264 Wilderness First Aid II Wilderness Nordic Skiing Wilderness Canoeing Option Capilano College Certificate Major Program Requirements .. Wilderness Canoeing Option First T e r m Recreation 161 Wilderness Backpacking I Recreation 162 Wilderness Canoeing I Recreation 163 Wilderness First Aid I . . . . 116 J5 15 O u t d o o r Recreation Courses Instructional F a c u l t y Annett, J . A . , W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Certificate - B a c k p a c k i n g , Bronze M e d a l l i o n (1977), St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e Cert., C . P . R . Certification B a s h a m , D.F., Coordinator, W i l d e r n e s s and Fitness P r o g r a m B e r t a , J.L., Diploma, Outdoor R e c . Mgt. & W i l d e r n e s s Leaders h i p (Capilano C o l l e g e ) , Certificate, B a s i c C a n o e Instructor (Capilano C o l l e g e ) B o y d e , J . E . , B.A. (Simon Fraser) B o y d e , P., Ind. 1st A i d Ticket, C l a s s C ; St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e 1st A i d Instructor Cert. B o w e r i n g , L , B.Ed. (Brit. C o l . ) B r a a k s m a , T., W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Cert., ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) , C a n o e Sport Instructor Cert., C A N S I C h e s t e r , Neil, B.Ed. (Sask.), B.A. (P.E.) (Sask.), M.P.E. (Brit. Col.) C h r i s t i a n s e n , A., Royal Life Instructors Cert., St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e Instructors Cert., C . P . R . Cert.. C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor's Cert., W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Cert. C r e e r , B„ B . E d . (Brit. C o l . ) E w i n g , K . J . , B.A. (Michigan), M . S c . (Michigan) Griffiths, Roger, O . N . C . (England), C A N S I . , A s s o c . Mount. G u i d e Cert. H a t c h a r d , J . , Diploma, Outdoor R e c . Mgt. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) , W i l d e r n e s s Leadership Cert. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) , Outdoor Recreation C a n o e Sport Instructor Cert. C A N S I H o b b s , E., Diploma, O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t (Capilano College), C a n o e Sport Instructor Cert. H o d g i n s , B.W., B . P . E . (Brit. C o l . ) Jarvis, J . , B.A., M.A. R e g . L a n d s A r c h i t e c t J e l e n s k y , M., St. J o h n ' s R e d C r o s s Stevens, D., Dipl. Outdoor R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t , Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Capilano C o l l e g e ) , Outdoor Recreation, C a n o e Sport Instructors Cert., St. J o h n ' s A m bulance Instructors Cert. White, B.P., B.A. (Simon Fraser), M.A. (Simon Fraser), C o o r dinator Wright, R„ Instructor, Photography R e c r e a t i o n 151 p s y c h o l o g i c a l perspectives in work a n d leisure, current trends in leisure, leisure c o u n s e l l i n g , prognostications for the future. R e c r e a t i o n 154 O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n F a c i l i t i e s (F) (3,0,1) The c o u r s e will deal with the structure of delivery systems and the p h y s i c a l facilities w h i c h operate to deal with these delivery systems. Although the c o u r s e will include a general overview in these topics, there will be an e m p h a s i s p l a c e d on outdoor systems a n d facilities. R e c r e a t i o n 157 S k i l l s D e v e l o p m e n t (S) (1.5, 3, .5) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to broaden student's existing proficiencies in outdoor recreation skills, to d e v e l o p leadership capabilities, safety c o n s c i o u s n e s s in w i l d e r n e s s settings, a n d e c o l o g i c a l appreciation of winter w i l d e r n e s s . R e c r e a t i o n 159 O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n A d m i n i s t r a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is open to recreation practitioners in the field. A study of general b u s i n e s s practices in the operation of the various outdoor recreation facilities, s u c h a s r e c o r d k e e p i n g , budgeting, a c c o u n t i n g , p u r c h a s i n g , advertising a n d c o n c e s s i o n agreements, liabilities, laws a n d statutes governing parks and recreation a g e n c i e s . R e c r e a t i o n 160 Physical (3,0,1) Fitness in T h e o r y and Practice (S,SU) A n overview of the constituents of p h y s i c a l fitness in w h i c h the following topics are dealt with. What is p h y s i c a l fitness? What are its p h y s i o l o g i c a l determinants? H o w c a n physical fitness be a c h i e v e d a n d maintained? Weight control, p h y s i o l o g i c a l c h a n g e s resulting from training a n d e x e r c i s e ; tests for p h y s i c a l fitness; d e s i g n i n g fitness programs. O u t d o o r Recreation E n v i r o n m e n t s (8) (3,2,1) A e r i a l photograph interpretation, c a r t o g r a p h i c techniques related to outdoor recreation, introduction to mapping and remote sensing techniques, w e a t h e r a n d climate. R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 152 W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g I ( S U . F ) (3,0,1) Introduction to O u t d o o r R e c r e e t i o n (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the s k i l l s of summer hiking a n d c a m p crafts in wilderness areas. E m p h a s i s wili be p l a c e d o n leadership development in organization, safety a n d group assessment. T o p i c s will i n c l u d e : a c c e s s to w i l d e r n e s s areas, equipment, first a i d a n d survival kits, trip planning a n d organization, navigation, c a m p crafts, hiking on difficult terrain, and wilderness e c o l o g y . A brief historical overview of the development of recreation. Nature and s c o p e of outdoor recreation in relation to modern leisure, nature of supply and d e m a n d , d e m a n d a n a l y s i s as a p l a n n i n g t o o l , c o n c e p t s a n d p h i l o s o p h i e s of parks management, outdoor recreation r e s o u r c e p e r c e p t i o n , p s y c h o l o g i c a l nature of o u t d o o r recreation, experience a n d behaviour, outdoor recreation legislation, carrying c a p a c i t i e s of wildlands, land u s e c o n flict, multiple use p o l i c i e s , inventory t e c h n i q u e s . R e c r e e t i o n 153 W o r k , L e i s u r e a n d S o c i e t y (S) (3,0,1) Overview of the functional roles of work a n d leisure in various cultural contexts. Evolution of leisure behaviour in western society, the protestant work ethic, utilitarianism, lifestyle-based variation in work a n d leisure, modern c o n c e p t s of work a n d leisure, nature of stress, s o c i o l o q i c a l a n d R e c r e a t i o n 162 W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g I ( S U ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the skills, t e c h n i q u e s and k n o w l e d g e of b a s i c paddling in open c a n o e s . Most of the c o u r s e time is spent in c a n o e s in water u p to grade two. Overnight trips(s) are also included.Students will be e x p e c t e d to s w i m in turbulent waters with clothes o n . W h e r e a p p l i c a b l e students will work towards the b a s i c instructor level of C a n o e Sport British C o l u m b i a . C . S . B . C . instructors a n d instructional format will be used throughout the c o u r s e . 117 R e c r e a t i o n 163 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I ( F , S ) (3.0,1) T h i s c o u r s e , incorporating the St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e S t a n dard First A i d , is adapted s p e c i f i c a l l y to problems of first aid in the W i l d e r n e s s setting. Due to this s p e c i a l adaptation, the c o u r s e has been extended from the normally required ten lectures to fourteen lectures i n c l u d i n g c l a s s e s in wilderness areas. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s is given to t o p i c s of hypothermia, frostbite, and emergency e v a c u a t i o n . Students will also be e x p e c t e d to participate in w e e k e n d field e x p e r i e n c e s . R e c r e a t i o n 164 W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g I (S) (3,0,1) T h i s is an introductory c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to give students an initial e x p o s u r e to winter environments on cross-country s k i s and s n o w s h o e s . The c o u r s e i n c l u d e s both a lecture and field trip series with e m p h a s i s on outdoor activity. Lecture topics are on equipment, w a x i n g , clothing, g e o g r a p h i c features, fitn e s s , nutrition and safety. S k i l l levels will reflect C.A.N.S.I. instructional formats. R e c r e a t i o n 166 E n v i r o n m e n t a l E d u c a t i o n (F) (6,4,3) A n introduction to the p h i l o s o p h i e s and c o n c e p t s of e n vironmental education and life-space evaluation. Students are e n c o u r a g e d to develop a questioning attitude in reviewing individual and group r e s p o n s e to contemporary a n d post-contemporary environmental p h e n o m e n a . B a s e l i n e interpretive skills are promoted w h i c h include s u c h features of the British C o l u m b i a l a n d s c a p e as flora and fauna, astronomy, g e o m o r p h o l o g y and urban conditions. Students will gain insight into the use of activity v e h i c l e s s u c h as b i c y c l i n g , c a n o e i n g , hiking, and cross-country s k i i n g . R e c r e a t i o n 167 K a y a k i n g I ( S U . F ) (3,0,1) N o t e : This c o u r s e is open to the public. A n introduction to the skills, t e c h n i q u e s , a n d b a s i c princ i p l e s of equipment and safety used when paddling in k a y a k s on o c e a n s , lakes and rivers. Most of the c o u r s e time is spent in k a y a k s in water up to grade three. Overnight trip(s) are also i n c l u d e d . Students will be e x p e c t e d to s w i m in turbulent waters with clothes o n . C a n o e Sport B . C . instructors and instructional format will be used for the c o u r s e . R e c r e a t i o n 168 A n Introduction to C y c l i n g ( S U ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the l e a d e r s h i p s k i l l s for c y c l i n g tour leaders. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on safety regulations and bike m e c h a n i c s . Other topics will i n c l u d e : riding techniques, c a m p i n g equipment, how to p a c k for a trip, organizational s k i l l s , legal liability, environmental c o n c e r n s , fitness and c y c l i n g routes. (Not offered 1979/80). R e c r e a t i o n 170 W i l d e r n e s s R e c r e a t i o n (F) (3,0,1) N o t e : This c o u r s e is open to the public. Students will be c h a r g e d an activities fee. A n introductory c o u r s e in w i l d e r n e s s recreation, d e s i g n e d as an overview of the c o m p o n e n t s w h i c h make for a safe and comfortable e x p e r i e n c e in a wilderness area at different s e a s o n s of the year for different activities. The c o u r s e 118 d i s c u s s e s the inter-relationship of people's n e e d s and the environment. General topics will include leadership, navigation, general geography, first aid and ethics. Wildern e s s activities will include b a c k p a c k i n g , c a m p i n g , c a n o e i n g and cross-country s k i i n g . P r e v i o u s e x p e r i e n c e in the a c tivities is not n e c e s s a r y . R e c r e a t i o n 171 M o u n t a i n e e r i n g I (SU) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is open to the public. The c o u r s e will cover b a s i c principles of equipment, safety, glacier travel and c l i m b i n g on rock, ice, and snow. A l t h o u g h the c o u r s e is primarily d e s i g n e d for the beginner, it is flexible e n o u g h to cater to people wishing to improve their skills b e y o n d the novice level. L e c t u r e s are in the e v e n i n g , and field e x p e r i e n c e on w e e k e n d s . Note: A n additional fee will be levied to cover field trip expenses. R e c r e a t i o n 180 F i t n e s s L e a d e r s h i p (S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to c o m b i n e t e c h n i c a l and practical information n e c e s s a r y to run a fitness program a n d is d e s i g n e d primarily to train fitness instructors in the M u n i c i p a l recreation a g e n c i e s and in private recreation a g e n c i e s . The a c c e n t will be on practical application of the t e c h n i c a l k n o w l e d g e acquired. R e c r e a t i o n 190 L e i s u r e C o u n s e l l i n g ( F , S ) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will provide training in leisure c o u n s e l l i n g for practitioners in the areas of recreation, c l a s s r o o m t e a c h i n g , s o c i a l and neighbourhood s e r v i c e s , s c h o o l c o u n s e l l i n g and retirement and pre-retirement planning. The e m p h a s i s will be upon the application of C o u n s e l l i n g strategies in the leisure and recreation field. R e c r e a t i o n 250 O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n E c o l o g y (F) (3,2,1) A study of plant and animal e c o l o g y , land-man relationships, conservation theories and e c o l o g i c a l principles as a basis to recreation land management. R e c r e a t i o n 254 Outdoor Recreation P r o g r a m P l a n n i n g (F) (4.5,3,2) This c o u r s e will explore the program planning function in outdoor recreation. T o p i c s will include: the problems of planning programs in existing delivery systems, s e e k i n g ways to solve these present problems, new p h i l o s o p h i e s to consider in programming, and s e e k i n g alternative a n d new methods of program planning in outdoor recreation. Recreation 254 S k i l l s Development R e s i d e n t i a l C a m p M a n a g e m e n t (F) l a b . (1.5,3,.5) Students will be required to attend a residential c a m p exp e r i e n c e . B u d g e t i n g , planning, facility operations and m a i n t e n a n c e of residential c a m p u s and outdoor e d u c a t i o n c e n tres; financing and b o o k k e e p i n g problems; a s s o c i a t i o n s , - r e g u l a t i o n s , legal liability; programming, public relations, crisis management, brochure d e s i g n and marketing approaches. R e c r e a t i o n 255 O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n P r a c t i c u m (3) (9,0,3) The practicum is d e s i g n e d to integrate c l a s s r o o m theory with working experience in the field. Students will arrange with the faculty Supervisor to s p e n d three months in an a c ceptable agency placement a n d will b e responsible to a s p e c i f i c a g e n c y supervisory. Students will b e provided with terms of reference for the practicum e x p e r i e n c e . Student work performance and potential will b e evaluated by the faculty a n d agency supervisor. R e c r e a t i o n 257 An Introduction to T e c h n i q u e (F) (3,2,»/») Landscape Design and History of l a n d s c a p e d e s i g n , modern p h i l o s o p h i e s a n d concepts; ecological, geographical and social considerations, site analysis and p l a n n i n g ; nature of l a n d s c a p i n g materials, plant materials, elements of g o o d d e s i g n ; analysis of d e s i g n ; e c o n o m i c s of l a n d s c a p e architecture. R e c r e a t i o n 259 Lectures and field trips will include a variety of informational seminars a n d teaching e x p e r i e n c e s c o n c e r n e d with c r o s s country s k i i n g . C.A.N.S.I. instructional standards will b e promoted throughout the duration of this c o u r s e . R e c r e a t i o n 271 M o u n t a i n e e r i n g II ( S U ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M o u n t a i n e e r i n g I, Federation of M o u n t a i n C l u b s B a s i c M o u n t a i n e e r i n g c o u r s e , equivalent training a n d e x p e r i e n c e a c c e p t a b l e to instructor. Students s h o u l d expect to take a skills test prior to course c o m m e n c e m e n t . T h e c o u r s e will deal with the principles and t e c h n i q u e s of Mountaineering leadership u p to a n d i n c l u d i n g a n i n termediate level o n both snow a n d i c e , a n d o n rock. N o t e : A n additional fee will be levied to cover field trip e x penses. R e c r e a t i o n 360 Log Book E x p e r i e n c e ( P r a c t i c u m ) ( S , S U ) (3,0,1) Skills D e v e l o p m e n t (F) (1.5, 3,5) Prerequisite: First two years of the program in o n e of the three specialty areas. T o develop s p e c i a l i z e d skills related to the students' e m ployment goals. Students will upgrade skills in wilderness photography, display d e s i g n , brochure d e s i g n , layout, a n d graphic arts. T h i s c o u r s e will be a major expedition held o n c e every three years for e a c h of the three program activity areas. S t u d e n t s will gain e x p e r i e n c e in trip planning, route s e l e c t i o n and navigation in off-trail extended trip situations. R e c r e a t i o n 261 W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g II ( S U ) (3,0,1) The course objective is to further involve students with w i l d e r n e s s b a c k p a c k i n g s k i l l s in a n atmosphere of safety, enjoyment a n d environmental understanding. E m p h a s i s will be directed towards the development of leadership e x perience as it applies to individual and group requirements in wilderness settings. S p e c i a l attention will be f o c u s e d on survival techniques, s o l o e x p e r i e n c e , first a i d , environmental perception study a n d s p e c i a l group study. R e c r e a t i o n 262 W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g II ( S U ) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to further develop paddling skill, personal e x p e r i e n c e , teaching ability a n d leadership quality. Trips will range from day to multi-day events. In addition there will b e a w o r k s h o p series to include c a n o e c o n struction a n d repair, l a n d s c a p e interpretation and first a i d simulation. Where a p p l i c a b l e the c o u r s e format a n d i n structors will be taken from C a n o e Sport British C o l u m b i a . R e c r e e t i o n 263 W i l d e r n e s s Flret A i d II ( F . S ) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Recreation 163 E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the application of first a i d techniques in W i l d e r n e s s settings under conditions of isolation, where m e d i c a l a s s i s t a n c e is distant a n d where there are problems of e v a c u a t i o n . S o m e practical s e s s i o n s will b e deferred to field trips taken in s e c o n d year activity c o u r s e s in all three programs. R e c r e a t i o n 264 W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g II ( S ) (3,0,1) This course is d e s i g n e d to further develop s k i i n g skill, pers o n a l experience, t e a c h i n g ability a n d leadership quality. 119 Retail Fashion Program T h e Retail F a s h i o n program prepares students for direct employment in the field of f a s h i o n . The program relates directly to the existing fashion m e r c h a n d i s i n g situation by presenting detailed b a c k g r o u n d c o u r s e s , pertinent merc h a n d i s i n g techniques, and practical on-the-job training. A l t h o u g h further on-the-job training is a s s u m e d o n c e the student is in the field, the c o u r s e provides in-depth exp e r i e n c e s in all major areas of the fashion s c e n e . M a n y different c o u r s e s are r e c o m m e n d e d within the framework of the program to tailor the learning situation to the students' interests and needs. Students who have had equivalent post-secondary c o u r s e s may m a k e arrangements with an advisor to substitute e l e c tives in lieu of prescribed c o u r s e s . Electives in Art and B u s i n e s s programs are r e c o m m e n d e d . There will be a lab fee c h a r g e d for F a s h i o n 153, 172, 176, 177, 156 a n d 265. T h e optional fourth hour mentioned in the following outline of c o u r s e s indicates a student/instructor contact, other than an office hour, when a student may have c o u r s e enrichment. T h i s may take the form of assignment a s s i s t a n c e , tutorials, field trips, s p e c i a l s p e a k e r s or practical work. B a s i c a l l y , it is time programmed right into the Retail F a s h i o n time-table. G r a d u a t e s of this program will have skills and k n o w l e d g e n e c e s s a r y to enter a career in manufacturing, m e r c h a n d i s i n g or the promotion of fashion. Associate In Arts a n d S c i e n c e Diploma Major P r o g r a m Requirements G e n e r a l E d u c a t i o n Requirements First Term C o m n s . 150 F a s h i o n 150 F a s h i o n 152 Fashion 154 Fashion 158 Fashion 170 Fashion 176 Credit Hours 78 6 84 Basic Communications . . . . Consumerism Fashion Work Experience I P e r s o n a l Development for the F a s h i o n E m p l o y e e . . . . P r i n c i p l e s of C o l o u r and D e s i g n History of Western Fashion Pattern D e s i g n I 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 Second Term C o m n s . 151 Fashion 153 F a s h i o n 172 Fashion 173 F a s h i o n 177 F a s h i o n 160 Fashion 156 Business Mgt. 175 Third Term B u s . Mgt. 165 B u s . Mgt. 173 120 B u s i n e s s Writing Fashion Illustration Fabrics for the Fashion Industry History of Furniture Pattern D e s i g n II Fashion Work E x p e r i e n c e II Fashion Modelling OR Organizational Behaviour Essentials of B o o k keeping I Communications in M a n a g e m e n t 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 -• • 21 3 3 F a s h i o n 257 F a s h i o n 258 F a s h i o n 260 F a s h i o n 266 B u s . Mgt. 271 M e r c h a n d i s e Display Non-Textiles and Accessories Fashion Work E x p e r i e n c e II Fashion M a r k e t i n g Merchandising I 3 3 3 3 3 21 Fourth T e r m F a s h i o n 251 Fashion 259 Fashion 261 F a s h i o n Promotion M e r c h a n d i s i n g II Fashion Work E x p e r i e n c e IV Introduction to Fashion 264 Interior D e s i g n Any 3 of the fol lowing B u s . Mgt. c o u r s e s : B u s . Mgt. 163, B u s . Mgt. 210, B u s . Mgt. 230, B u s . Mgt. 270, B u s Mgt. 273 3 3 3 3 3 3 __3 21 Note: For mature students with relevant fashion work exp e r i e n c e an elective may be substituted for F a s h i o n Work E x perience upon consultation and approval of the Program Coordinator. O p e n c o u r s e s are available to other than full time Retail Fashion students with the C o o r d i n a t o r ' s approval. Retail Fashion Courses F a s h i o n 158 Principles of C o l o u r a n d D e s i g n Instructional F a c u l t y Best, E.R., B . S c . (Man.), M . S . (Man.) C l a r k , H., B.H.E. (Brit. Col.), T.T. Dipl. (Brit. C o l . ) Hall, E., Dipl. A.D. (St. Martins' S c h o o l of Art), Art T e a c h e r s ' Cert. (Goldsmiths C o l l e g e Univ. of London) Keating, T., B . S c . (Nova Scotia) McLafferty, M . Podolak, P. Rodger, E.G., L u c i e Clayton S c h o o l , Dipl. ( L o n g o n , Eng.) S i d d a l l , P., Dipl. Royal C o l l e g e of Art, L o n d o n , E n g . Taylor, M., B . S c . (Alta.) Urbshadt, G . , B . C o m m . (U.B.C.) A n introduction to the c o n c e p t s of c o l o u r a n d d e s i g n as they are used in Fashion Illustration a n d P r o m o t i o n . A p plication of the principles of graphic c o m p o s i t i o n , b a s i c form and s h a p e , c o l o u r theory and visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s impact to fashion related themes a n d subjects, through instruction, field trips, i n d i v i d u a l i d e s i g n a n d analysis. F a s h i o n 160 F a s h i o n Work E x p e r i e n c e II (S) (3,0,1) A structured work e x p e r i e n c e within an approved firm in a b u s i n e s s area related to fashion retailing, s u c h as selling or d e s i g n i n g apparel, fashion promotion, etc. Includes a weekly seminar which incorporates on-the-job k n o w l e d g e with various s p e a k e r s from related fashion retailing areas. I F a s h i o n 150 Consumerism (F) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) (F) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) A n examination of fashion from the viewpoint of the c o n sumer, human behaviour and c o n s u m e r behaviour in relation to clothing are d i s c u s s e d . The work experience c o n t i n u e s through four terms a n d is c o o r d i n a t e d and supervised by a College. F a s h i o n instructor. F a s h i o n 170 History of W e s t e r n F a s h i o n F a s h i o n 152 F a s h i o n Work E x p e r i e n c e I (F) (3,0,1) A structured work experience within an approved firm in a b u s i n e s s area related to fashion retailing, s u c h as selling or d e s i g n i n g apparel, fashion promotion, etc. includes a weekly seminar which incorporates on-the-job k n o w l e d g e with various s p e a k e r s from related fashion retailing areas. The work experience c o n t i n u e s through four terms a n d is coordinated and supervised by a C o l l e g e F a s h i o n instructor. F a s h i o n 153 F a s h i o n Illustration (S) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) S k e t c h i n g garments for the fashion figure; utilization of d e s i g n c o n c e p t s for illustrations w h i c h c o u l d be used in showroom or advertising situations. Shorthand s k e t c h i n g . (F) (3,0,1) (Open) A survey of fashions from the days of A n c i e n t Egypt to the present. Investigation of major cultural forces that influence c h a n g e and analysis of current fashions to d i s c e r n influence of the past cultures. F a s h i o n 172 T e x t i l e s (S) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) A survey of the development and use of fashion fabrics inc l u d i n g fibre identification; grouping of fibre c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s ; methods of fibre construction and finishing. C o n s t a n t relation of these factors to the effect on development of the d e s i g n , serviceability and care of fabrics. Investigation of textile labelling; legislation, promotion s e l l i n g : and the d e v e l o p ment of the C a n a d i a n textile industry. F a a h i o n 154 Personal (F) Development for the F a s h i o n Employee (3,0,1) This c o u r s e deals with the basic grooming procedures, appropriate c o s m e t i c s , figure control (exercise), a professional wardrobe, nutrition, s e l f - a w a r e n e s s a n d inner c o n f i d e n c e . It c o n s i d e r s the service of the public a n d a sensitivity to interpersonal relations. F a s h i o n 155 Basic Clothing (Open) F a s h i o n 173 History of Furniture (Open) (S) (3,0,1) A survey of furniture from the c a v e m a n to the s p a c e age with interrelation to the History of Western F a s h i o n c o u r s e and to the introduction to Interior D e s i g n . F a a h i o n 176 Pattern D e s i g n Construction Methods (F) (3,0,1) I (F) (3,0,1) (Open) A c o u r s e for students with little or no s e w i n g b a c k g r o u n d . It will include pattern layout, m a c h i n e operation, current c o n struction techniques a n d fitting of garments for all ages. B a s i c principles a n d t e c h n i q u e s of garment d e s i g n a n d production; involvement of original d e s i g n , pattern making, and garment construction, development of skill in solving fitting problems. Market survey of design a n d construction standards. • F a s h i o n 156 F a a h i o n M o d e l l i n g (S) (3,0,1) (Open) F a s h i o n 177 Pattern D e s i g n Fundamentals of poise, carriage and sense of style, individual attention to determine student's best personal qualities; makeup, hair styles, apparel s e l e c t i o n . Prerequisite: Retail F a s h i o n 176 or written permission of the Live a n d photographic modelling t e c h n i q u e s before an a u d i e n c e , s u c h as fashion show m o d e l l i n g , professional makeup. II (S) (3,0,1) (Open) Instructor. A continuation of individual d e s i g n i n g and development of garments, c o m p a r i s o n of construction techniques and design in relation to retail value; d i s c u s s i o n of current d e s i g n and designers. 121 F a s h i o n 251 F a s h i o n 261 F a s h i o n Promotion (S) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) F a s h i o n Work E x p e r i e n c e IV (S) (3,0,1) T h e overall study of methods of fashion promotions. The s p e c i f i c study of planning fashion promotions, including theme selection a c c o r d i n g to influencing factors s u c h as a g e - g r o u p a p p e a l , promotional timing, budgets a n d merc h a n d i s e content. F a s h i o n 257 M e r c h a n d i s e D i s p l a y (F) (3,0,1) ( O p e n ) T e c h n i q u e s a n d t h e o r y of m e r c h a n d i s e d i s p l a y ; arrangement a n d display of m e r c h a n d i s e for e d u c a t i o n a l c o m m e r c i a l purpose. F a s h i o n 258 N o n - T e x t i l e s a n d A c c e s s o r i e s (S) (3,0,1) (Open) A study of the importance of a c c e s s o r y items to the total fashion picture, (i.e. jewelry, hats, w i g s , c o s m e t i c s , h a n d bags, gloves), marketing trends a n d merchandising t e c h n i q u e s for these products. F a s h i o n 259 F a s h i o n M e r c h a n d i s i n g I (F) (3,0,1) (Open) A study of the principles of retail buying a n d selling of fashions, study of m e r c h a n d i s i n g functions s u c h as pricing, inventory control, turnover, a n d " o p e n - t o - b u y " . F a s h i o n 260 F a s h i o n Work E x p e r i e n c e III (F) (3,0,1) S a m e as Retail F a s h i o n 152 a n d 160. ft I 122 S a m e as Retail F a s h i o n 152, 160 a n d 260. F a s h i o n 264 Introduction to Interior D e s i g n (S) (3,0,1) (Open) F u n d a m e n t a l s of d e s i g n , study of textiles, colour, wall finishes, window treatments, floor c o v e r i n g s and a c c e s s o r i e s , practice of room-planning through u s e of floor plans and room decorating by c o m b i n i n g furniture fabrics a n d a c c e s s o r i e s . D e s i g n i n g of a " b o u t i q u e " or office to s c a l e with renderings. F a s h i o n 265 French' Draping (Open) and Advanced Design (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Retail F a s h i o n 176, 177 or written permission of the Instructor. A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e in the F r e n c h method of draping fabric onto a form to produce a finished garment. Includes a further examination of the flat pattern method of clothing construction. F a s h i o n 266 F a s h i o n M a r k e t i n g (F) (3,0,1) (Open) A n overview of the total marketing c h a n n e l for textiles a n d apparel products, from product development to retail c o n sumer distribution. t Vocational Capilano College is Programs offering Vocational Programs and P r o g r a m s Offered U p g r a d i n g C o u r s e s u n d e r an a g r e e m e n t with the D e p a r t m e n t Although several additional vocational programs and of E d u c a t i o n . P r o v i n c e of B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a . T h e p u r p o s e of u p g r a d i n g c o u r s e s a r e b e i n g c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e C o l l e g e , in V o c a t i o n a l E d u c a t i o n is t o p r o v i d e c o u r s e s in b u s i n e s s , t h e consultation skilled trades, service o c c u p a t i o n s and adults requiring service s p e c i a l i z e d training commercial Applicants should the Ministry a t h e R e g i s t r a r ' s o f f i c e of t h e C o l l e g e f o r f u r t h e r about new courses and programs offered 2. be: B a s i c Employment Skills Training (B.E.S.T.) (Details p a g e 126) over. 3. C a r e e r A l t e r n a t i v e s P r o g r a m ( C A P . ) 4. B u s i n e s s O f f i c e Accounting A d u l t s w h o h a v e b e e n o u t of t h e p u b l i c s c h o o l s y s t e m f o r m o r e t h a n a y e a r a r e e n c o u r a g e d t o a p p l y f o r t r a i n i n g e v e n if t h e y a r e u n a b l e to m e e t t h e e d u c a t i o n a l requirements o u t l i n e d for a p a r t i c u l a r p r o g r a m or c o u r s e , a s o t h e r f a c t o r s s u c h as w o r k e x p e r i e n c e a n d maturity will be t a k e n into c o n sideration. All students who successfully complete vocational courses a n d w h o d e s i r e to a p p l y c r e d i t for t h e s e c o u r s e s t o w a r d s a C o l l e g e C e r t i f i c a t e o r D i p l o m a s h o u l d c o n t a c t a c o u n s e l l o r at the C o l l e g e . Clerk - 6 Bookkeeping Clerk Training months - 4 months Typist - 4 months Stenographer - 6 months 5. L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r - 8 m o n t h V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m ( D e t a i l s p a g e 95 & 127). 6. M e d i c a l O f f i c e A s s i s t a n t - 8 m o n t h V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m ( D e t a i l s p a g e 94 & 128). 7. B u s i n e s s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n - 10 m o n t h s 8. O t h e r Programs Pre-employment 1979/80, subject -Landscape -Welding ( D e t a i l s p a g e 83). may be to f u n d i n g . T h e s e m i g h t and Garden Worker - 4 offered in include: months Equipment Sales - 4 months U p g r a d i n g - 10 w e e k s -Selling Skills - 2 weeks Services -Video A s s i s t a n c e a n d g u i d a n c e i s p r o v i d e d to t h o s e p e o p l e i n - -Heavy C a r e e r P r o g r a m C o u n s e l l o r , is a v a i l a b l e t o s t u d e n t s w h o m a y about personal difficulties or questions academic and career choices. Equipment Operation - 2 weeks -Homemaker - 5 weeks t e r e s t e d in t h e t y p e s of p r o g r a m s a v a i l a b l e . G a r y S i e g r i s t , t h e to ( D e t a i l s p a g e 126). ( D e t a i l s p a g e 126). -Building Material and concerns information by t h e C o l l e g e . 1. B a s i c T r a i n i n g S k i l l s D e v e l o p m e n t ( B . T . S . D . ) ( D e t a i l s p a g e 124) occupation. relating following as w e l l a s providing (b) p o s s e s s a n i n t e r e s t i n , a n d a p t i t u d e f o r , t h a t p a r f i c u l a r have E d u c a t i o n , the p r o g r a m s w i l l b e o f f e r e d in t h e 1 9 7 9 / 8 0 t e r m s . P l e a s e c o n s u l t Requirements (a) 16 y e a r s of a g e o r Counselling of to to e m p l o y e r s t h r o u g h o u t t h e P r o v i n c e . General Admission with art Equipment Operator - 9 weeks -Industrial R e c o r d K e e p i n g - 4 months 9. P a r t - t i m e Evening Programs -Administrative Assistant (page -Executive Secretary (page For Fees further information Career/Vocational office 126) 126) please at t h e Lynnmour contact the Centre. F e e s for all full-time p r e - e m p l o y m e n t t r a i n i n g c o u r s e s are $15.00 per month. Financial Assistance PRE-EMPLOYMENT UPGRADING SKILLS DEVELOPMENT (B.T.S.D.) (Approximately AND 6 months per level.) T h e B . T . S . D . p r o g r a m p r o v i d e s a n o p p o r t u n i t y for s t u d e n t s FULL-TIME to g a i n t h e e q u i v a l e n c y of g r a d e 6, 8, 10 o r 12 in E n g l i s h , PROGRAMS Prospective BASIC TRAINING students Who have b e e n out of the regular M a t h e m a t i c s a n d t h e S c i e n c e s . C o m p l e t i o n of t h e s c h o o l s y s t e m s o n e y e a r o r m o r e s h o u l d s e e k c o u n s e l at t h e increases nearest C a n a d a Employment Centre, as under certain q u a l i f i e s h i m or h e r for e n t r y into further v o c a t i o n a l ditions training costs provided to and sponsored income students. replacement P e r s o n s not con- may be eligible for the student's employment program opportunities and training programs. In s o m e c a s e s , C a n a d a M a n p o w e r o f f e r s f i n a n c i a l s u p p o r t s p o n s o r s h i p by C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t s h o u l d s e e the C a r e e r for f u l l t i m e s t u d e n t s . B e f o r e e n t e r i n g t h e p r o g r a m , potential P r o g r a m C o u n s e l l o r to d e t e r m i n e o t h e r s o u r c e s of students are a d v i s e d to c o n t a c t to whether they financial assistance. Under certain applicable conditions are e l i g i b l e for their local office verify support. financial assistance I n s t r u c t i o n is to a l a r g e d e g r e e i n d i v i d u a l i z e d . D e p e n d i n g m a y b e o b t a i n e d f r o m a v a r i e t y of a g e n c i e s s u c h a s W o r k e r s o n t h e i n d i v i d u a l ' s n e e d s , i n s t r u c t i o n m a y b e t a k e n in a l l o r Compensation, o n l y s o m e of t h e s u b j e c t s o f f e r e d . In a d d i t i o n to t h e Social Welfare, Indian Affairs, and others. E n q u i r i e s s h o u l d b e a d d r e s s e d to t h e a g e n c i e s c o n c e r n e d . Under certain be conditions benefits may Canada M a n p o w e r training C e n t r e s for full Manpower paid to Unemployment students not eligible allowances. Consult Insurance provided to b u s i n e s s h o u r s or w h o receive Manpower information. sponsored students for students who are work shifts. employed regular T h e a v e r a g e t i m e r e q u i r e d f o r c o m p l e t i o n of a n y o n e l e v e l who are enrolled in w o r k in a s s h o r t a t i m e a s p o s s i b l e . D u r i n g t h e f i r s t m o n t h , the t h e i r w a g e - r e p l a c e m e n t a l l o w a n c e f o r u p t o f o u r d a y s d u e to perience a r e c o n s i d e r e d in d e t e r m i n i n g c l o s u r e of t h e levels dppropriate. 124 during is s i x m o n t h s , b u t s t u d e n t s a r e e n c o u r a g e d to c o m p l e t e t h e i r p r o g r a m s s p a n n i n g the C h r i s t m a s - N e w Y e a r p e r i o d m a y l o s e institution. regular full time day p r o g r a m , e v e n i n g a n d part-time day c o u r s e s are student's interests, g o a l s and previous e d u c a t i o n a l is which of t h e exfour The program c o n s i s t s of the following four M a t h e m a t i c s , S c i e n c e and E n g l i s h : B.T.S.D. Level 1 - equivalent to G r a d e 6 B.T.S.D. Level 2 - equivalent to G r a d e 8 B.T.S.D. Level 3 - equivalent to G r a d e 10 B.T.S.D. Level 4 - equivalent to G r a d e 12 levels in C o u r s e Content B.T.S.D. Levels 1, 2 and 3 - to G r a d e 10 equivalency. English (Communications) This c o u r s e develops the student's skills in the use of the E n g l i s h language and e n c o u r a g e s a questioning and analytical attitude towards the content of all forms of c o m munication. Mathematics The c o u r s e develops proficiency in arithmetic and provides a review of the decimal and metric systems, a basic understanding of informal geometry, and an introduction to algebra. The acquisition of skills required of a wise c o n s u m e r is e n c o u r a g e d . Science This course will develop the student's understanding of scientific c o n c e p t s and procedures, and the practical applications of chemistry and p h y s i c s . Biology Biology 2 and 3 is an introduction to the cell and unicelled organisms, followed by a c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of human biology. This c o u r s e e m p h a s i z e s the importance of g o o d health, nutrition and life style. B.T.S.D. Level 4 - G r a d e 12 e q u i v a l e n c y English (Communications) Level 4 explores the field of c o m m u n i c a t i o n s from reading and interpretation of works of fiction and non-fiction, through practical work in the area of b u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , to the study of personal and public c o m m u n i c a t i o n p r o c e s s e s . Mathematics Level 4 provides an opportunity for mastery of practical mathematics at a level equivalent to senior s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l math. The c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of three s e c t i o n s : the first section is a review of basic arithmetic and algebra, the student then has a c h o i c e of b u s i n e s s math for those pursuing a career in b u s i n e s s or c o m m e r c e or t e c h n i c a l math for those interested in trades or technology. Science This c o u r s e offers the student a wide c h o i c e of topics in chemistry or physics at the senior s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l level. T h e student is thus able to select a c o u r s e w h i c h e m p h a s i z e s chemistry or physics, or c o m b i n e s both in a way that suits the educational or vocational g o a l s of the student. Biology This c o u r s e is o r g a n i z e d to give the student a thorough understanding of the cell, the b a s i c unit of life. The student then p r o c e e d s to the study of plant or animal systems. The topics studied in level 4 are dependent upon the individual student's requirements for entry into vocational training. Instructional Faculty A t h a i d e , D., B . S c . (McGill), M . S c . (Brit. C o l ) , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Cert. (Brit. Col.), B a n k s , J.L., B . S c . (S.F.U.), Bannister, J . , B A . (Brit. Col.), B.S.W. (Brit. Col.), Dip. of E d . (Oxford), M . E d . (Toronto), B r o w n , Shirley, St. J o h n ' s First A i d Certificate, C a i r n s , M., B . S c . (Calgary), Prof. Art (Alta.), C h a m b e r l a i n , R„ Standard Cert. (B.C.), Duvall, J . E . , B.A. ( U . B . C ) , D i p . E d . (Sask.) Futterman, E. Hill, B. H i n d , J . , B.A. (Hons.) (S.F.U.), M.A. ( U . B . C ) , H o d g s o n , P. Irvine, R.F., T e a c h i n g Training Cert. (Sask.), M a c S t o d d a r t , K. P a s s , J . , B.A. (B.C.), T e a c h i n g Cert. (B.C.) R a m s a y , Frank, B . S c . (McGill), Rawsthorne, M., B . H . E c . (U.B.C.) Rose, J . Southerst, J . , Prof. Cert. (B.C.) B.A., B . E d . ( U . B . C ) , T h o m l i n s o n , A . G . , B.A. (B.C.), M . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Cert. (B.C.), Van Eijk, J a n Warsh, Michael W i l s o n , R. Y o u n g , D.E., B.A. (S.F.U. Dipt.T.N. (London) S . R . N . (London), S . C . M . (Scotland), BASIC EMPLOYMENT SKILLS TRAINING Vocational - 8 weeks This program is d e s i g n e d to help people w h o have difficulty getting and k e e p i n g a job. First, students a s s e s s themselves: their skills and interests as well as any jobs they've had in the past. Then students have the opportunity to have two work w e e k s in jobs they think they w o u l d like. At the same time students learn about job requirements, training programs and community r e s o u r c e s . They also learn about how to apply for a job. At the e n d of 8 w e e k s most students have a better idea about what job or what training they are best suited for. Outline of the B.E.S.T. P r o g r a m : Week 1 a n d 2 - Individual a s s e s s m e n t Arrange work week placement Week 3 - Work week W e e k 4 and 5 - Evaluate work week a n d investigate other options Week 6 - Work week W e e k 7 a n d 8 - Evaluate work w e e k s a n d other projects M a k e plans for the future Information meetings are held before e a c h program. New programs begin in September, November, January and March. C a n a d a Employment Centre s p o n s o r s h i p is available for students. Administrative Assistant This program w o u l d be offered in the evening for people w o r k i n g in offices in either the public or private sectors. The e m p h a s i s will be on providing a general a w a r e n e s s of managerial c o n c e r n s a n d skills. Prerequisites: 3 - 5 years relevant work e x p e r i e n c e , a s s e s s e d by the co-ordinator. Total 30 credits of which approximately 1/3 will be electives selected in consultation with the department. Executive Secretary This evening program is d e s i g n e d a s an " u p g r a d i n g " program for people w h o are currently w o r k i n g as clerk typists, b o o k k e e p e r s or general secretaries. Prerequisites: Typing " 60 wpm Shorthand 80 wpm Basic Bookkeeping At least 2 years general office e x p e r i e n c e or at discretion of the co-ordinator. Total 18 credits of w h i c h approximately 1/3 will be e l e c tives s e l e c t e d in consultation with the department. B U S I N E S S O F F I C E TRAINING V o c a t i o n a l • C o n t i n u o u s Intake The B u s i n e s s Office Training Program offers c o m prehensive skill training with a Clerk-Typist, Stenographer, B o o k k e e p e r / A c c o u n t i n g C l e r k option. (C.A.P.) S u b j e c t s taken in e a c h program: Calculators Business Arithmetic X X X X X X X X X Bookkeeper X X X X X X X X .X. X X Accounting X X X - X X X X X Accounting X X X X X Shorthand X X Bookkeeping X Stenographer Office Procedures Clerk Typist Filing Information meetings are held in M a y and August for the S e p t e m b e r intake and in N o v e m b e r a n d D e c e m b e r for the lanuary intake. The B u s i n e s s Office Training Program has a monthly intake of students. P r o s p e c t i v e students s h o u l d contact the B u s i n e s s Training and C a r e e r Development Department for more information and to p l a c e their names on the waiting list. Dicta-Typing Content of C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m : 1. C a r e e r Development S e m i n a r - i n c r e a s e d c o n f i d e n c e a n d self a w a r e n e s s ; job and training information, resume and interview techniques. 2. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s - development of skills in oral and written E n g l i s h . 3. Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e - c l a s s e s c a n c e l l e d a n d students work at a job for one week. 4. Elective - students may c h o o s e a c o u r s e in any subject area that interests them. The Clerk Typist, B o o k k e e p e r / A c c o u n t i n g and S t e n o g r a p h e r options e a c h take an additional five months. Business English The C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m provides an opportunity for women to a s s e s s their current life styles a n d set g o a l s based on their individual skills and interests. Participants will get information about trainirjg p r o g r a m s ; employment o p tions; community resources a n d other a g e n c i e s w h i c h may assist them in m a k i n g v o c a t i o n a l d e c i s i o n s . Students do a c o m m o n month of training in T y p i n g , R e c o r d K e e p i n g , B u s i n e s s E n g l i s h , B u s i n e s s Arithmetic, and then c h o o s e their program option. Career Development V o c a t i o n a l - 4 months - Part-time Typing PROGRAM Record Keeping CAREER ALTERNATIVES X X S o m e c o u r s e s in the B u s i n e s s Office Training Program are equivalent to career office training c o u r s e s . P l e a s e d i s c u s s your program with your coordinator if you wish to obtain c o l l e g e credit. 126 LEGAL STENOGRAPHER S e c o n d T e r m (4 m o n t h s ) Vocational - 8 Months The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal stenographers. Employment opportunities are plentiful s i n c e e x p e r i e n c e d office assistance is not always readily available and busy lawyers do not have the time to train personnel themselves. The 8-month Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r program at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e covers three main c a t e g o r i e s of information: c o u r s e s w h i c h provide a fundamental understanding of the legal system in B . C . ; shorthand and typing; and legal office procedures. Students s h o u l d c o n t a c t the c o l l e g e in early spring for September intake. C a p i l a n o Collage Certificete Firat T e r m (4 monthe) 39.0 credit hours (Typing and Shorthand c o u r s e s will be a s s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g to student's present level) Credit Hours (Typing and Shorthand c o u r s e s will be a s s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g to students' present level) 6 Office Training 181 L e g a l M a c h i n e Transcription 1.5 Office Training 174 Shorthand S p e e d Development 3 Office Training 301 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e 1 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 151Business Writing 3 L e g a l Studies 155 B a s i c C o n v e y a n c e & M o r t g a g e P r o c e d u r e s . . . 1.5 L e g a l Studies 156 B a s i c Corporate P r o c e d u r e s II 1.5 L e g a l S t u d i e s 158 B a s i c Litigation P r o c e d u r e s II 1.5 L e g a l Studies 177 L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II 3 22.0 Lab Hours Additional typing credits will be a s s i g n e d . 7.5 For c o u r s e description refer to pages 95 and 98. Office Training 180 Legal Machine •Transcription 1.5 Office Training 300 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e 1 Basic Communications Communications 3 150 L e g a l Studies 152 B a s i c Litigation Procedures I 1.5 L e g a l Studies 153 B a s i c Corporate Procedures I 1.5 L e g a l S t u d i e s 154 L a n d Registry S y s t e m . . . 1.5 1.5 L e g a l Studies 157 Wills and Probate L e g a l S t u d i e s 176 L e g a l Office Procedures I • 3 22.0 MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT Health 158 Vocational - 8 months Health 160 G r a d u a t e s from the M e d i c a l Office Assistant P r o g r a m have a variety of employment options s u c h as: M e d i c a l R e c o r d s C l e r k , W a r d C l e r k , M e d i c a l Assistant, M e d i c a l Stenographer, Receptionist, Admitting C l e r k , Laboratory Assistant. A l l applicants will have the opportunity to meet with the Program Coordinator prior to registration to a s s e s s whether or not they have personal qualities and c l e r i c a l skills n e c e s s a r y to be a s u c c e s s f u l M e d i c a l Office Assistant. A p plicants to this program must have typing speed of 40 w.p.m. Students should contact the C o l l e g e in early spring for S e p tember intake. Capilano Collage Certificate 42.5 credit hours First T e r m Communications Medical 157 Communications Office Training 162 Typing II Office Training M a c h i n e Transcription 180/181 (Medical) Credit Lab Hours Hours 3 2 7.5 4.5 Health 162 Health 164 M e d i c a l Office Procedures Introduction to Health C a r e Anatomy and Physiology M e d i c a l Terminology 3.0 3.0 ... 3.0 3,0 23.5 Second 6.5 Term Office Training M a c h i n e Transcription 180/181 (Medical) Office Training 166 Typing S p e e d 3.0 Development Office Training 252 Interpersonal S k i l l s and O r g a n i z a t i o n a l P s y c h o l o g y 3.0 Office Training 301 Directed Work Experience 1.0 Health 159 M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II 3.0 Health 161 Introduction to Health C a r e II 3.0 Health 163 A n a t o m y and P h y s i o l o g y II 3.0 6 2 2 2 S "j o o J o o > >•>, ^ co c — ® o u. ••- c c ~— c < c — c ~< < co o CM O CM o CM •. >. >. O) o o >. UI o o a o >. o o < c c C C CO CO 2• oCO os ~ r o ro m CD CM o *~ CM O >. >, co u ai a> CO E >> Q- ii I- k_ O o oo 2 o o CL a o o SZ sz SZ c •* <0 CO CD £ O) >- CD Q) c co > ^ ^ CO c << < Ol a> 0 o o o CL a O o St sz sz c c < < 05 l OCMOCMOOCMOO 0 > - 0 > - 0 0 > - 0 0 to *- iff 5! sz}L:sz}-szsz-:szsz cz tz ^ , « ~ t J » << 0 << c < c to UI -I o J CM O c o CD C CO CD = TJ _ Q . CO 10 CO c o >. fs oi O o z o ^ 2 a. £ < c O < CO •? c CM cn o o CL O UI UI o o o o a a 2 2 2 22 o o o a CL a o o o < << s oI : ai c o e oi aw I 3— o. co ra >- Q.CO C g o co CD O ~ CO - S CO .ai 8 *- is 5 ° e $ o i oQ »§ g O S 2 co co o .S3 | ° ~ 2 co * gi .2 • t o o : i | •t: -co « E w " 5-5 5 " 3 -. 2P .w aP a CD CD ^ ^_ ,<0 3 T, ° o 5 c r S E o co 'I 5 £ a «> I c E O O) " o r e O 0 O O CM CM CM >,>,>. 01 Ol Ui sz sz << CD O C CJ C O C CD _ O c o ° CD > CO c — CD C c CD 3 T J ^ CO 01 — ° 22 S8 >,o o m O ,—, CO ^ ^ 8 « < ? sz . . . co co 2 < < < < < C/3 CO C/i CO UsIs a o 2 CO CD * " E"g CO CD l l 00 co c co Cco — a •O co . co_.<2 o sz CO 0>T3 T J - E . ~s CD C ** £ '— CO TJ _ a -o c Oi c i: 3 •c c oic |JB-O CO) o © CO = OS •a ^ c (9 CO 00 c0 UI CD _i o sr 0 O ~ M CM TJ _| CM CMC y- T- Z3 O *" o >. >. >> >,co oi oi 01 O l „ O 22 O O « Z o o ° 9 m < a a 3 o oo o E a £ £i i i UI M l 01 o 3 •o £ fcs- go J CD ==. S O * c 01 co to ^ | to > CO i ^ < c c O <<<< 08 i, ^_ 5 CM "O t- 3 >. CO c?<» II II < CO O CM TJ- Ol CM O O O rt T- CM CM CM CM >>>->.>,>. co oi oi oi oi 2 2 2 22 o ooo o a a o. a a o ooo o £ £££ £ c c cc c < <<<< <0 2 Q) 3 w co t! to o <° -I Q) CD X °1 1 S Q. o O «0 CO o o 0) COl u c "5 "O C ° i i *.0 CD O -i; ^ 5 5" 'i i c 8c c to c Q. s § co I § > co o CO CD o . 0J ^s« o c CO Q. C w ~ C .c 1 >. o . o •§ 2 u_ to CL o I 5 c CD •o CO 8 | ' ^. 5 » U 9 _— i» COOc ro 3^ Sit 5" 2^IE« 9 o o cw Oi M -oi =:* £§ ** o? I a is • a C | c l oi a o to ~-QQ 5 i c If c CO to01 Q. to ^ CE i o o '0/00 o O TJ • cz cz£ CM g£ a - _ i tog; O C 0 UI S < < 1* a o a o a a o a o . o ^ . o „ o o ^ . o o O CD CD W z < c >• "O > . > . " • = 1 o < O o i c o i c o i o i c oioi ai o co l = o < CL £ °C/)CD . t/i tf) TJ •>- E 73 o sz • ic5-eiroo^c5-c--c;-ci ^ C D ^ C O O * ^ C D ^ ^ ^ >>CM ^ > . Z ^ Z ^ Z ^ >.T3 2 i oc O SZ sz .5.2 § J »2 25= tt>u.O j CO Ui CO CL Ol scei III > i Po Po Po P o will nr. OCDOCDOCDOCD CL CL— CL — Q. — r- O O t O £ O £CM£CM£CM£CM -I CM CM ® IfIflfIf UI T3 TJ CM 73 £ I S I 8 • 1°* u > (0 o o a o as. • o o o o a o 3 < << O . «o a - ® co 2 < E UI Ol 6 2 2 > £ £ o c CM >s 3 oi ui w -cs o 8 T~ T~ w c oi c CO s ^ 8 5 3 P , *R 3 Oi O t § P- P O cn w 01 .2 E cl 11 8 O W^C ° 0 C§ 4 ? CM II o g o 8 T3 » >. £ o> U. CO CO 129 l a i ic i 0olct"0 5 "S o co « 3 u > "S § 85 '-I tj co S -E -I co IU ~ < -" I •s CM CO < CM CO co C co CO CO t3e r CC D> co X - • • t o -Si 8 si* m Ill (j co c !! C M 8M II0C 0C M 81 •*" -t co co r- co ? &2 , co % << CD CD CO f i l l m2 £ 8 > 3 CO 9 £ I: o co o-2 CO k. S CO - S II » CO © J • i £ gcrj 8 I•cIoc 1 5 *Seo co -1« _ CDCO <. I'll ?!! . c 6 cx CO E « E >. o tr co = •~ 5 co co i Q. a c, Q. CD CO W CO Q fol C O S CO 5) s CO o M | - co 5 £ CO - *f 1 -s 0 CO • . •»„O 0C M -C CO 5 ii 2 a CO ^* ° e 1 CD C D co 1 1 i f to v • s o. 2jc?^ a g i «j a w "of t co| i? C Ocwo -co *- o * o o 8 £ * | \i «CD _ "S c • fi5 £ co coC O I ©I i CD "O -Q I <0~ S o l i 8l * Sols • c r § a £ 3 CD S o *° « ci w « aas w « o o « J; « w E . 13 wOi03 CO CO -J co -Q O iri 2 CD O £ £ 2 co §-°5 I ; « 6 .o 5 co > a. O) CO EoaE O C O c * o c cx S — t T- T^ E s CM 2 *D > S <£ 00 CM .3" is." -r £ c ir I I I ? • o » *c 1 s c O C O « s * a . a s CM CM O ** - . . » * c o o>* oo co co c C ~ 05 O O CO "O ^ — t C9O >o" co" B i l l * §11 c « ° v. Q C "1 CO *- C ® •= CD S M CM . *f CO -Q I, •tr g Z • r*^ *") CO CO CO > . JS _ "O ^5 E ^ c-• s | < o CM" s eg"c o" co' •S co - »• -J o cr> co coCO If) C iOcowo• S o o a »e i i= i ^ u. 5 | $ I O 2 • < CM C C MC C M CMq> r r r i- r — O D v » • K CD i O Ul , UJ N SKIS < c t: o<< H s t: < < (0 "O cocococooocortcooocococo ~ ~" ~~ ~" ^ ™C Q« a — — — — — -~ £ oo'oooooooo'oo'oo -I TJ B S B '6 '6 5 T3 ^ 13 TJ T3 T3 a S'fe'rrtrrrrrrrcrcr ui2S<<<<<<<<<<<<<< C OC O_ ^Xicocococococococococococococo S£2 CO CO CO T3T3T3 325 — o i : co ^ o co Q CO CO CO CO CO CO CO TJTJTJTJ^TJTJ ~B333B33 wwwSGcocowcocoww t t t c t t: r r c t: < < <0 o <<<<<<< CO CO 1CO I CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 3 3 3 3 33333 3 CO CO rCO r CO CO CO CO CO CO CO > > > < < >>>>>>> « < < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > Ul o _l o u Z >> > ggg.5> £ £2 ui £ • _i — — < O r> O) m m CD '—' '—' d) ' ' C D "'' '""' * v2m^^2Z-2Z.Z-^-Z- -i> 5 'T O CD CD III O CD CD 6 E E E > E o o 3 OO " " C O O O S S C M O O O O C-i^T-cocoi-lcMiicMCMCMCM 0)0)0)010)0)0)0)0)0)0101 2 .2 2 2 2 .2 .2 .2 .2 2 .2 .2 mmmmmmmtDincocQiri ^- S C3 O O C_J M CJ — ( i— (1 — (S I—\ IT £ £ IT IT 17 IT « < > / w«G O « tuo E EEEEI E CD CD CD CD CD CD CD SZ SZ SZ SZ sz sz sz O O OO O O O Ul o III _l T3 -J c co o Tj-cooo^cocn O C M CO * LO o o o O o - r - p o o o JJT-T-T-CMCMCMCM * ~ 1— T— T— T— CM c c a CD CD Ul -I E E D CO -I C O) O Ol CO CO O _ Z III > 5' co _ _ >. T- Z- ^ C M CO mo "> o o 2 oi CO O ^ r- C M C M r-gC S MC ££ STCO CO_ SC > C M MM C M C MO ^ O | o 5 >. >. CO c o O) O) — f c ? Sro-2 5 o o o CO o I ul o o » 2 2 § i CO DO CJ LU CD o in 8 C D O o C V C D .C) «0:j .2? £ co -J Q. III u ai E E E E a) CD a> 0) x: SZ sz sz O o O O LO T- T- CO I- Ul O T" O O TC M C M CM O ^ D TJ TJ III C TJ c c %>•>%>*>,>>,>>>.>.>,>,>. ro co co T3 Z co CO CO c CTOICOOIOIOOIOIOIOIOIOIOI CO CO CO D CD W i C C C T ? < zs CO CO 2 oca 0. 2 2 2 2 2 2 ° 2 2 2 2 2 2 o o o o o o o 2 ° ° ° <_ 0 o o m o CM 95 o T" CM cv CM f> CO CO CO CD CD CD 6 E E E ED E E o o D OO O o o o o .2 .2 .2 I» CD CO N N C O CO 5 & CO CO co co < > ! a r- CO Z- Z- C IZ-- ml J D 2 £ £ £ £ £ £ £ C •Jtwwwwwoito = EEEEI E E ILcDCDCDCDCDCDCD . > . > s > . > . > . > . C D >.>->.>,>.>>>%>.o • O l O l O l O l O l O l O l T i 0)0)0)0)01010101 — ^ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 $ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ul o 2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 (OCQCDCQCQCOrjDCO CQCDCDCQCOCDCQCDCD m •o c C 3 O ul < £j CM CO CO > CD CD CD CD „ ^ „ * U ) r C , r G S S ? ° S C M 8 S S N CD CO CD T3 C D C S *• I CD LO g cocococococococncoco ^8 E I EEEEEEEE E . CM CD CD CD CD E CDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCD LO C O E EEE 3 SZSZSZSZSZSZSZSZSZSZ o LO C E E E E »C M ~ c • O o ooo .O O O O O O O O O O LO o ooo w •vt O £ C D LO CD — f o »2 S LO LO LO C M C M CM E 2 CO o C D -Q c C C C Ul cCD U J in' CD CD CD ** (3 c o C D E E E O E "O CJ Ul c -1 CD CD CD E D c Q -1 CO Ul C D O) O) O) Ol C O) CO CO CO -1 o ^ CO ^ . o i - o T- «* LO o C D c c c _l O O O T - T - O O O O T T- r~ C M C M C M C M CM CO CO To p 5co ™ CO CO CO o I" 5 5 5 •o E E z £ £ £ £ £ £ £ £ £ £ Era io Z co- c CO c CO CO CO CD CD r^ CO CO CO CO CO < X >c U_ C D C D C D 5) co to to M ~ n n % o) . n O u t , CD j i J c c c L U LU CO EI E E ° a. E E I E I = C CM cCO 2 < (D(Dlll(DlDO)i])ID(D(D ?- S J : g So a i- 2 RO c? ° c5 •~ p o 45 CD o 2- C D S t < CD <00i; o -a CO f i n O r O ^ K ) CO CO CO CO CO T-" „ „ _ c C D 3 » « » B •£ J? 0101010)0)0101 O O I O I O I O I O I O I O I O ) 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 ° 2 22 2 2 22 CO CD "co • 2 2 2 2 2 2 .2 -2.2 .2 .2 2 2 2 2 2 CO CD CD CD in CD CD CD C O CO CD CD CD CO CO CD 5 1 UC OC OC DC OC O < 3 ^ r r r r r r r r r r O O O O O O O O O O w co Q. E CD LU — i= 131 -Oi -Si -et is E (- J) £ »io I 5 S--EE 2§8 5 CO § i i i s i O to E E o o > o o • o o 3 LU UJ o o o o o 1 1 1 1 1 o o o c LU LU LU o UJ LU o HI CO CO 0 ) CO UI co co co co TJ c .2S!GSS!S5S o £ E E-5'E I E I o o o o o o o CD r t t < < — < — < CD O C D C D c > c > c • >> >•,-. > • „ > 5 8 >- >- O >- o >_ o oo op o > CD Q.CD o_ 0 6 3 6 CO CO v i- ocMcocMrfcocMcom(DO Q » CO i e J << S3 i O)C})O)O)O)O)O)O)C0O)OlO)O)C3)O)CJ)O)CJ)CJl Ol < U LULULULULULULULULULULULULULULULULULULU LU £ £ £ £ j C £ £ £ £ r £ r £ r r r 1st • q c c c c c c c c c c c c c e c c c c c 5?d o o T- OO r- CM I ' - ' - ' - ' - ' - ' - ' - ' - C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M C M CM £ CO CO 10 o CJ O O o> r SU % TJ TJ c c TJ TJ C C i o o o o o o T - o ) O o o o o O i - T - ^ ? : c n £ x 1 1 > E 2 9 1 o o UJ o LU o o LUo LUo LUo UJ O LU TJ TJ TJ c c c 0 0 c 3 X O c co CO E *- > co m o o CM CM CO o o c c c r c c c c O O O C O O O O 0 , 0 0 1 0 ) 0 1 0 ) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ) 0 ) 0 1 o UI -I -I co •*** C C C C C C C C C C LU LU LU LU L U L U _ l O L U L U L U L U L U L U L U U J L U L U 0 O O O c O O O O > > > > > I I .c.c.c:.c.£:.c:.r:.c.c:.c: cotototocototocototo 6 CO Ol O) > O) C C c c -O CM h- co , 0 0 0 0 0 ui § CD CD CD CD CD 8 1 co^55?coiJ®iJS® > • 3 O o III UI _i < : CM CM o - ~ CO O CD CO — CD CD > > _>> CD CD u CD CD 0) c c LL LL c LL | * CD $I z UI _ _^ co ^-C-C;-C!-C!-C!-C!-C!-CS e 2t0COt0tOCOtQC0tOC0 O o o o o o o o o o !• E E E E E E I E I , ; o o o o o o o o o W c c c c c c c c c m O O O O O O O O O . o o o o o o o o o 3LULUUJLUUJUJLULUUJ 8 O ~ OOOOOOOOO • 5 0 0 E E E 0 0 < o o 0 0 c c 0 0 0 0 Z UI -I < -c; 0 1 ^ ^ co •- co co > o f CD > - sz xz xz 6 cd aS S E to " J 2 «o *" O) o o o ui n J , - CM CM CM 10 r < J O TJ TJ TJ CO O o >. c c c c o o c M ^ c o c M n i n o i CO CO CO xz 0 « c 0 0 2 7JJ 8 OIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOI UJ UJUJLULULULULULUUJLU c'~ CO O COCOCOCOCOCOCOCO UI -I < > Oi-OCMO'-tOQ 5 o c o c o t o t o t o t o c o c o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ui. „• 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . CVJ CO CO xz to CO 0 " l O O O O O O O O WLULULUUJLULULULU £ £ . . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 ? 2 * £ £ £ £ £ £ £ £ £ CNI CM VVT-t-T-T-T-t-CMCM O z E E E 0 0 E E E c c 0 0 0 0 c c cz 0 0 0 0 c 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (JLULULULULULULULU 132 (0 t o t o 8 OJ £ £ £ £ £ £ . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 2 2 2 2 2 £ 4 £ 0 £ OT £ 2 OT 3B2222<< £ 1 . 0 0)0)C3)0)0)0)0)010)0)0)010)0)010)CJ)CJ)C))CJ)0)0) c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c LULULULULULULULULULULUUJLULULULUUJLULUUJLULU •c .to 2 2 2 2 2 t < r 2 fo co i i i i i i CM (0 r < r < r < < r < . 2 . 2 > > Ol c LU ui -1 O T - O I - Q T - Q ^ O ,,OOCMCMCOCOpp to 10 n UI Ui 0 CO T- CM CM CM O) c LU O) c LU £2. £2-52-£2 S2. ^, ^ ^ ^ ^ o So, a. ai co CD ai < c C C c O LL LL LL LL .^S°?22£2£2S£2°CMCMCMCMS2SS£2°5 ! 3 c c c c c c - c c t— S2.S2.J2o ^ CO xz to 81 to 'o S r< t to>. 2 • to CO to TJ C co co t, 5 CO T~ 1— S[ to CO CO U< I < - << «!???? 6 ki 1 is i in OUJLUUJLUUJLULULUUJ CM 0 O) co Q» 0 1 o i 0 1 0 1 O) Ol t o c ? c c c c c c c r y j O LU LU UJ LU LU LU UJ < 8-2. > co _ 5 •« to 2? £ O 1. T— CO -— .—• o o EE 5 3 0 UI 5 Ui _ TJ C CM E p o o UI a ui 0 ! - 0 * - 0 T - 0 > - o o rf m co 0 0 O J- o o o o o z O T- r~ T- T- T- Or-c-wco^iotDpjtomcooT0)CJ)OOOOOOOt-T-i-T-0)0) T-r-CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCM szxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxz .2 0)0)0)0)0)0 c c cz c a cz LU LU LU LU LU «J . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 2 2 2 "J 1 0 0 1 co c o 0)0)oJo)o)0)a)0)0)o)0)0)o)0)0) c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c LULULULULULULULULULUUJLULULULU P E 0) X U) CM CM CM CM f O t O f O C O C O C O C O C O rc-crtrcct: <<<<<<<< 0)0)0)00)0)0)0) c c c c c c c c CD CP > > > S 2 S E < n > 5 o u > O S § o § co UJ T- T- T- CM CM sz sz sz (J• s: <>- sz o o o o C cr c c c c 9J* © M © m CD ID tCD C iO l l C > > > to to CD CD CD CD Q) tr tr tr £ S . , | e co co co _ co co 2O OO O CM O |« J= O ^ >- CM co TCM O 111 CM T- CM • sz sz sz sz sz sz SZ U o o o o o o O O •Q -2 • c c c c c c c c ID CD CD CD CD CD CDCD CD 3 LL LL LL LL LL LL < 1! if 5 Ul OCO |||0 X! XJ XJ X! XJ X) O c tz tz c tz c c O co CO CO CO CO CO CO CO O CD CM O O O OS O CO O CD O) r- r- T-T-T-T-CMCMCMCM * •£= -C sz sz sz sz o o o o o o o a. tz £ c c c c c tz < £ fD CD CD CD CD CD CD O U- LL LL LL LL LL LL LL xx tu a. T-.^COT-T-YT-CDOT-CDO> TCM CM CM CM 5 III S O .2 O x> o « 2 55 XJ e Z c •< "5 • Q. a. 3 *" _ e LL o Zt < CD C OO x x x x x x x x x x x x x fi sis i co •§ * .2 c i 8 if o co e -Q CD - 1^, . 55LO"'55 3 1" 3 s i c CO 9 n .T 3 CO J3 C > 5 o © LD.fc_ _CO?iCO C JZ CD CO 3 3 8 3 ul to 3 CO « CM © ° SZ = Olrn Olfn O to UJC C c CDc©cCC©DCC LU O C5 O CO C XJ — CDCO—c CD tCDL-© ai D co C o o - Ul O O T- ui _i Ul o O I s Oxi s x5 3 3 5 (OOT-T-cDCOOOj-j-cpcpo^O) C OlX) c .s f I K 5 3 g o o o o o o o o o o o o o o c c c c c c c c c c c c c c w £ a o co & 5 S co T- CM CM CM CM CM CM szszszszszszszszszr.szr.szsz 5 C M CDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCD O u. L L L L L L I L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L 15 M 3 3 COCOOT-OT-CMCOOT-OT-OT- W »C O k u W t> co -2 •5 . - o i i ' f * J * & C ~ co $ co • 4 i i = -c » ..ococ ;-^ o~:„oco*cco * 22 £E- * Ui (9 CO CO .2 © XJ „ .= CO COx> 3 CO 52 3 «•> 3 • ? 1 2 3 co 1 o T- T- •— CM CM CO CO CO CO CO © © © © © X) X) X) X) X) 3 3 3 3 3 2C O to CO CO co to CO © c © C C C CC CD CD CD CD CD a I < © O C3 CO © (0 TO©CP © B CD CD CD 133 u 5 co CO CO J? ^ g^co^g^f gm ?i O O O CM O CM o i^t-CMCMiiCM-^i-icM*- C D ,T3 CD r r r r r r f, sz sz a CL CL CL CL CL CL CJ CL CL CJ CO (0 CO CO CO CO ro ro Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol i- Ol Ol o o o o o oR o o 0) 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 OOOOCJO * * CO CO T- CM . 01 O P 5 o i 01 nt r- T— T— CM •» (0 (0 CO CO CO CO coco — Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol OlOl % o o o o o o O O 0) 01 CD 03 CD 0 O O O O O O O o C O 3 O O 5i _i to ro ca OOCD t\ H r- tts T CM-co z • T- •—— 5 0 0 •—-CM CM '—' CM >.>.>• >. - - >. > >. SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ sz cCL szCL £CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CO CO COro ro ro ro ro ro CJ) CD cn ro 0 0 0 0 O CD O 0 O 0 0 CD O O O O O O O O O O 01 0101 01 01 0101 01 01 01 01010)0101 O _ o o «t O UI « S C O 3000 in . 01 O P 3O r- III*- Ui OCDO*-CMO<-CDO*-CJ> OT-I-I-I-CMCMCMCMCMCM sz sz sz sz sz sz rorocororo ro ro ro ro CL CL CL CL CL CL CL oioioioioioioioioioi o o o o o o o o o o oioioioicDoioiaiai O O O O O O O O O O O ui 3 _ro O o U i o- Ui CL • CO "o o o O O -Cl CL •roco > c £ 2 ^ — & 8 O CD 5 o •a Si I I UI 1- CM 0. o < 01 010) c c o ro O sz sz a. a. 5 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . W HI III "~c i- X sz sz SI sz sz sz _l _ ^ O U 3i O (5 - r- •H c c c -J 03 CD CO OCPOCNOCOO T-Ol X o o CM cvj^r U T- CM CM CM CM CM w >. I- «- O HI III CM O O *- III -I - O CO "o o V0. o < ai oo •5 _i O O CO-rCO*-CO c c co ro O £ £ E CD 01 01 ui 5 5 UI T- CM a Ooro ro 00 o rj> o o o 3 c= c: c 0) < 1 CD O CC OD CO O O E » OEO E X X X X X J CO CO CO CO CO CO «1ICO„.-'-_T-_„CMO„ >• £ C O 2 ^ £ 2 ^ £ 2 E 2 C V J C M £ 2 . 5 >>>.>->.>.>.>.>->.>. L Z S Z S Z S Z S Z S Z S Z S Z S Z S Z Oa-£a a a a a c L C L a a c L U•IOC DOO Ol f l lOQ lOO lOf l l OO l OOl OOl CODOO l 0)00000000000 corocorocorococococoro ~j 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Ui o n lDO^MfOi-lDO^Ol "O'-^'-'-OO'-NOIt OT-T-t-r-i-CMCMCMCMCMCM Ui ziszszszszszszszszszszsz \W o . a o . o . Q . o . a Q . o . Q . 0 . •Irocorocororocorarororo 0101010101010101010101 a O O O O O O O O O O O OIOIOIOIOICDOIOIOIOIOI 000000000000 < - < > 3 co co o~- UI >• >- o ui (0 01 01 a P P o o U. 01 0) WOO U i (9 U i _i _l O O^5 >. >. *s 0 1 0 1 = p p a. o o < 01 0) OOO 134 UI _i < > 3 Ui o U I _1 _l o o < c c; c c c 1rocororoco E §1i 1I < 01 0) 0) 01 0) 000000 UJCco T3 CD "O Q. X CD CO CD — -5 3 = 1 CD tD CP 4} co J? - i .5 J? k> 5 ~ 3»8 B g8 £3008888 O „ 7- §* i owo^oooooo to O i n U J o n n o n n 1 i f i i i i i O ui (9 111 _l 8- _i _i n T3 O c c 8 i l § §°§888 o OSS C O 10 o 18 J 3 I UI ? S CO CO J. £ E < 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 < 1 OX U fl Uflu O i l I I I I I I ?j £2 O^-cs-cs-ca-cs-cs-cs^-cs-oi _ -cs 2EEc.c.£.c-E.S?EESE HI „^co 5 Pj 03 c o m « 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 t t a r i i i i i i i i i i i f CA co 2» a < t J O O O O O O O O O O O O Iff 8m g < 0 0 0 3 3013 c 6 a i § 3 ii ii Ol O) c c c 8 J2 •c Ol HI O c Ui E I 8 T3 c O O CO o gg 0 -I Q. g 8 := g 5 C3M 8CM 0 O CO V) CO 2 O S p < 0) « m E co = 33 3 01 < .E £ S oooooooooo o £• 0 x x x i i i x x i x C O1 1- o 2—I O o 2 2 1 I Ot cn cn O —1 —1 1 CD CD > > CD CD CO CO CO ^ 8 CO CM CO r- CM O > ZZt 0£2£2£2cMC\i°2£2£2£ 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • i i i i i i i i i i HI -I < J co to JtJTJ a HI 355 2w it £2. £2 2 •» CO O o o Ml S 5 3 ro ro 3 3 in in O CO CD HI. c2 a c ~ CO CO ? E E H. 3 3 1/ O) O) . CD CD CO - J —I — — co to = Ol 01 tt.cc co -J _i 3 cn x x HI O HI HI o HI -I -I O Z'-»-»-»-T-T-»-CMCMI o O tOlDSfflCJlOiO O O O O II.C? —- ^ o _ o -C\l < J\ irl " to -CM o O > * ! «> ^ CM Z CM §- 6 < > 5 o 5 ID f (D CD 'T > •« CD 1- T— _ r" - o — o 5 o C OC O C J C O C O E E EO E E E E E E C OC OC OC a> cpco cpOC u .9 E .c ££" _c C PC PC PC PC P > o co co coto 5 : 5 5 to 15 5 5 5 5 5 C O C O C O C O C O 5 5 I z 2 5 co m ui — OO Cs O s CD • - . > CO CO CNJ (O CO if u to co CO to CO CO m +f m to to o o o m CO Ul JZ sz sz SZ JZ J Z * - JZ CO CO CO T3 c a Ul CO o - LO o LO O oCM CM CM co CM o CO CM CO to CO to CO O O T- CM CO O ' T- O O O O r- _j _j CO _ O T- 1- T- T- To CJ 0 •zz = 0o . = -zz -zz ~ -zz -zz = -zz u E E E E E E E E E CD CD CD CP CP CD a> - 03 CD CJ CJ CJ CO CO CD CD CD CD CD sz sz sz sz sz CO CO CO CO co co 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ~ cp O C^j^it!( -cy-cy-cy-cy c o O c o c o c D c o c o c o 3 r- n B *j — «- jr£ CO % 0 - J O G . n n g CJ *- *-CO E EE E E sz & sz sz sz sz sz sz sz sz 5 CJ *to CO CO C 0 T T C 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 CO fcoocMpcMoO'- I^T-^CPW^^CM—CMCMCMCO CO CO CO ,2 2 CO CO CO CO CO 0 to to U O •= 3 5 - 0 0 0 , r O O O O O O O O zz zz ^ E zz -zz -zz zz -zz •= -zz -sz UjCOCOCOCOCOCOCDCJCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO E E E E E E £ < - > E E E E E E E E • CP CP CP CP CP CP Q . - D C P C P t P C P C P c P t P C P w SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ £ i\szszszszszszszsz r o CDcocococococoo cococococococDCO = 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 UJ C3 r- O CM T O T- o o C T3 T3 TJ c c c c UJ CO CO CO CO HOOOT-T-CMCO S O O O O O O O OT-T-T-T-T-T-TO c O C O C O C O C O C O C O CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ Q 2 2 Zcococococococo < E E E E E E E -JCDCDCDCDCDCDCD ^SZSZSZSZSZSZSZ OT-OT-LOOT-LO T-T-OC3>-COCOCO T-T-CMCMCMCMCMCM COCOCOCOCOtOCOCO O CJ O CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ cocococococococo E E E E E E E E (DCDCDCDCDCDCDCD szszszszszszszsz tfCDCOCOCOCDcDCD COCOCOCOCDCOtOCO 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 >, . o CD L Q > p < D < D | |€« t\ O o tC ov o v -co 2 CO CO CO CD CD COco co o) co o_ o co 5 2-2 £ 8 Ul -I < co 3, CO C M_CM_^C02to CO co CO CO SP TZ C CD CD -2 CD CJ a o « - CO 3 ^ CL C S i CM S CM — CM COCO o *COCOCOCOCOCO-— CO i \ h co c n co o o c c O CD 5s .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 co o c o> o> CO CO ffl CO CD CD COOT E CO 2 -2 ~ O C 3 CO CO 2 » I E E E E3 3 E E E E E E E E E E o

CD CD E I •» E * co ^r* —- r1,3 co co ° £ S22 s CO CO D - ° »C _ S CD CM N a*- o CO CO co CD »O c TO 2 co 2a £ it§ Cc 5 5 a co o E c .2 o o "o co 0 5 s c2 T- CO o > 5 o Ul >. CD CO gcL-O c o co-2 5 £ c f S O O coP I i s• 0 co 2 Co O) . a 12 E o .5, O 5o CD CO CO S = " S E o p co 2 6 7 S z UI UI CO — III -I d >l t- ^ C C M Ul° -J C O co i o C C OC OC O -c- o oo ° IZ ™ 0. co co <3 3 co o o 1)555 » — C N «" CO. 7 - °=S TJ UJ O 6 2 to o = 5I s O d e c r e e 5 CX CL CL CL CL < z o O O O c O "2to ~C n w w cMtollt^fl-ciiino TJ UJ CM CO CM .2 .2 .2 .2 •— 2 2 2 ° 0 « i ' . »- < 5 O o ; o .o 2 5 £L 0 . 0 . 0 . tt-^T-^COT-r"->-»-»-CMCMCMCM totototototocoto C O to C O to to to C O to >.>s>.>.>.>.>s>. c r c c c r r r Q-CLCLLLCLCLCLQ. •0 C M .— i s C O C O S C M p O UI CM a XJ XJ XJ UI c c c -j -i r - c M * - o O ' - o o * - o o oooT-ppoi-^-To ^T-t-^CMCMCMCMCMCM o >->->.>.>->.>->->.>. z xzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxz C O UI O 0 C O— f r- T- T- TJ TJ cc C OC O to C OC OC OC O •"tcOOOOi-OO o ^ 0 0 » - < - 0 0 T - C M ' - ' - I - ' - C M C M C M C M cotototototototo 2 .2 2 .2 2 2 2 t>->->->.>.>.>.>, o co to co to to to v> xzxzxzxzxzxzxzxz 0000000000 cocotocococototototo o C L C L C L Q - C L L L C L C L C L C L CL LO LO T- -^CM Ov-O^O CMCM UI.-T-t-T-CM TJ TJ TJ T) TJ c c c c c i f «& 3 CLCLCLCLCLCLQ-CLCLQCL o o o o o o o o o o a 8 < xzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxzxz XZ f- 5 5 5 0 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 2 2 CL CL CL C L C L O . C L C L Q . C L C L C O to t/l l/l o to to to to (B s to 33335-3333 C DC D O 1- «- 1O C M C MC C M C C C C C C C C C OC OC C OC OC OC OtoC O C OC O C O C M C D C D C MC MC M .2 .2 .2 .2 o 2 2 2 ° .2 .2 .2 to "333333333 to 'n co co c'o to to "C toO"toto to 5 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3U8-1CJ 5 xz xz xz xz toomo^tTfojcD >•>.>. CM CM Cxz xz xz x : x : x : x : £ : x : £ : £ : CL CL CL c>.o.c).o.ao.o.a O O O o UJ «V S ao co co § r- y~ r- COir)T-i-C0N. co in «- CO O r- CMtf) CD C^ DT 00 Dl [\| if) Cin -^ M C O 2 —s TJ TJ TJ XJ TJ TJ TJ TJ TJ TJ TJ . 50.s XZ xz Q. CL O *!^-CS^-tS-CS ct -8 ^" o ~ o ^^8 ~ —^ -c c ^3 .2 . 2 . 2 .2 .2 co co CO . CO CO to to C O t - C0 0) C OC O >.>*>.>.>. C C C CO CO CO TJ CO C Q »- O "O CO p O CM CM TCM CM CM CM O 10 r~ 10 tO tO lO i O E O O r- O C C5 ui r-1 O _i to xz xz xz xz xz TJ — XJ TJ O O O O co o "5 P c Z UI co c2c ^° C ~. O O 3 C- —.Si" ^ 2 c Oo mo C M ( 3 D C M C O CM O ° T- -I' ^00000 _l C OC OC OC OC O C O J 3 < £ j z J Z J H j = 00.0.0.1105 •E O C ' OT- O CM CM 1- Q. 0 . 0 . CL O . c o TJ TJ TJ ~ 6 XZ xz > Q_ 0 . 3 Q . 0 . 0- 0- 0- 5 (9 o CM 1-- • * T- TT»- CM CM CM CM ui 3 (03 (03 O Cll "o t3 o O O 5-ts E E < CO > 5 2 o O " o «- — ™ CO CO CO 3 -">-' — O S o o U| O ^ o o co > CO ui -«S CS CO 0 C O~ *. O.Q.LLO.Q.CLQ.0. CD C D ~ X x-c i t CL o c CM CD o 5 "g z HI a> a —- 2> '— c*l cl ^ 2" &• £" 0000 in co to to 0 •C OC OC OC OC OC OC OC O U.33333333 to 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0) 3 1 -I i c c CD TJ - — _^ _ 3 > 2C O C O C O n T ^ N C O 5 8 CM p. r- -q iiCMCM 2 3g„t-T-CM„^eDcoin^i3 >>>.>,>,>,>, cScoOOOcoCMCOCOCOrora xz xz xz xz xz xz a ..1-ii^r-^iicMCMCMCMS-icM UJ UI UI ! • oooooo o o xz a n C M D .C OC s& 0 CO CO S OCM *SI si * I . cocotocotototototototo co "C •1 xz xz xz xz xz xz ^cotococococototototototo 000000 u.>>>->.>.>.>.>.>.>.>.>,>, E o0 to •r r r r c c c c c c r r O °- i* • to to C OC O co to to C 3 ooooo o 1•0 v- to "D Oi co UI 1 g UI a 0 UI E _l • o • I * S 2, . c -JE CM O O T- o III X O O 1O p C M O 1- *- r- CM CM CM %>.>.>,>,>, »C 5 i D .M*- -C -.•"Q-CLCLCLQ.Q.Q.CLCLCLQ.Q. ui w CD CD 0 TJ " c o o T j a O TO O O J- O »- CD rc§8 EOr- O CMTCM Ol Ol O T- 1- C ML C M LO 5 ; .2 .2 2 2 2 2 2 T- 0. to CD 0 O C O O O3 C OC OC O 3O3C 3 3C 3 3C d l 5 5 55 55 5 , £ £ £ £ ! £ O O O O O O < £ £ £ £ £ £ OQ.CLCLQ.CLQ. C OC OC OC O C O = .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 y 2 2 2 CL to to to co to "co 'to 7\xz xz xz xz xz xz xz xz xz xz xz xz 0 " 0 . 0 Q.Q.Q.Q.Q.Q.Q.Q.Q.Q.Q. CO CM 137 . . CM . . CM _ CP CS CD CO ca CP CD <1CP CJ CJ i- o CJ O o Z— c c c c c , c CO CP CP CP 0) CP o "cp '5 o 0) o 40 5 "cp CJ CO > CO CO o o a. o zz CP o to CD CJ CD CD u CJ *z.tr a. CO CO CD CJ CO o CJ *£ o CL ajai'cp'cD'cD'cD'cDai > > > > > > > > O 0)0)0)0)0)010)0)010)010)0) u i o p p o o o p p o p ° ° p . o o o o o o o o o o o o o Cjjrjz_z_z_z_ZJZ-Zjz_z_zJz_z — >O O, > - >O. >O. >O, >O, >O. >O, >O, >O, >O, - O , , >O, > • COCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOLOCO'CO 3CLCLLLCLCLCLCLCLCLCLCLCLCL CM CM CM Ul CO c CM CP CJ c CP CJ CO CD CJ t_ o x> zz CD a Ul o o 010)0)0)0)0)0)0)0)0)0)010) o p o o o o o o o o o p o o o o o o o o o o o o o o O O O O O O O O O O O O O >>>.>.>^>->>^>>>>>>>^>cocococflcococococococococo O_CLCLCLCLCLCLCL0-0_CLCLD_ CL O Q o CM c^si '— 5 «* fx o — CM CD CP U CJ c c 0) CJ CJ c CD c CP CJ CJ to CO CJ 6 CM o CO CO CO CD o • o o o C o cj c O o •S o o o t t o o o CO CO C DC DC D I_ C DC D CJ C L 0- s O Ul O)O)O)01O)01Olc3)OlO)Ol o o o o o o p o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o -L.JZJZJZJZJZJZJZJZJZJZ O O O O O O O O O O O . 3 cococococococococococo Q-0_Q_CLQ_CLCLQ_ CLCLQ. — i o a. 1 C D c g O 0 - Q - Q . Q - C L C L C L CM o CM ui «a -o _ o CO CD CM Ul ~ CO O CM O O O IS O o O O CM CM CM oCM CM CM CM CM CM CM O r ; o !>->->. O o > '0)0)01 O) Ol S oi oi oi oi Z o --O O o O Op o o p o < o ° o o oO O o o o o o sz rz sz sz sz sz sz sz sz sz o o o o o o a. y o O O CJu >. >. >->->,>.>. Jt "* COCM >.>->, CO CO CO CO CO CO CO C O C O c o O CL CL CL Q- C L Q . CL CL CO 5 TC 3 r- •<•! r- S COCOCOCOCOCOCOTJCO c _ COCOCOCOCOCDcoCO CD O CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ ££__:£ £ £ ££ ° < o o o o o o o Q . CQ XI Q. o sw * o >s CO CL 1 ~ 111" CM CM CD Ci— D CD CD*— CD CD CCPM CMCD CJ CJ O O O O CJ CJ c c c c c c c c o c (PCDCDCDCDCDCDO P O "O O O 'O O O CC J O to CO S o i co s>o ^ E 8 is -3; Ol a ». p o §CD CD CQ.D CO o T- co o o ro o o CM o o O) p o •c o ^s CO £ -2 CD C L O - C L < C L C L V CM O) CM O := := X > '> x ^ CM CO C c o C z C M M CM CP CP CO tu CJ CzzJ CJ C CD c CP CP > COCJ COO toCJ OT-^CDCDOCMO -J o o o o -J IIAX) -e. -es o CM CP CJ c CD o a. 000 - o a o o CM CP CJ c CP CJ i_ o C > 3 >.>.>.>.>,>.>.>.>*>,>,>,>, CO > CO > CO CO o o CP CP u o c c CP CP o o CO CO -ca-oc-ci^-CKa.01^ _JcD___OgOOOOOO„ < o ° ° ° o S o o o o o o ° JP CP 0) CD CD CD CD CD CJ o CJ o CJ o o o CJ ZZo zz o o 8 C M C M —'— 0 '—' o o o o o Q. CL Q. CL 00- J- •ex CO co o c CD CO O •o o £ c D O •C 5p i--• C > C CO Oi £ o •o CM CO ^, Z CM T3 C C E CO 3 C D o C O E "O ^L E . 3 2 C ° 'S sg 00 CD CO co co ™ c 5 3 M _i 1 CL C L C L CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO .T-CMT-^-T-T-T- HcOT-r-lOCMr/rf 2"-CMCMCMCMCMrHjcDCDCDCDCDCDCD H o o o o o o * c c c c c zz c i J ! 5 .5 S . ! .0). a oo o oo o o jScOcOCOtotococo C OoC OC DC DC DC OC D o CJOOo o " I O O O O O O O 0flQ.LlCLQ.Q-Q.Q_ z Ul -J co co CO ——' G Q — >. CO LO O O 28a in s 3 <; CO CO CO >.>.>. > •O) 5 p oO)pO) >->->. >->.>. °% Ol Ol Ol Ol O) O) O O O o sz sz sz Zsz p o p p o p O O Oo o o Ul o o oCO oSZ SZ >.>.>. CL >• o SZ o osz sz sz CO CO CO >.>.>. o o o CO C L C L C L CO CO CO>.>->. CL C L C L C O CO CO Ul u ^ CO CO CO 3 o o o o "* * T Ul "~ *~ " sz sz sz o o o c CD CD CO LL LL LL 3 J CO < ^ CO sJ t» 3>;>n oi oi a 2o . 2 .2 -5 co co . CD CD U. zz c «ji it. vr CL CL Q . TJ c ui O o T- o ui o o o ra HOT-COOOT-CO O O O O C M O O O UJT-T-T-T-CMCMCM "jCDCDCDCDCDCDCP s o o o o o o o O c c c c c c c (JCDCDCDCDCDCDCD o oo oo o o OcOCOCOCOCOCOCO z OcOCOCOCOCOCOCO J o o o o o o o 2 £ £ £ £ £ £ £ < o o o o o o o O L L C L Q - D - Q - Q - C L 138 Ul o _l *~ *" *" Ul -o r-> r>. >s O z Ol Ol < Ol o o o o o o JZ JZ J JZ o o o s < O CM CM CM I >s >s >s >s >- >• > 01 O) Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol 2 222 2 2 2 O OOO OO o sz sz sz sz sz sz sz o oo o o o o LL Q. Q_ >s >, >s >s CO CO CO CO CO CO CO Q . C L CL CL C L CL CL •J CO CO CO O CD CD CD O TJ T3 TJ 3 13 -3 O to to to 4 0 0 0 J CD CD CD r J3 J3 J3 CL CD CD CD zs < 33 0 0 0 0 Ul o Ul OQo U CO CO C D 11 O tr tx cs -c CS -T! C -J C -S C DC DC DC D > > >> «l CD CD CD > >0 > 0) 0 UI -J < Z 888 | | > 5 o > ' §§8888 C D 0) >->->.>.>.>. lC OC O cn Ol Ol fi in > > o O > C DC OC DC O 3C D 5 = ;•=. tr tr £ IC O CD UI 6 > O O O o o O o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o CO CO CO CO CO CO • E 3 P 3 OO X0 0I8I0I-04IM CJ -I C D C UI ui UI ui _i _i XJ C O O XJ . . o. CO < 8 (9 es es es _ l cn es o C M C O C M C M >>. C M C M C M C M C M >. cn in cn in 735s01 1-0 9s01 co O l01O)O)C O C O .0 °> £ 3 3 22 0 0 0 u CO CO CO CO 3 3 3 3 p o O Ol O l Ol OI < "cii XJ o 0. < ai o> ai ai tr tr tr tr O tr -> cn cn O o o O o O o O O g O O O O 0 O O O O co O 0 O O O O o CO CO CO CO CO ^ 1 O co CJ 0 C O C O C DC D >. >. CO 0 o H -tS JM J5! -CS sC MC M _ 8 zZZ -J ^C CJ CS _ J« C -M CS ZZ c ZZC MC M > ~ ~ * ~ » " ~ * ~ >.>.>> > Dl Dl Ol S: >S >N >. >K >, 5**">, O lC OC O 01 01 01 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i n i n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z. Z. Z. Z. r- _ — — — Z co to to to to „ ii > CD CD CD CD CD XJ XJ X J XJ XJ = 1 3 3 3 3 3 £! in cn cn cn in CO CO CO CO CO o UI —I J* I U 3 3 3 3 3 p O O O O D> Ol Ol Ol "co ai ai "CD "ai 01 O 3 „ CD -CM -CS *" o o CO CO CO 0 1—0 cn 0 O n1i0 n) 0 01 1 _| C D 01i0 O c o = 1 3 = 1 = 1 O 3 O zO ^ t0o in n < 3 -0in 3 i3 J cn cn a 01 01a < „ i s >. >. >. 0 1 01 0101 - 0 0 0 0 0010 0 0 0 XI XJ O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CM CM CM CM XJ c CO CO to CO CO CO CO UI UI -I c c cr tr cr cr tr a X) XJ ~ o o o o o o o o O co co co o o o o CO Ol o o o Ol Ol Ol Ol _ o o o o o o p o o o o o Ol 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o CO CO CO CO CO to CO 3 I- C O CO CO CO CO CO Oi —O -Q - * .0 u 01 01 t?3EC co -C D 01 C MC cO C » ^ -I Ol O ^ C o U CO CD >- 0 C DC O C to to —: w 5 3 C D E 8 C DC D 2i l l eD o * S-"8 O 3£ C ^ 10tno SXJftoC co C D *r •2 ri "r- s. 01 *~ ~- E c 0 c O 5 s l l 01 CJ. co to a01 -1. O ~CO CO C OC £ 2 • •» L 01 01 •sto- 01 ^a to to SI UI 0 1 to P 8 E5 UI C D ~ 2.0 LC O cB X 2 g o>^:= & Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol Ol ^< <8 <£2<«•-; 1C o OOOOi-i-OIN XJC O to to 2 C 3 01*-oi1> •2 *. « ° 3 | - P C O3C E- C >.>.>->,>>>>>.>. 3 C L O C O C O C o 01O1O1O1O1 toJ?5: C D Cl ^J co co to co to to 2O1°O1°O1 »S o ° ° ° ° ° O C M 3 zi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J P M s a ^8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08^: Z" 01 01 01 01 01o< O) cotococococotoco — ~ z: L LC OC O 0) 01 Oct. tr tr tr tr tr z z _| 01 > to to co to to a5 a < > XJ 3 2 E UI _l < UI CO X J XJ XJ X J 3 3 3 3 XJ 3 CO CO CO CO CO CO 3C0 co 3 3 O p 3 3 3 o o o 3 o> l l — — o o _ — o o CO to o o * • •c c £ o w c c — S; co = 2 3 W h» — O) Ol X) p i i> •c o O O UI o O T- J CO J CD CD CD CD CD CO CO III _l _l O XJ X J XJ XJ XJ XJ 3 3 3 3 3 3 O T - O ' - O ' - C M C O T-T-CMCMCMCMCMCM 3 3 Ol O c o CO g Ol ai i ; Q u. c: 3 O *- o O C M§ co O § co p O . C * co a i co to o o• — Q. X) C X l co p O O) co S : o t o i co • ai 1 o To o ,° o Q „ 0 O a O - 1 10 CO 5s Q. o c 11 ~ c ^ £ c o 0 o 3 XJ CO CO 2 3 nj o CO CO CO 3 »o Q) 0) Q. o o CO g c Q. Ol o i ; L 3 a> 1 X) Q *"* 3 s XJ . o O ft! O u. co . h ,A "O c O O O XJ O O O O O O O < -— : 3 CD CD CD CD CO CO 139 - CO TJ Ol c 3 < n n DC DCOO. I 51 C to o S oo > C DD> O—CD O) ui cr 3 C D •zz C o p o o C M tr o •> C OC O i a a k_ 3 co w 3 o a o o OC Dlit o.o ? o C 3 I- Ol E 3 ~° £ c c o X < -= 2 sec o o > B -I TJ c = 88 O «- z ui c c < c? Ul T(3 o Ul CD*"TJ XJ TJ TJ O o o -- C M H TJ xi O c o coco 2 U| o28 r> < a a CD co O C O CO p o J3co 2 -5°T •C O co •> c .50 •o t o * 'S a i COX co Ol » • OC O5^3Q- , S •£ Z E to CO c3oooC £ O » -2 1 1 £ 3 O) t)r C OC OC O 3 O O O O T- T- C M 4 > zz o o o c "2 fi EEE O • a a. a CO CO CO (Jo I O o 2 a - c- _ i C co <- "~ c co g,£ I 23 c 3 X J- C D ~cC DcI C DC O C ~tl£O -QXIc CO " 5 ™ xi c M •2 1Of 5 O C D C O C a 9 * O Ol 0 £ 3 =5 ~ o-j a C DC D •5 8 £ C _J < >l U E E 5 g Z .* o ° 8 o °ei _1 Z. C D > >-XJ a oc ui 0 * a o C DC D C DC D C D o O - m O C O C O W C O C O•D m C D C D C D C D «C ! c . £ _ : _ : £ £ 3 Ul 2 I -I TJ _ O Js- o o c 000000 8 K T- T- CM CM < Ul C C M (J M U l *" -I CO -I C D O XJ CJ =1 o w Z C O < c . >. o o co XI 5 III « CO co -I y »| Ul 3 Ul -J < > 3 E |3 C O 1- z s 0 "5 " i t s 5 CO CO CO < a a o. O to to co XZ x x x 5?§ £ o Q. * o _ o O T T CM #r £ >; 9C 3 co Co. -5 ' 5C Dl k O CO co 3l O scot? •o-3i s i n fi ( A * c 1 UJ I- C M " oOo00o o - c C ~ 9OtEt*o§ ? to p i i k. O CCDD2 C0O1 0• o &5 . (O Cfl (fl „ o c 8I c " r r r Ul ^ o~ o ? o *- o_ *- CD- C DC DC DC DC D C D C D TJ TJ C OC On C O0 5 js S~ 9O toO&XJ&XJ S § C g CO CO j= J CO CO 3C/3COCOCOtOC0C0t0COC0 C OC O5 i" £ CO o_ c o c o yi yi yi yt co co co _ c o t o a " p C CD C D "co to fiE o i £ O cC c c c c c c c "c c ^ C D C D C D C D C D D E S 0) C zz E s • O r- C D 2 C D O c cco £ E E " 3 C O C OC C OC C OC C O C O UlC o o. ^. 5 -Q 4 2 C DC D D D D C o o £ D CDCDCDCDCDCDCDCDCD to to D cV t CO gC .££££££ CO c * C D 1- < 535 h CO H — t — I — I — t — I oC D i i cc o o C (0 to o 5 C O ^ t o S C.OS EEEEEEEEEE § to co a c • xi 2 * i < to 55 Q 3 gI 5 § OOOOOOOOOO c 3: 3 3 co to °> SO O 3 ^ CO > ° «, i s O C M E-j^ ui C . If) If)1- C J> CM M C CM M PCM "18; a 0 o a Ul _• 2 O -_, cv. «- O ui 0 S _j C O C O o •s=l i —E CO C D o to * C DC D gl2§ XJ TJ TJ _j o o O TlJ T J T J T J T J T J T J T J T J T J T J T J | U c o i e c : £ >> 33 3 CJ cj 0 3 3 _ 3 D _ J D 3 0 _ 3 _ 3 3 3 2. c co jaoct E 1 2 S •o£ O. oc _ O I" O T- O T- 55 55 55co5555cotococoto CO o co o o E 2 £ . i_ ? JT" CO CO CO CO CO CO " c o Q E CPCDC1)CU(UCP(1}CU(1} C DC D A • «b Canada Potl Poataa Canada 1 • PoiHgt C—d Pan M y * , / Third Trxxsi^me class class* 155 | North Vancouver, B.C. felt fHIMIt r